diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-14 20:10:21 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-14 20:10:21 -0700 |
| commit | 382956c16c050a3e37746364f3490b4e25590045 (patch) | |
| tree | 957162e2e696ad39aa9e994e97fad2b3e82251c1 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38453-8.txt | 6292 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38453-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 102954 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38453-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 139411 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38453-h/38453-h.htm | 7746 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38453-h/images/illus-001.jpg | bin | 0 -> 32069 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38453.txt | 6292 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38453.zip | bin | 0 -> 102931 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
10 files changed, 20346 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/38453-8.txt b/38453-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2357638 --- /dev/null +++ b/38453-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6292 @@ +Project Gutenberg's The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass, by Allen Chapman + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass + The Midnight Call for Assistance + +Author: Allen Chapman + +Release Date: January 1, 2012 [EBook #38453] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + +[Illustration: "LOOK! OUR AERIAL IS STILL UP"] + + + + +_THE RADIO BOYS SERIES_ + +(Trademark Registered) + +THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS + +OR + +THE MIDNIGHT CALL FOR ASSISTANCE + +BY ALLEN CHAPMAN + +AUTHOR OF + + THE RADIO BOYS' FIRST WIRELESS + THE RADIO BOYS AT OCEAN POINT + RALPH OF THE ROUNDHOUSE + RALPH THE TRAIN DESPATCHER, ETC. + +WITH FORWARD BY + +JACK BINNS + +_ILLUSTRATED_ + +NEW YORK + +GROSSET & DUNLAP + +PUBLISHERS + +Made in the United States of America + + + + +BOOKS FOR BOYS + +By Allen Chapman + +12mo. Cloth. Illustrated. + +THE RADIO BOYS SERIES + +(Trademark Registered) + + THE RADIO BOYS' FIRST WIRELESS + Or Winning the Ferberton Prize + + THE RADIO BOYS AT OCEAN POINT + Or The Message that Saved the Ship + + THE RADIO BOYS AT THE SENDING STATION + Or Making Good in the Wireless Room + + THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS + Or The Midnight Call for Assistance + + THE RADIO BOYS TRAILING A VOICE + Or Solving a Wireless Mystery + +THE RAILROAD SERIES + + RALPH OF THE ROUNDHOUSE + Or Bound to Become a Railroad Man + + RALPH IN THE SWITCH TOWER + Or Clearing the Track + + RALPH ON THE ENGINE + Or The Young Fireman of the Limited Mail + + RALPH ON THE OVERLAND EXPRESS + Or The Trials and Triumphs of a Young Engineer + + RALPH THE TRAIN DESPATCHER + Or The Mystery of the Pay Car + + RALPH ON THE ARMY TRAIN + Or The Young Railroader's Most Daring Exploit + +GROSSET & DUNLAP, Publishers, New York + +Copyright, 1922, by + +GROSSET & DUNLAP + +_The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass_ + + + + + FOREWORD + + By Jack Binns + + In the first chapter of this volume there appears a statement + by "Bob," one of the Radio Boys, as follows: "Marconi is one + of those fellows that can never rest satisfied with what's + been done up to date." + + Perhaps no more concise summary of the driving force back of + the men responsible for the tremendous development of radio + could be made. It is just that refusal to be satisfied with + what has been accomplished that has made wireless the greatest + wonder development in the history of mankind. + + Although the radio boys in this case are but creatures of the + author's imagination, nevertheless they are typical of all the + men who have taken part in bringing radio to its present + stage. Even Marconi himself likes to take pride in the + assertion that he too was at one time an amateur, because he + insists that during his early experiments he was only a boy + amateur tinkering with a little known subject. + + There is undoubtedly a great deal of truth in his claim, + because the experiments that led to his success were made + while he was a youth studying at the Bologna University in + Italy. + + What is true of Marconi is equally true of all the others. We + have only to think of a name prominent in the field of wireless, + and then trace back the history of the man who bears it, + and you will come to an enthusiastic amateur. + + There is another fascinating thing about wireless, and it is + the fact that no matter how much work one may really expend in + tinkering with it, and no matter how valuable the results, it + does not seem like real work. This is aptly phrased by Joe in + the book who says: + + "I'd like to take it up as a regular profession. Think of what + it must be for fellows like Armstrong and Edison, and De + Forest and Marconi. I'll bet they don't think it's work." + + There is no doubt that Joe wins his bet. + + Jack Binns + + + + +CONTENTS + +I--The Bear Pursues +II--An Exciting Chase +III--An Amazing Discovery +IV--The Bully Appears +V--A Startling Accusation +VI--The Burned Cottage +VII--Radio Wonders +VIII--A Close Shave +IX--Bucking the Drifts +X--Convincing a Skeptic +XI--A Mountain Radio Station +XII--The Marvelous Science +XIII--Pressed into Service +XIV--Scoring a Triumph +XV--The Snowslide +XVI--The Modern Miracle +XVII--Thrashing a Bully +XVIII--A Nest of Conspirators +XIX--On Guard +XX--Broken Wires +XXI--A Sudden Inspiration +XXII--Putting It Through +XXIII--The Midnight Call +XXIV--A Plot That Went Wrong +XXV--Solving the Mystery + + + + +THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE BEAR PURSUES + + +"Nothing to do till tomorrow!" sang out Bob Layton, as he came out of +high school at Clintonia on Friday afternoon, his books slung over his +shoulder, and bounded down the steps three at a time. + +"And not much to do then, except just what we want to," chimed in Joe +Atwood, throwing his cap into the air and catching it deftly as it +came down. + +"You fellows do just love to work, don't you?" put in Herb Fennington, +with an air of self-righteousness that was belied by the merry twinkle +in his eyes. + +"Oh, we just dote on it," replied Bob. + +"Work is our middle name," asserted Joe. "In fact we lie awake nights +trying to conjure up something to do." + +"Regular pair of Work Hard twins--I don't think," declared Jimmy +Plummer. "Now as for me----" + +"Yes?" said Herb, with an assumption of polite interest. + +"As for me," repeated Jimmy, not at all daunted by the incredulity in +Herb's tone, "I've been working like a horse all this season. A little +more and I'll be only skin and bone." + +As Jimmy was by all odds the fattest boy in school, this assertion was +greeted by a roar of laughter. + +"Now I know why you look like a string bean," chuckled Joe. + +"That explains why his clothes hang on him so loosely," laughed Bob, +pointing to Jimmy's trousers which were so filled out that they +resembled tights. "Jimmy, you may be an unconscious humorist, but +you're a humorist just the same." + +Jimmy glared at his tormentors and tried to look wan and haggard, but +the attempt was not a pronounced success. + +"All the same," he protested, "Doc. Preston has been rushing us like +the old Harry all this fall, and what with school work and home work +and radio work----" + +"Radio!" interrupted Bob. "You don't call that work, do you? Why it's +fun, the greatest fun in the world." + +"You bet it is," chimed in Joe enthusiastically. "We never knew what +real fun was until we took it up. Look at the adventures it's brought +us. If it hadn't been for radio, we wouldn't have won those Ferberton +prizes; we wouldn't have run down Dan Cassey and made him give back +the mortgage he was trying to cheat Miss Berwick out of; and we +wouldn't have got back the money he nearly got away with when he +knocked out Brandon Harvey." + +"Right you are," agreed Bob. "And probably that boat our folks were on +would have gone down with all on board if it hadn't been for the radio +message that brought help to it. And see the good it did for Larry and +the experience we had in sending out from the broadcasting station in +Newark!" + +"I tell you, fellows, there's nothing like radio in the universe!" +agreed Jimmy. + +"I'd like to take it up as a regular profession," said Joe. "Think of +what it must be for fellows like Armstrong and Edison and De Forest +and Marconi. I'll bet they don't think it's work. They're eager to get +at it in the morning and sorry to knock off at night. There's no +drudgery in a profession like that." + +"Speaking of Marconi," remarked Herb, "I see that he's just come over +to America again on that yacht of his where he thought he heard +signals that might have been from Mars. I wonder if he's heard any +more of them." + +"I don't know," replied Bob thoughtfully. "Though I've become so used +to what seem to be almost miracles that I'm prepared for almost +anything. At any rate, the only thing one can do nowadays is to keep +an open mind and not say beforehand that anything is impossible. It +would be great, wouldn't it, if we could get in touch with another +planet? And if we could with one, there doesn't seem to be any reason +why we couldn't with all, that is if there's life and intelligence on +them. But after all, at present that's only speculation. What +interests me more just now is the discovery that Marconi is said to +have made by which he is able to send out radio waves in one given +direction." + +"I hadn't heard of that," remarked Joe. "I thought they spread out +equally in all directions and that anybody who had a receiving set +could take them." + +"So they have up to now," replied Bob. "But Marconi's one of those +fellows that can never rest satisfied with what's been done up to +date. That's what makes him great. I'm not exactly clear about this +new idea of his, but the gist of it is that he throws a radio wave in +a certain direction, much as a mirror throws a ray of light. He uses a +reflector apparatus and the wave is caught at the receiving end on a +horizontal metal standard. With a wave of only three and one half +meters he has thrown a shaft nearly a hundred miles in just the +direction he wanted it to go. The article I read said that he had some +sort of semicircular reflector covered with wires that resembled a +dish cut in half. When the open side is turned toward the receiving +station he wants to reach, the signals are heard loud and clear. When +the open part is turned away, the signals can't be heard. The whole +idea is concentration. Just what a burning glass does with the rays of +the sun, his device does with the radio waves. Marconi's a wizard, and +that's all there is about it. There's no knowing what he may do next. +But you can be sure that it'll be something new and valuable." + +"He's a wonder," agreed Joe heartily. "And if he's the 'father of +wireless,' we've got to admit that he has a good healthy baby. I'm +going to try to get on friendly terms with that baby." + +"We've already been introduced to it, if we haven't got much further," +laughed Bob. "But say, fellows, what's the program for tomorrow?" + +"Three square meals," was Jimmy's suggestion. + +"Sure," agreed Herb. "Though in your run-down condition you ought to +have at least six." + +"He'll get them, don't worry," chaffed Joe, unmoved by the reproach in +Jimmy's eyes. + +"I was thinking----" Bob began. + +"How do you get that way?" inquired Herb composedly. + +"You'll never get that way," retorted Bob severely. "As I was saying +when this lowbrow interrupted me, I was thinking that it might be a +good idea to go nutting. The trees are full of nuts this year, and +that frost we had a couple of nights ago will make it easy to get a +raft of them. What do you say?" + +"I say yes with a capital Y," replied Joe. + +"Hits me just right," assented Herb. + +"It's the cat's high hat," was the inelegant way that Jimmy phrased +it. + +"It's a go then," said Bob. "Come around to my house a little after +eight tomorrow morning and we'll get an early start. Every fellow +brings his own lunch, and we'll take some potatoes along to roast in +the woods." + +"Here's hoping it will be a dandy day," said Herb, as the boys parted +at Bob's gate. + +"It looks as though it were going to be," replied Bob, looking at the +sky. "But after supper I'll tune in and get the weather report by +radio." + +"Anything you don't do by radio?" asked Joe, with a grin. + +"Oh, I set my watch by the Arlington signal every night and a few +other things," laughed Bob. "Fact is, I'm hanging around the receiving +set every spare minute I have for fear I'll let something get by me. +Radio has got me, and got me for fair." + +The weather report was favorable and Bob slept in peace. And when he +opened his eyes on the following morning he found that Uncle Sam's +weather bureau had been right in this particular instance, for a +lovelier fall morning, to his way of thinking, had never dawned. + +He ate breakfast a little more quickly than usual, and had barely +finished when the other radio boys were at his door loaded with +lunches and ready to start. Jimmy especially was well furnished in the +matter of provisions, for he carried two packages while the rest of +the boys were content with one. + +"Aren't you afraid you'll be hunchbacked carrying both those bales of +goods?" asked Herb, with mock anxiety. + +"Not a bit," responded Jimmy cheerfully. "One of them is full of +doughnuts, and I expect to eat them on the way. You see I was in such +a hurry that I didn't eat much of a breakfast----" + +"What?" exclaimed Bob. + +"Can I believe my ears?" asked Herb plaintively. + +"Say it again and say it slow," urged Joe. + +"I mean," Jimmy hurried to correct himself, "not so much as I might +have eaten. I had a bit of cereal----" + +"Catch on to that 'bit,'" murmured Herb. + +"And some bacon and eggs and a slice of cold meat from the roast last +night and some hot rolls and----" + +"Outside of that you didn't have anything to eat," said Joe. "All +right, Jimmy, old boy, we understand. But shake a leg now and let's +get under way. This is too fine a day to be spending it in a chinfest, +and besides we can have plenty of that as we go along." + +The air was brisk and stimulating, with just enough warmth imparted by +the sun to prevent its being cold, and a soft autumnal haze hung over +the landscape and clothed it in mellow beauty. It was the kind of day +when Nature is at her best and when it is good just to be alive. + +The boys were like so many young colts turned out to pasture, and +joked and jested as they went along. Laughter came easily to their +lips and shone through their eyes, while the joy of youth ran through +their veins and made them tingle to their finger-tips. Life was +roseate and they had not a care in the world. + +A walk of between two and three miles brought them to the woods for +which they had set out. The forest covered a great many acres and was +full of noble trees, chestnut, hickory, and many other varieties. + +As Bob had said, the year had been an unusually good one for nuts, and +the trees were loaded with them. The frost of a little time before had +been just sufficient to make them ready to pick, and the ground was +already strewn with the half-opened burrs of many that had been shaken +from the trees. Others still hung to the boughs by so slender and +brittle a thread that it was only necessary to hurl clubs up into the +trees to have them come down in showers. + +The boys had brought big bags along with them to carry the nuts they +might gather, and before long these had most of the wrinkles spread +out of them by the steadily accumulating collection of chestnuts that +formed the bulk of their treasure, although they had a good many +hickory nuts as well. + +The active work gave them all an appetite, a thing that came to them +very easily under almost any circumstances, and a little before noon +they ceased for a while from gathering the nuts and bestirred +themselves in gathering leaves and brushwood for a fire. Their bags +were more than half full, and from what they had seen they knew they +would have little trouble in finishing filling them up to the very +drawing strings. + +They gathered together a little cairn of rocks and built the fire +inside of it, keeping it fed to such effect that before long the +stones were at a white heat. Then they drew the fire away and on the +heated stones roasted their potatoes and a large number of the +chestnuts they had gathered. They had brought plenty of salt and +butter along, and when at last the potatoes were done they seasoned +them and ate them with a relish exceeding anything that would have +attended the eating of them at a regular meal in their homes. An +epicure might have complained of the smoky flavor, but to the boys, +seated on the leaf-carpeted ground flecked with the sunlight that +sifted through the trees, the food was simply ambrosial. + +With the potatoes they dispatched the rest of the food they had +brought along. Then, with a feeling of absolute content, they +stretched out luxuriously on the ground and munched the roasted +chestnuts in beatific indolence. + +For an hour or two they rested there, and then Bob rose and stretched +himself and called his reluctant friends to action. + +"It would be a sin and a shame to go out of these woods without having +our bags crammed to bursting," he said. "Let's get a hustle on, and +just for variety let's try another part of the woods." + +"All right," assented Joe, while Herb and Jimmy, though more slowly, +roused themselves. + +They picked up their bags and moved from place to place, choosing +those sections where the trees grew thickest and the outlook for nuts +was most promising. + +"Better be a little careful," warned Joe, after they had gone a +considerable distance. "Part of this wood belongs to Buck Looker's +father, and perhaps he'd have some objection to our nutting here." + +"I don't think any one would kick," responded Bob. "Everybody around +here regards the woods as common property, as far as nutting is +concerned. Besides, there's no way of telling, as far as I know, what +section belongs to him and what to other people." + +"There's something that will give us the tip," remarked Herb, pointing +through the trees to a clearing in which they saw a two-story cottage. +"That house belongs to Mr. Looker, though nobody has lived in it for a +long while and I guess he's just letting it go to rack and ruin." + +The house did indeed look shaky and dilapidated. Some of the railing +and boards of the low veranda had been broken in or rotted away, and +the whole place bore the look of decay that comes to houses that for a +long time have been destitute of occupants. + +"Looks as if it would fall to pieces if you breathed on it," said +Herb. + +"Old enough to have false teeth," commented Jimmy. "I suppose Mr. +Looker lets it stand simply because it's cheaper than pulling it +down." + +The boys gathered nuts for perhaps two hours longer, and then they had +to stop because their bags would not hold any more. Jimmy was already +groaning in anticipation of having to carry his home. + +"That'll weigh a ton by the time we get to Clintonia," he grumbled, as +he eyed it with considerable apprehension. + +"Hard to please some people," commented Herb. "You'd be kicking like a +steer if you didn't have any to carry, and now you're sore because +you've got enough to last all winter." + +"Might as well leave enough for other people," said Jimmy, with a +spasm of generosity. + +"There are more nuts here than will ever be picked," replied Herb. +"For that matter, some other people are getting them now. I've heard +them thrashing about in the brush for the last few minutes only a +little way from here." + +"Funny we don't hear voices then," said Joe. + +"Perhaps they're deaf mutes," suggested Jimmy, and adroitly ducked the +pass that Joe made at him. + +The noise persisted and seemed to be coming nearer and nearer. There +was a crashing of bushes, as though some heavy body were being pushed +through them. + +"Seem to be making heavy weather of it," commented Herb. "Don't see +why any one should make extra work for himself when there are plenty +of paths through the woods. Now if--Look!" + +His voice rose in a shout that startled his comrades. + +They turned and looked in the direction of his pointing finger. And +what they saw froze the blood in their veins. + +A great shaggy bear had emerged from the brush into a path not more +than a hundred feet away and was lumbering rapidly toward them! + + + + +CHAPTER II + +AN EXCITING CHASE + + +For a single instant the boys stood motionless and silent, stupefied +by the sudden apparition. Then, as though shocked by a galvanic +battery, they woke to life. + +"Quick!" shouted Bob. "To the bungalow! It's our only chance!" + +Like a flash he was off, followed by his comrades. Even Jimmy's feet +seemed winged, and they reached the porch in record time. + +Frantically Bob grasped the knob of the front door. The door was +locked. He threw himself against it, but his weight was not +sufficient, and although the door groaned it refused to yield. He +glanced at his comrades, surrounding him in a panting group, and then +at the bear. The latter was still coming, and seemed to have increased +his speed. + +The roof of the veranda was supported by half a dozen wooden pillars. + +"Shin up these!" shouted Bob, throwing his arms and legs about one and +setting the example. + +In a trice they were all climbing desperately. Fortunately they had +not far to go, for the roof of the veranda was not high. But they felt +as though they were in a nightmare, and although they were really +making surprisingly good time, it seemed as though they would never +get to the top. + +Bob reached there first and swung himself over the roof. Not waiting a +moment to rest, he rushed over to the post that Jimmy had chosen, +reached over his hand and caught one of Jimmy's wrists. There was a +mad scramble and then Jimmy lay on the roof, gasping. + +Joe and Herb needed no help, as they had reached the roof only a +second later than Bob. + +For the moment at least they were safe, and they sat panting and +trying to get their breath. + +And while with fast-beating hearts they are wondering how they are to +escape from the monster below them, it may be well, for the benefit of +those who have not read the preceding volumes of this series, to tell +who the radio boys were and what had been their adventures up to the +time this story opens. + +Bob Layton was the son of a prosperous chemist who was a leading +citizen of the town of Clintonia, a wideawake, thriving, little city +with a population of about ten thousand. The town was located on the +banks of the Shagary River, and was about seventy-five miles from New +York. Bob, at the time these incidents occurred, was in his sixteenth +year. He was tall and well built, of rather dark complexion and frank, +merry eyes that always looked straight at one. He was good in his +studies and a leader in athletic sports among boys of his own age. He +had a firm, decided character, and was always at his best in an +emergency that demanded cool thinking and quick action. + +His closest friend was Joe Atwood, whose father was a physician with a +large practice. Joe was fair in complexion, while Bob was dark, and +they differed in more than mere physical qualities. Joe had a fiery +temper and was apt to speak or act first and think afterward, and Bob +many times served as a brake on the impulsive temperament of his +friend. + +Herb Fennington was a year younger than Bob and Joe, and of a more +indolent, easy-going disposition. He was full of fun and jokes and +nobody could long have the blues when Herb was about. + +A fourth member of the group was Jimmy Plummer, whose father was a +carpenter and contractor and a highly respected citizen of the town. +Jimmy was fat, red-faced and good-natured, with a special partiality +for the good things of life. He had gained the nickname of +"Doughnuts," because of his fondness for that famous product of the +kitchen, and did his best to deserve the name. + +Besides the liking that drew the boys together, there was an added +link in their interest in radio, which by its wonders had taken a firm +hold on their youthful imaginations. In delving into the mysteries of +this new and fascinating science, they had been greatly assisted by +the kindly help afforded them by the Reverend Doctor Dale, the pastor +of the Old First Church of Clintonia. His suggestions had been of +immense value in helping them to master the elements of the science, +and whenever they got into a quandary they had no hesitation in +appealing to him for help that was never refused. + +What gave the boys an added stimulus was the offer by the member of +Congress for the district in which Clintonia was situated of prizes +for the best radio sets made by the boys themselves. The contest was +open to all the boys residing in the Congressional district, and Bob, +Joe, and Jimmy entered into it with enthusiasm. Herb, with his natural +indolence, did not go into the competition and was sorry afterward +that he had not. The first prize was a hundred dollars, and the +second, fifty. To the boys this seemed a whole lot of money and well +worth the winning. + +It was hard work though, and made the harder by the obstacles put in +their way by Buck Looker, the bully of the town, assisted by Carl Lutz +and Terry Mooney, two of his cronies almost as worthless as himself. +Buck tried to wreck Bob's aerial and got a richly deserved thrashing +in consequence. Later on the trio tried to steal Jimmy's set, but the +radio boys got it back in a way that brought a good deal of +discomfiture to the Looker crowd. + +While the radio sets were in the making, an exciting incident occurred +in town that drew the boys into a series of adventures. An automobile +running wild and dashing through the windows of a paint and hardware +store in the town gave Bob and Joe an opportunity to rescue the +occupant, a Miss Nellie Berwick, and to learn her story of having been +swindled out of some property by a rascal. How by the means of radio +they got on the track of the scoundrel and forced him to make +restitution, how they overcame all the machinations of their enemies +and came out ahead in the competition, is told in the first volume of +this series, entitled: "The Radio Boys' First Wireless; Or, Winning +the Ferberton Prize." + +Shortly after Bob had won the first prize and Joe the second, the +radio boys went down to Ocean Point on the seacoast to spend the +summer. A colony had been established there by several of the +Clintonia families, including those of the radio boys, and they had +great fun on the beach and in the surf. Here too they made marked +advances in their knowledge of radio, in which they were greatly +helped by Brandon Harvey, the wireless operator at the Ocean Point +sending station. How they repaid this by pursuing and capturing the +man who had assaulted him and looted the safe at the station, what +exciting adventures they met with in the pursuit and capture, how +their knowledge of radio enabled them to send help to a ship in peril +on which their own families were voyaging, are told in the second +volume of this series, entitled: "The Radio Boys At Ocean Point; Or, +The Message that Saved the Ship." + +Their summer at Ocean Point was further marked by a gallant rescue of +two young vaudeville performers who had been run down by reckless +thieves in a stolen motor boat. How they finally brought these men to +justice, how they managed to bring congenial employment to a crippled +friend, and how in doing this they found scope for their own talents +in the fascinating work of radio broadcasting, are told in the third +volume of this series entitled: "The Radio Boys At the Sending +Station; Or, Making Good in the Wireless Room." + +And now to return to the boys, who found themselves in the woods on +the roof of the porch of the cottage where they had taken refuge from +the pursuit of the bear. + +That refuge promised to be only a temporary one and exceedingly +precarious. The roof was none too strongly built in the first place, +and had fallen into decay from stress of weather and lack of repairs. +Already there was an ominous creaking as it sagged crazily under the +weight of the four boys. + +Beneath them was the bear, who looked up at them, his jaws slavering +and his little red eyes flaming. He was an enormous beast, capable of +tearing any one of them in pieces if he once got them within his +clutches. + +"If we only had a gun!" groaned Bob, as a terrifying rumbling came +from the throat of the bear. + +"I'd rather have a stick of dynamite to throw at his feet and blow him +into kingdom come," muttered Joe, as he gingerly shifted his position +to find a more solid support than the part of the roof that was +sagging under him. + +"'If wishes were horses, beggars might ride,'" remarked Herb. "The +question is what are we going to do?" + +"Seems to me the question is what is the bear going to do?" put in +Jimmy. + +"What he'll do is plenty," said Joe. "He's got us trapped good and +proper, and the next move is up to him." + +The bear himself seemed to be in something of a quandary as to what +that next move was to be. He paced clumsily up and down before the +veranda while he was making up his mind. But to the boys' dismay there +was no sign that he was inclined to relinquish the prey that was so +nearly within his reach. + +Finally he seemed to come to a decision. He moved from one to the +other of the pillars supporting the veranda roof, sniffing at each as +if calculating which was the strongest. Then to the horror of the boys +he threw his paws about one of the pillars and commenced to climb. + +"He's coming up!" cried Bob, and even as he spoke they could see the +shaggy hair of the beast's head come in sight on a level with the +porch roof. "Up on the other roof, fellows! Maybe he can't follow us +there." + +The roof of the house proper extended over the side and front of the +second story and there were several protruding points that offered +support to the feet and hands. In addition there were shutters to the +windows, the tops of which reached nearly to the roof. + +There was a wild scramble for whatever support came nearest to hand. +How the boys did it they could not for the life of them remember +afterwards, but somehow, with the spur given to them by the knowledge +that the bear was close behind, they got up on the roof of the house, +their clothes torn and their fingers bruised and bleeding. + +"Let's go along the roof toward the back of the house," panted Joe. +"There may be an extension kitchen there on which we can drop and then +from there to the ground. It may not be so easy for the bear to get +down after us as it has been to get up." + +They followed this suggestion at once and made their way as rapidly as +possible across the shaky roof. It would have been more prudent of +them to have left some interval between them, but they were so excited +that they did not think of that and crowded close on one another's +heels. + +Suddenly a shout rose from Bob. + +"Back, fellows!" he cried. "The roof's caving in!" + +But the warning came too late. There was an ominous cracking and +splintering, and then with a roar a section of the roof collapsed, +carrying the boys down with it. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +AN AMAZING DISCOVERY + + +There was a chorus of shouts as the boys felt themselves falling, +followed by a heavy thud as they brought up on the floor of the attic +in a blinding cloud of dust and plaster. + +They had been so close together that they all came down in a heap, in +a waving confusion of arms and legs. + +Fortunately the distance had been only a few feet, but it was enough +to knock the breath out of them, especially out of Jimmy, who had the +misfortune of finding himself at the bottom of the heap. + +For a minute or two they were too dazed by the suddenness of the fall +to speak coherently, or in fact to speak at all. Then gradually they +disentangled themselves and got to their feet. + +Their first sensation had been that of alarm and the second of shock. +But after they had in some measure recovered from these, there came a +third sensation of immense relief. + +For what had seemed at first a disaster revealed itself as a blessing +in disguise when they realized that at least they had escaped from +their pursuer. They were inside the house and had a number of ways of +escape through the doors or windows available to them. The tables had +been turned, and now it was the bear that was at a disadvantage. + +They rubbed their eyes to get the dust out of them, and had barely +begun to see clearly when they heard a voice calling from outside the +house. The accents were foreign and they could not catch clearly what +was said, but the words, whatever they were, were promptly followed by +a scratching and clawing that seemed to indicate that the bear was +sliding down one of the pillars of the porch to the ground. + +"We must warn him!" cried Bob. "The bear will get him, sure!" + +They rushed down the stairs to the ground floor and looked through one +of the front windows. At a few yards' distance stood a man, short and +stocky and of a swarthy complexion. A bandana handkerchief was wound +around his head and earrings dangled from his ears. + +As they looked, the great body of the bear dropped from the lower part +of the pillar to the ground, and the beast turned and rushed toward +the man. + +"He'll be killed!" yelled Joe, in great apprehension. "Killed right +before our eyes! Why doesn't he run? Can it be that he is blind?" + +They all shouted in unison to warn the newcomer of his danger. + +Then an amazing thing happened. The man not only stood his ground, but +advanced toward the bear. The huge brute reared on his hind legs and +threw his great paws over the man's shoulders. But even while the boys +shuddered at the nearness of the tragedy that seemed about to be +enacted, the man laughed joyously and passed his hand caressingly over +the shaggy head and playfully pulled one of the brute's ears. + +The boys looked at each other in amazement. The look gradually changed +from one of wonderment to one of sheepishness. Then Bob turned the +lock of the front door, threw it open and stepped out on the porch. + +"Hello there!" he called. + +The man turned around and looked at him in surprise. It was evident +that he had not known until that moment that there was anybody in the +house. + +"Hello, you'sel'!" he replied, with a smile that showed a row of +gleaming white teeth. + +"Is that your bear?" inquired Bob, while his comrades, who had also +come out on the porch, taking care, however, to leave the door open in +case a quick retreat should seem desirable, clustered about him. + +"Sure data mya bear," was the response. "He verra gooda bear. He dance +an' maka tricks while I sing and we maka lota da mon. Mya name Tony +Moretto. I coma from da Italy two, nearly tree years ago. I spika da +Inglis good," he continued, with evident pride in his accomplishments. + +"Doesn't he ever get cross and ugly?" asked Bob. "He looks as though +he could eat you in two mouthfuls." + +"What dat?" asked Tony, in a tone of aggrieved surprise. "Bruno get +ugly? Nevair! He verra tame." And to prove it, he thrust his hand into +the bear's mouth and took hold of his tongue. + +Instead of this evoking any protest, Bruno took it as part of a game, +and acted just as a big good-natured mastiff might while romping with +his master. + +"You see," said Tony, with evident pride. "He lova me. I show you how +he minda me." + +He gave a word or two of command and began a monotonous chant, to the +notes of which the bear began to dance with an agility that was +surprising in so clumsy an animal. Then he lay down and played dead, +turned somersaults and went through his whole repertoire of tricks for +the edification of the boys, who looked on with very different +emotions from those they had felt only a little while before. + +"What I tella you?" said Tony complacently. "Bruno verra nice bear." + +"What made him chase us then?" asked Joe. "We thought he was going to +eat us alive." + +"He chasa you?" said Tony, in surprise. "No, no. You mus' be mistake. +He wan' to maka frens--to playa wi' you. Dat' ees it. He tink eet was +a game." + +"I wish we'd known that half an hour ago," murmured Joe to his +companions. "It would have saved us a whole lot of trouble." + +"How did he come to get away from you?" asked Herb. + +"I verra tired," answered Tony. "I go sleepa in de woods. When I waka +up I no finda him. He hunt for grub in da woods. Den he seea you and +try to maka frens wi' you." + +He took a chain from his pocket and fastened it to a collar on the +bear's neck. + +"Coma, Bruno," he said. "We go now." + +"Wait," called Bob, and he and his companions emptied their pockets of +what loose change they had and pressed it on the Italian, who at first +shook his head. + +"No," he said. "Bruno maka you much trubbeel." + +"Never mind that," replied Bob. "You've given us a good show, and this +will buy some grub for Bruno. He's a good old sport, and we don't bear +him any malice, even if he did give us the scare of our lives." + +He was so insistent that Tony finally pocketed the money, and with a +smile and another flash of his white teeth trudged off through the +woods with Bruno lumbering along clumsily beside him. + +The boys watched the pair until they were out of sight and then turned +and looked at each other. Then the comical aspect of the whole affair +appealed to them and they burst into inextinguishable laughter. + +"Stung!" cried Bob, when at last he could get his breath. "Stung good +and plenty." + +"Running away like all possessed when the bear was only lonely and +wanted company," gasped Joe, wiping his eyes. + +"He lova us, he wanta maka frens with us," chuckled Herb, and again +they went into convulsions of mirth. + +"Well, fellows," said Bob, when they had regained some degree of +composure, "there's no doubt but that the joke is on us. But, after +all, we've nothing to reproach ourselves for, because we're not mind +readers and couldn't be supposed to know Bruno's intentions when he +came galloping toward us. There isn't a man on earth who wouldn't have +done just as we did under the circumstances." + +"We can't say we haven't had excitement enough for one day," remarked +Jimmy. "Gee, I feel as though I'd been drawn through a knothole. When +you fellows came down on me in the attic, I felt sure that you'd drive +me through the floor." + +"We showed good judgment in letting you fall first," said Joe, with a +grin. "It was as good as falling on a rubber cushion." + +"I guess I was born to be the goat," sighed Jimmy. "I'll bet I'm black +and blue all over." + +"It's a safe bet that we're all pretty tired and sore," said Bob. "And +that's too bad too, for we've got a lot of work to do before we leave +this old shebang. And we won't have any more than time to do it, for +it's getting on pretty late in the afternoon." + +"What do you mean?" asked Herb. "Seems to me we've worked hard enough +for one day." + +"All the same we've got to fix up that roof before we go," explained +Bob. "It wouldn't be fair to leave it open to the wind and rain after +we smashed it in." + +"I tell you what!" exclaimed Herb, struck with a bright idea. "Jimmy's +the one to do that to the queen's taste. He's had a lot of experience +in his father's carpenter shop, and he could make a far better job of +it than any of us could. It'll be a real treat to see him go at it." + +"Sure," said Jimmy sarcastically. "Just the thing. I told you that I +was the goat. But all the same don't you try to hold your breath till +you see me do it." + +"We'll all go at it," declared Bob. "And we'll get it done in jig +time. Probably it won't be done like cabinet work, but we can make it +reasonably tight and snug just the same. Come along now and let's get +busy." + +They picked themselves up and made their way to the attic and set to +work. They were hampered at first by lack of tools, but search of the +house brought to light a couple of rusty hammers and saws, and they +managed to make a fairly good job of it. At least they had made it +secure against rain or snow, and that was all they could hope to do +under the circumstances. + +The sun was getting low in the western sky as they were putting in the +last nails. Suddenly Herb stopped and listened. + +"Who's that calling?" he asked. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +THE BULLY APPEARS + + +Joe went to a window in the side of the attic and peered out. Then he +gave a low whistle. + +"What's the game?" inquired Bob curiously. + +"It's Buck Looker and his gang," replied his chum. "How in the world +did they happen to get here just at this minute? Five minutes more and +we'd have been gone." + +"Now I suppose it will all come out about the bear," said Herb +regretfully. "I was hoping we could keep that to ourselves." + +"Perhaps it's just as well," said Bob thoughtfully. "We'd have to +explain anyhow how we came to fall through the roof, and of course +we'd tell the truth about it. What we've done now is only a makeshift +job, and we'll have to get some carpenter to make a perfect thing of +it at our expense. That's the only fair thing to do." + +"Hello, up there!" came a voice from below, which they recognized as +Buck Looker's. "Who's up there and what are you doing?" + +Bob, who had come up to Joe's side, thrust his head out of the window. + +"Some of my friends and myself are here," he answered. "We broke +through the roof of the house and we've just been fixing it up." + +"Broke through the roof!" came in a gasp from below. "What business +did you have on the roof of my house? You're going to get into trouble +for this." + +"Oh, I don't know," replied Bob. "We're not worrying much about it." + +"Well, you'd better worry," growled Buck truculently. "You come right +down and get out of my house as fast as your legs can carry you or +I'll--I'll----" + +"Yes," said Bob quietly, "go right ahead with what you were going to +say, Buck Looker. You'll do what?" + +Buck hesitated, for there was a note in Bob's voice that he did not +like. + +"You'll see what I'll do," he blustered. "You get right out of my +house." + +"Now listen, Buck Looker," replied Bob. "We're going to get out of +this house for just two reasons. The first is that there's nothing +especially attractive to keep us here, and the second is that we've +finished our work and were just about to go anyway. But don't fool +yourself into thinking that we're going because you tell us to. If +your father told us to, we'd have to, because it's his property. But +it isn't yours and what you say doesn't interest us a little bit. Get +that?" + +There was a growling response, of which they did not catch the words, +and Bob turned to his companions. + +"Come along, fellows," he said. "Let's go down and see what this +terrible man-eater and his cronies are going to do to us." + +"I only wish they'd give us an excuse for pitching into them," said +Joe. "I've been aching to give Buck Looker a licking ever since that +time Mr. Preston came along and stopped us." + +"No chance," laughed Bob. "Buck is prudent enough when any one comes +face to face with him. As a long distance fighter he's a wonder, but +he wilts fast enough when a scrap seems coming." + +The radio boys brushed off their clothes, restored the tools to their +places, and went downstairs and out on the front porch, where they +found the bully and his friends in close conversation. + +"It's time you got out of here!" exclaimed Buck. "My father will have +something to say about this, and maybe he'll have you all arrested for +burglary." + +At this the boys could not help laughing, and Buck's face grew red +with fury, while a venomous light glowed in his mean eyes. + +"You'll laugh out of the other side of your mouths when you find +yourselves in jail," he shouted. + +"Now look here," burst out Joe, taking a step toward him, "you've gone +quite far enough. You keep a civil tongue in your head, or I'll give +you what I've owed you ever since Mr. Preston came between us. And +there's no Mr. Preston here now." + +Bob put a restraining hand on his friend's arm. + +"Easy, Joe," he counseled. + +Then he turned to the bully. + +"We don't owe you any explanation, Buck Looker," he said, "but we do +owe one to your father, and you can tell him what we say. We were +chased by a bear who had wandered away from his master. We chose this +house for safety because it was the only place at hand and we couldn't +do anything else. First we got up on the roof of the porch, but the +bear came after us there and we had to take to the roof of the house +itself. While we were going across it, part of it caved in and let us +down into the attic. Afterward we tried to repair the damage for the +time, and you can tell your father that we will pay whatever is +necessary to make the roof as good as it was before." + +"Chased by a bear!" repeated Buck, with a sneer. "That's a likely +story. There hasn't been a bear around these parts for a hundred +years. Tell that to the marines." + +"I suppose that means that I'm telling a falsehood," said Bob, his +eyes taking on a steely glint. + +"I didn't say that," muttered Buck, as he stole a glance at Bob's +clenched fist. "But you can tell that to my father and see if he +believes it." + +"He can believe it or not as he sees fit," replied Bob. "Come along, +fellows." + +"Just notice that we're going of our own accord," put in Joe, as he +prepared to follow his friend down the steps. "Don't you want to throw +us off the porch or any little thing like that?" he inquired politely, +pausing a moment for an answer. + +But the only answer was a snarl, and the radio boys left the bully +there and went on to the place a little way off where they had dropped +their bags when the bear came upon them. + +Jimmy, who was in the van, suddenly gave a cry of dismay. + +"The bags are gone!" he exclaimed. "I dropped mine right here, and now +there are no signs of it." + +"And mine was close by this tree," cried Herb. "That's gone too." + +They hunted about for a few minutes, but the search was fruitless. + +"Look here!" exclaimed Joe, at last. "Those bags didn't walk away of +their own accord. Somebody's taken them." + +"And after working all day to fill them!" groaned Jimmy. + +"Say, fellows," said Bob. "The only ones that have been around here +have probably been Buck Looker and his gang. There's the answer." + +"But they didn't have any bags with them," interposed Herb. + +"They could have hidden them, intending to come back after dark and +get them," replied Bob. "I'm going to question them anyway. Buck +Looker isn't going to put anything like that over on us." + +"They'll only lie out of it," prophesied Jimmy pessimistically. + +"We can see from the way they talk and act whether they are lying or +not," returned Bob. "At any rate I'm going to take a chance." + +They all went back rapidly toward the house, and reached there just in +time to see Buck and his cronies vanishing around the back. + +"They've seen us coming and tried to dodge," cried Joe. + +"That won't do them any good," replied Bob, quickening his speed. "We +can beat them running any day." + +The truth of his words was quickly demonstrated when they drew up +abreast of the three, who slowed to a walk when they saw it was no use +trying to evade their pursuers. + +"What are you running away for?" queried Bob, as he stepped in front +of Buck. + +"None of your business," answered Buck snapishly. "I might ask you +what you are running for." + +"And if you did, I'd tell you mighty quick," answered Bob. "I was +running after you to ask you what you did with the bags of nuts you +found under the trees." + +Buck tried to put on a look of surprise, but the attempt was a +failure. + +"I--I don't know what you're talking about," he stammered. + +Every tone and every look betrayed that he was not telling the truth, +and Bob went straight to the point. + +"Yes, you do," he retorted. "You know perfectly well what I'm talking +about. You found those bags under the trees where we had dropped them +when the bear chased us, and you've hidden them somewhere intending to +come back for them later. We've got you dead to rights, and you'd +better come across and come across quick." + +Buck hesitated a moment, but the look in Bob's eyes told him what was +in store for him if he refused, and again he concluded that discretion +was the better part of valor. + +"Oh, were those yours?" he said, with an affectation of surprise. "We +did find a few nuts and laid them aside for the owners if they should +come back for them. I had forgotten all about it." + +"It's too bad that your memory is so poor," remarked Bob grimly. +"Suppose you come along and show us where you laid them aside so +carefully for their owners." + +Again Buck hesitated and seemed inclined to refuse, but the menace in +Bob's eyes had not lessened, and he reluctantly shuffled back to the +woods in front of the house and pointed out a hollow tree. + +"There you'll find your old nuts," he snarled viciously. "That is, if +they are yours. Ten to one they belong to somebody else." And with +this Parthian shot, which the boys disregarded in their eagerness to +regain their property, he slunk away, followed by Lutz and Mooney, the +discomfited faces of the three of them as black as thunder clouds. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +A STARTLING ACCUSATION + + +Elated and triumphant, the radio boys shouldered their bags and set +out for home. + +"This is the end of a perfect day," chanted Joe, as they trudged +along, tired in body but light in heart. + +"For us perhaps, but not for Buck and his crowd," chuckled Herb. + +"And those sneak thieves were the fellows who were talking about +burglars," laughed Jimmy. + +The sun had gone down before the radio boys left the woods, and it was +full night by the time they reached their homes and disburdened +themselves of their load of nuts. + +"I was going to ask you fellows to come around tonight and listen in +on the broadcasting concert," said Bob, as they reached his gate; "but +I guess our folks will be so much excited about the bear that they +can't talk or think of anything else." + +"That's bearly possible," chuckled Herb, and grinned at the +indignation of his companions at the pun. + +"But I think there'll be something doing at church tomorrow on the +subject of radio," continued Bob. "You fellows must be sure to be +there. I heard Doctor Dale talking about it to father." + +"I'll be there if I can wake up in time," said Jimmy. "But just now I +feel as if I could sleep through the next twenty-four hours straight. +I'll be like one of the seven sleepers of Pegasus." + +"Ephesus, I guess you mean," laughed Bob. "Pegasus was a horse." + +"Is that so?" replied Jimmy. "Well, that's a horse on me. Don't hit +me," he begged, as Bob made a pass at him. "I'm stiff and sore all +over, without having that big ham of yours land on me." + +Bob laughed and went up the steps, while the others made their ways to +their respective homes not many doors away. + +As they had anticipated, the telling of the adventures that they had +gone through that day was listened to with breathless interest by all +the members of their families. At places in the story there was +laughter, but more frequently there were exclamations of alarm mingled +with great relief that they had come through safely. + +"I tell you," said Bob, as he finished telling of the matter to his +parents. "I felt mighty cheap to think that I had run like mad from a +bear that, as the Italian said, was simply trying to 'maka frens' with +me." + +"It was rather amusing after it was all over," assented his father, +with a smile. "But after all you were very wise to act as you did. It +isn't by any means certain that the bear would have been as friendly +with you as he was with his master, and resistance of any kind might +have awakened all his savage instincts. I am very doubtful about the +bear thinking it was only a game when he was climbing up after you. +But even if he did, you had no reason to suppose it. For all you knew +he might have escaped from a circus or menagerie and might have been +ready to tear you in pieces." + +"That was my first thought; that is, as soon as I could think calmly +about anything," answered Bob. "But, after all, a miss is as good as a +mile, and he didn't get us. He came mighty near it though." + +"The most serious outcome of the whole thing will probably be the +matter of the broken roof," said Mr. Layton meditatively. "It will +probably cost considerable to put it in perfect shape again. But, +after all, that doesn't count for anything as long as you boys weren't +hurt. I'll see Looker about it on Monday and fix the matter up with +him." + +"And of course the fathers of the other fellows will chip in on the +expense," said Bob. "I'd like to hear what Buck is telling his father +about it tonight," he continued, with a grin. "By the time he gets +through, we'll have pulled the whole house down." + +The next morning all the boys were at church in time for the morning +service, even Jimmy, who walked very stiffly and smelled strongly of +arnica. + +"You fellows needn't sniff as though I had the plague," he protested, +as his friends lifted their nostrils inquiringly. "I was the fellow +who was underneath when you fell on me like a thousand of brick. You +got off easy, while I had all the worst of it. But then I'm used to +that," he concluded, sighing heavily. + +"Cheer up, old boy," said Joe, clapping him on the back, at which poor +Jimmy winced. "The first hundred years is the worst. After that you +won't mind it. But now we'd better get in if we want to sit together, +for there's a bigger congregation here than usual." + +Doctor Dale, the friend and counselor of the boys in radio, as in many +other things, was in the pulpit. He was a very eloquent preacher and +was always sure of a good congregation. But as Joe had said, the +church was even fuller than usual that morning, and there was a +general stir of expectancy, as though something unusual was in +prospect. + +The attention of the boys was attracted at once by a small disk-like +contrivance right in front of the preacher's desk. It had never been +there before. They recognized it at once as a microphone, but to the +majority of the audience its purpose was a complete mystery, and many +curious glances were fixed upon it. + +There were the customary preliminary services, and then Doctor Dale +came forward to the desk. + +"Before beginning my sermon this morning," he said, "I want to explain +what will seem to some an unusual departure from custom, but which I +hope will justify itself to such an extent as to become a regular +feature of our service. + +"There is no reason why the benefits of that service should be +confined to the persons gathered within these four walls. There are +thousands outside who by the means of radio, that most wonderful +invention of the present century, can hear every word of this service +just as readily as you who are seated in the pews. The prayers, the +hymns, the organ music, the sermon, the benediction--they can hear it +all. The only thing they will miss will be the privilege of putting +their money in the collection plate." + +He paused for a moment, and a smile rippled over the congregation. + +"I have said," he resumed, "that they can hear it. And if they can +hear it, they ought to hear it--that is if they want to. This is no +new or untried idea. It is being carried out today in Pittsburgh, +Washington, and other cities. The pulpit becomes a religious +broadcasting station, from which the service is carried over an area +of hundreds of miles. Everybody within that area who has a receiving +set can hear it if they wish. In some cases it is estimated that more +than two hundred thousand people are enjoying at the same moment the +same religious service. You can see at once what that means in +immeasurably extending the usefulness and influence of the church. + +"Now it has occurred to me that we might do here what is being done +elsewhere on a larger scale. So, after a conference with the officials +of the church, an adequate sending set has been installed in the loft +of the building. What is said here is sent from this microphone to the +loft, where it is flung out into the ether. Arrangements have been +made with a number of churches in this county, too poor and small to +have a regular pastor, by which they have installed loud speaker +receiving sets in their buildings. At this moment there are a dozen +scattered congregations where the people have gathered to worship, and +where at this moment they are hearing everything that is said just as +plainly as you do. + +"And in addition to that," he went on, "in hundreds, perhaps thousands +of homes, people who cannot go to church because of illness or some +other reason are listening to this service. The sick, the crippled, +the blind--think of what it means to have the church brought to them +when they cannot go to the church. You in the pews are the visible +congregation. But outside these walls there is today an invisible +congregation many times greater, to whom this service is bringing its +message of help and healing." + +With this prelude, Doctor Dale announced his text and preached his +sermon, which, if anything, was more eloquent than usual. It seemed as +if he were inspired by preaching to the greatest audience that he had +ever had in his whole career, and the audience in the pews also felt a +thrill as they thought of the invisible listeners miles and miles +away. It seemed as though the natural were being brought into close +connection with the supernatural, and the impression produced was most +powerful. + +If the doctor had had any misgivings as to the attitude of his people +toward this new departure, these were quickly dissipated by the +cordial congratulations and approval that were expressed after the +service was over and he moved about among them. It was the universal +opinion that a great advance had been made and that the innovation had +come to stay. + +The radio boys had been intensely interested in this new application +of their favorite study, and after the sermon they went up into the +loft and examined the apparatus that had been used in sending. It was +a vacuum tube set with two tubes and power enough to send messages out +over the whole county. It had been set up by Dr. Dale himself, and +that was proof enough for the boys that it had worked perfectly in +sending out the morning service. + +"What will radio do next?" asked Bob, as the boys were walking +homeward. + +"What won't it do next is the way you ought to put it," suggested Joe. +"It seems as if there were no limit. There are no such things as space +and distance any more. Radio has wiped them out completely." + +"That's true," chimed in Herb. "The earth used to be a monstrous big +thing twenty-five thousand miles round. Now it's getting to be no +bigger than an orange." + +"What a fuss they made when it was proved that one could travel around +the world in eighty days," said Jimmy. "But radio can go round the +earth more than seven times in a single second. Just about the time it +takes to strike a match." + +"Gee, but I'm glad we weren't born a hundred years ago," remarked Bob. +"What a lot of things we would have missed. Automobiles, locomotives, +telegraph, telephone, phonograph, electric light----" + +"Yes," interrupted Joe, "and radio would have been the worst miss of +all." + +"They're doing in the colleges now, too, something very like what the +doctor did in the pulpit this morning," said Bob. "In Union College +and Tufts and a lot of others the professors are giving their lectures +by radio. Talk about University Extension courses! Radio will beat +them all hollow. Think of a professor lecturing to an audience of +fifty thousand, instead of the hundred or so that are gathered in his +classroom. And think of the thousands of young fellows who are crazy +to go to college and haven't the money to do it with. They can keep on +working and get their college education at home. I tell you what, +fellows, Mr. Brandon was right the other day when he said that the +surface of radio had only been scratched so far." + +The next day at school the boys found that the story of their +experience with the bear had had wide circulation, chiefly through the +activity of Buck Looker, who took care at the same time, however, to +express his belief that nothing of the kind had happened. There was a +good deal of good-natured joking, and the boys in self-defense had to +explain the whole thing in all its details. + +At recess their story received unexpected confirmation, for there, +just outside the school yard, was Tony putting Bruno, the bear, +through his tricks while a breathlessly interested crowd gathered +about the pair. Tony grinned at the boys when he saw them and Jimmy +asserted that Bruno grinned too, but the rest of the radio boys +thought that that was due to Jimmy's excess of imagination. + +A noticeable feature of the school work that day was the scarcity of +pupils. All the classes were more or less sparsely attended, and the +teachers were called to a conference with Mr. Preston, the principal. + +"What do you suppose the powwow of the teachers was all about?" asked +Bob, as the boys were going home after the session of the school was +ended. + +"About so many fellows being away," replied Joe, who, as his father +was the leading physician of the town, was better informed than were +his friends as to the situation. "Dad says there's an awful lot of +sickness in the town. He's kept busy day and night, and scarcely has +time to breathe." + +"I wonder what the reason is," remarked Herb. + +"Dad thinks the water supply may have something to do with it," +answered Joe. "He says there's a regular epidemic of typhoid fever, +and that usually comes from impure water. He's called the attention of +the town council and the engineers of the reservoir to the matter, and +they're going to have an investigation. Dad says it may even be +necessary to close the schools for a time." + +"What's that?" exclaimed Jimmy, with sudden animation. + +"Don't tell Jimmy anything like that," mocked Herb. "It would simply +break his heart. If there's anything he's stuck on it's school." + +"You fellows wouldn't be tickled to death either if you thought you +were going to get a vacation, would you?" retorted Jimmy. "I know you +birds." + +"Say, wouldn't it give us lots of time for radio!" said Bob +enthusiastically. "I want to get all the new wrinkles in that latest +set of ours, and we don't have time to do it in the few evenings we +can spare from our home work." + +"You bet," agreed Herb. "I don't want there to be any more sickness, +but I sure do hope they find it necessary to close the schools. That +would be just what the doctor ordered--in more senses than one." + +"I wouldn't shed any bitter tears myself," admitted Joe. "There's +going to be a meeting of the Board of Health to consider the subject +soon, and I'll give you fellows the tip the minute I hear anything +definite about what they decide to do." + +"In the meantime, suppose you fellows drop around this evening for a +little while," suggested Bob. "I want to try out some long distance +receiving and listen in on Chicago." + +All agreed to be there at about eight o'clock. + +The Laytons had barely finished dinner that night when the door bell +rang. Bob answered the bell. + +He was surprised to find that the callers were Mr. Looker and his son +Buck. Both had dark and angry looks on their faces. + +"I want to know," said Mr. Looker abruptly, "what you and your +companions mean by burning down my cottage!" + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE BURNED COTTAGE + + +"Nonsense!" exclaimed Bob. "What makes you think we'd do a trick like +that?" + +"Never mind about that!" exclaimed the elder Looker, furiously. "I +supposed you'd deny it. I want to see your father, young man." + +"Here he is," and Mr. Layton, who had been attracted to the door by +Mr. Looker's loud and angry tones, emerged on to the porch. "What can +I do for you, Mr. Looker?" + +"You can pay me for my house that your boy and his companions burnt +down," said Mr. Looker in angry tones. + +"I rather think you must be mistaken," said Mr. Layton. "What grounds +have you for making such a serious accusation?" + +"My boy caught them red-handed after they'd broken into the house, and +made them get off my property. It wasn't six hours later that the +place was burned, and there's no doubt in my mind that your boy and +his friends set it on fire just to get even. They've always had a +grudge against Buckley, anyway, and are always doing all they can to +make life miserable for the poor fellow." + +"You know that isn't true, Dad," protested Bob, hotly, "neither about +the fire, nor about Buck. He's always the one that starts trouble." + +"You've got plenty of nerve, Looker, to come here and make an +accusation like this to me," remarked Mr. Layton, his usually kindly +face stern and set. "There are many ways that fire could have occurred +besides being deliberately set, and you know it. Likely enough some +tramps had decided to spend the night there, and set it on fire by +accident. You had better get off my property before I am tempted to +throw you off." + +"It might not be so easy as you think," sneered the elder Looker, but +nevertheless he began edging toward the sidewalk. "If you don't pay, +I'll see my lawyer and have him bring action in court. See if I +don't." + +"Suit yourself," answered Mr. Layton, shrugging his shoulders. "Your +lawyer will tell you, though, that you haven't the shadow of a case. +As for your boy, he looks big enough to take care of himself, and if +he can't, I don't see what business that is of mine." + +"I'll show you," threatened Mr. Looker, as he turned down the walk. +"Don't worry about that. Maybe somebody will be arrested." + +"As you please," said Mr. Layton, with a grim smile. + +Mr. Looker and his promising son reached the sidewalk in sullen +silence, while Bob and his father watched them until they turned the +corner of the street. + +"Young Looker is a young bully, just as you say, and his father would +like to be," said Mr. Layton, seating himself in a rocking chair. "I +suppose you and Joe and the others are sure you didn't light a match +for any purpose while you were there?" + +"Absolutely not, Dad," asserted Bob. "We weren't inside that shack +more than five minutes the first time, and, with that bear outside, +lighting matches was the last thing we'd have thought of. As soon as +the bear's owner captured him, we went outside. We worked on the roof +both from outside and inside, and tried to patch the thing up. We +struck no matches. We were doing the last few things inside when Buck +came along." + +"Tell me just what happened then," directed Mr. Layton. + +"Why, then there was a bit of an argument with Buck," grinned Bob. "We +knew that the place belonged to his father, and that there was nothing +for us to do but clear out. We came right home from there, though, and +you know that we were all here listening to radio that entire +evening." + +"Yes, I remember that," nodded his father. "And I guess that would be +a pretty convincing alibi if Looker really should carry the case to +court. My opinion is, though, that he's just bluffing, and we'll never +hear any more of it." + +"I wish I did know who _was_ responsible," speculated Bob. "Do you +really think tramps were responsible, Dad?" + +"Very likely. Several barns have been burned in this neighborhood from +the same cause, you know. I'm rather sorry that you and your friends +were around there the same day it happened, because unless the real +cause is discovered the Lookers will never stop talking about it. +However, it's a small matter and we'll not think any more about it. +From what you tell me, the place must have been falling apart, +anyway." + +"I should say so," laughed Bob. "We were a surprised bunch when that +roof caved in with us. The place was so rickety it's a wonder it +didn't all come down then." + +"I'll bet you were a scared bunch," bantered his father, a twinkle in +his eyes. + +"I'll say we were," admitted Bob, honestly. "If we'd had a gun with +us, it would have been a different story, though. Tony would have been +out one large, brown bear." + +"It's just as well you didn't," said Mr. Layton, dryly. "We'd have had +Tony threatening a lawsuit, too, if you had killed his pet bear." + +"It would have been a shame to do it," admitted Bob. + +For a few minutes they both sat silent, each busy with his own +thoughts. + +"I expect I'll have to be away from home most of next week, Bob," said +Mr. Layton, at length. Bob looked at him expectantly, and he +continued. "There is a store at Mountain Pass being offered at a +bargain, and I'm strongly tempted to buy it and operate it as a +branch. I'm going to look the ground over, anyway, and if it looks as +good then as it does now, I think I'll buy." + +"That will be fine!" exclaimed Bob. "I've heard a good deal about that +place lately, and it seems to be getting more popular all the time. If +you go will you take mother with you?" + +Mr. Layton nodded, and waited expectantly for the question that he +knew was coming. Nor was he wrong. + +"How about taking me along, Dad?" said Bob, eagerly. "It will be a +peach of a trip. They say the scenery through Mountain Pass is the +best ever." + +"Well, I've thought of that, too, because I was pretty sure you'd want +to come. But I'm afraid they'll have you too busy in the high school +this term for us to manage it. I may have to be gone two or three +weeks, and that would be a serious break in your studies." + +Bob urged and pleaded, but his father was adamant, and at last Bob was +forced reluctantly to give up the idea of going. + +When he told the other radio boys about the visit of the Lookers, they +were as indignant as he. + +"'Like father, like son,'" quoted Joe. "They're two of a kind, that +pair. But I guess they didn't get much satisfaction out of your +father, Bob." + +"I should say not!" laughed Bob. "If they had said much more, I think +we'd have treated ourselves to the pleasure of throwing them into the +street." + +Bob then told them about his father's projected trip to Mountain Pass, +and his disappointment at not being allowed to accompany his parents. + +"That's pretty tough," said Jimmy, sympathetically. "I know how you +must feel. It would be a swell trip, and they say the meals at the +Mountain Rest Hotel up at Mountain Pass are about the best ever." + +"There you go!" exclaimed Bob, laughing. "It's a lucky thing for the +hotel that you're not going. They'd lose money on you, sure as +shooting." + +"Well, I'd try to get my money's worth," said Jimmy, complacently. + +"You'd get it, too, no fear of that," said Joe, confidently. + +When this conversation took place, the boys never dreamed that they +might all be going to Mountain Pass together in the near future. But +as events shaped themselves in the next few days, this began to assume +an aspect of probability. + +The epidemic of typhoid increased, and there was something nearly +approaching a panic in Clintonia. Families began leaving the town +every day, and Dr. Atwood, as head of the town Board of Health, +finally issued orders that the schools must close until the epidemic +had been gotten under control. + +When Bob heard this news, he could not, in spite of the seriousness of +the situation, suppress a feeling of exultation. With school closed, +the main objection to his accompanying his parents to Mountain Pass +was removed, and he had little doubt now that he could persuade them +to take him. + +The task was even easier than he had anticipated, for the Laytons, +like all the other towns-people, were greatly alarmed over the rapid +spread of the sickness, and when Bob broached the subject to them they +readily consented to having him go with them. + +"It's an ill wind that blows nobody any good," thought Bob, and +hurried away to seek his friends and tell them the good news. + +He found all three of them in a state of excitement equal to his own. + +"Dad wants us all to leave town, too," declared Joe. "He says there +must be something wrong with the water supply, and he wants us all +away until the trouble has been located and remedied." + +"My father says the same thing," said Herb. "The trouble is, that +we'll have to go to different places, and that breaks up our +combination for goodness knows how long." + +"Maybe we could get our folks to let us all stick together and go to +Mountain Pass with Bob," ventured Jimmy. "It seems too good to be +true, though." + +"It's an idea, anyway," declared Joe. "You certainly come out strong +once in a while, Doughnuts. It won't do any harm to try, at any rate." + +The others agreed with this, and that night besieged their parents to +let them go to the mountain resort. They succeeded more easily than +they had hoped, as the older people were too worried over the +situation, and too busy packing up, to offer much resistance to the +impetuous lads. + +Early the next morning first Joe, and then Herb and Jimmy, dropped +into the Layton home, to report their success to Bob. + +"Well, that's great!" exclaimed the latter. "Jimmy, you win the +celluloid frying pan for making that suggestion yesterday." + +"Huh! that's about as useful as anything I'll ever get from you +Indians," snorted Jimmy. "I ought to make you pay in advance for my +ideas, instead of giving them away so carelessly." + +"You'll never get rich that way," remarked Joe. "But let's cut out the +comedy, fellows, and get down to business. When are your folks going +to start for Mountain Pass, Bob?" + +"The day after tomorrow." + +"Whew!" whistled Herb. "That means that we'll have to flash a little +speed, doesn't it?" + +"I sha'n't worry about that," grinned Bob. "I'm all ready to start +this minute, so I'll sit back and watch you fellows hustle. It will be +lots of fun." + +"You won't be able to see me, on account of the dust I'll raise," +announced Jimmy. + +"You're going to stay at the Mountain Rest Hotel, aren't you, Bob?" +asked Joe. + +"Sure! It's the best hotel up there. The only one, in fact; though I +believe some of the natives take a few people into their homes." + +"By the way," said Herb. "Who's said anything to Mrs. or Mr. Layton +about our joining their party? Seems incredible, but maybe they won't +want us." + +"Gee!" gasped Joe. "I never thought of that. But maybe it's so." + +"There's mother now," announced Bob. "Let's put it up to her." + +This they did, and her son's three friends were assured by Mrs. Layton +that if their parents were willing they should go she and Mr. Layton +would be glad to have them in their party. + +"That's fixed then," announced Jimmy. "I'm off now, fellows. Next +stop, Mountain Pass." + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +RADIO WONDERS + + +That day and the next were busy ones for the radio boys. The party was +to go in two big automobiles that Mr. Layton had hired, and the boys +had secured permission to take a small radio set with them. On the +morning set for their departure they were ready to the last detail, +and it was not long before they and their belongings were snugly +packed into the two automobiles and they were all on their way to the +mountain resort. + +Although it was still only mid-autumn, the air had a keen edge to it, +the sky was gray and overcast, and there was the indefinable feel of +snow in the air. The big cars rolled crisply through long drifts of +dead leaves, going at a lively pace, as it was quite a journey to the +resort, with many steep grades to be encountered on the way. The boys +were warmly wrapped, and the keen air only gave zest and added to +their high spirits. + +"These cars ought to be equipped with a radio set," remarked Bob, a +short time after they had started. "I saw a picture the other day of a +car that was rigged up that way, with an antenna from the radiator to +a mast in the rear." + +"It's not a bad idea, at that," said Joe. "If a person were going on a +long tour, he could keep in touch with the weather forecasts, and know +just what to expect the next day." + +"Yes, and when he camped for lunch, he could have music while the +coffee pot was boiling," said Herb. "Pretty soft, I'll say." + +"He'd be out of luck if the static were bad, though," observed Jimmy. + +"Oh, it won't be long before they'll get around that static nuisance," +said Bob. "Have you heard of the latest method of overcoming it?" + +The others had not, and Bob proceeded to explain. + +"At Rocky Point, Long Island, they put up twelve radio towers, each +four hundred and ten feet high, in a row three miles long. Then they +hitched up a couple of two hundred kilowatt alternators so that they +run in synchronism. That means four hundred kilowatts on the aerial, +and I guess that can plough through the worst static that ever +happened." + +"Four hundred kilowatts!" exclaimed Joe. "That's an awful lot of +juice, Bob." + +"You bet it is," agreed Bob, nodding his head. "But it does the work. +When they tested out this system signals were received in Nauen, +Germany, of almost maximum strength, in spite of bad weather +conditions. You know they have a numbered scale, running from nothing +to ten, which is maximum. Well, the Rocky Point signals were classed +as number nine, which means they were almost maximum strength." + +"It must have been a terrible job to synchronize those two +alternators," commented Joe. + +"No doubt of it," agreed Bob. "This article stated that they had to +experiment for months before they succeeded. Those machines turn over +at somewhere around twenty-two thousand revolutions per minute, you +know." + +"About three hundred and sixty-six times a second," said Joe, after a +short mental calculation. "Nothing slow about that, is there?" + +"It's fast enough to do the trick, anyway," agreed Bob. "Wouldn't it +be great to be in charge of a station like that?" + +The others agreed that it would, and for some time they discussed this +latest marvel of radio. Then their minds were drawn away by the +wonderful scenery through which they were passing. The leaves still +left on the trees were tinted in rich reds and browns, and as the big +cars climbed to higher levels the party had some wonderful views of +high hills and spreading valleys. + +But the sky became continually more leaden and overcast, and the +drivers put on more speed in an effort to reach their destination +before the impending storm should start. But they had gone only a +short distance further when a few white flakes came swirling silently +down from the leaden sky. Scattered at first, they rapidly increased +in numbers until the air was filled with swirling sheets of white. The +snow packed over the windshields and powdered the occupants of the two +cars, and the drivers were forced to stop and put up the side +curtains. The snow hissed through the branches of the trees and +whispered to the dead leaves, making the only sound in a world that +was rapidly changing from autumn brown to winter white. + +With the side curtains adjusted as snugly as possible, the party +resumed its journey. The fine, dry snow searched out every chink and +opening between the curtains, penetrating in some mysterious manner +where rain would have been kept out. In a surprisingly short time it +had thrown a thick mantle over the road, and the cars began to feel +the drag of ploughing through it. Another stop had to be made to put +on tire chains, and by this time it was plainly to be seen that the +drivers were becoming worried. + +They had still about a third of the distance to cover, which included +some of the worst grades in that part of the country. The road had +changed from smooth macadam to a rough trail that required careful +driving even under the most favorable conditions, and now the snow, +drifting into holes and depressions, hid them from sight, the first +intimation of their presence being a jolt and slam as the wheels +dropped into some pit that the driver could easily have avoided +otherwise. The passengers were shaken about unmercifully, and had to +hold fast to anything handy to keep from being thrown against the +roof. + +"Good night!" exclaimed Herb, as one particularly heavy jolt threw him +from the seat and left him floundering on the floor. "We won't have +any springs left on the cars by the time we reach the hotel, provided +we ever do. I know people who have driven over this road, and they +never mentioned its being so bad." + +"So have I," said Bob, peering out through the side curtains. "My +private opinion is, that we've gotten off the main road altogether. +There was a fork a way back, and I thought then that the drivers +turned in the wrong direction." + +"That hardly seems possible, Bob," said Mr. Layton. "They are both +experienced drivers, and are supposed to know this road like a book." + +"Well, likely enough I'm wrong," said his son. "If they did take the +wrong fork, though, I suppose they'll soon find it out and turn back." + +But Bob was gifted with a keen sense of direction, and it was not long +before the little party found that he had been correct in his surmise. +The leading car halted, the other followed suit, and the drivers, +beating their numbed hands together, held a conference in the road. + +After a struggle with the fastenings of the side-curtain, Mr. Layton +descended and joined them. The boys followed suit, leaving Mrs. Layton +in sole possession of the two cars. + +"We don't rightly know how it happened, sir," said one of the drivers, +addressing Mr. Layton; "but somehow we've got off the right road in +this confounded snow, and I guess there's nothing for it but to turn +and try to get back on it at the place where we branched off." + +"Well, let's do it then, as quickly as possible," said Mr. Layton, +decisively. "The snow is getting deeper every minute, and we can't +afford to lose any more time. I thought you men knew the road too well +to make a mistake like that." + +One of the drivers muttered something about "snow" and "can't see +nothin' ten feet ahead," and they climbed into their seats, while the +others scattered to their places inside. + +The driver of the leading car stepped on the electric starter button, +but instead of the engine starting there was a shock, a sharp snap of +breaking steel, and the starter motor whirred idly around with no more +effect on the engine than one of the thickly fallen snowflakes. + +The driver uttered a fierce exclamation. "There goes that starter +spring again!" he exclaimed. "Now I'll have to crank the blamed engine +every time I want to start for the rest of this trip." + +He fished around under the front seat, produced a starting crank, and +tried to turn the engine over by hand. In his haste, however, he had +forgotten to retard the spark, and as he lunged down on the crank with +all his strength, the motor backfired, the crank spun around several +times, and the driver staggered back, his right arm hanging limp and +useless. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +A CLOSE SHAVE + + +Mrs. Layton uttered a scream, and the others looked at each other a +second with blank faces. Then they jumped out and surrounded the +unfortunate driver, who was gazing at his injured arm in a dazed +fashion. Mr. Layton made a quick examination, and pronounced that the +wrist was badly sprained. Fortunately, they had a complete medical +outfit in one of the cars, including splints, and Mr. Layton contrived +to bind up the injured wrist after a fashion, and then suspended the +arm in a sling. + +"But who's going to drive the car?" asked the uninjured chauffeur, +after this operation had been completed. "If none of you people knows +how to drive, we're in a pretty bad fix." + +"I'll drive," volunteered Bob. "You lead the way, and I guess I'll +manage to keep near you." + +"Are you sure you can do it, Bob?" questioned his father, anxiously. +He had great faith in his son's ability, and liked to have the lad +take a certain amount of responsibility. + +"Sure, Dad. Watch and see," was the quick answer. + +"I don't know about this," said the chauffeur, with the professional's +distrust of the amateur. "We could all pack in one car in a pinch, you +know, and leave the other here." + +"But that would so overload one car that we'd have very little chance +of getting there without a breakdown," argued Bob. "Don't worry about +my driving. I'll manage somehow." + +"I'll bet you will," said Joe. "You'll have to move lively to keep +from being run over," he told the driver. + +"Quit your kiddin'," said the chauffeur, unbelievingly. "We'll have to +hit the high spots from now on, and it ain't goin' to be an easy job +holdin' those boilers on the road." + +Somewhat against his mother's will, Bob cranked the motor of the car +he was to drive, but took care to see that the spark was fully +retarded, in consequence of which he started the engine without any +trouble. The injured driver occupied the other half of the driver's +seat, so as to give Bob pointers in handling the car if they were +needed. + +But he soon found that Bob required very little of his advice. It was +some time since he had driven a car, and at first he was a little slow +at gear shifting, but soon got the "feel" of that particular car and +from then on shifted with the ease and deft certainty of an expert. As +a matter of fact, Bob possessed the knack of handling machinery, +without which no one can really claim to be a good driver. + +The injured driver was not long in recognizing this. Shortly after +they had reached the main road and were once more headed for their +destination, they encountered a steep grade, something over a mile in +length. Both cars were going at a fair speed when they felt the first +tug of gravity, but so sharp was the grade that they lost way rapidly, +and it became necessary to shift into a lower speed. Bob did not wait +until they had slowed down too much. With a quick shove he disengaged +the clutch, shifted into neutral, and then dropped the clutch into the +engagement, at the same time accelerating the engine momentarily. This +causes the idle gears on the jack-shaft to revolve, after which it is +comparatively easy to mesh the intermediate gear combination. Bob had +no difficulty in doing this, and with his gears properly engaged, he +let in the clutch again and stepped on the accelerator. The car surged +forward, ploughing through the snow and skidding from side to side as +it fought its way up the steep gradient. + +In a few moments they caught up with the leading car, which was in +difficulties. Its driver had waited too long before attempting to +shift, and the car had slowed down so much by the time he got into +intermediate that it would not pick up even in that speed, and he was +forced to shift into low. + +"I'll bet that young feller that's driving Jim's car is stalled +somewhere at the bottom of this hill," he thought. "Hope I don't have +to wait too long for him after I reach the top. This road is no place +for an amateur to drive, anyway. I----" + +Honk! Honk! The raucous note of Bob's horn broke in upon his thoughts, +and he glanced, startled, through the rear windows, to see the other +car looming through the drifting storm. + +Too late he tried frantically to speed up and avoid the humiliation of +being passed by one whom he condescendingly termed an amateur. +Resistless as fate the pursuing car drew abreast, and then went on +past in a cloud of fine snow kicked up by the spinning rear wheels. He +muttered morosely to himself as he caught a glimpse of grinning faces +through the dim windows of the storm curtains, but was conscious of a +feeling of admiration, too, for the daring young driver. + +"Say, son, I've got to hand it to you!" exclaimed Jim, the injured +chauffeur. "You know how to handle a car with the best of 'em." + +"Oh, I didn't care so much about passing him, but I didn't want to +slow down," explained Bob, never for an instant taking his eyes from +the road. "It's against my principles to put on brakes when I'm going +up a hill." + +"I figure the same way myself," admitted the other. "Now that we're +ahead, we might as well stay ahead. I'll tell you which way to turn, +an' I guess between us we'll get through all right." + +But many miles still lay between them and their destination, and the +storm showed no sign of abating. Softly, silently, but implacably the +white flakes continued to pile up that clinging carpet over the road +until driving became more a matter of guesswork and instinct than +anything else. For a time the injured chauffeur gave Bob directions +and advice, but at length he came to the conclusion that this boy +behind the wheel was very capable of doing the right thing in the +right place, and he sat silent, gripping the seat and pressing on +imaginary pedals when they got in tight places. + +They were making good progress, considering the adverse conditions, +and were within perhaps ten miles of their destination when suddenly, +through the whirling snow, Bob glimpsed another car swinging into the +main road not fifteen feet from him. Both cars were going at a fast +speed, but the drivers caught sight of each other at almost the same +instant, and both jammed on their brakes. The cars swayed and skidded, +and the occupants of both started from their seats, believing a +collision inevitable. Nothing could have averted this had not Bob, +quick as lightning, wrenched his wheel around, bringing his car into a +course almost parallel with the other. For a few brief seconds the +outcome lay in the hand of fate. When the two cars finally came to a +jarring halt, they were side by side, with not six inches between +their running boards. + +The door of the other car, which was a sedan, burst open, and a small, +red-faced and white-haired man leaped out and shook a belligerent fist +at Bob. + +"What do you mean by driving that car at such a rate of speed?" he +shrilled. "You were breaking every speed law there is, young man, and +I'll make you sorry for it, or my name isn't Gilbert Salper." + +"But your car was going faster than ours, and there isn't any damage +done, anyway," Bob pointed out, as he wriggled from behind the wheel +and descended to the road. + +"No damage done?" echoed the other, waving his hands excitedly. "You +almost scared my wife and daughters into fits, and yet you have the +nerve to stand there and tell me there is no damage done. What do you +mean by it?" + +Before Bob could make an indignant reply, a lady wrapped in costly +furs stepped from the sedan and laid a soothing hand on the irate old +gentleman's shoulder. + +"I'm sure it wasn't the young man's fault, Gilbert," she said, in a +pleasant voice. "Indeed, I think it was his quick action that +prevented a collision. Jules was at fault in coming on to the main +road without slowing down or blowing his horn." + +"They were both going too fast, I say!" insisted her husband. "But I +suppose we ought to be thankful that we are still alive, after +undertaking such a fool trip. Next time we'll do what I want and stay +at home." + +The gentleman fumed and fussed a little longer, but at length his wife +and daughters succeeded in enticing him back into his car. The latter +were both unusually pretty girls, and as they coaxed their father back +into good humor, Joe, who was in the car driven by Bob, whispered that +he hoped they were also bound for the Mountain Rest Hotel. + +Mr. Salper was a wealthy Wall Street broker, whose pocketbook was much +longer than his temper. Although irascible and prone to "fly off the +handle" at the slightest provocation, he was at bottom a kindly man, +and one who would do anything for those he cared for. Like many +others, his health had suffered in the process of money making, and +his physician had ordered him to give up business for a month or two +and rest. + +The broker owned a house not far from the big hotel at Mountain Pass, +and the family frequently came to the place, both in the winter and +the summer. They were well known at the hotel itself for they often +ran over to take meals there and to visit with some of the patrons. + +By the time his daughters had succeeded in calming the broker's +excitement, the second car of the Layton party came up, and it was +decided that the three cars should keep close together for the rest of +the journey, in order to render mutual aid if it should be needed. The +snow had attained a depth of six or eight inches by this time, and it +was only with the greatest difficulty that they even managed to start +again. But finally they got straightened out and resumed their bucking +of the hills and snow. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +BUCKING THE DRIFTS + + +It was heartbreaking work, for from that point on the road ascended +steadily toward the top of the mountain, with hardly a level spot on +it. A mile ahead lay the Pass, a narrow gorge in which the snow had +drifted so deep as to make it almost impassable. + +The car that Bob was driving was in the lead, and as they neared this +dangerous place the disabled chauffeur gave him a word of advice. + +"Open 'er wide, son," he counseled. "We'll have to buck drifts maybe +two feet deep or more, and if we once have to stop, it means we'll +stay there until somebody comes and digs us out. Give 'er all she'll +take, and hold her on the road if you can." + +Bob nodded, and opened the throttle little by little, while the +chauffeur held his foot on the muffler cut-out pedal, in order to +relieve the engine of all back pressure. Just before they reached the +Pass, by some freak of the wind the road had been swept clear of snow +for several hundred feet, and this gave the car an opportunity to +gather speed. + +Faster and faster it flew, until the speedometer needle registered +fifty miles an hour. Then through the driving snow the entrance to the +Pass loomed ahead, and the chauffeur gave an exclamation. + +Before them was a snowdrift that looked almost as high as their car, +stretching solidly across the road and leaving Bob not the shadow of a +chance to dodge. He set his teeth, opened the throttle to the limit, +and gripped the wheel with wrists braced strong as steel bars. + +The heavy car hurtled into the drift with the force of a projectile +shot from a big gun, throwing clouds of snow in every direction as it +bored resistlessly through. The car skidded and twisted in every +direction, and it was a supreme test of Bob's strength and skill to +keep the powerful machine on its course. Big rocks lined the road, and +more than once they shaved past these with only inches to spare. + +Resistless with its initial momentum, the big car was nevertheless +gradually losing speed as it penetrated further into the drift and the +passive but deadly resistance of the snow began more and more to make +itself felt. The engine began to labor, and Bob was on the point of +shifting speeds, when suddenly the car broke through the farther side +of the drift, seemed to shake the clinging flakes from it, and began +to pick up speed again. + +Those composing the little party never forgot the gruelling battle +against odds that followed. The blustering wind had piled the snow in +great drifts in some places, and in others had swept the road so clean +that the frozen brown earth was visible for some distance. + +On these stretches they would pick up speed, and then charge into the +drifts and repeat the former battle. Over and over they did this, Bob +driving like a master, with steely blue eyes fastened grimly on the +road ahead, jaws set, and a face that looked ten years older than it +really was. Those in the car spoke words of encouragement from time to +time, but he was too busy and concentrated on his task to answer with +anything other than a brief nod. + +For what seemed like an age they ploughed through one huge drift after +another, with the high rocky walls of the Pass frowning down at them +till at last the rugged hills fell back from the road, the air +lightened, and they were through the Pass, with less than two miles +between them and the warmth and shelter of the hotel. The road now ran +along a high ridge, which the wind had swept clear of snow, and Bob +stopped the car and relaxed with a great sigh. + +"Guess we'd better wait for the others to catch up," he said. "We +broke a path for them, though, and it ought to be a lot easier for +them than it was for us." + +"You must be all in, Bob," said Joe. "You handled this car like an old +timer, but now it's about time you had a relief. Why not let me take a +hack at it for the rest of the way?" + +But Bob laughed, and shook his head. "I wouldn't have missed that for +a farm," he said. "It was hard work, but it was the best kind of +sport, too. Besides, Jim here says that the road runs along this ridge +almost to the doors of the hotel, and it will be easy sailing the rest +of the way." + +"I wonder what has become of the other cars?" said Mr. Layton, in a +worried tone. "I hope nothing has happened to them." + +He had hardly ceased speaking, when one of the automobiles appeared, +so covered with snow that it was hard to believe that it was actually +a car at all. Shortly afterward the Salper car appeared, came to a +halt when its driver saw the other two at a standstill, and its French +chauffeur descended and advanced stiffly to where Bob and the driver +of the second Layton car were standing. + +"Pah!" he exclaimed. "In all France there is no road like that which I +have just traverse. I am hire to drive ze petrol car, not ze snow +plough. It eez ze so great mystery zat we have arrive so far." + +"Mystery is right," agreed Jim, the injured driver. "The only casualty +up to date is my busted wing, which is a lot better than a busted +neck. But you'd better get back in your glass house, Frenchy, because +we're all frozen stiff, and the sooner we land at the hotel, the +better. My arm feels as though it must be broken in twenty places." + +The Frenchman looked doubtfully at Jim when he spoke of an injured +"wing," but evidently set it down as being one more incomprehensible +vagary of the English language, for he only shrugged his shoulders and +returned to his car without comment. + +The short day was drawing rapidly into night when the little party at +last saw the cheerful lights of the hotel shining through the storm. +Fifteen minutes later the lads were all seated in front of a roaring +open fire in the big parlor and were telling their experiences to the +amazed guests. + +Bob was the only uncomfortable one in the crowd, as he heard everybody +speaking in praise of the way he had risen to the emergency and was +thankful for more reasons than one when dinner was announced. + +"Dinner!" exclaimed Jimmy, rapturously. "Bob, I've got to hand it to +you. Not only do you get us here through a howling blizzard, but you +land us just in time for a turkey dinner. Oh my, oh my!" + +The Mountain Rest Hotel had a reputation for serving generous meals, +and for this the boys were thankful that night. Through all the long, +cold day they had eaten nothing but a few sandwiches, and now they +strove to make up for lost time. Not in vain, either. Even Jimmy had +to own up that he could not eat another mouthful, which was a +statement he could seldom truthfully make. + +Owing to the sickness in Clintonia, there had been an unprecedented +rush of visitors to the hotel, and the Layton party discovered that +they would have to take one of the small cottages adjoining the hotel, +although they would board in the main establishment. + +The cottage was snug and comfortable, however, and they were all +delighted with it. Indeed, it was better for the radio boys than rooms +in the hotel, because they could set up their receiving set more +readily. Of course, it was out of the question to erect an outdoor +aerial, but they were not bothered by this and decided to use a loop +aerial instead. They had brought with them a knock-down frame on which +to wind their antenna, and this frame could be moved around and set +against the wall when not in use. + +The first night at Mountain Pass they had little thought, however, +even for their beloved radio, and were content to tumble into bed +shortly after dinner. But the next day they were up early, and after a +hearty breakfast set to work to put up their set. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +CONVINCING A SKEPTIC + + +It was a simple matter for the boys to wind the loop aerial, for they +had become expert in the manipulation of wire, tape, and the numerous +other accessories that go with the art of wireless telephony. After +the aerial was completed they unpacked their receiving set and quickly +connected it up. They worked skillfully and efficiently, and before +the lunch bell rang at noon they were ready to receive signals. + +But even their enthusiasm was not proof against the seductive summons +of the genial looking old darky who rang the bell, and they washed +hastily and started for the dining room at a pace that would have +reflected credit on the hungriest boarder who ever lived. + +"Gang way, Bob!" panted Jimmy, as they clattered down the last flight +of stairs and dashed for the entrance to the hotel. "I'm hungry, and, +therefore, desperate. Get out of the way before I trip over you!" + +"Good night!" shouted Bob. "You're getting too fresh to live, Jimmy," +and he picked up a handful of snow and dropped it carefully and with +precision down Jimmy's fat neck. + +"Ugh!" exclaimed that corpulent youth, stopping short in his wild rush +and digging snow from under his collar. "I'll get even with you for +that, Bob, you old hobo. Just you wait!" + +"Can't wait a second," grinned Bob. "I don't want to be late and miss +all the good things, even if you do." + +"Come on, Doughnuts, don't stand there all day picking snow off you," +entreated Herb. "I can't see where there's any fun in that." + +Jimmy reached down, packed a handful of snow, and sent it flying after +the others. They were close to the door, however, and ducked in +unscathed, while the snowball spread out in a big patch against the +door casing. + +Jimmy did not allow himself to be delayed very long at any time when +there was food in prospect, however, and his friends had hardly seated +themselves at the table when he came in, his collar badly dampened, +but his appetite in prime condition. He shook his fist surreptitiously +at the others, but he was incapable of staying angry long, and was +soon his usual jolly and happy-go-lucky self. + +The snowstorm had stopped during the night, the weather had grown +warmer, and a brilliant sun now shone down on a dazzlingly white +world. The snow had come ahead of time, as all the "regulars" at the +Mountain Rest Hotel united in asserting, and now it gave every +indication of disappearing as fast as it had come. + +The boys wanted to get back to their radio set after dinner, but the +snow looked so inviting that they could not resist the temptation to +have a snow fight. Some of the men, seeing them hard at it, cast +dignity to the winds and joined them, until quite a miniature battle +was raging. Ammunition was plentiful, and there was a good deal of +shouting and laughter before both sides became tired and agreed to +call it a draw. + +The radio boys were pretty damp with snow water, and their hands were +stiff with cold, but trifling discomforts such as these did not bother +them much. They had had a good time, and they knew that there is +seldom any fun that does not have its own drawbacks. They went to +their rooms, changed the wettest of their clothing for dry articles, +and were soon ready to test their set. + +They were just making a final inspection of their connections when Mr. +Layton entered the room, accompanied by two other gentlemen. + +Mr. Layton introduced the two latter as the owners of the store he was +thinking of purchasing. + +"Mr. Blackford and Mr. Robins are rather skeptical about radio," +explained Mr. Layton, when the introductions had been duly +accomplished. "I happened to mention it this morning, and as they both +seemed to think I was exaggerating its possibilities, I asked them +here to see and hear for themselves." + +"It's no trouble to show goods," said Bob, grinning. "We haven't +tested for signals yet, but the set is all hooked up, and I guess all +we'll have to do is tune up and get about anything you want." + +"You seem pretty confident," remarked one of the two strangers, Mr. +Robins. "My opinion is, that this radio stuff is mostly bunk. A friend +of mine bought a set just a little while ago, and he couldn't hear a +thing with it. Paid fifteen dollars for it, too." + +"I shouldn't imagine he could," said Bob, drily. "Mountain Pass must +be at least a hundred miles from the nearest broadcasting station, and +that set you speak of could never be expected to catch anything more +than twenty-five miles away, at the most." + +"Well, I'll bet dollars to doughnuts you can't hear anything with that +outfit you've got there, either," broke in the other of the two +strangers. + +"You'd lose your money, Blackford," said Bob's father. "Go ahead and +convince these doubting Thomases, Bob." + +Bob adjusted a headset over his ears and switched on the current +through the vacuum bulb filament. Then he manipulated the voltage of +the "B," or high voltage, dry battery, and also varied the current +flowing through the filament by means of a rheostat connected in +series with it. Almost immediately he caught a far-away sound of +music, and by manipulation of the variometer and condenser knobs +gradually increased the strength of the sounds. + +Meantime Mr. Layton's two acquaintances had watched proceedings with +open skepticism, and often glanced knowingly at each other. But +suddenly, as Bob twisted the knob of the variable condenser, the music +became so loud that all in the room could hear it, even though they +had no receivers over their ears. + +"If either of you two gentlemen will put these receivers on, he'll be +convinced that radio is no fake," said Bob quietly, at the same time +removing his headset and holding it out. + +After a moment's hesitation Mr. Robins donned the receivers, and a +startled look came over his face, replacing the incredulous expression +it had worn heretofore. + +"Let's hook up another set of phones, Bob, and let Mr. Blackford +listen at the same time," suggested Joe. + +This was done, and soon both skeptics were listening to their first +radio concert. Mr. Layton regarded them with an amused smile. Mr. +Robins extended his hand curiously toward the condenser knob, and +immediately the music died away. He pulled his hand hastily away, and +the sounds resumed their former volume. + +"Don't be frightened," laughed Mr. Layton. "It won't bite you." + +"But what made it fade away in that fashion?" asked Mr. Robins. + +"Don't ask me," said Bob's father. "I'm not up on radio the way the +boys are. I enjoy it, without knowing much of the _modus operandi_." + +"That was caused by what is known as 'body capacity,'" explained Bob. +"Every human being is more or less of a natural condenser, and when +you get near the regular condenser in that set, it puts more capacity +into the circuit, and interferes with its balance." + +The other nodded, although in reality he understood very little of +even this simple explanation. He was too much absorbed in listening to +what was going on in the phones. + +As he listened, he heard the latest stock market quotations given out, +among them being the last minute prices of some shares he happened to +be interested in. He slapped his knee enthusiastically, and when the +last quotations had been given, he snatched off the headset and leaped +to his feet. + +"I'm converted!" he fairly shouted. "I'll buy this outfit right as it +stands for almost any price you fellows want to put on it. What will +you sell it for?" + +The boys were taken aback by this unexpected offer, and all looked at +Bob expectantly. + +"Why, we hadn't even thought of selling the set," he said slowly. "We +wouldn't sell it right now, at any price, I think. But when we leave +here to go back home, I suppose we might let you have it. How about +it, fellows?" + +After some argument they agreed to this, but Mr. Robins was so +determined to have the set that he would not be put off. + +"Now look here," he said. "I'm a business man, and I'll make you a +business proposition. I'll buy that outfit right now, before I leave +this room, at your own figure. But you fellows can keep it here and +have the use of it just the same as you have now, only it will be +understood that I'll have the privilege of coming over here once a day +in time to hear those market reports. At the same time you can teach +me something about operating the thing. How does that strike you?" and +he threw himself back in his chair and waited for his answer. + +"We'll have to talk over that offer for a little while," said Bob. +"Give us ten minutes or so, and we'll give you an answer." + +"That's all right," replied Mr. Robins. "While I'm waiting I'll just +put on those ear pieces again and see what's doing." + +The radio boys left the room and held an excited conference +downstairs. After some discussion they agreed to sell their set, as +long as they could have the use of it during their stay at the resort, +but the matter of price proved to be a knotty problem. Bob produced +pencil and paper, and they figured the actual cost of the set to +themselves, and then what the same set would have cost if bought ready +made in a retail store. + +"The actual material in that set didn't cost us much over forty +dollars, but we put a whole lot of time and experience into it," said +Bob, "It would cost him close to a hundred to get as good a one in a +store." + +"It's a mighty good set, too," said Joe, a note of regret in his +voice. "We might make another as near like it as possible, and not get +nearly as good results." + +"Oh, don't worry. We're some radio builders by this time," Herb +reminded him. "Besides, that isn't the only set we've got." + +"Let's ask him eighty dollars," ventured Jimmy. "He'll be getting it +cheaper then than he could buy it retail, and we'll be picking up a +nice piece of change." + +"I think that ought to be about the right figure," agreed Bob. "Does +that suit this board of directors? Eighty hard, round iron men?" + +The others grinned assent, and they returned to the room where the +older men were still seated about the radio set. + +"Well, what's the verdict?" inquired Mr. Robins, glancing keenly from +one to the other. + +"We've decided to sell," replied Bob. "The price will be eighty +dollars." + +Without a word Mr. Robins produced a roll of greenbacks, and counted +off the specified amount in crisp bills. + +"You'll want a receipt, won't you, Robins?" inquired Mr. Layton. + +"Not necessary," replied the other. "I've got a hunch that your son +and his friends are on the level and won't try to cheat an old fellow +like me. I'll have to be going now, but I'll be around about the same +time tomorrow morning to get the stock quotations. Coming, Blackford?" + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +A MOUNTAIN RADIO STATION + + +Left to themselves, the boys looked at one another. + +"That's what I call quick work," remarked Joe. "I hate to let the old +set go, but they say you should never mix sentiment with business." + +"Maybe this will lessen your grief," said Bob. "Eighty divided by four +makes twenty, or at least that's what they always taught us in school. +Take these four five-dollar bills, Joe, and dry your tears with them." + +"Oh, boy!" exclaimed Joe. + +"Money, how welcome you are!" ejaculated Herb, as he pocketed his +share. "What I can't do with twenty dollars!" + +"That will buy exactly two thousand doughnuts," calculated Jimmy, a +rapturous expression on his round countenance. "Hot doughnuts, crisp +brown doughnuts, doughnuts with jelly in them, doughnuts----" + +A human avalanche precipitated itself on the corpulent youngster, and +he found himself writhing on the floor with his three companions +seated comfortably on different parts of his ample anatomy. + +"Hey! Quit, quit!" stuttered Jimmy. "Get off me, you hobos! You'll +have me flattened out like a dog that's just been run over by a steam +roller." + +"And serve you right, too," retorted Joe. "What do you mean by talking +about doughnuts when it's almost dinner time, and we're starved to +death, anyway. Besides, you know there isn't a place at Mountain Pass +where we can buy them." + +"Yes, and if I'd known that before I started, I would probably have +stayed at home," retorted Jimmy. "Get off me, will you, before I throw +you off?" + +"We'll let you up, but I doubt if you should be trusted with all that +money," returned Bob, grinning. "You'd better whack it up among us, +Jimmy. You'll just buy a lot of junk with it and make yourself sick." + +"Well, I've got a right to get sick if I want to," said his rotund +friend, struggling to his feet. "If you get that twenty away from me, +it will have to be over my dead body." + +"It doesn't seem worth while to kill him for just twenty dollars," +said Bob, pretending to consider. "That's just a little over six +dollars apiece." + +"No good," said Joe, decisively. "It would cost more than that to bury +him." + +"You're a cold-blooded set of bandits," complained Jimmy, in an +aggrieved tone. "I'm glad I haven't got a hundred dollars with me. I'd +be a mighty poor insurance risk then, I suppose." + +"I wouldn't give a lead nickel for your chances," said Bob. "But don't +let that worry you, Jimmy. You'll probably never have that much money +all at one time as long as you live." + +"I won't if I wait for you fellows to give it to me," admitted his +friend. "But I'm going over to the hotel and see if dinner is served +yet. I'm not going to be the last one in the dining room at _every_ +meal." + +"When you get the hang of this place, you'll always be the first one," +said Herb. "After a little while they'll make you up a bunk in a +corner, and you can even sleep there." + +"Oh, go chase yourself!" exclaimed Jimmy. "You never learned how to +eat, Herb, and that's why you're such a human bean pole," and with +this parting shot he slammed the door behind him before Herb could +think of a suitable reply. + +"He got you that time, Herb," said Bob, with a grin. "I guess we might +as well all get ready for dinner. Dad says they hate to have people +coming in late." + +Every day after that Mr. Robins dropped in in time to hear the market +reports, sometimes alone, and at others accompanied by his partner, +Mr. Blackford. The latter was not quite so enthusiastic as his +colleague, but he was nevertheless greatly interested, and was always +glad to don a head set and hear what was going on. + +True to their agreement, the boys instructed the new owner of the set +how to adjust it and get the best results. He always paid the closest +attention to what they told him, and in a few days could pick up +signals and tune the set fairly well. + +"Not bad for an old fellow, eh?" he exclaimed delightedly one day, +when he had accomplished the whole thing without any aid from the +boys. "If Blackford and I sell out to your father, Bob, I'll have a +little leisure time, and blame it all if I don't think I'll do some +experimenting and possibly some building myself." + +"You're pretty badly bitten by the radio bug," observed his partner. + +"I won't try to deny it," said the other, emphatically. "The more I +think about it, the more wonderful it seems. Besides, it's got a +mighty practical side to it. I was holding on to some shares a few +days ago until I learned by way of the radio that they were starting +to fall. I sent a telegram to my brokers, they sold out for me just in +the nick of time, and I made a profit on the deal instead of having to +take a loss. The bottom dropped clean out of the market that same +afternoon, and if I'd been holding on to those shares, I would have +gotten bumped good and hard." + +The other nodded. "It's a good investment when you look at it that +way," he admitted. + +"Good investment is right," declared his partner. "I saved a lot more +in that deal than the whole radio outfit cost me, and I still own the +set." + +"I wonder why the new government wireless station doesn't do something +of the kind," remarked Mr. Blackford. "They might as well make +themselves useful as well as ornamental." + +"Government station!" exclaimed Bob and Joe at once. "Is there a +government station at Mountain Pass?" + +Mr. Blackford nodded. "I thought you fellows knew about it, or I'd +have mentioned it before," he said. "It was just opened a few weeks +ago, and I don't think they've got all their equipment in yet. There's +been some delay in getting the stuff here, I understand." + +"What does the government want of a wireless station away up here?" +asked Bob. + +"This is the highest point in all the surrounding country and makes an +ideal lookout for forest fires," said his informant. "The station was +supposed to be ready for use last summer, but, as I say, was delayed a +good deal. But we expect it to be of great service in the future. +There have been some disastrous forest fires around here in the last +few years, as you probably know." + +"We ought, to know it," remarked Joe. "The smoke has been so thick as +far away as Clintonia sometimes that you could cut it with a hatchet. +It's about time something was done to stop it." + +Of course, once they heard about the government station, the boys +could think of nothing else until they had visited it. Bob proposed +that they go right after lunch, and this met with the enthusiastic +approval of his friends. Poor Jimmy was so rushed by his eager friends +that he was frustrated in his design of asking for a second helping of +chocolate pudding, and was hurried away protesting vainly against such +unseemly haste. + +"What do you Indians think you're doing?" he grumbled. "Do you all +want to die of indigestion? Don't you know you're supposed to rest +after a meal and give your stomach a chance?" + +"Oh, dry up," said Joe, heartlessly. "If you didn't eat so much you +wouldn't want to lie around for two hours after every meal like a +Brazilian anaconda. You know you didn't want another plate of that +pudding, anyway." + +"Didn't I!" said Jimmy, disconsolately. "That was about the best +pudding I ever tasted, bar none. You fellows are such radio bugs that +you can't even pay proper attention to what you're eating." + +"You give enough attention to that to make up for the whole gang," +said Bob. "Stop your growling and step along lively, old timer." + +Jimmy grumbled a little more in spite of this admonition, but regained +his usual cheery mood when he saw the steel lattice-work towers with +the familiar antenna sweeping in graceful spans between them, and +forgot all about the missing plate of pudding. + +The station was situated some distance from the Mountain Rest Hotel in +a clearing cut out of the dense pine woods, and the boys ceased to +wonder why they had not discovered it on some of their rambles. As +they drew near they could see that everything was solidly and +substantially built, as is usually the case with government work. + +The station, besides the towers, comprised a large, comfortable +building, which housed all the sending and receiving equipment, and a +smaller building, in which the operators slept when off duty, and +where spare equipment was stored. + +The radio boys knocked at the door of the larger building, and after a +short wait it was opened by a tall, rather frail looking young fellow, +who eyed them inquiringly. + +Bob explained that he and his friends were radio fans, and were +anxious to look over the station, if it would not cause too much +inconvenience. + +"Not a bit of it," said the young operator, heartily. "To tell you the +truth, there is not much doing here at this time of year, and company +is mighty welcome. Step in and I'll be glad to show you around the +place." + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE MARVELOUS SCIENCE + + +Inside of half an hour the boys were on a friendly footing with the +young operator and felt as though they had known him a long time. He +was only a few years older than themselves, and had been a +full-fledged operator for about six months. The Mountain Pass station +was his first assignment, and he was inordinately proud of the +complicated apparatus that went to compose it. + +"This is some little station that Uncle Sam has rigged up here, and +while there are plenty of bigger ones, there are very few that are +more complete and up to date. Look at this three unit generator set, +for instance. Compact, neat, and efficient, as you can easily see. It +doesn't take up much room, but it can do a whole lot." + +"It does look as though it were built for business," admitted Bob. "I +suppose that unit in the center is the driving motor, isn't it?" + +"Right," said the other. "And the one nearest you is a two thousand +volt generator for supplying the plate circuit. The one at the other +end is a double current generator. That supplies direct current at one +hundred and twenty-five volts and four amps for the exciter circuit, +and alternating current at eighty-eight volts and ten amps for feeding +that twelve volt filament heating transformer that you see over there +in the corner." + +"Pretty neat, I'll say," remarked Joe. + +"I think so," said the other, and continued to point out the salient +and interesting features of the equipment. "Over here, you see, is our +main instrument panel. These dials over here control the variable +condensers, and the other ones control the variometers. But there!" he +exclaimed, catching himself up short. "I suppose none of you ever +heard of such things before, did you?" + +The radio boys looked at each other, and could not help laughing. + +"We've got a faint idea what they are, anyway," chuckled Bob. "We've +made enough of them to be on speaking terms, I should say." + +"Made them!" exclaimed the other, surprised in his turn. + +"Sure thing," grinned Bob. "We've made crystal detector sets and +vacuum tube sets, and----" + +"And other sets that we never knew just how to describe," interrupted +the irrepressible Herb, with a laugh. + +"Yes, that kind too," admitted Bob, with a grin. "But, anyway, we've +made enough to know the difference between a variometer and a +condenser." + +"Well, I didn't know I was talking to old hands at the game," said the +operator. "I suppose I might have known that you wouldn't take that +long walk out here through the snow unless you were pretty well +interested in radio." + +"Yes, we're dyed-in-the-wool fans," admitted Bob, and told the +operator something of their radio work. + +"I'm mighty glad to know that you fellows do understand the subject," +said the operator, when Bob had finished. "I'm so enthusiastic about +it myself, that it is a real pleasure to have somebody to talk to that +knows what I'm talking about. So many of the people who come here seem +to be natural born dumb-bells--at least, on the subject of radio." + +"Such as you took us for at first, eh?" asked Jimmy, with a grin. + +"I apologize for that," said the other, frankly. "Please don't hold it +against me." + +"Personally, I don't blame you a bit," said Bob. "We can't expect you +to be a mind reader." + +"Well, then, that's settled; so let's look at the rest of the +station," said the operator, whose name was Bert Thompson. "This is +our transmitter panel over here. It is very compact, as you can see +for yourselves." + +He opened two doors at the front, one at the bottom, and raised the +cover, thus exposing most of the interior mechanism to view. + +"Here are all the fuse blocks down at the bottom, you see," Thompson +continued. "The various switches are conveniently arranged where you +can easily get at them while you are sitting in front of the panel. +Then up here are the microphones, with their coils and wiring where +you can easily get at them for inspection or repairs. Rather a neat +lay-out, don't you think?" + +"No doubt of it!" exclaimed Bob, admiringly. "We've never made a CW +transmitting set yet, but we hope to some day. A set like this would +cost a pile of money, even if you made it yourself." + +"Rather so," admitted the young operator. "It takes a rich old fellow +like Uncle Sam to pony up for a set like that." + +"We're more interested in receiving sets just at present," said Joe. +"Let's take a look at that end of the outfit." + +"Anything you like," said Thompson, readily. "That panel is located on +this side of the room." + +"I suppose you use a regenerative circuit, don't you?" asked Bob. + +"Oh, yes," answered the other. "That helps out a lot in increasing the +strength of the incoming sounds." + +"I suppose you use a tickler coil in the plate circuit, don't you?" +ventured Joe. + +"No, in this set we use a variometer in the plate circuit instead," +said Thompson. + +"Speaking of regenerative circuits, have you heard about Armstrong's +new invention?" asked Bob. + +The operator shook his head. "Can't say that I have," he said. "It +must be something very recent, isn't it?" + +"Yes, I believe it is," said Bob. "I read about it the other day in +one of the latest radio magazines." + +"Do you remember how it worked?" asked Thompson, eagerly. "I wish +you'd tell me about it, if you do." + +"I'll do my best," promised Bob. "The main idea seems to be to make +one tube do as much as three tubes did before. Armstrong found that +the limit of amplification had been reached when the negative charge +in the tube approaches the positive charge. By experimenting he found +that it was possible to increase the negative charge temporarily, for +something like one twenty-thousandth of a second, I think it was. This +is far above the positive for that tiny fraction of a second, and yet +the average negative charge is lower. It is this increase that makes +the enormous amplification possible, and lets the operator discard two +vacuum tubes." + +"Sounds good," said Thompson. "Do you suppose you could draw me a +rough sketch of the circuit?" + +"Let's have a pencil and some paper, and I'll make a try at it," said +Bob. "I doped it out at the time, but likely I've forgotten it since +then." + +Nevertheless, with the friendly aid of the eraser on the end of the +pencil, he sketched a circuit that the experienced professional had no +difficulty in understanding. + +"You see," explained Bob, "with this hook up you use the regular +Armstrong regenerative circuit, with the second tube connected so that +it acts as an automatic switch, cutting in or out a few turns of the +secondary coil. The plate circuit of the second tube is connected to +the plate of the detector tube through both capacity and inductance." + +"I get you," nodded the operator. "According to your sketch the plate +and grid of the second tube are coupled inductively, causing variation +in the positive resistance of the tuned circuit." + +"That's the idea exactly," agreed Bob. "You see, this is done by means +of the oscillating tube, the grid circuit being connected through the +tuned circuit of the amplifying tube." + +"Say, that looks pretty good to me!" exclaimed Thompson. "I wonder how +Armstrong ever came to dope that out. I've been trying to get +something of the kind for a long time, but I never seemed to get quite +the right combination." + +"Well, better luck next time," said Bob, sympathetically. "There are a +lot of people working at radio problems, and it seems to be a pretty +close race between the inventors. Something new is being discovered +almost every day." + +"If you fellows are building sets, you're just as likely to make some +important discovery as anybody else," said Thompson. "That +super-regenerative circuit is a corker, though. I'm going to keep that +sketch you made, if you don't mind, and see if I can make a small set +along those lines. I have lots of spare time just at present." + +"It will repay you for your trouble, all right," remarked Joe. "We're +figuring on doing the same thing when we get back home." + +Jimmy had tried faithfully to follow the technicalities of the recent +conversation, but his was an easy-going nature, disinclined to delve +deeply into the intricate mysteries of science. Herbert was somewhat +the same way, and they two wandered about the station, laughing and +joking, while Bob and Joe and the young wireless man argued the merits +of different equipments and hook-ups. + +"Say!" exclaimed Jimmy, at length, "I hate to break up the party, but +don't you think it's about time that we thought of getting back to the +hotel? Remember we've got a long way to go, and it's four-thirty +already." + +"Gee!" said Bob, glancing in surprise at his watch. "I guess Jimmy is +right for once in his life. We'll have to hustle along now, but we'll +drop in here often while we are at Mountain Pass--unless you put up a +'no admittance' sign." + +"No danger of that," laughed the other. "The oftener you come, the +better I'll like it. This is a lonely place, as you can see for +yourselves." + +The radio boys shook hands with Bert Thompson, and after thanking him +for the trouble he had taken to show them the station, they started +back for the hotel at a brisk pace. + +The days were growing very short, and it was after dark when they +reached the hotel. Very warm and comfortable it looked as they +approached it, windows lighted and throwing cheerful beams over the +white snow outside. A red glow filled the windows of the living room, +and the boys knew that a big wood fire was roaring and crackling in +the big fireplace. As they drew close, a tempting aroma of cookery +reached them, and caused them to hasten their steps. + +They had barely time to get freshened up before the dinner bell rang, +and in a short time they were making havoc with as fine a meal as any +of them ever tasted. + +When they told about their visit to the radio station, Edna and Ruth +Salper, the daughters of the Wall Street broker they had met in the +snowstorm, were among the most interested of the listeners. + +"We find it so dull over at our house we are glad to come over here +for meals and to visit," said Ruth Salper. + +"I suppose being in the woods in winter is rather dull," returned Joe, +politely. + +"Did you boys really know enough about radio to talk all afternoon +with the man in charge of the government station?" inquired Edna, +curiously. + +"Why not?" asked Bob. "Don't you think radio is a broad enough subject +to talk about for an entire afternoon?" + +"Oh, I suppose it is," she admitted. "But why don't you share some of +your fun with us?" + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +PRESSED INTO SERVICE + + +"Just what do you mean?" asked Bob. "Do you want to talk radio with us +all tomorrow afternoon?" he went on, with an irritating grin. + +"No, of course I don't, stupid," she exclaimed. "But why can't you +bring your old wireless things into the hotel parlor and let us all +hear some music? We'd be ever so grateful if you would." + +The radio boys looked doubtfully at each other. + +"We'd do it, fast enough," said Bob. "But we didn't bring a loud +speaker with us, and without that nobody could hear much unless he had +a set of telephone receivers." + +"Oh, dear!" she exclaimed. "I just knew you'd make some excuse or +other." + +"A loud speaker is something that looks like an old-fashioned +phonograph horn, isn't it?" asked Ruth, the younger sister, before any +of the radio boys could refute the older girl's accusation. + +"Well, yes, it looks like that; but the details are different," +replied Bob. + +"Yes, but if you had a phonograph horn, couldn't you fix it up so that +the music would be loud enough for us all to hear it?" persisted Ruth. + +"Good for you, Ruth!" exclaimed her sister. "I know what you mean. +You're thinking of that old phonograph they used to have in this +hotel, before they got the big new cabinet machine." + +"If Edna and I get that horn for you, it will be easy for such experts +as you boys are to make a--a what-you-may-call-it--loud speaker--out +of it, won't it?" asked Ruth, demurely. + +"I think they're kidding us now, Bob," said Joe, grinning. "When a +girl tells you you're an expert, you can bet she's figuring to wish +something on you." + +"Yes, but it's so unusual that we ought to do something to encourage +it," laughed Bob. "Let's call their bluff. Probably they'll never be +able to find a horn, anyway." + +"Don't count too much on that," said Edna, with a dangerous smile. "We +almost always get what we ask for." + +"Yes, and you are everlastingly asking for something, it seems to me," +grumbled her father, who had joined the little group at that moment. + +"Now, Daddy, you know you love to give us things," chided Ruth. "If we +suddenly had everything we wanted, you'd be dreadfully disappointed." + +"There's no danger of that happening," said her father, a smile +softening his grim face. "But what is it you're after just at +present?" + +"We want that big phonograph horn they used to have here in the +hotel," said Edna, with a provoking side glance at the radio boys. +"Will you ask the manager to hunt it up and lend it to us?" + +"I'll see what I can do about it," promised Mr. Salper. "I remember +the horn you mean, but it was probably thrown away long ago." + +The radio boys rather wished that this might prove to be the case, but +they were not destined to get off so easily. The first thing they saw +when they entered the dining room the next morning was a large wooden +horn, of a style in universal use in the early years of the +phonograph, standing prominently near their table. + +"There, now!" exclaimed Jimmy, in a low voice. "You see what you've +let us in for, Bob. Why didn't you tell them that we didn't have time +to waste building a loud speaker, and settle the thing right then and +there." + +"That's easier said than done," answered Bob. "Why don't you go over +to the Salper's house and tell the girls that?" + +"Yes, go right over and be rough with them," advised Joe. "Tell them +that you're not afraid of girls, and they can't put anything over on +you." + +"Aw, I would have, last night; but it's too late now," said Jimmy, +lamely. + +"Yes, you would!" jeered Herb. "After all, it won't be so much work. +You're an expert carpenter, Jimmy, and can make a bang-up job of it." + +"That's always the way," complained Jimmy, heaving a dismal sigh. "You +fellows think up a good, hard job, and then I do the work. I've never +known it to fail yet." + +"Buck up, Doughnuts," said Bob. "Think of how the girls will thank you +for it. You'll be the most popular fellow in the hotel." + +"Like fun I will!" returned the fat boy. "But I'm not going to let it +interfere with my appetite. I can see where I've got a hard day ahead +of me." + +It proved to be a busy morning for all the radio boys. Immediately +after breakfast they fell to work on the horn, and after some three +hours of steady labor they had constructed a passable loud-speaking +horn, using one telephone receiver clamped securely at the narrow end. +They mounted the whole thing on a solid wooden pedestal, leaving two +substantial shelves at the back to hold their radio apparatus. + +It did not take them long to mount the receiving outfit in a neat +manner, and when this was done they all drew a long breath and sat +down to admire the result of their labors. While still engaged in this +gratifying occupation, Edna and Ruth Salper entered. + +"Oh!" exclaimed the former, with a gesture of delight, "doesn't it +look simply beautiful? I never thought you boys could make it so +quickly." + +"You've got Jimmy to thank for that," said Bob. "I never saw him work +so hard in his life before. It was easy to see that he was thinking of +you and Ruth all the time, from the way he put his heart into it." + +"I didn't anything of the kind," said the embarrassed Jimmy. "I never +thought of them once, even." + +"What a dreadful thing to say," laughed Ruth. "I didn't know you hated +girls, Jimmy." + +"Who said I hated 'em?" demanded Jimmy, getting as red as a beet. +"I--I----" + +"Love them," Joe finished for him. "Is that what you are trying to +say, Jimmy?" + +"Say, who asked you to butt in?" inquired Jimmy, desperately. +"Everybody is trying to tell me what I mean, until I don't know which +is right myself." + +"Never mind," said Edna, coming to the rescue of the floundering +youth. "We are grateful to you for working so hard for us, anyway." + +"Oh, that's all right," mumbled Jimmy. "If it works all right, we +won't worry about the labor we put into it." + +"But don't you expect it to work?" asked Edna, teasingly. + +"Sure it will work," asserted Bob, before Jimmy could involve himself +again. "That is, you'll hear music, all right, but it probably won't +be very loud, even with the help of the horn. We're a long way from +the broadcasting station, you know. If we were within ten or fifteen +miles of it, I'd say surely that it would be a success." + +"I'll go and get the loop aerial, Bob, and we can test it right now," +suggested Joe. "What do you think?" + +Bob nodded, and Joe left the room, returning a few minutes later with +the loop. This was soon connected with the set, and then Bob began +tuning for signals. + +"Mercy! what was that?" exclaimed Edna, while Ruth gave a little +scream. + +From the horn came an ear-piercing howl, followed by whistles and +weird unearthly shrieks. But the boys only laughed heartily at the +girls. + +"That's nothing but old man static," said Bob. "We'll soon get him off +the wires." + +"Does he live near here?" asked Ruth, innocently. + +"Wow!" shouted Herb, and the boys could not help laughing, although +they stopped as soon as they saw the mystified and somewhat hurt +expression in the girl's eyes. + +"That was just Bob's slangy way of talking," explained Joe, after he +was sure that he had regained control of his features. "Static is the +electricity that is always in the air, and gives us radio fans a good +deal of trouble." + +"Oh, I see," said Ruth, and she was a good enough sport to laugh at +her own mistake. + +Meantime Bob had finally got the set tuned to the proper wave length, +and the little group were all delighted with the clarity and volume of +the resultant sounds. They were not nearly as loud as an ordinary +phonograph, but were sufficient to be heard distinctly in a fairly +large room. + +"It's too bad we only have a one-stage amplifier," said Bob. "If we +only had another transformer and vacuum tube, we'd have a loud speaker +that you could hear all over the hotel." + +"I think this one is plenty good enough," asserted Edna. + +Both she and her sister were as excited as children with a new toy, +and they were both delighted with the music. + +"You boys will have to bring this wonderful thing into the parlor +tonight, and let everybody hear it," coaxed Edna. "I know they will +all be tickled to death to hear a concert in this new way." + +"They might not be as enthusiastic as you think," said Bob, +doubtfully. "Maybe they'd rather just talk, and wouldn't thank us for +interrupting them." + +"What an idea!" exclaimed Ruth. "Just try it once, just to please us, +and you'll soon find out whether they like it or not." + +"Well, if it's to please you, we'll certainly do that thing!" Bob +gallantly remarked, and was rewarded by a friendly smile. + +"Edna and I will speak to the manager about it this afternoon, and I +know it will be all right," she said. "We'll tell you what he says at +supper time." + +The radio boys, although they were radio enthusiasts themselves, did +not actually realize how deeply interested people had become in this +new and wonderful science. They were somewhat surprised, therefore, +when the manager sought them out that afternoon and told them that he +would be more than delighted to have them give a radio concert that +evening. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +SCORING A TRIUMPH + + +When he had gone the boys grinned at one another. + +"We're getting to be popular around this place," remarked Bob. + +"We sha'n't be quite so popular tomorrow, if the concert broadcasted +tonight isn't a good one," said Joe. + +"I only wish we could get that loudspeaker to speak just a bit +louder," said Herb. "It's only fair now, and those people will be +expecting a lot, I suppose." + +"I was thinking the same thing," remarked Bob. "And if we're willing +to pitch in this afternoon, we can improve the strength of our set a +lot" + +The others looked incredulously at him. + +"Explain," said Joe. "You've got us guessing, Bob." + +"The way we've got our set hooked up now, we're using a loop antenna, +aren't we? Well," as the others nodded assent, "why not unwind the +loop and string a double aerial on the roof? That would give us a lot +more power, you know." + +"Right you are!" exclaimed Joe. "That should make a lot of +difference." + +"But if we do that, we'll have to have a ground, which isn't necessary +with the loop antenna," objected Herb. + +"That's true enough," agreed Bob. "But that's easy, after all. We can +hook our ground wire to one of the steam radiators." + +"Trust Bob to think of everything!" ejaculated Jimmy. + +"Bob is thinking that we'd better get busy, then," said that +individual. "Heave yourself off that nice soft couch, Jimmy, and get +your hat and overcoat on." + +Jimmy emitted a dismal groan. + +"Have a heart, Bob," he complained. "You know I worked so hard this +morning that I'm all in." + +"All right, then, you stay there; but we'll tell Edna and Ruth that +you refused to help," said Joe, cruelly. + +This threat had its effect, and Jimmy struggled to his feet and had +his outer clothing on almost as soon as the others. It was a beautiful +day outside, and after they once got warmed up, they thoroughly +enjoyed the work of stringing the aerial on the roof. They brought the +leading-in wire to one of the windows of the hotel parlor. It was not +necessary to insulate this with anything heavier than friction tape, +as this was to be only a temporary installation. Before dark they had +everything ready, and then they went inside, moved their receiving set +into the parlor, and connected it up to the leading-in wire. Following +Bob's suggestion, they attached a ground wire to a radiator, and found +that everything worked perfectly. As they had anticipated, the signals +were considerably louder, and the old phonograph horn filled the big +room with a satisfying volume of sound. + +During dinner the boys were so excited that they could hardly eat, and +immediately afterward they hurried into the parlor. The guests had +been notified of the impending concert, and soon almost everybody in +the hotel had crowded into the room. + +The hotel manager made a little speech introducing the boys to those +who had not already become acquainted with them, and mentioning the +concert that was to come. Then every one waited expectantly for the +promised entertainment. + +It proved unnecessary to do much tuning, as the adjustment they had +secured that afternoon proved to be very nearly correct still. + +When the first clear notes floated into the room many of the audience +straightened up in their chairs, while looks of astonishment passed +over their features. At first they were too engrossed with the novelty +of the thing to pay much attention to the music, but gradually the +golden notes wove their magic net and held them all enthralled. The +night was an ideal one for radiophony, cold and still, with hardly any +static to annoy. One selection after another came in clear and +distinct, and after each one the audience applauded instinctively, +hardly conscious of the fact that upward of one hundred miles of bleak +and snow-covered mountains and valleys lay between them and the +performers. + +At length, to everybody's regret, the last number was played, and the +receiving set was silent. Not so the audience, however, who +overwhelmed the boys with thanks, and made them promise to entertain +them in a similar manner on other evenings. + +After most of the audience had drifted out the Salper girls thanked +the boys prettily for all they had done, and they felt more than +repaid for the hard work of the day, even Jimmy admitting afterward +that "it was worth it." + +The next day the boys were eager to see Bert Thompson, the radio man, +and tell him about their successful experiment, so they set out for +the government station soon after breakfast. It had snowed in the +early morning, but had now stopped, and the air was cold and bracing. + +The four lads relieved the monotony of the long walk with, more than +one impromptu exchange of snowballs. It seemed that they had hardly +started before they had traversed the miles of difficult going and +found themselves in the snug interior of the wireless house. + +As they were approaching it, they were astonished to see Mr. Salper +emerge, a heavy frown on his usually none-too-cheerful countenance. He +only nodded to the radio boys in passing, and hurried away through the +snow at a pace of which they would never have believed him capable. + +When they entered the station they found Bert Thompson excited and +angry. When they opened the door he started up, but when he saw who +his visitors were, sank back in his chair. + +"I'm glad it's you fellows!" he exclaimed. "I thought it was that Wall +Street man coming back. I'm not sure but I'll throw him out if he +does. I'd like to, anyhow." + +"You are all up in the air," said Bob. "Did you have an argument with +Mr. Salper?" + +"Well, he did most of the arguing," said the other, with a faint +smile. "He's so blamed used to having his own way that if any one +doesn't do just as he wants, he gets mad. + +"I suppose I should make allowances for him, because he has plenty to +worry him," went on Thompson. "Some of those Wall Street manipulators +are a ruthless bunch, and when they aren't busy taking money from an +innocent public, they stage some battles between each other. Mr. +Salper has an idea that a bunch of them are trying to swing the market +against him while he's up here, and he seems to think that this is a +public radio station, with nothing to do but send and receive messages +for him all day. I'm working for Uncle Sam, not for him." + +"Oh, well, don't let him get you all stirred up, anyway," said Bob. +"He doesn't mean half of what he says. He was real decent last night +while we were giving our concert." + +"What do you mean, concert?" asked the wireless man. "Are you in the +entertainment game now?" + +"Something like that," answered Bob, grinning, and then he told the +operator about the concert of the previous evening. + +"That's fine," said Thompson heartily, when he had finished. "That was +a good idea, to use a regular aerial instead of the loop. It certainly +catches a lot more." + +"Yes, but the loop is mighty handy, just the same," remarked Joe. +"Especially in a portable set. You can set it up in no time." + +"Oh, it's handy, there's no doubt of that," admitted the young +wireless man. "I wish I had been there for the concert. I heard most +of it here, but it must have been fun to watch the faces of the +audience when you started in." + +"It was," laughed Herb. "I think that some of them imagined we had a +phonograph hidden somewhere because after the concert was over a +number of them looked all around the set as though they were hunting +for something suspicious." + +"Likely enough," agreed Thompson. "Some people are mighty hard to +convince." + +After some further conversation the boys took their leave, promising +to come again for a longer visit. On the way back the chief topic of +discussion was Mr. Salper, and the boys wondered more than once just +what the nature of the trouble was that caused him to haunt the +wireless station and besiege the operator with a flood of messages. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +THE SNOWSLIDE + + +"Well," said Herb, philosophically, "'it is an ill wind that blows +nobody any good.'" + +Bob, who had been shaking a tree for nuts and had shaken down more +snow than anything else, looked at Herb inquiringly. + +"Now what's the poor nut raving about?" he asked slangily of Jimmy and +Joe, who were also engaged in nut gathering. + +"I was just thinking," said Herb, with an attempt at dignity, "how +sorry I am for all those poor sick people in Clintonia." + +"Oh, yes, you were," scoffed Jimmy, who was eating more nuts than he +saved. "You were thinking how lucky we are to be here picking nuts in +the woods instead of slaving away in Clintonia High." + +"Gee, that fellow must be a mind reader!" exclaimed Herb, grinning, +and Bob, coming near, made a pass at him. + +"Say, get busy, old bluffer," he said. "You're getting slower than +Doughnuts here. You haven't got half the nuts that I have." + +"But I'm having twice as much fun," countered Herb, unmoved "A fellow +can't work all the time." + +"I wish I knew what was worrying Mr. Salper," said Joe, suddenly. "I +wonder if that Wall Street bunch, is really out after his money." + +"Gee, he sure does know how to change the subject," murmured Herb, and +Bob threw a nut at him, which he successfully ducked. + +"He seemed rather cut up about it, anyway," said Bob, in answer to +Joe. + +"I wouldn't trust those Wall Street sharpers out of my sight myself," +added Jimmy solemnly. + +"Gee, listen to the financier," gibed Herb. "He's lost so many +millions in Wall Street himself." + +"Not yet," said Jimmy, plaintively. "But wait, my boy, my life is all +before me." + +"Say," cried Joe, "if you two fellows don't look out I'll put you in +my pocket with the other nuts." + +"Mr. Salper seems kind of a nut himself," said Joe, continuing with +his own reflections. "He seems to have a grouch on everything and +everybody." + +"No wonder, with all the worries he's got," said Jimmy, adding +dolefully: "You see the penalties of extreme wealth." + +"One thing you'll never have to worry about," said Herb, and Jimmy +grinned good-naturedly. + +"I'd rather have my sweet disposition," he sighed, "than all of +Salper's wealth." + +"I don't see why you think he's so wealthy," Bob objected. "Everybody +who trades in Wall Street isn't a millionaire, you know." + +"Say, wait a minute!" cried Bob suddenly, with an imperative wave of +his hand. "Did you hear anything?" + +They listened for a moment in breathless silence and it came again, +the call that Bob's sharp ears had first detected. In the distance it +was, surely, but a distinct cry for help, nevertheless. + +"Come on, fellows! We're needed!" cried Bob, and, dropping his bag of +nuts in the snow, he started off at a swift pace in the direction of +the sound. + +The rest of the radio boys needed no second invitation. They started +after Bob, pushing swiftly through the deep snow. + +But as the seconds passed and they heard no further outcry, they +thought that they must have been mistaken or that they had started in +the wrong direction. + +However, as they stopped to consider what to do, the cries began +again, louder this time, a fact which told them they had been on the +right track all along. + +They hurried on again, sometimes plunging into snowdrifts that reached +nearly to their waists, but keeping doggedly on to the rescue. + +It was enough for the radio boys that some one was in trouble. Even +roly-poly Jimmy, puffing painfully, but running gallantly along in the +rear, had but one thought in his head, and that to help whoever needed +help. + +As they came nearer the cries became louder, and they thought they +could distinguish three voices, and one seemed to be that of a woman. + +Another minute they came upon a cleared space and stopped still for a +moment to stare at the amazing scene which met their eyes. + +A woman stood, nearly knee deep in snow, waving her arms wildly, and +even in that moment of astonishment they recognized her as Mrs. +Salper. She was gesticulating toward something in front of her and +calling urgently to the boys to hurry. + +Then the lads saw the cause of her distress. At the foot of a steep +rise of ground, almost a small hill, was all that was to be seen of +two girls. These latter had their heads above the snow that enveloped +them and they were trying desperately to work their arms free of the +icy blanket. From their expressions and from their wild cries for help +it could be seen they were panic-stricken. + +"A snowslide!" Joe, who was standing close to Bob, heard him mutter. +"Those girls had a narrow escape to keep from being buried entirely!" + +The next moment he was dashing off in the direction of the two +prisoners, shouting encouragement to Mrs. Salper. The others were +close at his heels. + +"We'll get you out all right," he called to the frightened girls, who +had stopped their struggling and were looking at him hopefully. "Just +keep still for a moment and save your breath. We'll have you out of +there in a jiffy. + +"Dig, fellows, for all you're worth," he added to the boys, who, as +usual, looked to him for directions. "These girls must be pretty cold +by this time." + +For answer the boys did dig manfully, the imprisoned girls helping +them as much as they could with their numb fingers, and before many +minutes they had the snow cleared away sufficiently to be able to +struggle through it to a spot where it was not so deep. The girls +were, of course, Edna and Ruth Salper, the pretty daughters of the +Wall Street broker. + +Edna and Ruth were trembling with cold and with the shock of their +recent accident, and Mrs. Salper ran to them, putting an arm about +each of them protectingly and pouring out thanks to the embarrassed +boys. + +"That's all right," said Bob, modestly. "We couldn't very well have +done anything else, you know. I hope," he added with a glance at the +shivering girls, "that the girls won't take cold." + +"They will if I don't get them home quickly," said Mrs. Salper, +adding, with a worried frown: "I wish we hadn't come so far from the +house." + +It was then that Joe broke in. + +"I tell you what," he said, eagerly. "It isn't far to Mountain +Rest----" + +"And there's sure to be a fire in the grate up there," Bob finished +for him. + +"And it's a fire that will warm you up in a jiffy," added Herb with +his most friendly smile. + +"If we can only make it," sighed Mrs. Salper. + +The radio boys knew of a short cut from this spot to Mountain Rest and +along this they led the others as swiftly as they were able to travel. +And on the way they learned how it was that the girls had happened to +be in such a predicament. + +"I shouldn't have let them do it." It was Mrs. Salper who told the +story. The two girls were still too shaken from their adventure to say +anything. All they could think of was the comforting shelter of a room +and an open grate fire. + +"They wanted to climb up that little hill to see what was on the other +side of it," the lady went on to explain. "I didn't want them to, for +I saw that the snow was deep. But they were in wild spirits, wouldn't +listen to me, said I didn't need to come if I didn't want to--which I +didn't!--and off they went. + +"When they had nearly reached the top Edna started to fall----" + +"No, it was Ruth, Mother," corrected the girl, showing the first sign +of returning interest. + +"Well, it doesn't matter," said Mrs. Salper, with a sigh. "The result +was the same. One of them clutched at the other and they both toppled +down the hill. Their fall must have loosened a mass of the drifted +snow and it came down on top of them. Heavens!" she shuddered at the +memory. "It seemed as if the whole mountain side were falling on top +of them! I thought they would be completely buried!" + +"Well, we were, almost," said Ruth, chafing her cold hands to bring +the circulation back into them. "Anyway," she added with a stiff +smile, "I feel almost as frozen as if I had been!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +THE MODERN MIRACLE + + +"I bet you're cold," said Bob, sympathetically. "Never mind, we'll +have you warmed up in a jiffy now." + +As a matter of fact, the big hotel was even then looming before them, +and in a moment more they entered its doors, to find to their delight +that a roaring fire was burning in the grate of the big living room. + +The two girls rushed to it joyfully, holding out their chilled hands +to the blaze, snuggling to its warmth like two half-frozen kittens. + +They happened to have the big room all to themselves at that moment, +and, after having drawn chairs up to the fire for Mrs. Salper and the +girls, the boys excused themselves and hurried back to the spot where +they had dropped their bags of nuts when the cry for help had +interrupted them in their occupation. + +"Never do to lose the fruits of our labor," said Herb, grinning, as he +picked up his own particular bag. + +The other boys did likewise, and they were soon hurrying back to the +hotel again, talking excitedly about the rescue of the Salper girls. + +"It's mighty lucky we happened to be near enough to hear the cries for +help," said Joe, soberly. "It would have been pretty hard for them to +have forced their way through those drifts alone, half numbed as they +were." + +"Yes," agreed Bob. "It's pretty nice to think of them warm and snug +before the fire just now." + +"Queer," observed Jimmy as they neared the house, "that we should have +been talking about them just at the time the thing happened." + +"Queer," said Herb patronizingly, "but not half so queer, Doughnuts, +as the modern miracles that happen every day----" + +"Take radio, for instance," finished Bob, and they entered the hotel +laughing. + +They found the two girls recovered from their fright and quite a good +deal happier than they had been a few minutes before. They regarded +the radio boys with interest, and it was clear that the girls and Mrs. +Salper had been talking about them during their absence. + +"You're often called the 'radio boys,' aren't you?" challenged Edna, +as the boys drew chairs up to the fire. + +"Why, I guess so," said Bob, with a smile. "Lots of folks call us +that." + +"Dad was up at the radio station the other day and the operator there +was enthusiastic about you," said Ruth Salper, in her direct way. +"Said that if you kept on the way you were going, you would soon know +more about radio than he does himself." + +"That's mighty nice of him, but I'm afraid he was boosting us too +high," replied Bob, trying hard not to show how pleased he was. + +"That fellow at the station has forgotten more about radio than we +ever knew," added Joe modestly, but in his heart he was as pleased at +the praise as Bob was. It is always nice to receive commendation from +some one who is an authority. + +"You're very modest," teased Edna gaily. "But when dad says anything +nice about anybody he generally means it. He doesn't say nice things +very often----" She caught a glance of reproof from her mother and bit +her lip penitently. + +"You mustn't say unkind things about your father, Edna," said Mrs. +Salper, gently. "You know he is worn to death with business worries. +If we could once succeed in making him forget his responsibilities, he +would be as jolly and fun-loving as he used to be." + +"Yes, dad used to be no end of fun," said Ruth, adding, with a fierce +little frown and a clenching of her fists; "I just wish I could get +hold of whoever's worrying him so. I'd give them something to worry +about for a change." + +Then, seeming to realize that the boys might not be interested in her +personal affairs--though as a matter of fact they were interested, +extremely so--the girl tactfully turned the conversation to something +which she thought might interest them. + +"Could we see your radio set?" she asked, impulsively. "We'd just love +to have you tell us about it. As much as we could understand," she +added, with a smile for the boys. + +Mrs. Salper protested feebly, but so eager were the boys to show off +their set to the girl radio fans that her opposition was overcome +almost at once. + +Then followed a happy hour during which the radio boys talked +learnedly of condensers and amplifiers and different kinds of +receivers until the admiration of the girls mounted almost to awe. + +"My, but it sounds worse than Greek!" cried Edna Salper once, as she +bent absorbedly over the apparatus that worked such miracles and bore +such high-sounding names. "This is the tuning apparatus, isn't it?" +she asked, gingerly touching the wire coil. "It seems almost +impossible that you can tune to any wave length with this thing, just +as the piano tuner can tune the wires of his instrument to the proper +sound vibration." + +"It--the whole thing--seems impossible," added Ruth, while Mrs. Salper +found herself quite as interested as her daughters. + +"Yes, that's the way it seemed to us at first," agreed Bob, his eyes +shining. "When Doctor Dale told us we could make a set for ourselves +we could hardly believe him. But it didn't seem a bit hard once we got +started and learned the hang of it." + +"You mean to say that you made this set yourselves?" asked Mrs. +Salper, with interest. + +"Oh, this is nothing. We've made lots of 'em," said Jimmy proudly, at +which Herb promptly kicked him under the table. The injured Jimmy +glared at his assailant, but the others were too much interested in +the subject to notice him. + +"You see this is a comparatively small set," Bob explained. + +"But we're working on a powerful apparatus now," broke in Joe eagerly. +"And when we have that in working shape we'll be able to send as well +as receive." + +"Well, I think you're just as smart as father said you were," said +Ruth, and at this candid compliment the confused boys thought it time +to change the subject. + +"How about listening in a while?" suggested Bob, struck by a sudden +inspiration. "We ought to be just about in time to catch the afternoon +concert--if there is one. Would you like to find out?" + +"Would we?" cried Edna, enthusiastically. "Indeed we would!" + +"Just try us," added Ruth happily. + +So the boys showed them how to fit the head-phones, not using the +loudspeaker they had made from the phonograph horn, and adjusted the +tuning apparatus to the proper wave length, and the girls answered to +the thrill of catching music magically from the ether just as the boys +had done on that never-to-be-forgotten evening when their first +concert had reached them over the wires of their first receiving set. +Crude it seemed to them now in the light of later improvements, but an +instrument of magic it had been to them that night. + +No wonder that the boys felt a warm and real friendship for the Salper +girls--and Mrs. Salper, too--a friendship that would have been +surprising, considering the shortness of their acquaintance, had it +not been that they were all radio fans, dyed in the wool. + +So quickly did the time fly that Mrs. Salper was amazed and apologetic +when she found how long they had lingered. + +"We must hurry!" she exclaimed, starting toward the door, the girls +reluctantly following. "Your father will surely think we are all lost +in a snowdrift." + +"Which two of us came very near being," added Edna, with a laugh. + +"Don't joke about it," said Ruth, with a shiver. "I must say being +buried in a snowdrift wasn't very pleasant--while it lasted." + +The radio boys insisted upon accompanying the Salpers home, explaining +that they could show them the shortest path. Gaily they started out +and before they had reached the Salper place the friendship which had +begun the evening of the concert with their mutual interest in radio, +became steadily stronger. + +It was plain that, besides being grateful to them for having come to +the help of the girls, Mrs. Salper liked the boys for their own sakes. + +When they reached the house she begged them to come in with her so +that Mr. Salper might have the opportunity of thanking them for their +kindness. + +The boys skillfully avoided accepting this invitation by pointing out +that it was getting late and the path would be hard to find in the +dusk. + +"Thanks ever so much for everything," Ruth Salper called after them as +they started off, and Edna added: + +"We're going to frighten dad into getting us a radio set by +threatening to make one ourselves!" + +"I shouldn't wonder if they could make a set, at that," said Bob +thoughtfully, as they tramped on alone. "They're smart enough." + +"For girls," added Herb, condescendingly. + +Whereupon Jimmy turned and eyed him scornfully. + +"Say, where do you get that stuff?" he jeered. "If those girls +couldn't make a better radio set than you, I'd sure feel sorry for +them." + +"Ha! I'll wash your face for saying that," was the quick answer, and +the next instant Jimmy felt some snow on his ear. Then began a snow +battle between all the boys which lasted until they reached the hotel. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +THRASHING A BULLY + + +After that the boys saw a good deal of Edna and Ruth Salper. The +latter were thoroughly good sports and entered into the fun of the +moment with such enthusiasm that the radio boys declared they were +lots more fun than a good many of the fellows they knew. + +They went nutting together, tramped through the woods, read together +the latest discoveries in the radio field, until the girls became +almost as great enthusiasts as the boys. + +The boys were often asked to visit the Salper home, but it was seldom +that they took advantage of these invitations. + +"It would be pleasant enough," Herb declared, "if only grouchy Mr. +Salper were not always around to put a damper on the sport." + +As a matter of fact, on the rare occasions when they happened to meet, +Mr. Salper hardly uttered a word, but it was this very silence of his +that made the boys uneasy. + +"I feel sometimes," Jimmy remarked, "as if I'd like to put a tack on +his chair, just to see if he'd say 'ouch' when it stuck into him." + +"He'd probably say a sight worse than that," Bob replied, with a +laugh, + +However, they were having too good a time to allow Mr. Salper and his +grouches to interfere much with them. + +They became familiar figures at the sending and receiving station, and +the operator always received them cordially. They often had long and +interesting discussions which were not only delightful to the boys but +extremely helpful as well. + +"It seems," said Jimmy, with a grin, "as if all the radio inventors +were running a race with each other to see who can get the greatest +number of inventions on the market in the shortest space of time." + +"You said something that time, boy," the operator replied ruefully. +"The smart fellows are keeping us dubs on the jump trying to catch up +with them. Not that I intend to put you in the 'dub' class with +myself," he added, with a grin. + +"I only wish we knew half as much about the game as you do," Bob +returned heartily. "I think we'd be mighty well satisfied." + +One day when the radio boys had left Edna and Ruth Salper and were +tramping through the woods alone, they spoke of the operator +admiringly. + +"He sure does know a lot about radio," said Joe. "He must stay up all +night studying." + +"Guess that's what's the matter with him," remarked Bob, soberly. "He +spends too much of his time indoors, boning. He should get out in the +open more." + +"Looks as if a little fresh air might tone him up some," Herb +admitted. "He looks as if a breath of air might blow him away." + +"If I looked as thin as he does, I'd go see a doctor," said Jimmy +emphatically. + +It was a fact that the operator at the station, while looking far from +strong when the boys had first seen him, had grown thinner and thinner +and paler and paler until now he seemed to be positively going into a +decline. + +Because they had a sincere regard for Bert Thompson, the boys had +tried to lure him out into the open, but he had been proof against all +their blandishments. And after a while the boys had given up trying. + +"If he wants to kill himself," Bob had grumbled, "I suppose we'll have +to let him have his own way about it." + +And now at this particular time when the boys were at peace with the +world, something suddenly happened that gave them a rude jolt. + +Talking happily of improvements they expected to apply to their new +radio outfit, they came suddenly upon--Buck Looker and his crowd. + +To say they were surprised would not have half expressed it. They were +dumbfounded and mad--clear through. So here were these rascals, +turning up as they always did, just in time to spoil the fun. + +That Buck and his cronies had been talking about them was evident from +the fact that at the appearance of the radio boys they stopped short +in what they were saying and looked sullenly abashed. And from their +confusion Bob guessed that the meeting was as much a surprise to the +"gang" as it was to themselves. + +The boys would have gone on without speaking, hoping to avoid trouble +if it was possible, but Buck hailed them boisterously. + +"Say, what are you guys doing here?" he asked, sneeringly, thrusting +himself almost directly in front of Bob, so that the latter would be +forced to step aside in order to pass him. + +"That's what I'd like to ask you," returned Bob, feeling himself grow +hot all over. "Get out of my way, Buck. You're cramping the scenery." + +"Aw, what's your awful rush?" asked Buck, refusing to move, while Carl +Lutz and Terry Mooney sidled over to the bully, keeping a wary eye on +Bob's right fist, nevertheless. + +"Say, get out of here, Buck Looker, and get quick!" It was Joe who +spoke this time, and any one not as stupid as Buck Looker would have +known it was time to do as he was told. + +But because of the fire that had burned to the ground his father's +disreputable cottage in the woods and which he and his followers had +blamed upon the radio boys, Buck Looker thought himself safe in +taunting the latter as much as he wished. He assumed that they would +not dare resent anything he said or did, for fear he would make public +the matter of the fire and accuse them openly. + +It was a chance of a lifetime for Buck--or so he thought--and he was +determined not to over-look it. So his manner became more insulting +than ever and his face took on a wider grin as his glance shifted from +Bob to Joe. + +"So you're in a hurry, too, are you?" he sneered. "Going to set some +more houses on fire, eh?" + +He turned to his cronies with a grin and they piped up together as if +by a prearranged signal: + +"Firebrands!" + +This undeserved insult was more than the radio boys could stand, and +all stepped forward with clenched fists. + +"You take that back, Buck Looker!" cried Joe, with flashing eyes. + +"Take back nothing!" answered the bully. + +"Yes, you will!" broke in Bob, and caught Buck by the arm. + +At once the bully aimed a savage blow at Bob's head. But the latter +ducked, and an instant later his clenched fist landed upon Buck's chin +with such weight that the bully was sent over backward into the snow. + +At the instant when Buck made his attack on Bob, Terry Mooney tried to +hit Joe with a stick he carried. Joe promptly caught hold of the +stick, and, putting out his foot, sent Terry backward into a +snowdrift. Seeing this, Carl Lutz started to run away, but both Herb +and Jimmy went after him and knocked him flat. + +"You let me alone! I didn't do anything!" blubbered Carl, who was a +thorough coward. + +"You can't call me a firebrand," answered Herb, and while fat Jimmy +sat on the luckless Carl, Herb rammed some snow into his ear and down +his neck. + +While this was going on both Buck and Terry had scrambled to their +feet, and then began a fierce fight between that pair and Bob and Joe. +Blows were freely exchanged, but soon the radio boys had the better of +it, and when Terry's lip was bleeding and swelling rapidly, and Buck +had received a crack in the left eye and it was also swelling, all +three of the cronies were only too glad to back away. + +"Have you had enough?" demanded Bob, pantingly. + +"If you haven't, we'll give you some more," added Joe. + +"You just wait! We'll get square with you some other time," muttered +Buck. And thereupon he and his cronies lost no time in sneaking away +into the woods. + +"Of all the mean fellows that ever lived!" cried Herb. + +"I guess they'll leave us alone--for a while, anyway," came from Joe, +as he felt of his shoulder where he had received a blow. + +"I wonder what those fellows are doing around here, anyway," said Bob +thoughtfully. "Do you suppose they're putting up at the Mountain Rest +Hotel, too?" + +"More than likely," answered Joe, gloomily. "Perhaps they've been +driven out of Clintonia, too, on account of the epidemic. I heard +quite a number of the other young folks were getting out. The whole +town is pretty well scared." + +"They are sure trying their best to make trouble for us," added Jimmy. + +"That fire in the woods was just nuts for them," said Bob, with a +frown. "They've been trying for a long time to get something on us, +and now they think they've got it. They think we're afraid to beat 'em +up now as they deserve, for fear they'll tell everybody we set that +old shack on fire." + +"It was a funny thing," remarked Joe, musingly, "how that fire +started, anyway." + +"Oh, what's the use of worrying?" added Herb, carelessly. "I reckon +the memory of that licking will keep Buck quiet for a while. Say, that +was a fine piece of work you did, Bob! The memory lingers." + +Bob grinned. + +"How about yourselves?" he asked, adding, with a gleam in his eyes: "I +didn't notice Terry Mooney and Carl Lutz looking very happy!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +A NEST OF CONSPIRATORS + + +The radio boys saw Buck Looker often--all too often--in the days that +followed. As the boys had feared, Buck and his crowd were staying at +the Mountain Rest Hotel, and it was almost impossible to help +encountering them. + +Several times there were arguments which almost resulted in blows, but +Buck always managed to sneak off at the critical moment, leaving the +boys to fume helplessly. + +"Wish we could find out how that shack of theirs caught fire," Joe +grumbled on one of these occasions. "Then we could stop their mouths +on that firebrand question once and for all." + +"Wouldn't make any difference," remarked Herb gloomily. "If they +couldn't make trouble for us on that score, they'd think up something +else." + +But about this time something happened that took the minds of the +radio boys from Buck Looker and his trouble making. + +One day, as they were tramping through the woods in the still deep +snow, they came upon a little decrepit-looking one-room shack, +standing dejectedly within a circle of skeleton trees. + +They had wandered further than usual from camp in exploring the +surrounding country and had come upon the tiny cabin unexpectedly. +Jimmy was about to utter a gleeful shout at sight of the +interesting-looking place when Bob clapped a warning hand over his +mouth. + +"Keep still," he whispered sharply. "I hear voices in there." + +"Well, what if you do?" demanded Joe, but he kept his voice cautiously +lowered just the same. "Probably some harmless dubs----" + +"Like ourselves," finished Jimmy, with a grin, "seeking shelter from +the bitter weather." + +"Well, whoever they are, they sure are mad about something," said Bob, +hardly knowing why he should be so excited. + +The voices inside that one-room shack had been raised in altercation, +but now, as the boys listened, somebody evidently cautioned silence, +for once more the tones were lowered almost to a whisper. + +"There's something mysterious about this," said Bob, his eyes gleaming +joyfully. "I vote we look into it." + +"Right-o," agreed Joe, following the leader as Bob started softly +toward the shack. + +What they expected to find they had no idea. But it was an understood, +though unspoken, rule with the radio boys never to pass by anything +that looked in the least mysterious. And certainly this queer little +shack in the woods bore all the air of mystery. + +There was one small window near where they were standing and the four +boys crowded up to this, jostling each other in the attempt to be the +first to see through the dingy pane. + +"Hey!" whispered Jimmy in anguish, as Joe's foot clamped firmly down +upon his. "Quit parking on my toe, will you? There's lots of room on +the ground." + +Joe snickered derisively and that small sound came near to proving +their undoing. For inside the cabin it happened that for a moment +every one had stopped talking and in the silence Joe's laugh was +distinctly audible. + +"Some one's getting in on this," they heard one of the voices say, as +though its owner were nervous, yet was trying his best to hide his +uneasiness. "Let's take a look around, boys. You never can be too +sure." + +The radio boys looked at each other in consternation. There was no +time to get away, even if they had wanted to. And now that they were +convinced there was crooked work going on in the shack, they certainly +did not want to leave. + +Bob flattened himself against the wall and motioned to his chums to do +likewise. If the fellows found them and wanted to put up a fight, +"well, they'd get their money's worth, anyway." + +But it so happened that the lads were not discovered. The door of the +shack was on the opposite side from them, and either the men were too +lazy to search carefully or they were too confident of the obscurity +of their meeting place. At any rate, they went to the door, looked +around, and, finding no one within sight, evidently decided that they +had been mistaken in thinking they had heard a suspicious noise and +reëntered the shack without searching further. + +"You're crazy, Mohun," the boys heard one of them remark, in an +irritable voice. "You're letting your imagination--and your +nerves--run away with you." + +"Well, this deal is enough to get on anybody's nerves," was the +grumbled reply, evidently from the person addressed as Mohun. "If we +don't put it across pretty quick I'm going to quit. I've told you too +much delay would be fatal." + +The boys glanced at each other, and the relief they had felt at not +being discovered was closely followed by huge excitement as they +became more and more certain that they were on the verge of making an +important discovery. + +They crowded closer to the window though, mindful of how close they +had come to discovery, they were careful to make not the slightest +sound. + +Bob, who was closest to the window, could, by exercising the greatest +caution, peer into the shadows of the room. He put out his hand as a +warning to Joe, who was crowding him closely. + +"Don't push," he said, in the merest whisper. "I have a notion this is +going to be good." + +So had the other boys, but they were mad clean through at the fate +that prevented their getting a glimpse into the tumbled-down shanty. +However, they held back, knowing that if they were too eager they +would spoil everything. Discovery then would mean that they would +never hear the secret these men were about to disclose. + +The old shack had evidently once been lived in, for it was fitted up +with furniture of a crude sort. Along one side of the room ran two +long bunks, one above the other, and on the walls were some old +dilapidated-looking pictures, evidently cut out of magazines or news +periodicals. + +There was a three-legged, rickety table in the center of the room, and +about this the conspirators--for such they were--were gathered. Two of +the men had chairs, patently home-made, for seats, while the third, +who sat facing Bob, had merely an empty wooden box turned on end. + +It was this last fellow who was now speaking and who had been +addressed by the name of Mohun. He was short and of fair complexion, +with protruding, horsey teeth that stuck out disagreeably over his +lip. + +Another of the trio was a giant of a fellow, tall, dark and +heavy-browed, while the third, who sat with his back to Bob, was of +slighter build, but nearly as tall. + +Mohun seemed to be the leader of the party, for now he was leaning +across the rickety table, talking earnestly and emphasizing his +remarks with blows of his fist upon it. + +"I tell you, Merriweather," he said, addressing the giant, "this is +our time to act. You are merely pussy-footing when you ask delay. I am +convinced that delay means suicide." + +Jimmy, catching the last word, gasped involuntarily and Bob nudged him +warningly. + +"Keep still," he hissed. "This sure is going to be good!" + +The two other men looked uncertain but the fellow called Mohun was +pushing the point home. + +"This is our chance," he cried vehemently. "Salper is out of the way +for the present, but we never know when he may take the notion to go +back to the old job. They say he is getting mighty restive already." + +At the mention of Mr. Salper's name Bob fell back in his amazement and +landed on Joe's foot, whereupon the latter emitted a squeak of pain +that he immediately stifled. + +"Did you hear that?" demanded Bob in an excited whisper, without a +thought for poor Joe's foot. "They're talking about Mr. Salper." + +Eagerly he turned back to the window while Herb whispered in an awed +tone: + +"Maybe they're going to murder the old fellow." + +"Say, keep still, can't you?" said Bob impatiently, as he strained his +ears to catch the lowered tones of the three men. + +Herb subsided, and the four of them waited with bated breath to find +out what these three conspirators had to do with Gilbert Salper. + +"Maybe you're right, Mohun," the tall man with the craggy brows +answered reluctantly. "But I can't help thinking that to strike now is +a poor move." + +"In two or three weeks we'll have everything just as we want it," +added the man who sat with his back to Bob. "We'll have a sure thing +then, while now----" + +The man called Mohun threw up his hands in a gesture of despair. + +"Pussy-footing again!" he cried disgustedly. "What kind of gamblers +are you, anyway, to wait until you have a sure thing before you test +your luck? Don't you know that the big deals down on the Street that +have been successful have been put through because the fellows doing +it had nerve?" + +"Yes, but not many of the deals have been as big or as important as +this," said the giant quietly. + +"All the more reason to strike quickly," argued Mohun, with heat, +adding in a lowered tone: "I tell you this absence of Salper from Wall +Street is the chance of a lifetime. It's the thing we've been waiting +for. With him on the Street we haven't a chance for our lives. With +him away, we have everything in our own hands. Now it's up to you +whether we make the most of our luck, or throw it in the rubbish +heap." + +"But Salper is up here for an indefinite length of time," argued the +man with his back to Bob. "It is said he will stay at least a month, +maybe two. And a week--two at the outside--is all we need to make sure +of relieving him of some of his ill-gotten wealth." + +The man laughed noisily at this poor attempt at humor, and Mohun +glanced nervously about him. + +"Better look out," he said, peevishly. "You never can tell who's +listening. They say the trees have ears around this way." + +"Your nerves are getting the best of you, I think," cried the big man. +"Just because you've got cold feet is no reason why we should take the +chance of losing out on the biggest deal we've had the chance of +handling for many a day. Get a good sleep, man, and you'll think the +way we do, tomorrow." + +For a moment it seemed as though Mohun were about to spring upon the +big man and Bob held his breath, expecting a struggle. Mohun's face +turned a brick red and his lips drew back from his protruding upper +teeth as though in a snarl. His hands clenched, he took a step toward +the bigger man who had half risen from his chair. + +"Then I'll tell you one thing, you pussy-footers!" he cried furiously. +"If this deal isn't pulled through by the end of a week and if by that +time we haven't our hands on a good chunk of Salper's money, then I'm +through. Do you hear that? I quit!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +ON GUARD + + +The radio boys had heard enough. Silently they tiptoed from their +vantage point, putting off the tremendous desire to exclaim about what +they had heard until they had put a good distance between themselves +and the shack. + +Then they overflowed with wonder and excitement. + +"Say, wait till we spring this news on Mr. Salper!" cried Herb. "The +man will near go off his head." + +"Gosh, you couldn't blame him," said Joe, in an awed tone. "I wouldn't +like to have those three fellows after my hard-earned cash myself." + +"Then he was right when he thought there was somebody after his +money," said Bob, striding along so swiftly in his excitement that +poor Jimmy had hard work to keep up with him. "We thought he was kind +of crazy, but I guess he knew what he was talking about all the time." + +"But I say, you got all the best of it, Bob," said Herb. "Why couldn't +you let the rest of us get a glimpse of some honest-to-goodness +sharpers?" + +"They weren't much to look at," said Bob, with a frown. "That man they +called Mohun was one of the ugliest scoundrels I've ever seen." + +"Was he any worse than Cassey?" asked Jimmy, curiously. + +"If he was he must have been going some," added Herb, with conviction. + +"I guess nobody could be much worse than Cassey," said Bob, frowning +at the memory of the stuttering scoundrel's evil acts. "But he's just +as bad. When he jumped at that big fellow with the bushy eyebrows I +thought he was going to bite him. He has teeth that stick away out +over his under lip." + +"Must be a beauty," commented Herb. + +"I say," said poor Jimmy, fairly running in his effort to keep up with +the other boys, "you're not going toward the hotel, Bob. May I ask +where you are going?" + +"Why, Doughnuts, you shouldn't have to ask," broke in Joe, before Bob +could respond. "Don't you know there is only one place where we could +be going after hearing such rotten news as we've just heard?" + +"We're going to the Salpers, of course," finished Herb, with a +condescending air that irritated the plump and puffing Jimmy. + +"Well, you needn't be so fresh about it," he grumbled, rubbing his +empty stomach ruefully. "It's nearly dark----" + +"And it's dinner time," added Joe, with a grin. "How well we know you, +Doughnuts." + +"Well," grumbled Jimmy, grinning reluctantly, "I don't see why the +Salpers can't wait till we can get something to eat." + +"It won't take us long," said Bob, who had been thinking hard as they +tramped along. "We'll just stop in and tell them what we've heard and +then go on. I don't suppose there is anything that we can do." + +"I guess Mr. Salper will do all that's necessary when he finds his +money threatened," said Joe significantly. + +"I reckon he's had a hunch that something of this kind has been going +on for a long time--in fact, he as much as told us so," said Bob. "But +I guess these rascals were so clever he couldn't put his finger on +them." + +"I wonder what kind of deal they were talking about," mused Herb. + +"It was a crooked one, anyway," said Bob, decidedly. "All you had to +do was to look at them to know that." + +The little shack in the woods was a long way from the Salper place, +and so, in spite of their hurry, the boys did not reach it until just +on the edge of dark. + +The entire family was gathered in the living room of the Salper +cottage, even Mr. Salper himself, and the boys threw their bomb right +into the midst of them. + +Mr. Salper had seemed inclined, as he usually did, to draw apart by +himself, but at the very beginning of the boys' story, he evinced an +almost fierce interest. + +He questioned them minutely while the girls and Mrs. Salper listened +wonderingly. + +"You said the name of one of the men was Mohun?" he asked, throwing +away the cigar he had been smoking and bending earnestly toward Bob. +"What did he look like?" + +The disagreeable impression the man had made upon him was still so +vivid that Bob had no trouble at all in giving a graphic description +of the fellow. + +Mr. Salper's face grew blacker and blacker as he listened and he +pulled out another cigar, biting off the end of it viciously. + +"That's the fellow I've been suspecting all along," he said, finally. +"Slick fellow, that Mohun. Whenever a man gets too eager to do things +for you I've learned to suspect him. Yet, closely as I've watched this +man, I haven't been able to get a thing on him. As far as we could +find out, he was perfectly square. But, by Jove, this puts an entirely +new face on things." + +He paused for a moment, puffing hard on his cigar while the others all +watched him anxiously. The ill humor which had been hanging over him +for so long seemed magically to have vanished. Now that his suspicions +had been so unexpectedly justified, bringing with them the need for +action, the broker was a different man, entirely. His brow had cleared +and there was an eager light in his keen eyes. + +"You fellows have done me the greatest of possible services," he said, +turning to the radio boys--he had forgotten up to that time to thank +them for what they had done. "If you could know what it means to me to +have this information----" + +He broke off, running his hand excitedly through his hair, his eyes +gazing unseeingly out of the window. + +"I must act and act quickly," he muttered, after a minute. "There is +surely no time to lose. You said this man Mohun was urging haste?" he +added, turning to Bob. + +The latter nodded. "Said he'd quit if they didn't get a move on, or +words to that effect," he told his questioner, and Mr. Salper smiled a +preoccupied smile in response. + +"Then Mohun will get what he wants. He has a way of getting what he +wants," he said, again with that air of speaking to himself. "I'm glad +to know it's Mohun--very glad!" + +Although Bob had given as good a description as was possible of the +other two men who had been in the shack with Mohun, Mr. Salper did not +recognize them. + +"Probably a couple of dark horses," he said, and dismissed the +subject. Evidently, to him, Mohun was the most important of the +rascals and the one it was necessary to deal with at once. + +After repeated thanks from Mr. Salper and outspoken gratitude on the +part of Mrs. Salper and the girls, the boys managed to get away. + +They hurried on toward the Mountain Rest Hotel, talking excitedly of +what had happened. + +"That was sure just dumb luck," remarked Joe as he sniffed of the cold +brisk air and began to realize that he was very hungry. "Our happening +on that little shack just as we did," he added in response to an +enquiring look from Bob. + +"You bet," agreed Herb. "That was the time our luck was running +strong. It will do me good if those scoundrels get come up with, +especially the one with the big teeth." + +"Oh, stop talking and hurry up," begged Jimmy, who, in his eagerness +to get back to the hotel and dinner, was actually leading the others. +"It seems ten miles to the house when your poor old system is crying +aloud for grub." + +They laughed at him but followed his example just the same, for they +had been tramping many hours and their appetites were never of the +uncertain variety. + +But just before they reached the welcome lights of the cottage they +realized to their surprise that it was snowing again. So fast were the +flakes coming that by the time they reached the door of the hotel they +were well powdered with them. + +"Hooray!" shouted Herb. "We sure are getting our money's worth of snow +this winter." + +"You bet," agreed Bob, adding happily: "And this one looks like a +'lallapaloosa.'" + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +BROKEN WIRES + + +True to Bob's prediction, the snowstorm proved to be a fierce one even +for this season of unusual snows, and when the boys awoke the next +morning they found that the ground had taken on an extra covering and +the branches of the trees were weighted down with the heavy fall. + +"Say, fellows, look what's here!" cried Joe as he roused his mates, +sleepy-eyed from their comfortable beds. "Old Jack Frost sure was busy +last night." + +"Guess he thinks it's Thanksgiving," Bob agreed as he hurried into his +clothes, keeping one eye on the frosty landscape and fairly aching to +make part of it. "Hurry up, fellows, let's go out and have a snow +fight." + +"You're on," agreed Joe, and then began the race to see who would get +from their cottage to the hotel and to the breakfast table first. + +They arrived there--at the breakfast table, that is--at one and the +same time and ate as ravenously as though they had not broken their +fast in a week. Mr. and Mrs. Layton watched them and smiled, wishing +that they might once more eat with such lusty appetites. + +Before the boys had finished breakfast, it had begun to snow again, +making the landscape appear more than ever blizzardy and bleak. +Eagerly the boys buttoned up heavy sweaters, prepared to fight the +storm to a finish. + +It seemed that they were not the only ones whom the storm had lured +forth. There were a number of people gathered in front of the hotel +and, since they seemed rather excited about something, three of the +boys joined them to find out what the fuss was all about, Jimmy +remaining behind for the time being to take a nail from his shoe. + +"The telegraph wires are all down," said a man in response to Bob's +question. "There's a man been raving around here like a crazy man, +declaring he has to send a telegram. Nobody can seem to make him +understand that since the wires are all down such a thing is +impossible." + +"He might telephone," Joe suggested, but the man who had been their +informant took him up quickly. + +"They're down too," he said. "We're as marooned here, as far as any +communication with the outside world is concerned, as though we were +stranded on an island in the midst of the ocean. This storm has done +considerable damage." + +"I should say so," remarked Joe, as the gentleman turned to some one +else and the boys started on a tour of the place to look over the +prospect. "I'll call it some damage to knock down both telephone and +telegraph wires at one fell swoop." + +"That talk about our being just as badly off for communication with +the outside world as though we were on an island isn't quite correct," +observed Herb. "That fellow seemed to forget all about trains." + +"I suppose he meant quick communication," said Bob. "We could send a +message by wire in an hour or less, while it would take two or three +times that time to send the same message by rail." + +"That's so," agreed Herb, staring up at the wires which had fallen +beneath their weight of snow. "I'd hate to _have_ to get a message +through for any reason just now. But look," he added, pointing to the +hotel. "Our aerials are still up anyway." + +"I wonder who the fellow was who was so anxious to telegraph," said +Joe, after a few minutes. "He must think himself in bad luck." + +Bob brought his gaze from the damaged wires and stared at the boys, +and at Jimmy who just then came puffing up. + +"Say, I bet that was Mr. Salper," Bob said. "Don't you remember last +night that he said he must get a message through to his broker first +thing in the morning?" + +"By Jove, the storm knocked it clear out of my head!" exclaimed Joe. +"Say, I feel sorry for him, all right." + +"Wish we could help him some way," said Herb anxiously. "It would +never do to let that fellow Mohun and his pals get off with the filthy +lucre just when we thought we'd double-crossed them so nicely." + +"I guess that's where Mr. Salper would agree with you," said Jimmy, +with a grin. "Especially since the filthy lucre belongs to him." + +They walked on in silence for a few moments, chagrined at the thought +that the storm had played so into the hands of Mr. Salper's enemies. + +They had learned from Mr. Salper the night before that Mohun of the +protruding teeth was not the kind of man to let a golden opportunity +pass. He would rush the "deal" through while Salper was out of town, +and, from the latter's impatience, they had gathered that the next few +hours would, in all probability, be the crucial time. + +"Burr-r-r!" cried Jimmy suddenly, wrapping his arms as far as they +would go about his chubby body and shivering with the cold. "This +weather sure does make a fellow wish for a fur overcoat. The +thermometer must have gone down twenty degrees over night." + +"Hear who's talking!" scoffed Herb. "With all that fat on your bones, +Doughnuts, you haven't a chance in the world of feeling cold." + +"I suppose you know more than I do about it--not being me," retorted +Jimmy, scathingly. "I'd just like you to feel the way I do; that's +all." + +"Well, it isn't what you might call unpleasantly hot," observed Bob. +"I must say I'm not sweltering, myself." + +"Guess it isn't much colder than this up at the North Pole," agreed +Joe, as he turned his sweater collar up higher about his ears. "Might +as well rig up as an Eskimo and be done with it." + +"Reminds me of that Norwegian, Amundsen," said Bob. "He sure intends +to discover the North Pole with all the fancy trimmings, this time." + +"What do you mean?" asked Herb, with interest. + +"Do you mean to say you haven't read about it?" demanded Jimmy, +indulgently. "Why, he's the fellow who is going to have his ship all +dressed up with wireless so that when he smashes his ship against the +North Pole he can let everybody know about it." + +"It's a great idea, I call it," said Joe, enthusiastically. "Up to +this time, explorers haven't had any way of communicating with the +outside world, and so if they got in trouble they just had to get out +of it the best way they could or die in the attempt." + +"While now," Bob took him up eagerly, "his wireless messages will be +picked up by hundreds of stations all over the world and in case of +need ships and teams of huskies and even aeroplanes can be rushed to +his rescue." + +"Exploring de luxe," murmured Herb, with a comical look. "Pretty soon +there won't be any such thing as adventure because there won't be any +danger. We'll have radio to watch over us and keep us from all harm." + +"It's all right for you to talk that way," said Jimmy. "But I bet if +you were one of these explorer chaps you'd be mighty glad to have +something watch over you and help you out of a tight fix." + +"Yes, I guess those fellows need all the help they can get," agreed +Bob, soberly. "It isn't any joke to be away out there with hundreds of +miles of ice and water between them and civilization." + +"They say even the sledges are to be equipped with radio," Joe broke +in. "So that they can keep in touch with the ship all the time and +through the medium of the powerful sending set aboard the boat the +ship itself can be kept in constant touch with the outside world." + +"There are planes too, equipped with radio," added Bob. "And they say +each plane is outfitted with skids so that it can land safely on the +ice." + +"I should think there would be danger in that," remarked Jimmy, +rubbing his hands vigorously to set the blood circulating again. "They +say the ice is awfully rough and bumpy and spattered with small hills +of ice. I should think a pilot would have a jolly time trying to make +a landing under those conditions." + +"They intend to cut out the ice about the ship so as to make landing +possible," explained Bob. "And in the other places the skids help them +to make a sure landing. Say, wouldn't I like to make one of that +expedition!" he added, with enthusiasm. + +"I wonder how long they expect this expedition to take," said Herb. +The idea of exploring the arctic with radio as a companion was a +fascinating one to him and at that moment he would have made one of +Amundsen's hardy crew, if such a thing were possible, with the +greatest joy. + +"They expect it will take them five years, maybe six." It was Bob who +answered the question. "Their idea is to travel as far as possible +north before the ice gets thick. Then when the floes close in about +them they will drift with the ice over the pole--or, at least, that's +what they hope to do." + +"What gets me," said Jimmy plaintively, "is how they are going to know +when they get to the pole anyway." + +Herb made a pass at him which the fat boy nimbly avoided. + +"Why, you poor fish," said the former witheringly, "you sure will be a +full-sized nut if you ever live to grow up. I suppose if you got to +the North Pole you'd expect to see a clothes pole with the clothes +line wrapped around it, ready for use." + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +A SUDDEN INSPIRATION + + +Unconsciously their feet had carried the radio boys in the direction +of the radio station and now they were surprised to find themselves +confronted by the building itself. + +"We've come some way," Herb began with a chuckle, but Bob cut him +short excitedly. + +"Look!" he cried. "Didn't I tell you that radio was the best ever? +Just cast your eye on that aerial. You don't see that trailing on the +ground, do you?" + +For a moment the other radio boys failed to grasp the significance of +his words. Then they let out a great shout of triumph. For what Bob +had said was true. Where other means of communication with the outside +world failed, radio stood firm. + +The aerial was there, towering as serenely against the slaty sky as +though there was no such thing as a snowstorm. The great marvel of +radio! For no wires, other than the antenna, were needed to carry its +messages to the farthermost parts of the world! + +For a moment the boys were awed as the real significance of the modern +miracle was borne home to them. It was magnificent, it was inspiring +merely to have the privilege of living in such an age. + +"Well, Mr. Salper doesn't need to worry," said Joe, at last. "There's +always radio on the job if he wants to get a quick message through to +New York." + +"It's queer he didn't think of it," agreed Bob, adding, as the intense +cold struck still more deeply into his bones: "Come on in, fellows. +I'd like to see what the operator has to say to all this excitement." + +"You bet," said Jimmy, adding fervently: "And it will give us a chance +to thaw out." + +When the boys reached the room which had become so familiar to them, +they found that here too, the old régime had been interrupted. Several +men were gathered in the far corner of the room, talking earnestly, +and the long table where the operator could be seen daily bending +earnestly over his beloved apparatus was vacant. The operator himself +was nowhere to be seen. + +Sensing something unusual, the boys came forward hesitantly. At sight +of them one of the men detached himself from the group of his +companions and came quickly over to them. The boys did not know his +name, but his face was familiar to them. + +"A most unfortunate thing has happened," burst out this man nervously, +without even an attempt at a preface. "The operator here has been +taken very ill with a fever and we are at a loss to find any one who +can take his place in this emergency." + +The modesty of the radio boys was such that at that moment no thought +of the possibility of their being able to take the experienced +operator's place entered their heads. They were earnestly sorry for +the misfortune which had overtaken their friend, and they told the man +so. It seemed to them that the latter was rather disappointed about +something, and he listened to their words of sympathy absently. After +a moment he left them and rejoined his companions at the other end of +the room. + +"Say, that's tough luck," said Jimmy, his round face comically long. +"I knew that fellow would get into trouble if he didn't take more +exercise." + +Bob fumbled with the familiar apparatus on the table, his face +troubled. + +"If he's out of his head with fever, he must be pretty sick," he +muttered, as though talking to himself. "And that means that he won't +be able to attend to radio for a good long time to come." + +"And with telegraph and telephone wires all down, that's pretty much +of a calamity," added Joe, his eyes meeting Bob's with a look of +understanding. + +"Say!" cried Herb, suddenly seeing what they were driving at, "that +knocks out Mr. Salper's last chance of getting even with those +crooks." + +"Yes," said Bob, soberly, "I guess the game's up, as far as he's +concerned." + +"Let's go over to the hotel and inquire for the sick man," Joe +suggested, adding hopefully, "maybe he isn't as sick as they make +out." + +The operator had a room at the hotel, and the boys had been there once +or twice to talk over points on radio with him and so they knew +exactly where to go. + +However, if they had treasured any hope that Bert Thompson's sickness +had been exaggerated, they were promptly undeceived. No one was +allowed to speak to him, the nurse at the hotel told them, adding, in +her briskly professional manner, that it would be no use to speak to +him anyway, since he was delirious and recognized nobody. + +But before they went, softened by their real concern, she said, quite +kindly, that as soon as the patient was able to receive visitors at +all she would let them know. + +They thanked her and went out into the freezing air again. The snow +had stopped and the wind had died down completely but in the +atmosphere was a deadly chill, a biting cold that seemed to penetrate +to their very marrow. + +"Suppose we go to the Salpers," Bob suggested. "Mrs. Salper and the +girls may need help, for I imagine Mr. Salper isn't in a very pleasant +mood." + +"I wonder," said Joe, as with common consent they turned in the +direction of the Salper home, "if Mr. Salper has heard yet that even +the radio is out of business." + +"Give it up," said Herb, while Jimmy added, with a grin: "I'd hate to +be the one to break the news to him." + +But, as it happened, that was just what they had to do. They saw Mr. +Salper coming and tried to pretend that they did not, but he would +have none of it. + +He made for them directly, with a scowl on his face as fierce as if +they had been the cause of all his trouble. + +"This is a fine business, isn't it?" he asked, waving his hand in the +direction of the snow-weighted wires. "No telegraph, no +telephone--only the radio left. I'm on my way to the station to try to +get the message through, though that operator is a stubborn young +donkey and has before this refused to send messages for me." + +Herb and Jimmy made frantic motions to Bob to keep quiet, for they saw +that he was about to tell the news. And Bob did. + +"I'm sorry, Mr. Salper," he said quietly. "But the operator at the +wireless station has become suddenly very ill and there's no one there +to operate the apparatus." + +For a moment Mr. Salper simply glared while the news sank home. Then +he gazed wildly about him as though to escape from his own worrisome +thoughts. Then the fierce scowl returned to his face and he made an +angry motion toward the boys. + +"The operator sick!" he muttered. "And not a doctor up here!" + +The boys started and looked at him queerly. + +"Do you need a doctor?" asked Bob quickly, thinking immediately of +Mrs. Salper and the girls. "Is some one sick?" + +"Yes," snapped Mr. Salper. "My wife is sick, very sick. And if I can't +get any sort of word through, even by radio----" He paused and his +mouth looked as though he were grinding his teeth. + +He turned back toward his house, and the boys accompanied him with +some vague idea of at least offering their sympathy, even if they +could not do anything to help. + +They found Edna and Ruth nearly frantic with fright. + +"Mother is dreadfully ill," said Edna, between sobs. "Her hands and +face are burning up and she talks queerly. I'm afraid it's pneumonia, +and if she doesn't get a doctor pretty quick she'll d-die!" And with a +sob she fled into the room where the sick woman lay. + +The boys felt awkward, and, since there was nothing they could do to +help, deeply concerned over the trouble of these friends of theirs. + +"There's some good in Mr. Salper, anyway," said Joe, as they tramped +along. "He was so worried over Mrs. Salper that he didn't mention +those Wall Street scoundrels." + +"I reckon it's worrying him just the same," said Jimmy. + +"If only there was something we could do----" began Bob, then stopped +short, a great idea leaping to his eyes. "Say, fellows, what's the +matter with our sending that message?" + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +PUTTING IT THROUGH + + +The boys stared at him for a moment as though he had gone suddenly +crazy. Then the light of adventure dawned in their eyes, and they +grinned joyously. + +"Say, old boy," said Joe in an awed voice, "that sure is some swell +idea. But do you think we could swing it? We know a lot about +receiving, but when it comes to sending----" + +"We're a bunch of nuts," finished Jimmy, decidedly. + +"Maybe," retorted Bob. "But at this time, even a bunch of nuts might +be better than nothing." + +"We've been studying the code," said Joe thoughtfully. "We might be +able to handle it all right. It isn't the first time, if we're not +experts. Of course we can do it." + +"But not for old Salper," said Herb. "He's so impatient he'd make us +forget in five minutes everything we ever knew." + +"Maybe," said Bob again, adding, stoutly: "But I'm game to make a try +at it anyway. There's no one else to do it, and Mr. Salper stands to +lose his wife and a lot of money besides if some one doesn't help him +out." + +"Well, let's make him the proposition," suggested Joe, pausing and +looking back at the Salper house. "I'm with Bob in this thing." + +"So say we all of us," sang Herb cheerily, as they turned back. + +"So long as Bob's the goat," finished Jimmy. + +They found Mr. Salper in the living room of the bungalow, savagely +smoking a cigar. He scarcely looked at the boys when the girls let +them in, and Bob was forced to speak his name before he gave them his +attention. + +"Well, what is it?" he said gruffly, his tone adding plainly: "What +are you doing here anyway? I wish you'd get out." + +The tone made Bob mad, as it did the other boys, and when he spoke his +own tone was not as pleasant as usual. + +"We've decided to try to help you out, if we can, Mr. Salper," he +said, and the man looked at him with a mixture of surprise and +incredulity. + +"In what way?" he asked, in the same curt tone. + +"We know something about sending and receiving messages by radio," Bob +went on, getting madder and madder. "And we thought maybe we might get +a message through for you to a doctor and to your brokers, as well. Of +course," he added, modestly, "we haven't had very much experience----" + +Bob was too modest to say anything about how he had once sent messages +to some ships at sea, (as related in detail in "The Radio Boys at +Ocean Point,") and how he had tried to send on other occasions. + +"Experience be hanged!" cried Mr. Salper, so suddenly that the boys +jumped. "You mean to tell me you can operate that radio contraption?" + +"I think so," said Bob, still modestly. "We haven't done much along +that end of it----" + +"You'll do," cried Mr. Salper, while Edna and Ruth stared at him with +tear-reddened eyes. "Are you ready to go with me right away to the +station?" + +The boys nodded and the older man shrugged into his great coat, +reaching quickly for his cap. + +"Take care of your mother," he said to the girls. "I'll stop on my way +over to the hotel and send a nurse over for her. I hear there are two +of them there. Don't see why the physician there didn't send some one +to take his place if he had to leave." + +In a moment the radio boys found themselves once more in the freezing +air of the out-of-doors, being hurried along by the erratic Mr. +Salper. + +Poor Jimmy suffered on that forced march. Although he uttered no word +of protest, his face was purple and his breath came in little puffing +gasps before they had reached the hotel. + +Once there, they had a little respite, however, while Mr. Salper went +to arrange about having a nurse sent over to his wife. Jimmy waited in +the hotel lobby in a state nearing collapse while the other boys went +up to inquire once more about their friend, the operator. + +They found him no better--worse, if anything--and their faces were +very solemn when they rejoined Jimmy in the lobby. + +"Guess it will be nip and tuck if he gets through at all," said Bob, +anxiously. "I don't see why such hard luck had to pick him out for the +victim." + +"I suppose they'll appoint another operator right away," suggested +Herb. + +"I suppose so," agreed Jimmy. "But it will be hard to get any one for +a week or more on account of the heavy weather." + +"And in a week's time without communication with the outside world a +lot of Mr. Salper's money will probably have gone up in smoke," said +Joe. + +"Yes, it's us on the job all right," said Bob, looking a bit worried. +"I only hope we can live up to what's expected of us." + +"All right, boys," said Mr. Salper, on returning, in his eyes the +preoccupied look of the man of affairs. "If you can help me out of +this fix, I will surely be deeply in your debt." + +These genial words--almost the first that they had heard from the +self-absorbed man--warmed the boys' hearts and they resolved to do the +best they could for him, and, through him, for his daughters. + +When they reached the station they found it deserted save for one man +who sat at a desk, humped over in a dispirited fashion, reading a +magazine. + +At the entrance of Mr. Salper and the boys he looked up, then got up +and came over to them as though he were glad of their companionship. + +"How do you do, Mr. Salper?" he said, addressing the older man with +marked respect. "Is there anything I can do for you?" + +"Nothing, unless you can work this contrivance," returned Mr. Salper, +with a comprehensive wave of his hand toward the cluttered radio +table. + +"I'm sorry," said the other, a frown of anxiety lining his forehead. +"The operator is sick, and because of the heavy weather it is doubtful +if we shall be able to secure another one within the week." + +"A week!" cried Mr. Salper. "That amount of time, my friend, may very +easily spell ruin for me. It is necessary that I communicate with New +York immediately. Are you ready, boys?" + +The man looked with surprise, first at the radio boys and then back to +Mr. Salper. + +"Am I to understand----" he began, when Mr. Salper cut him short with +an imperative wave of the hand. + +"These boys," he said, "know something of radio. How much they know I +am about to find out. + +"Are you ready?" he asked, sharply, as the boys still hesitated. "A +delay of even a few minutes would be regrettable." + +The boys looked at each other, and since no one else made a move to +approach the apparatus, Bob saw that it was up to him. And right there +he realized the great difference that there is between theory and +practice. Of course they had had some practice in sending and they +were fairly familiar with the code, but never before had they been +called upon to make use of their knowledge in such a matter as this. + +Then too, Mr. Salper was not the kind of person to inspire +self-confidence. He was a driver, and it is hard to do good thinking +when one is being driven. + +However, having gone so far, there was no possibility of backing out +and with a show of confidence, Bob approached the apparatus. The man +who had addressed Mr. Salper regarded him with not a little distrust. +He had heard of the radio boys, as who at Mountain Pass had not, but +he certainly did not think them competent to send a message of any +importance. + +And at that moment, neither did Bob. + +"Will you send your message phone or code?" he asked, looking up at +Mr. Salper inquiringly. "We can do either here." + +Mr. Salper hesitated for a moment, then with a significant glance at +the other man, who was hovering curiously near, he snapped out, +"Code." + +"Do you know the letters of the station to be called?" asked Bob. + +The broker consulted a notebook which he took from his pocket. + +"Call HRSA," he returned. "That is our Stock Exchange station," he +explained. "They ought to be on the job while the Exchange is open. +They will relay a message to my brokers." + +Joe was standing beside Bob and saw that his chum's hand trembled +somewhat as he took hold of the ticker. + +"Don't get rattled, Bob," he whispered. "Take your time and don't let +him scare you. Remember, it's you that's doing the favor." + +Bob grinned, and then began sending out the call. Across the ether +traveled the letters HRSA and the call was presently caught up in New +York and then another message was relayed to the office of a +well-known brokerage firm. + +"Hey, Bill," called a well-dressed young man seated at a desk in the +far end of the office. "Here's WBZA calling us. These are the letters +of the station at Mountain Pass----" + +"Where the Honorable Mr. Gilbert Salper is taking his rest cure," +finished another man, flinging away his cigarette and coming to stand +beside his partner. "Do you suppose it's the old boy himself calling?" + +"We'll soon find out," returned the other, and without delay sent in a +message to the New York sending station. In a few seconds they were +being radioed into the ether. + +Bob's face beamed as he transcribed the dots and dashes into words. +The message read thus: + + "WBZA heard from. HRSA awaiting message." + +Mr. Salper, who had been striding up and down, hurried to Bob's side +in answer to the lad's hail. The other boys were peering eagerly over +Bob's shoulder. + +"I've reached HRSA and through them H. & D.," explained the young +operator proudly. "H. & D. are waiting for your message." + +"Fine! Fine!" cried Mr. Salper, and his face showed great enthusiasm. +"Those are my brokers, Hanson and Debbs. Got 'em right off the reel, +didn't you, boy? Great work! Can you get my message through at once?" + +"I don't know of anything to stop me," answered Bob. It seemed too +good to be true that he had picked up the right station so quickly. + +"Send this, then," Mr. Salper directed. And in a firm hand he wrote +down the following message: + + "Mohun is a crook and plots to ruin me. Find out + his scheme and check him. + + Gilbert Salper." + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +THE MIDNIGHT CALL + + +Skillfully Bob tapped out the message and in an inconceivably small +space of time it had been received by the station HRSA and relayed to +H. & D. The boys would have been interested if they could have known +the sensation caused by the few words. + +"Oh, boy!" cried Hanson, of the firm of Hanson and Debbs. "I've +suspected this slick fellow Mohun for a long time. Now with Salper's +authority we can go in and clean him out." + +"Salper wouldn't make an accusation of that sort," said Debbs +thoughtfully, "if there wasn't something in it. He's had some sort of +inside tip all right." + +"Well," returned the other briskly, "we'll let the old man know we're +on the job, and then get busy." + +Accordingly, a few minutes later Bob received and transcribed this +message: + + "Right. We'll have him inside of twenty-four hours." + +At the confidence contained in the message Mr. Salper straightened his +shoulders as if a great load had been lifted from them and held out a +friendly hand to Bob. + +"I can't tell you what you have done for me," he said, cordially. "Of +course I'm not safe yet from the crooked work of these men, but at +least Hanson and Debbs have been warned to look out. And that's +two-thirds of the battle." + +"I'm mighty glad we've been able to help," said Bob, adding earnestly: +"If there's anything else we can do please call on us. Mrs. +Salper----" + +He paused, for at mention of his wife's name the relief disappeared +from Mr. Salper's face and in its place was the old worried frown. + +"Yes--my wife," he muttered, and, without another word to the boys, +turned and stalked out of the room. The man, who had all this time +lingered near them, turned and went out after Mr. Salper and the boys +were left alone. + +"Say, you sure did turn the trick that time," said Herb admiringly. +"If they succeed in getting those crooks, Mr. Salper will love you all +the rest of his life." + +"It was more luck than anything else," Bob repeated. "Imagine getting +that station first throw out of the box." + +"Never mind," said Joe, adding truthfully: "No one else about this +place would have been able to do as much." + +They lingered for a while, talking over the exciting events of the day +and tinkering with the complicated apparatus. + +"Did you hear the latest prediction of Marconi?" asked Joe. "He says +that he has positive proof that in the near future a radio set will be +perfected which will send messages entirely around the world." + +"Yes," said Bob eagerly. "He even declares that we'll be able to put a +sending and receiving set side by side on the same table and receive +the messages that a moment before we've sent out." + +"It only takes a second of time too," said Herb. "Imagine sending +messages completely around the world at such speed. If Marconi didn't +say it could be done, I sure wouldn't believe it." + +"We'll be talking with Venus or Mars pretty soon," said Bob. "Marconi +says he has already received messages that don't come from anywhere on +the earth." + +Although they said little about it, the boys were elated at Bob's +success with the code, and it was surely a pleasant thought that they +had helped Mr. Salper, if only that they might make Mrs. Salper and +the girls happy. They had even, despite his usual gruffness, begun to +feel a sort of liking for Mr. Salper himself. + +During the long snow-bound afternoon they thought often of Mrs. Salper +and wondered if she were better. They wanted to inquire, but they were +afraid of making themselves a nuisance. + +Toward evening they strolled over to the hotel to ask after the +operator and found to their delight that he was better. The nurse, who +had become very friendly toward them, said she thought the trouble had +been checked in time and that the sick man's recovery, though it might +be slow, was sure. + +With hearts lightened on that score they went home. After dinner at +the hotel they spent some time tinkering with their set. One time they +noticed that in a vacuum tube was a pale blue glow, and Joe was at a +loss to know how to account for it. + +"We've got too high a voltage on the B battery," said Bob, after a +moment of study. + +"But how would that affect it?" asked Herb, interested. + +"Why," answered Bob, thoughtfully, "the high voltage causes a sort of +electrical breakdown of the gas in the tube and it's apt to affect the +receiving." + +"Say, Bob's getting to be a regular blue stocking," commented Jimmy +admiringly. "We'll have to get a move on to catch up with him." + +"You bet _you_ will," said Herb, with insulting emphasis on the +pronoun. However, Jimmy was too interested to notice. + +"Let's reduce the voltage, Bob," Joe was saying eagerly. "We'll test +out the theory." + +"It isn't a theory," replied Bob, as he reduced the voltage and the +blue glow disappeared as though by magic. "You can see for yourself +that it's a fact." + +This discussion led to others, and they sat for some time eagerly +experimenting with their set. It was just as well that they did for +they had just gone over to their cottage and thus were able to answer +quickly the imperative summons that came to them a few minutes later. + +In response to a knock on the door they found Mr. Salper standing +outside in the bitter night air looking so white and shaken that they +were startled. + +He came just inside the door and spoke in quick, jerky sentences like +a man talking in his sleep. + +"My wife is dangerously ill," he said. "She seems so much worse +tonight that there is imperative need of a doctor. There is no doctor +up here, and in this weather it would take too long to summon one. The +trained nurse who is with her suggests that we try to get in touch +with a doctor by radio and ask his advice. The idea is far-fetched, +but it seems about our only hope. If that fails----" he paused and Joe +broke in eagerly. + +"My father's a doctor, Mr. Salper," he said, and there was pride in +his voice. + +"A doctor, eh?" returned the broker quickly. "Oh, if only he were +here!" + +"I don't see how you are going to get hold of your father," broke in +Herb. "He's in Clintonia. Even if he got our message, through Doctor +Dale or somebody else with a receiving set, he couldn't send any +message here." + +"But he isn't in Clintonia!" shouted Joe, eagerly. "He went to Newark, +New Jersey, to attend some sort of medical convention and see if he +couldn't find out more about the epidemic that hit Clintonia." + +"Newark!" came simultaneously from Joe's chums. + +"Why, the big radio sending station is there!" exclaimed Bob. + +"Why can't you send a message to that station and ask them to get hold +of your father?" broke in Jimmy. + +"Maybe I could do it," announced Joe. And then he looked at Bob. +"Perhaps you had better do the sending. You'll probably have to call +them in code." + +Bob was willing, but first he went up to tell his mother and father +where he and his chums were going and beg them not to worry if they +did not come back soon. + +On the way to the radio station they stopped at the Salper bungalow, +where the calm-faced nurse was waiting for them. She had left the +Salper girls in charge of their mother, giving them minute +instructions as to what to do, and was going with Mr. Salper in the +hope that they might possibly secure medical advice by radio. + +The station was finally reached. It looked deserted and gloomy at that +hour of the night, and as Bob sent a call for help vibrating through +the ether he felt a creepy sensation, as though he were, in some way, +dealing with ghosts. + +There was just the slightest chance in the world that they would reach +Doctor Atwood. Just a chance, but if they did not take that chance +Mrs. Salper would die. + +For a long time they tried while the nurse sat quietly in the shadows +and Mr. Salper strode up and down, up and down, his face drawn and +white, his usually elastic step heavy and dragging. + +Again and again went out the call for the Newark station. Minute after +minute passed, and still Mr. Salper walked up and down uneasily. + +"I guess you'll have to give it up----" Herb was beginning when +suddenly Bob motioned for silence. The radio was speaking, and he was +taking down the message as well as he was able. + +"I've got Newark!" the young operator cried excitedly. "Now I'll put +in a call for your father, Joe. Where is he staying?" + +"At the Robert Treat Hotel." + +Once more Bob went to work rather excitedly and even a little +clumsily, yet his message went through. In reply he received another, +stating that Dr. Atwood had been called by telephone and would be at +the sending station inside of fifteen minutes. + +"And the best of it is, he is to radiophone," added Bob to Joe. "So +you can talk to him direct." + +After that the minutes passed slowly, both for Mr. Salper and the +boys. They thought the end of the wait would never come. But at last +the words so eagerly awaited reached them. + +There was no mistaking it, even though static interfered and the +tuning was not good--Dr. Atwood's voice, cheery, reassuring, helpful. +In his joy at the sound of it, Joe shouted aloud. + +"Hello, WBZA," came the voice. "If this is Joe talking, give me the +high sign, my boy." + +During the message Bob had tuned in the right frequency and, with +static eliminated one might have thought the speaker was in the same +room. + +Then there followed a battle with death that the boys would remember +as long as they lived. As soon as Doctor Atwood was made to understand +the nature of the service asked of him, he became immediately his +brisk, professional self. + +The nurse, instantly alert herself, gave him a description of the case +and it was wonderful as soon as the connection was switched off to +hear his kindly voice responding, giving full directions for the care +of the patient. He declared that he would be on call all during the +night and requested that some one call him every hour--oftener, if it +became necessary--to report the progress of the patient. + +The nurse hurried off, accompanied by Mr. Salper, and for the rest of +the night the boys kept busy, marking a trail between the Salper +cottage and the radio station, taking reports from the nurse and +carrying directions from Doctor Atwood. + +It seemed strange and weird, yet wonderful and soul-stirring, this +tending of a patient by a doctor many miles away. Once, during the +night, hope almost failed. Mrs. Salper scarcely breathed and lay so +still that Edna and Ruth were sure the end had come. They clung to +each other sobbing, while Mr. Salper strode up and down, up and down +the room as though if he stopped he would die too. + +Then came another message from Doctor Atwood. The nurse followed his +directions and once more hope came back to the Salper home. The +patient rallied, stirred, and for that time at least, the danger was +past. + +So dawn came at last and Joe and the two younger boys went back to +their cottage to try to catch a few hours of sleep. Bob remained at +the station, declaring that he felt not at all tired and as soon as +the other boys had rested they could come to his relief. + +A hard vigil that for Bob. In spite of all he could do, his head would +nod and his heavy eyelids close, to be jerked open next moment by the +arrival of some one from the Salper home or a message from Doctor +Atwood. + +News of the struggle had spread all over Mountain Pass, and people +watched with admiration and interest the brave fight that was being +made for a woman's life. And sometimes it seemed that, despite all +their efforts, the struggle must end in failure. + +All that day the battle waged and the next night--the boys taking +turns at the radio board, untiring in their determination not to lose. +And Doctor Atwood was as determined as they. + +And then, on the morning of the second day came news that the patient +had passed the much-dreaded crisis and, with the most careful nursing, +was sure to recover. + +"She'll be all right now," came Doctor Atwood's cheery voice. "It's +been a hard pull, but she's past the danger point now. Keep in touch +with me, boys, so that, in case of a relapse, I can tell you what to +do." + +Joe turned to the boys with the light of pride and affection in his +eyes. + +"That's some dad I've got!" he said. + +Later, when the boys walked over to the Salper home to offer +congratulations, the girls received them with literally open arms. + +"You've saved mother's life!" cried Ruth, with a catch in her voice. + +"And we love you for it!" added Edna gratefully. "You just wait till +mother knows!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +A PLOT THAT WENT WRONG + + +"So far, so good," breathed Bob happily, as the boys were discussing +the news that Mrs. Salper had passed the crisis and was now probably +on the road to recovery. "That's one thing we can set down to the +credit of radio." + +"And it's not the only thing of the same sort," put in Joe. "Do you +remember what Mr. Brandon told us of that ship with thirty men and no +doctor on board, where twenty-four of the men were down with a +mysterious disease? The captain got a message by wireless to shore +telling of his plight, and one of the best doctors in New York City +went to the radio station there and got in touch with the captain. He +talked to him by radio for hours, had him describe just the symptoms, +and then told the captain just what to do. A couple of days later the +captain wirelessed in that he had followed directions and that all of +the men had recovered and were fit for duty." + +"Yes," said Herb, "and about that other case, too, where a man had an +infected hand and they were afraid he was going to have lockjaw. A +doctor on land told the captain how to treat it and the man got along +all right." + +"Trust radio, and you won't go wrong," summed up Bob. "On land and sea +it's right on the job." + +"I only hope it will be as effective in saving Mr. Salper's money," +observed Joe. + +"I think very likely it will," replied Bob. "He's about as keen as +they make them, and now that he knows what those rascals are plotting +against him it's dollars to doughnuts that he'll get the best of them. +Their only chance was in taking him by surprise and putting over that +deal while his back was turned. And now that he's got in touch with +his brokers I guess the game is up." + +"I wonder how long it will be before we know how it turned out," +conjectured Herb. + +"Oh, probably not more than two or three days," replied Bob. "Things +move pretty fast in Wall Street when a fight is on for control." + +"I hope he comes out on top," observed Joe. "He's a good deal of a +crab, and I was mighty sore at him when he landed on us the way he did +the day we were coming up here. Acted as though he thought we ought to +be shot at sunrise. But since that time I've seen a good deal about +him to like and I've come to the conclusion that he's a regular fellow +after all." + +"You can tell by the fondness that the girls have for him that he +can't be so bad," said Bob. "That's a pretty good sign to go by. They +know him better than any one else except his wife, and she seems to +think, too, that the sun rises and sets in him." + +"I want him to come out ahead not only for his own sake but because I +want to see that fellow Mohun downed," put in Jimmy. "I'm sore at him +right down to the ground. I don't like his eyes, I don't like his +voice, I don't like his teeth, I don't like his character----" + +"Outside of that, though, I suppose he's all right," suggested Joe, +grinning. "He seems to be just about as popular with you as a +rattlesnake." + +"That's what he reminds me of, anyway," admitted Jimmy. + +"Talking of rattlesnakes," put in Herb, "here come three of them now," +and he indicated Buck Looker, who, with Lutz and Mooney, was coming +along the road. For some time now the Looker crowd had kept out of the +radio boys' way. + +"I wonder what trick they're up to now," said Bob, as he saw that the +bunch had their heads together in earnest conversation. + +"No knowing," answered Joe; "but it's a safe bet that it's something +cheap and low down. Buck would think the day was wasted if he didn't +have something of the kind on hand." + +The groups passed each other without speaking, though Buck darted a +look at Bob in passing that had in it the usual malignance, mingled +with a touch of triumph. + +"Did you see that look?" queried Herb, with interest. "Seemed as if he +had something up his sleeve." + +"I know what it meant well enough," answered Bob, with a shade of +soberness. "My dad was telling me that he'd been notified that a suit +had been started against him and the fathers of you other fellows by +Mr. Looker to recover the value of the cottage that he said we set on +fire." + +"That's all bunk!" cried Herb indignantly. "He couldn't prove it in a +hundred years. A lawsuit, eh? Huh!" + +"Dad doesn't think Looker has much of a case," replied Bob. "Still, he +says that you can never tell what a man like Looker and the kind of +lawyer he would hire may do. Of course we can't get away from the fact +that we were in the house the day before it burned, and that looks +bad. We know we didn't set it on fire, but nobody else knows we +didn't. At any rate, even if Looker loses his case, our folks will +have to hire lawyers and lose a lot of time in attending court, so +that all in all it makes a pretty bad mess." + +"So that's what Buck was looking so tickled about!" exclaimed Joe. +"I'd like to wipe that look off his face." + +"It might be a little satisfaction," laughed Bob. "But it wouldn't +help us win the lawsuit." + +By this time their walk had taken them near the vicinity of the radio +station; and as they approached it they caught sight of Mr. Salper +pacing back and forth in a state of impatience. + +"Seems to be stirred up about something," remarked Joe. + +"Did you ever see him when he wasn't?" laughed Jimmy. + +At this moment Mr. Salper caught sight of the boys and came hastily +toward them. + +"I want some messages sent and taken," he said, in his usual abrupt +way, though there was none of the sharpness in his voice that had +usually been in evidence when he spoke to them. "I wonder if you could +do this for me," and his eyes rested inquiringly upon Bob. + +"I'll do my best, Mr. Salper," replied the latter, and the whole group +went into the wireless room. + +"I suppose you have permission to use this plant?" came from Joe. + +"Oh, yes. If it hadn't been for that I couldn't have used it as I did +those other times," answered the broker. + +Bob seated himself at the sending key and, following the financier's +directions, got in touch with the Wall Street house that had figured +in the previous communications. + +For an hour or more there was an interchange of messages that were +mostly nonunderstandable to Bob and his friends who listened with the +keenest interest. There was talk of stocks and bonds and of +consolidations and controls and proxies and a host of other things +that bore on financial deals. + +At the beginning, Mr. Salper sat with furrowed brows and an air of +intense concentration. But as the answers came in to his various +inquiries, his brow gradually cleared and he relaxed somewhat in his +chair. + +Finally there came an answer that stirred him mightily. He jumped to +his feet and slapped his thigh. + +"I've got him!" he cried jubilantly. "By Jove, I've got him!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +SOLVING THE MYSTERY + + +Just whom Mr. Salper had got the radio boys could not tell with +certainty, but they had a shrewd suspicion that Mohun was the hapless +individual. + +The financier walked happily and springily about the office, chuckling +to himself, and Jimmy declared afterward that if they had not been +there he would have danced a jig. + +At last, when he had given sufficient vent to his elation, Mr. Salper +turned to Bob. + +"I'm sure I can't tell you how I thank you," he declared, with a +cordiality and heartiness that they had never yet seen in him. "This +matter was one of the most important that has come to me in the whole +course of my life. Hundreds of thousands of dollars were involved in +it, and I'd surely have lost out if I hadn't had your services in this +extremity. And now I'm going to prove my gratitude. A check--" + +"No, thank you, Mr. Salper," interrupted Bob hastily. "We don't want +money for the service we've been to you. It's been exciting and +interesting work for us, and I, at least, have been more than paid in +the experience I've got through sending." + +"Well then I'm going to get you the finest radio set that money can +buy," persisted Mr. Salper. + +"Not even that, thank you," returned Bob, smiling. "It's awfully good +of you, and we appreciate it, but we've learned more of radio by +building our own sets than we possibly could have done in any other +way. If you want to send a check to the Red Cross or some other +society of the kind, it would suit us better than anything else." + +"You're a stubborn young rascal," said Mr. Salper, with a smile, "and +I suppose I'll have to let you have your way. But just bear in mind +that you boys have a friend in me for life, and if I can ever be of +service to any of you in business or anything else, let me know and +I'll be only too glad to do it." + +He bade them good-by and went off briskly toward his bungalow to tell +his family of the news that had lifted such a heavy burden from his +brain and heart. + +The third day after the episode at the radio station the radio boys +had gone further afield than usual and came upon a little shack that +had evidently been used by workmen as a place for storing their tools. +It was little more than a shed, and the boys, bestowing on it only a +casual glance, had come nearly abreast of it when Bob, who was +slightly in advance, heard a voice that he recognized as that of Buck +Looker. + +He stopped dead in his tracks, and his companions did the same as he +held up his hand in warning. + +"We certainly did put it over on those boobs all right," Buck was +saying, and the remark was followed by laughs of satisfaction. + +"Yes, but we're not yet out of the woods," came the voice of Carl +Lutz, with a touch of uneasiness in the tone. "Suppose when they put +us on the stand to testify that we found Bob Layton and the other +fellows in the cottage the evening before it burned, their lawyer asks +us if we were in it too?" + +"Well, let them ask," replied Buck. "All we'll have to do is to deny +it. We know they were in it. They don't know we were in it. Who knows +that we slipped in later and sat there until nearly midnight smoking +cigarettes?" + +With a bound Bob was at the door of the shack. + +"I know it!" he cried. "I didn't know it till just this minute, but +now I know it by your own confession." + +"We all heard it," echoed Joe, as he, with Herb and Jimmy, followed +Bob into the shack. + +Consternation and conscious guilt was written on every one of the +three faces. + +Buck was the first of the cronies to recover some measure of +self-possession. + +"Think you've put something over, don't you?" he sneered. "Well, +you've got another think coming to you. This won't do you a bit of +good in court. I'll simply swear that I didn't say anything of the +kind and that you've made up the story out of whole cloth. It'll be +simply my word against yours, and you'd be interested witnesses trying +to help your fathers out by cooking up this story. So what are you +going to do about it?" + +"I'll show you what we're going to do about it!" cried Joe, starting +forward. + +But Bob stopped him. + +"Wait a minute, Joe," he said. Then he turned to Buck. "Do you mean to +say," he demanded, "that you'd take a solemn oath in court to tell the +truth, and then go on the stand and swear to a downright lie?" + +The contempt in his tone stung Buck into fury. + +"You can put it any way you like," he shouted. "I'm simply not going +to let you get the best of me. Who cares for the old confession as you +call it? You can have as many of those as you like and it won't do you +any good. Here's another one now for good measure. We were in the +house late that night. We were smoking cigarettes. Probably that's +what caused the fire to break out later. I tell you these things just +because it won't do you any good. In court I'll deny that I ever said +them. You'll say I did. But the court will know that you have as much +interest in lying as I have, and it'll just be a standoff. You'd have +to have a disinterested witness, and that you haven't got." + +"Oh, yes, they have," came a voice from the doorway, and Mr. Salper +stepped into the shack. + +An exclamation of delight broke from the lips of the radio boys, while +Buck and his cronies slunk back in terror and confusion. + +"I was out taking a stroll," explained Mr. Salper, "and as I heard +loud voices coming from the shack I stepped up to see what was the +matter. I was just in time to hear the full confession of this +estimable young man"--here he turned a withering glance on Buck--"and +while I'm here, I guess I'll take it down." + +He drew from his pocket a notebook and a fountain pen and wrote +rapidly, while Buck and his companions looked at each other like so +many trapped animals. + +In a few minutes Mr. Salper had finished. Then he read in a clear +voice just what he had written. It was a complete confession similar +to that which Buck had made, with date and place affixed. He handed +this over to Buck with the fountain pen, with a crisp demand that he +sign it. + +Buck hesitated as long as he dared, but with those keen eyes used to +command fixed upon him from beneath Mr. Salper's beetling brows, he +finally signed his name, and Lutz and Mooney shamefacedly followed +suit. + +"I guess that will settle the law case," Mr. Salper remarked, with a +smile, as he handed the precious document to Bob, who folded it +carefully and put it in his breast pocket. "Now perhaps we would +better go and leave these worthy young gentlemen to their meditations. +I don't think they'll be especially pleasant ones." + +The radio boys left the shack, followed by the black looks of the +discomfited conspirators. + +"You certainly came along in the nick of time, Mr. Salper," said Bob. +"We're very grateful to you." + +"I'm glad if I've been able to be of service to you," replied Mr. +Salper. "It's only paying back in small measure what you've done for +me. The bulk of the obligation is still on my side." + +It was a happy group of radio boys that returned to the Mountain Rest +Hotel that afternoon. + +"Adventures have surely crowded in on us lately," remarked Bob. + +"More than they ever will again," prophesied Joe. + +But that he had not foretold the future correctly will be seen by +those who read the following volume of this series, entitled: "The +Radio Boys Trailing a Voice; Or, Solving a Wireless Mystery." + +That very night they sent the news of the confession to Dr. Atwood +with the request that he would communicate the tidings to the fathers +of the rest of the boys. The lawsuit, of course, was dropped at once, +and Buck and his cronies slunk home in disgrace. + +"Radio is lots of work, but it's also lots of fun," remarked Joe that +night, as they sat late reviewing the events of the day. + +"Radio," repeated Bob. "It's more than fun. It's excitement. It's +romance. It's adventure. It's life!" + +THE END + + + + +_This Isn't All!_ + +Would you like to know what became of the good friends you have made +in this book? + +Would you like to read other stories continuing their adventures and +experiences, or other books quite as entertaining by the same author? + +On the _reverse side_ of the wrapper which comes with this book, you +will find a wonderful list of stories which you can buy at the same +store where you got this book. + +_Don't throw away the Wrapper_ + +_Use it as a handy catalog of the books you want some day to have. But +in case you do mislay it, write to the Publishers for a complete +catalog._ + + + + +THE RADIO BOYS SERIES + +(Trademark Registered) + +By ALLEN CHAPMAN + +Author of the "Railroad Series," Etc. + +Individual Colored Wrappers. Illustrated. + +Every Volume Complete in Itself. + +A new series for boys giving full details of radio work, both in +sending and receiving--telling how small and large amateur sets can be +made and operated, and how some boys got a lot of fun and adventure +out of what they did. Each volume from first to last is so thoroughly +fascinating, so strictly up-to-date and accurate, we feel sure all +lads will peruse them with great delight. + +Each volume has a Foreword by Jack Binns, the well-known radio expert. + + THE RADIO BOYS' FIRST WIRELESS + THE RADIO BOYS AT OCEAN POINT + THE RADIO BOYS AT THE SENDING STATION + THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS + THE RADIO BOYS TRAILING A VOICE + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE FOREST RANGERS + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE ICEBERG PATROL + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE FLOOD FIGHTERS + THE RADIO BOYS ON SIGNAL ISLAND + THE RADIO BOYS IN GOLD VALLEY + +GROSSET & DUNLAP, _Publishers_, NEW YORK + + + + +THE DON STURDY SERIES + +By VICTOR APPLETON + +Individual Colored Wrappers and Text Illustrations by + +WALTER S. ROGERS + +Every Volume Complete in Itself. + +In company with his uncles, one a mighty hunter and the other a noted +scientist, Don Sturdy travels far and wide, gaining much useful +knowledge and meeting many thrilling adventures. + +DON STURDY ON THE DESERT OF MYSTERY; + +An engrossing tale of the Sahara Desert, of encounters with wild +animals and crafty Arabs. + +DON STURDY WITH THE BIG SNAKE HUNTERS; + +Don's uncle, the hunter, took an order for some of the biggest snakes +to be found in South America--to be delivered alive! + +DON STURDY IN THE TOMBS OF GOLD; + +A fascinating tale of exploration and adventure in the Valley of Kings +in Egypt. + +DON STURDY ACROSS THE NORTH POLE; + +A great polar blizzard nearly wrecks the airship of the explorers. + +DON STURDY IN THE LAND OF VOLCANOES; + +An absorbing tale of adventures among the volcanoes of Alaska. + +DON STURDY IN THE PORT OF LOST SHIPS; + +This story is just full of exciting and fearful experiences on the +sea. + +DON STURDY AMONG THE GORILLAS; + +A thrilling story of adventure in darkest Africa. Don is carried over +a mighty waterfall into the heart of gorilla land. + +GROSSET & DUNLAP, _Publishers_, NEW YORK + + + + +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES + +By VICTOR APPLETON + +Uniform Style of Binding. Individual Colored Wrappers. + +Every Volume Complete in Itself. + +Every boy possesses some form of inventive genius. Tom Swift is a +bright, ingenious boy and his inventions and adventures make the most +interesting kind of reading. + + TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE + TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT + TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP + TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT + TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT + TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE + TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS + TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE + TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER + TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE + TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD + TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER + TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY + TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA + TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT + TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON + TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE + TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP + TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL + TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS + TOM SWIFT AND HIS WAR TANK + TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR SCOUT + TOM SWIFT AND HIS UNDERSEA SEARCH + TOM SWIFT AMONG THE FIRE FIGHTERS + TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE + TOM SWIFT AND HIS FLYING BOAT + TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT OIL GUSHER + TOM SWIFT AND HIS CHEST OF SECRETS + TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRLINE EXPRESS + +Grosset & Dunlap, Publishers, New York + + + + +THE RIDDLE CLUB BOOKS + +By ALICE DALE HARDY + +Individual Colored Wrappers. Attractively Illustrated. + +Every Volume Complete in Itself. + +Here is as ingenious a series of books for little folks as has ever +appeared since "Alice in Wonderland." The idea of the Riddle books is +a little group of children--three girls and three boys decide to form +a riddle club. Each book is full of the adventures and doings of these +six youngsters, but as an added attraction each book is filled with a +lot of the best riddles you ever heard. + +THE RIDDLE CLUB AT HOME + +An absorbing tale that all boys and girls will enjoy reading. How the +members of the club fixed up a clubroom in the Larue barn, and how +they, later on, helped solve a most mysterious happening, and how one +of the members won a valuable prize, is told in a manner to please +every young reader. + +THE RIDDLE CLUB IN CAMP + +The club members went into camp on the edge of a beautiful lake. Here +they had rousing good times swimming, boating and around the campfire. +They fell in with a mysterious old man known as The Hermit of Triangle +Island. Nobody knew his real name or where he came from until the +propounding of a riddle solved these perplexing questions. + +THE RIDDLE CLUB THROUGH THE HOLIDAYS + +This volume takes in a great number of winter sports, including +skating and sledding and the building of a huge snowman. It also gives +the particulars of how the club treasurer lost the dues entrusted to +his care and what the melting of the great snowman revealed. + +THE RIDDLE CLUB AT SUNRISE BEACH + +This volume tells how the club journeyed to the seashore and how they +not only kept up their riddles but likewise had good times on the sand +and on the water. Once they got lost in a fog and are marooned on an +island. Here they made a discovery that greatly pleased the folks at +home. + +GROSSET & DUNLAP, Publishers, NEW YORK + + + + +FOOTBALL AND BASEBALL STORIES + +Durably Bound. Illustrated. Colored Wrappers. + +Every Volume Complete in Itself. + +The Ralph Henry Barbour Books for Boys + +In these up-to-the-minute, spirited genuine stories of boy life there +is something which will appeal to every boy with the love of +manliness, cleanness and sportsmanship in his heart. + + LEFT END EDWARDS + LEFT TACKLE THAYER + LEFT GUARD GILBERT + CENTER RUSH ROWLAND + FULLBACK FOSTER + LEFT HALF HARMON + RIGHT END EMERSON + RIGHT GUARD GRANT + QUARTERBACK BATES + RIGHT TACKLE TODD + RIGHT HALF HOLLINS + +The Christy Mathewson Books for Boys + +Every boy wants to know how to play ball in the fairest and squarest +way. These books about boys and baseball are full of wholesome and +manly interest and information. + + PITCHER POLLOCK + CATCHER CRAIG + FIRST BASE FAULKNER + SECOND BASE SLOAN + PITCHING IN A PINCH + +THIRD BASE THATCHER, By Everett Scott + +GROSSET & DUNLAP, _Publishers_, NEW YORK + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass, by Allen Chapman + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS *** + +***** This file should be named 38453-8.txt or 38453-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/8/4/5/38453/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/38453-8.zip b/38453-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8aa7fb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/38453-8.zip diff --git a/38453-h.zip b/38453-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5034dce --- /dev/null +++ b/38453-h.zip diff --git a/38453-h/38453-h.htm b/38453-h/38453-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e81c783 --- /dev/null +++ b/38453-h/38453-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7746 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> +<head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"/> + <meta name="generator" content="pph (1.16)"/> + <meta name="title" content="The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass"/> + <meta name="author" content="Allen Chapman"/> + <meta name="date" content="1922"/> + <title>The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass</title> + <style type="text/css"> + p.center {text-align:center} + p.caption {text-align:center; margin-left:20%; margin-right:20%;} + h2.chapter {font-size:1.2em; text-align:center; margin: 2em auto 1em auto; font-weight:normal} + div.bq {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%;} + </style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass, by Allen Chapman + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass + The Midnight Call for Assistance + +Author: Allen Chapman + +Release Date: January 1, 2012 [EBook #38453] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + +</pre> + +<div style='text-align:center'> +<img id='ilink01' src='images/illus-001.jpg' alt=''/> +<p class='caption'>“LOOK! OUR AERIAL IS STILL UPâ€</p> +</div> +<hr style='border:none; border-bottom:1px solid silver; width:70%; margin:2em auto' /> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'><i>THE RADIO BOYS SERIES</i></p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:0.8em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>(Trademark Registered)</p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.5em;margin-top:1em;margin-bottom:0;'>THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:2em;margin-bottom:0;'>OR</p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:2em;margin-bottom:0;'>THE MIDNIGHT CALL FOR ASSISTANCE</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>BY ALLEN CHAPMAN</p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:0.8em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>AUTHOR OF</p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:0.8em;margin-top:0em;margin-bottom:0em;'>THE RADIO BOYS’ FIRST WIRELESS</p> +<p class='center' style='font-size:0.8em;margin-top:0em;margin-bottom:0em;'>THE RADIO BOYS AT OCEAN POINT</p> +<p class='center' style='font-size:0.8em;margin-top:0em;margin-bottom:0em;'>RALPH OF THE ROUNDHOUSE</p> +<p class='center' style='font-size:0.8em;margin-top:0em;margin-bottom:0em;'>RALPH THE TRAIN DESPATCHER, ETC.</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:2em;margin-bottom:0;'>WITH FORWARD BY</p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>JACK BINNS</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:2em;margin-bottom:0;'><i>ILLUSTRATED</i></p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:2em;margin-bottom:0;'>NEW YORK</p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0em;margin-bottom:0;'>GROSSET & DUNLAP</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>PUBLISHERS</p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:0.8em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>Made in the United States of America</p> +<hr style='border:none; border-bottom:1px solid silver; width:70%; margin:2em auto' /> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>BOOKS FOR BOYS</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>By Allen Chapman</span></p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:0.8em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>12mo. Cloth. Illustrated.</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>THE RADIO BOYS SERIES</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>(Trademark Registered)</p> + +<table style='margin:auto' summary=''> +<tr><td> +THE RADIO BOYS’ FIRST WIRELESS<br/> + Or Winning the Ferberton Prize<br/> +<br/> +THE RADIO BOYS AT OCEAN POINT<br/> + Or The Message that Saved the Ship<br/> +<br/> +THE RADIO BOYS AT THE SENDING STATION<br/> + Or Making Good in the Wireless Room<br/> +<br/> +THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS<br/> + Or The Midnight Call for Assistance<br/> +<br/> +THE RADIO BOYS TRAILING A VOICE<br/> + Or Solving a Wireless Mystery<br/> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>THE RAILROAD SERIES</p> + +<table style='margin:auto' summary=''> +<tr><td> +RALPH OF THE ROUNDHOUSE<br/> + Or Bound to Become a Railroad Man<br/> +<br/> +RALPH IN THE SWITCH TOWER<br/> + Or Clearing the Track<br/> +<br/> +RALPH ON THE ENGINE<br/> + Or The Young Fireman of the Limited Mail<br/> +<br/> +RALPH ON THE OVERLAND EXPRESS<br/> + Or The Trials and Triumphs of a Young Engineer<br/> +<br/> +RALPH THE TRAIN DESPATCHER<br/> + Or The Mystery of the Pay Car<br/> +<br/> +RALPH ON THE ARMY TRAIN<br/> + Or The Young Railroader’s Most Daring Exploit<br/> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>GROSSET & DUNLAP, Publishers, New York</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Copyright, 1922, by</span></p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>GROSSET & DUNLAP</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'><i>The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass</i></p> +<hr style='border:none; border-bottom:1px solid silver; width:70%; margin:2em auto' /> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>FOREWORD</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>By Jack Binns</span></p> + +<div class='bq'> +<p>In the first chapter of this volume there appears a statement +by “Bob,†one of the Radio Boys, as follows: “Marconi is one +of those fellows that can never rest satisfied with what’s +been done up to date.â€</p> + +<p>Perhaps no more concise summary of the driving force back of +the men responsible for the tremendous development of radio +could be made. It is just that refusal to be satisfied with +what has been accomplished that has made wireless the greatest +wonder development in the history of mankind.</p> +</div> + +<div class='bq'> +<p>Although the radio boys in this case are but creatures of the +author’s imagination, nevertheless they are typical of all the +men who have taken part in bringing radio to its present +stage. Even Marconi himself likes to take pride in the +assertion that he too was at one time an amateur, because he +insists that during his early experiments he was only a boy +amateur tinkering with a little known subject.</p> +</div> + +<div class='bq'> +<p>There is undoubtedly a great deal of truth in his claim, +because the experiments that led to his success were made +while he was a youth studying at the Bologna University in +Italy.</p> +</div> + +<div class='bq'> +<p>What is true of Marconi is equally true of all the others. We +have only to think of a name prominent in the field of wireless, +and then trace back the history of the man who bears it, +and you will come to an enthusiastic amateur.</p> +</div> + +<div class='bq'> +<p>There is another fascinating thing about wireless, and it is +the fact that no matter how much work one may really expend in +tinkering with it, and no matter how valuable the results, it +does not seem like real work. This is aptly phrased by Joe in +the book who says:</p> +</div> + +<div class='bq'> +<p>“I’d like to take it up as a regular profession. Think of what +it must be for fellows like Armstrong and Edison, and De +Forest and Marconi. I’ll bet they don’t think it’s work.â€</p> +</div> + +<div class='bq'> +<p>There is no doubt that Joe wins his bet.</p> +</div> + +<div class='bq'> +<p style='text-align:right; margin:0 0ex 0 auto'>Jack Binns</p> +</div> +<hr style='border:none; border-bottom:1px solid silver; width:70%; margin:2em auto' /> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>CONTENTS</p> + +<table id='toc' style='margin:auto' summary='TOC'> +<tr><td> + <a href='#clink01'>I—The Bear Pursues</a><br/> + <a href='#clink02'>II—An Exciting Chase</a><br/> + <a href='#clink03'>III—An Amazing Discovery</a><br/> + <a href='#clink04'>IV—The Bully Appears</a><br/> + <a href='#clink05'>V—A Startling Accusation</a><br/> + <a href='#clink06'>VI—The Burned Cottage</a><br/> + <a href='#clink07'>VII—Radio Wonders</a><br/> + <a href='#clink08'>VIII—A Close Shave</a><br/> + <a href='#clink09'>IX—Bucking the Drifts</a><br/> + <a href='#clink10'>X—Convincing a Skeptic</a><br/> + <a href='#clink11'>XI—A Mountain Radio Station</a><br/> + <a href='#clink12'>XII—The Marvelous Science</a><br/> + <a href='#clink13'>XIII—Pressed into Service</a><br/> + <a href='#clink14'>XIV—Scoring a Triumph</a><br/> + <a href='#clink15'>XV—The Snowslide</a><br/> + <a href='#clink16'>XVI—The Modern Miracle</a><br/> + <a href='#clink17'>XVII—Thrashing a Bully</a><br/> + <a href='#clink18'>XVIII—A Nest of Conspirators</a><br/> + <a href='#clink19'>XIX—On Guard</a><br/> + <a href='#clink20'>XX—Broken Wires</a><br/> + <a href='#clink21'>XXI—A Sudden Inspiration</a><br/> + <a href='#clink22'>XXII—Putting It Through</a><br/> + <a href='#clink23'>XXIII—The Midnight Call</a><br/> + <a href='#clink24'>XXIV—A Plot That Went Wrong</a><br/> + <a href='#clink25'>XXV—Solving the Mystery</a><br/> +</td></tr> +</table> +<hr style='border:none; border-bottom:1px solid silver; width:70%; margin:2em auto' /> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink01'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER I—THE BEAR PURSUES</a></h2> + +<p>“Nothing to do till tomorrow!†sang out +Bob Layton, as he came out of high school at +Clintonia on Friday afternoon, his books slung +over his shoulder, and bounded down the steps +three at a time.</p> + +<p>“And not much to do then, except just what +we want to,†chimed in Joe Atwood, throwing his +cap into the air and catching it deftly as it came +down.</p> + +<p>“You fellows do just love to work, don’t you?†+put in Herb Fennington, with an air of self-righteousness +that was belied by the merry +twinkle in his eyes.</p> + +<p>“Oh, we just dote on it,†replied Bob.</p> + +<p>“Work is our middle name,†asserted Joe. “In +fact we lie awake nights trying to conjure up +something to do.â€</p> + +<p>“Regular pair of Work Hard twins—I don’t +think,†declared Jimmy Plummer. “Now as for +me——â€</p> + +<p>“Yes?†said Herb, with an assumption of +polite interest.</p> + +<p>“As for me,†repeated Jimmy, not at all +daunted by the incredulity in Herb’s tone, “I’ve +been working like a horse all this season. A +little more and I’ll be only skin and bone.â€</p> + +<p>As Jimmy was by all odds the fattest boy in +school, this assertion was greeted by a roar of +laughter.</p> + +<p>“Now I know why you look like a string bean,†+chuckled Joe.</p> + +<p>“That explains why his clothes hang on him +so loosely,†laughed Bob, pointing to Jimmy’s +trousers which were so filled out that they resembled +tights. “Jimmy, you may be an unconscious +humorist, but you’re a humorist just the +same.â€</p> + +<p>Jimmy glared at his tormentors and tried to +look wan and haggard, but the attempt was not a +pronounced success.</p> + +<p>“All the same,†he protested, “Doc. Preston +has been rushing us like the old Harry all this +fall, and what with school work and home work +and radio work——â€</p> + +<p>“Radio!†interrupted Bob. “You don’t call +that work, do you? Why it’s fun, the greatest +fun in the world.â€</p> + +<p>“You bet it is,†chimed in Joe enthusiastically. +“We never knew what real fun was until we took +it up. Look at the adventures it’s brought us. +If it hadn’t been for radio, we wouldn’t have won +those Ferberton prizes; we wouldn’t have run +down Dan Cassey and made him give back the +mortgage he was trying to cheat Miss Berwick +out of; and we wouldn’t have got back the money +he nearly got away with when he knocked out +Brandon Harvey.â€</p> + +<p>“Right you are,†agreed Bob. “And probably +that boat our folks were on would have gone +down with all on board if it hadn’t been for the +radio message that brought help to it. And see +the good it did for Larry and the experience we +had in sending out from the broadcasting station +in Newark!â€</p> + +<p>“I tell you, fellows, there’s nothing like radio +in the universe!†agreed Jimmy.</p> + +<p>“I’d like to take it up as a regular profession,†+said Joe. “Think of what it must be for fellows +like Armstrong and Edison and De Forest and +Marconi. I’ll bet they don’t think it’s work. +They’re eager to get at it in the morning and +sorry to knock off at night. There’s no drudgery +in a profession like that.â€</p> + +<p>“Speaking of Marconi,†remarked Herb, “I +see that he’s just come over to America again on +that yacht of his where he thought he heard +signals that might have been from Mars. I wonder +if he’s heard any more of them.â€</p> + +<p>“I don’t know,†replied Bob thoughtfully. +“Though I’ve become so used to what seem to be +almost miracles that I’m prepared for almost anything. +At any rate, the only thing one can do +nowadays is to keep an open mind and not say +beforehand that anything is impossible. It +would be great, wouldn’t it, if we could get in +touch with another planet? And if we could +with one, there doesn’t seem to be any reason why +we couldn’t with all, that is if there’s life and intelligence +on them. But after all, at present +that’s only speculation. What interests me more +just now is the discovery that Marconi is said to +have made by which he is able to send out radio +waves in one given direction.â€</p> + +<p>“I hadn’t heard of that,†remarked Joe. “I +thought they spread out equally in all directions +and that anybody who had a receiving set could +take them.â€</p> + +<p>“So they have up to now,†replied Bob. “But +Marconi’s one of those fellows that can never rest +satisfied with what’s been done up to date. +That’s what makes him great. I’m not exactly +clear about this new idea of his, but the gist of it +is that he throws a radio wave in a certain direction, +much as a mirror throws a ray of light. He +uses a reflector apparatus and the wave is caught +at the receiving end on a horizontal metal standard. +With a wave of only three and one half +meters he has thrown a shaft nearly a hundred +miles in just the direction he wanted it to go. +The article I read said that he had some sort of +semicircular reflector covered with wires that resembled +a dish cut in half. When the open side +is turned toward the receiving station he wants to +reach, the signals are heard loud and clear. +When the open part is turned away, the signals +can’t be heard. The whole idea is concentration. +Just what a burning glass does with the rays of +the sun, his device does with the radio waves. +Marconi’s a wizard, and that’s all there is about +it. There’s no knowing what he may do next. +But you can be sure that it’ll be something new +and valuable.â€</p> + +<p>“He’s a wonder,†agreed Joe heartily. “And +if he’s the ‘father of wireless,’ we’ve got to admit +that he has a good healthy baby. I’m going +to try to get on friendly terms with that baby.â€</p> + +<p>“We’ve already been introduced to it, if we +haven’t got much further,†laughed Bob. “But +say, fellows, what’s the program for tomorrow?â€</p> + +<p>“Three square meals,†was Jimmy’s suggestion.</p> + +<p>“Sure,†agreed Herb. “Though in your run-down +condition you ought to have at least six.â€</p> + +<p>“He’ll get them, don’t worry,†chaffed Joe, unmoved +by the reproach in Jimmy’s eyes.</p> + +<p>“I was thinking——†Bob began.</p> + +<p>“How do you get that way?†inquired Herb +composedly.</p> + +<p>“You’ll never get that way,†retorted Bob +severely. “As I was saying when this lowbrow +interrupted me, I was thinking that it might be +a good idea to go nutting. The trees are full +of nuts this year, and that frost we had a couple +of nights ago will make it easy to get a raft of +them. What do you say?â€</p> + +<p>“I say yes with a capital Y,†replied Joe.</p> + +<p>“Hits me just right,†assented Herb.</p> + +<p>“It’s the cat’s high hat,†was the inelegant way +that Jimmy phrased it.</p> + +<p>“It’s a go then,†said Bob. “Come around to +my house a little after eight tomorrow morning +and we’ll get an early start. Every fellow brings +his own lunch, and we’ll take some potatoes along +to roast in the woods.â€</p> + +<p>“Here’s hoping it will be a dandy day,†said +Herb, as the boys parted at Bob’s gate.</p> + +<p>“It looks as though it were going to be,†replied +Bob, looking at the sky. “But after supper +I’ll tune in and get the weather report by +radio.â€</p> + +<p>“Anything you don’t do by radio?†asked Joe, +with a grin.</p> + +<p>“Oh, I set my watch by the Arlington signal +every night and a few other things,†laughed +Bob. “Fact is, I’m hanging around the receiving +set every spare minute I have for fear I’ll let +something get by me. Radio has got me, and +got me for fair.â€</p> + +<p>The weather report was favorable and Bob +slept in peace. And when he opened his eyes on +the following morning he found that Uncle Sam’s +weather bureau had been right in this particular +instance, for a lovelier fall morning, to his way +of thinking, had never dawned.</p> + +<p>He ate breakfast a little more quickly than +usual, and had barely finished when the other +radio boys were at his door loaded with lunches +and ready to start. Jimmy especially was well +furnished in the matter of provisions, for he +carried two packages while the rest of the boys +were content with one.</p> + +<p>“Aren’t you afraid you’ll be hunchbacked +carrying both those bales of goods?†asked Herb, +with mock anxiety.</p> + +<p>“Not a bit,†responded Jimmy cheerfully. +“One of them is full of doughnuts, and I expect +to eat them on the way. You see I was in such +a hurry that I didn’t eat much of a breakfast——â€</p> + +<p>“What?†exclaimed Bob.</p> + +<p>“Can I believe my ears?†asked Herb plaintively.</p> + +<p>“Say it again and say it slow,†urged Joe.</p> + +<p>“I mean,†Jimmy hurried to correct himself, +“not so much as I might have eaten. I had a bit +of cereal——â€</p> + +<p>“Catch on to that ‘bit,’†murmured Herb.</p> + +<p>“And some bacon and eggs and a slice of cold +meat from the roast last night and some hot rolls +and——â€</p> + +<p>“Outside of that you didn’t have anything to +eat,†said Joe. “All right, Jimmy, old boy, we +understand. But shake a leg now and let’s get +under way. This is too fine a day to be spending +it in a chinfest, and besides we can have +plenty of that as we go along.â€</p> + +<p>The air was brisk and stimulating, with just +enough warmth imparted by the sun to prevent +its being cold, and a soft autumnal haze hung +over the landscape and clothed it in mellow beauty. +It was the kind of day when Nature is at her best +and when it is good just to be alive.</p> + +<p>The boys were like so many young colts turned +out to pasture, and joked and jested as they went +along. Laughter came easily to their lips and +shone through their eyes, while the joy of youth +ran through their veins and made them tingle to +their finger-tips. Life was roseate and they had +not a care in the world.</p> + +<p>A walk of between two and three miles brought +them to the woods for which they had set out. +The forest covered a great many acres and was +full of noble trees, chestnut, hickory, and many +other varieties.</p> + +<p>As Bob had said, the year had been an unusually +good one for nuts, and the trees were +loaded with them. The frost of a little time before +had been just sufficient to make them ready +to pick, and the ground was already strewn with +the half-opened burrs of many that had been +shaken from the trees. Others still hung to the +boughs by so slender and brittle a thread that it +was only necessary to hurl clubs up into the trees +to have them come down in showers.</p> + +<p>The boys had brought big bags along with +them to carry the nuts they might gather, and +before long these had most of the wrinkles spread +out of them by the steadily accumulating collection +of chestnuts that formed the bulk of their +treasure, although they had a good many hickory +nuts as well.</p> + +<p>The active work gave them all an appetite, a +thing that came to them very easily under almost +any circumstances, and a little before noon they +ceased for a while from gathering the nuts and +bestirred themselves in gathering leaves and +brushwood for a fire. Their bags were more +than half full, and from what they had seen they +knew they would have little trouble in finishing +filling them up to the very drawing strings.</p> + +<p>They gathered together a little cairn of rocks +and built the fire inside of it, keeping it fed to +such effect that before long the stones were at a +white heat. Then they drew the fire away and +on the heated stones roasted their potatoes and a +large number of the chestnuts they had gathered. +They had brought plenty of salt and butter along, +and when at last the potatoes were done they +seasoned them and ate them with a relish exceeding +anything that would have attended the eating +of them at a regular meal in their homes. An +epicure might have complained of the smoky +flavor, but to the boys, seated on the leaf-carpeted +ground flecked with the sunlight that sifted +through the trees, the food was simply ambrosial.</p> + +<p>With the potatoes they dispatched the rest of +the food they had brought along. Then, with a +feeling of absolute content, they stretched out +luxuriously on the ground and munched the +roasted chestnuts in beatific indolence.</p> + +<p>For an hour or two they rested there, and then +Bob rose and stretched himself and called his reluctant +friends to action.</p> + +<p>“It would be a sin and a shame to go out of +these woods without having our bags crammed to +bursting,†he said. “Let’s get a hustle on, and +just for variety let’s try another part of the +woods.â€</p> + +<p>“All right,†assented Joe, while Herb and +Jimmy, though more slowly, roused themselves.</p> + +<p>They picked up their bags and moved from +place to place, choosing those sections where the +trees grew thickest and the outlook for nuts was +most promising.</p> + +<p>“Better be a little careful,†warned Joe, after +they had gone a considerable distance. “Part of +this wood belongs to Buck Looker’s father, and +perhaps he’d have some objection to our nutting +here.â€</p> + +<p>“I don’t think any one would kick,†responded +Bob. “Everybody around here regards the woods +as common property, as far as nutting is concerned. +Besides, there’s no way of telling, as far +as I know, what section belongs to him and what +to other people.â€</p> + +<p>“There’s something that will give us the tip,†+remarked Herb, pointing through the trees to a +clearing in which they saw a two-story cottage. +“That house belongs to Mr. Looker, though nobody +has lived in it for a long while and I guess +he’s just letting it go to rack and ruin.â€</p> + +<p>The house did indeed look shaky and dilapidated. +Some of the railing and boards of the +low veranda had been broken in or rotted away, +and the whole place bore the look of decay that +comes to houses that for a long time have been +destitute of occupants.</p> + +<p>“Looks as if it would fall to pieces if you +breathed on it,†said Herb.</p> + +<p>“Old enough to have false teeth,†commented +Jimmy. “I suppose Mr. Looker lets it stand +simply because it’s cheaper than pulling it down.â€</p> + +<p>The boys gathered nuts for perhaps two hours +longer, and then they had to stop because their +bags would not hold any more. Jimmy was already +groaning in anticipation of having to carry +his home.</p> + +<p>“That’ll weigh a ton by the time we get to +Clintonia,†he grumbled, as he eyed it with considerable +apprehension.</p> + +<p>“Hard to please some people,†commented +Herb. “You’d be kicking like a steer if you +didn’t have any to carry, and now you’re sore because +you’ve got enough to last all winter.â€</p> + +<p>“Might as well leave enough for other people,†+said Jimmy, with a spasm of generosity.</p> + +<p>“There are more nuts here than will ever be +picked,†replied Herb. “For that matter, some +other people are getting them now. I’ve heard +them thrashing about in the brush for the last few +minutes only a little way from here.â€</p> + +<p>“Funny we don’t hear voices then,†said Joe.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps they’re deaf mutes,†suggested +Jimmy, and adroitly ducked the pass that Joe +made at him.</p> + +<p>The noise persisted and seemed to be coming +nearer and nearer. There was a crashing of +bushes, as though some heavy body were being +pushed through them.</p> + +<p>“Seem to be making heavy weather of it,†commented +Herb. “Don’t see why any one should +make extra work for himself when there are +plenty of paths through the woods. Now if—Look!â€</p> + +<p>His voice rose in a shout that startled his comrades.</p> + +<p>They turned and looked in the direction of his +pointing finger. And what they saw froze the +blood in their veins.</p> + +<p>A great shaggy bear had emerged from the +brush into a path not more than a hundred feet +away and was lumbering rapidly toward them!</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink02'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER II—AN EXCITING CHASE</a></h2> + +<p>For a single instant the boys stood motionless +and silent, stupefied by the sudden apparition. +Then, as though shocked by a galvanic battery, +they woke to life.</p> + +<p>“Quick!†shouted Bob. “To the bungalow! +It’s our only chance!â€</p> + +<p>Like a flash he was off, followed by his comrades. +Even Jimmy’s feet seemed winged, and +they reached the porch in record time.</p> + +<p>Frantically Bob grasped the knob of the front +door. The door was locked. He threw himself +against it, but his weight was not sufficient, and +although the door groaned it refused to yield. +He glanced at his comrades, surrounding him in +a panting group, and then at the bear. The latter +was still coming, and seemed to have increased +his speed.</p> + +<p>The roof of the veranda was supported by half +a dozen wooden pillars.</p> + +<p>“Shin up these!†shouted Bob, throwing his +arms and legs about one and setting the example.</p> + +<p>In a trice they were all climbing desperately. +Fortunately they had not far to go, for the roof +of the veranda was not high. But they felt as +though they were in a nightmare, and although +they were really making surprisingly good time, it +seemed as though they would never get to the top.</p> + +<p>Bob reached there first and swung himself over +the roof. Not waiting a moment to rest, he +rushed over to the post that Jimmy had chosen, +reached over his hand and caught one of Jimmy’s +wrists. There was a mad scramble and then +Jimmy lay on the roof, gasping.</p> + +<p>Joe and Herb needed no help, as they had +reached the roof only a second later than Bob.</p> + +<p>For the moment at least they were safe, and +they sat panting and trying to get their breath.</p> + +<p>And while with fast-beating hearts they are +wondering how they are to escape from the monster +below them, it may be well, for the benefit of +those who have not read the preceding volumes of +this series, to tell who the radio boys were and +what had been their adventures up to the time this +story opens.</p> + +<p>Bob Layton was the son of a prosperous +chemist who was a leading citizen of the town +of Clintonia, a wideawake, thriving, little city +with a population of about ten thousand. The +town was located on the banks of the Shagary +River, and was about seventy-five miles from +New York. Bob, at the time these incidents occurred, +was in his sixteenth year. He was tall +and well built, of rather dark complexion and +frank, merry eyes that always looked straight at +one. He was good in his studies and a leader in +athletic sports among boys of his own age. He +had a firm, decided character, and was always at +his best in an emergency that demanded cool +thinking and quick action.</p> + +<p>His closest friend was Joe Atwood, whose +father was a physician with a large practice. +Joe was fair in complexion, while Bob was dark, +and they differed in more than mere physical +qualities. Joe had a fiery temper and was apt to +speak or act first and think afterward, and Bob +many times served as a brake on the impulsive +temperament of his friend.</p> + +<p>Herb Fennington was a year younger than Bob +and Joe, and of a more indolent, easy-going disposition. +He was full of fun and jokes and nobody +could long have the blues when Herb was +about.</p> + +<p>A fourth member of the group was Jimmy +Plummer, whose father was a carpenter and contractor +and a highly respected citizen of the town. +Jimmy was fat, red-faced and good-natured, with +a special partiality for the good things of life. +He had gained the nickname of “Doughnuts,†+because of his fondness for that famous product of +the kitchen, and did his best to deserve the name.</p> + +<p>Besides the liking that drew the boys together, +there was an added link in their interest in radio, +which by its wonders had taken a firm hold on +their youthful imaginations. In delving into the +mysteries of this new and fascinating science, +they had been greatly assisted by the kindly help +afforded them by the Reverend Doctor Dale, the +pastor of the Old First Church of Clintonia. +His suggestions had been of immense value in +helping them to master the elements of the science, +and whenever they got into a quandary they had +no hesitation in appealing to him for help that +was never refused.</p> + +<p>What gave the boys an added stimulus was the +offer by the member of Congress for the district +in which Clintonia was situated of prizes for the +best radio sets made by the boys themselves. The +contest was open to all the boys residing in the +Congressional district, and Bob, Joe, and Jimmy +entered into it with enthusiasm. Herb, with his +natural indolence, did not go into the competition +and was sorry afterward that he had not. The +first prize was a hundred dollars, and the second, +fifty. To the boys this seemed a whole lot of +money and well worth the winning.</p> + +<p>It was hard work though, and made the harder +by the obstacles put in their way by Buck Looker, +the bully of the town, assisted by Carl Lutz and +Terry Mooney, two of his cronies almost as worthless +as himself. Buck tried to wreck Bob’s aerial +and got a richly deserved thrashing in consequence. +Later on the trio tried to steal Jimmy’s +set, but the radio boys got it back in a way that +brought a good deal of discomfiture to the +Looker crowd.</p> + +<p>While the radio sets were in the making, an +exciting incident occurred in town that drew the +boys into a series of adventures. An automobile +running wild and dashing through the windows +of a paint and hardware store in the town gave +Bob and Joe an opportunity to rescue the occupant, +a Miss Nellie Berwick, and to learn her +story of having been swindled out of some property +by a rascal. How by the means of radio +they got on the track of the scoundrel and forced +him to make restitution, how they overcame all +the machinations of their enemies and came out +ahead in the competition, is told in the first +volume of this series, entitled: “The Radio +Boys’ First Wireless; Or, Winning the Ferberton +Prize.â€</p> + +<p>Shortly after Bob had won the first prize and +Joe the second, the radio boys went down to +Ocean Point on the seacoast to spend the summer. +A colony had been established there by several of +the Clintonia families, including those of the +radio boys, and they had great fun on the beach +and in the surf. Here too they made marked advances +in their knowledge of radio, in which they +were greatly helped by Brandon Harvey, the wireless +operator at the Ocean Point sending station. +How they repaid this by pursuing and capturing +the man who had assaulted him and looted the +safe at the station, what exciting adventures they +met with in the pursuit and capture, how their +knowledge of radio enabled them to send help to +a ship in peril on which their own families were +voyaging, are told in the second volume of this +series, entitled: “The Radio Boys At Ocean +Point; Or, The Message that Saved the Ship.â€</p> + +<p>Their summer at Ocean Point was further +marked by a gallant rescue of two young vaudeville +performers who had been run down by reckless +thieves in a stolen motor boat. How they +finally brought these men to justice, how they +managed to bring congenial employment to a +crippled friend, and how in doing this they found +scope for their own talents in the fascinating +work of radio broadcasting, are told in the third +volume of this series entitled: “The Radio Boys +At the Sending Station; Or, Making Good in the +Wireless Room.â€</p> + +<p>And now to return to the boys, who found +themselves in the woods on the roof of the porch +of the cottage where they had taken refuge from +the pursuit of the bear.</p> + +<p>That refuge promised to be only a temporary +one and exceedingly precarious. The roof was +none too strongly built in the first place, and had +fallen into decay from stress of weather and lack +of repairs. Already there was an ominous creaking +as it sagged crazily under the weight of the +four boys.</p> + +<p>Beneath them was the bear, who looked up at +them, his jaws slavering and his little red eyes +flaming. He was an enormous beast, capable of +tearing any one of them in pieces if he once got +them within his clutches.</p> + +<p>“If we only had a gun!†groaned Bob, as a +terrifying rumbling came from the throat of the +bear.</p> + +<p>“I’d rather have a stick of dynamite to throw +at his feet and blow him into kingdom come,†+muttered Joe, as he gingerly shifted his position +to find a more solid support than the part of the +roof that was sagging under him.</p> + +<p>“‘If wishes were horses, beggars might ride,’†+remarked Herb. “The question is what are we +going to do?â€</p> + +<p>“Seems to me the question is what is the bear +going to do?†put in Jimmy.</p> + +<p>“What he’ll do is plenty,†said Joe. “He’s got +us trapped good and proper, and the next move +is up to him.â€</p> + +<p>The bear himself seemed to be in something of +a quandary as to what that next move was to be. +He paced clumsily up and down before the veranda +while he was making up his mind. But to +the boys’ dismay there was no sign that he was +inclined to relinquish the prey that was so nearly +within his reach.</p> + +<p>Finally he seemed to come to a decision. He +moved from one to the other of the pillars supporting +the veranda roof, sniffing at each as if +calculating which was the strongest. Then to the +horror of the boys he threw his paws about one +of the pillars and commenced to climb.</p> + +<p>“He’s coming up!†cried Bob, and even as he +spoke they could see the shaggy hair of the beast’s +head come in sight on a level with the porch roof. +“Up on the other roof, fellows! Maybe he can’t +follow us there.â€</p> + +<p>The roof of the house proper extended over the +side and front of the second story and there were +several protruding points that offered support to +the feet and hands. In addition there were +shutters to the windows, the tops of which +reached nearly to the roof.</p> + +<p>There was a wild scramble for whatever support +came nearest to hand. How the boys did it +they could not for the life of them remember +afterwards, but somehow, with the spur given to +them by the knowledge that the bear was close +behind, they got up on the roof of the house, +their clothes torn and their fingers bruised and +bleeding.</p> + +<p>“Let’s go along the roof toward the back of the +house,†panted Joe. “There may be an extension +kitchen there on which we can drop and then +from there to the ground. It may not be so easy +for the bear to get down after us as it has been to +get up.â€</p> + +<p>They followed this suggestion at once and +made their way as rapidly as possible across the +shaky roof. It would have been more prudent +of them to have left some interval between them, +but they were so excited that they did not think +of that and crowded close on one another’s heels.</p> + +<p>Suddenly a shout rose from Bob.</p> + +<p>“Back, fellows!†he cried. “The roof’s caving +in!â€</p> + +<p>But the warning came too late. There was an +ominous cracking and splintering, and then with +a roar a section of the roof collapsed, carrying +the boys down with it.</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink03'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER III—AN AMAZING DISCOVERY</a></h2> + +<p>There was a chorus of shouts as the boys felt +themselves falling, followed by a heavy thud as +they brought up on the floor of the attic in a +blinding cloud of dust and plaster.</p> + +<p>They had been so close together that they all +came down in a heap, in a waving confusion of +arms and legs.</p> + +<p>Fortunately the distance had been only a few +feet, but it was enough to knock the breath out of +them, especially out of Jimmy, who had the misfortune +of finding himself at the bottom of the +heap.</p> + +<p>For a minute or two they were too dazed by +the suddenness of the fall to speak coherently, or +in fact to speak at all. Then gradually they disentangled +themselves and got to their feet.</p> + +<p>Their first sensation had been that of alarm and +the second of shock. But after they had in some +measure recovered from these, there came a third +sensation of immense relief.</p> + +<p>For what had seemed at first a disaster revealed +itself as a blessing in disguise when they +realized that at least they had escaped from their +pursuer. They were inside the house and had a +number of ways of escape through the doors or +windows available to them. The tables had been +turned, and now it was the bear that was at a +disadvantage.</p> + +<p>They rubbed their eyes to get the dust out of +them, and had barely begun to see clearly when +they heard a voice calling from outside the house. +The accents were foreign and they could not catch +clearly what was said, but the words, whatever +they were, were promptly followed by a scratching +and clawing that seemed to indicate that the +bear was sliding down one of the pillars of the +porch to the ground.</p> + +<p>“We must warn him!†cried Bob. “The bear +will get him, sure!â€</p> + +<p>They rushed down the stairs to the ground +floor and looked through one of the front windows. +At a few yards’ distance stood a man, +short and stocky and of a swarthy complexion. +A bandana handkerchief was wound around his +head and earrings dangled from his ears.</p> + +<p>As they looked, the great body of the bear +dropped from the lower part of the pillar to the +ground, and the beast turned and rushed toward +the man.</p> + +<p>“He’ll be killed!†yelled Joe, in great apprehension. +“Killed right before our eyes! Why +doesn’t he run? Can it be that he is blind?â€</p> + +<p>They all shouted in unison to warn the newcomer +of his danger.</p> + +<p>Then an amazing thing happened. The man +not only stood his ground, but advanced toward +the bear. The huge brute reared on his hind legs +and threw his great paws over the man’s +shoulders. But even while the boys shuddered +at the nearness of the tragedy that seemed about +to be enacted, the man laughed joyously and +passed his hand caressingly over the shaggy head +and playfully pulled one of the brute’s ears.</p> + +<p>The boys looked at each other in amazement. +The look gradually changed from one of wonderment +to one of sheepishness. Then Bob turned +the lock of the front door, threw it open and +stepped out on the porch.</p> + +<p>“Hello there!†he called.</p> + +<p>The man turned around and looked at him in +surprise. It was evident that he had not known +until that moment that there was anybody in the +house.</p> + +<p>“Hello, you’sel’!†he replied, with a smile that +showed a row of gleaming white teeth.</p> + +<p>“Is that your bear?†inquired Bob, while his +comrades, who had also come out on the porch, +taking care, however, to leave the door open in +case a quick retreat should seem desirable, +clustered about him.</p> + +<p>“Sure data mya bear,†was the response. “He +verra gooda bear. He dance an’ maka tricks +while I sing and we maka lota da mon. Mya +name Tony Moretto. I coma from da Italy two, +nearly tree years ago. I spika da Inglis good,†+he continued, with evident pride in his accomplishments.</p> + +<p>“Doesn’t he ever get cross and ugly?†asked +Bob. “He looks as though he could eat you in +two mouthfuls.â€</p> + +<p>“What dat?†asked Tony, in a tone of +aggrieved surprise. “Bruno get ugly? Nevair! +He verra tame.†And to prove it, he thrust his +hand into the bear’s mouth and took hold of his +tongue.</p> + +<p>Instead of this evoking any protest, Bruno +took it as part of a game, and acted just as a big +good-natured mastiff might while romping with +his master.</p> + +<p>“You see,†said Tony, with evident pride. +“He lova me. I show you how he minda me.â€</p> + +<p>He gave a word or two of command and began +a monotonous chant, to the notes of which the +bear began to dance with an agility that was surprising +in so clumsy an animal. Then he lay +down and played dead, turned somersaults and +went through his whole repertoire of tricks for +the edification of the boys, who looked on with +very different emotions from those they had felt +only a little while before.</p> + +<p>“What I tella you?†said Tony complacently. +“Bruno verra nice bear.â€</p> + +<p>“What made him chase us then?†asked Joe. +“We thought he was going to eat us alive.â€</p> + +<p>“He chasa you?†said Tony, in surprise. “No, +no. You mus’ be mistake. He wan’ to maka +frens—to playa wi’ you. Dat’ ees it. He tink +eet was a game.â€</p> + +<p>“I wish we’d known that half an hour ago,†+murmured Joe to his companions. “It would +have saved us a whole lot of trouble.â€</p> + +<p>“How did he come to get away from you?†+asked Herb.</p> + +<p>“I verra tired,†answered Tony. “I go sleepa +in de woods. When I waka up I no finda him. +He hunt for grub in da woods. Den he seea +you and try to maka frens wi’ you.â€</p> + +<p>He took a chain from his pocket and fastened +it to a collar on the bear’s neck.</p> + +<p>“Coma, Bruno,†he said. “We go now.â€</p> + +<p>“Wait,†called Bob, and he and his companions +emptied their pockets of what loose change they +had and pressed it on the Italian, who at first +shook his head.</p> + +<p>“No,†he said. “Bruno maka you much trubbeel.â€</p> + +<p>“Never mind that,†replied Bob. “You’ve +given us a good show, and this will buy some grub +for Bruno. He’s a good old sport, and we don’t +bear him any malice, even if he did give us the +scare of our lives.â€</p> + +<p>He was so insistent that Tony finally pocketed +the money, and with a smile and another flash of +his white teeth trudged off through the woods +with Bruno lumbering along clumsily beside him.</p> + +<p>The boys watched the pair until they were out +of sight and then turned and looked at each other. +Then the comical aspect of the whole affair appealed +to them and they burst into inextinguishable +laughter.</p> + +<p>“Stung!†cried Bob, when at last he could get +his breath. “Stung good and plenty.â€</p> + +<p>“Running away like all possessed when the +bear was only lonely and wanted company,†+gasped Joe, wiping his eyes.</p> + +<p>“He lova us, he wanta maka frens with us,†+chuckled Herb, and again they went into convulsions +of mirth.</p> + +<p>“Well, fellows,†said Bob, when they had regained +some degree of composure, “there’s no +doubt but that the joke is on us. But, after all, +we’ve nothing to reproach ourselves for, because +we’re not mind readers and couldn’t be supposed +to know Bruno’s intentions when he came +galloping toward us. There isn’t a man on earth who +wouldn’t have done just as we did under the +circumstances.â€</p> + +<p>“We can’t say we haven’t had excitement +enough for one day,†remarked Jimmy. “Gee, I +feel as though I’d been drawn through a knothole. +When you fellows came down on me in the attic, +I felt sure that you’d drive me through the floor.â€</p> + +<p>“We showed good judgment in letting you fall +first,†said Joe, with a grin. “It was as good +as falling on a rubber cushion.â€</p> + +<p>“I guess I was born to be the goat,†sighed +Jimmy. “I’ll bet I’m black and blue all over.â€</p> + +<p>“It’s a safe bet that we’re all pretty tired and +sore,†said Bob. “And that’s too bad too, for +we’ve got a lot of work to do before we leave this +old shebang. And we won’t have any more than +time to do it, for it’s getting on pretty late in the +afternoon.â€</p> + +<p>“What do you mean?†asked Herb. “Seems +to me we’ve worked hard enough for one day.â€</p> + +<p>“All the same we’ve got to fix up that roof before +we go,†explained Bob. “It wouldn’t be +fair to leave it open to the wind and rain after +we smashed it in.â€</p> + +<p>“I tell you what!†exclaimed Herb, struck with +a bright idea. “Jimmy’s the one to do that to +the queen’s taste. He’s had a lot of experience +in his father’s carpenter shop, and he could make +a far better job of it than any of us could. It’ll +be a real treat to see him go at it.â€</p> + +<p>“Sure,†said Jimmy sarcastically. “Just the +thing. I told you that I was the goat. But all +the same don’t you try to hold your breath till +you see me do it.â€</p> + +<p>“We’ll all go at it,†declared Bob. “And we’ll +get it done in jig time. Probably it won’t be +done like cabinet work, but we can make it reasonably +tight and snug just the same. Come along +now and let’s get busy.â€</p> + +<p>They picked themselves up and made their way +to the attic and set to work. They were hampered +at first by lack of tools, but search of the +house brought to light a couple of rusty hammers +and saws, and they managed to make a fairly +good job of it. At least they had made it secure +against rain or snow, and that was all they could +hope to do under the circumstances.</p> + +<p>The sun was getting low in the western sky as +they were putting in the last nails. Suddenly +Herb stopped and listened.</p> + +<p>“Who’s that calling?†he asked.</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink04'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER IV—THE BULLY APPEARS</a></h2> + +<p>Joe went to a window in the side of the attic +and peered out. Then he gave a low whistle.</p> + +<p>“What’s the game?†inquired Bob curiously.</p> + +<p>“It’s Buck Looker and his gang,†replied his +chum. “How in the world did they happen to +get here just at this minute? Five minutes more +and we’d have been gone.â€</p> + +<p>“Now I suppose it will all come out about the +bear,†said Herb regretfully. “I was hoping we +could keep that to ourselves.â€</p> + +<p>“Perhaps it’s just as well,†said Bob thoughtfully. +“We’d have to explain anyhow how we +came to fall through the roof, and of course we’d +tell the truth about it. What we’ve done now is +only a makeshift job, and we’ll have to get some +carpenter to make a perfect thing of it at our expense. +That’s the only fair thing to do.â€</p> + +<p>“Hello, up there!†came a voice from below, +which they recognized as Buck Looker’s. +“Who’s up there and what are you doing?â€</p> + +<p>Bob, who had come up to Joe’s side, thrust his +head out of the window.</p> + +<p>“Some of my friends and myself are here,†he +answered. “We broke through the roof of the +house and we’ve just been fixing it up.â€</p> + +<p>“Broke through the roof!†came in a gasp from +below. “What business did you have on the roof +of my house? You’re going to get into trouble +for this.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, I don’t know,†replied Bob. “We’re not +worrying much about it.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, you’d better worry,†growled Buck +truculently. “You come right down and get out +of my house as fast as your legs can carry you or +I’ll—I’ll——â€</p> + +<p>“Yes,†said Bob quietly, “go right ahead with +what you were going to say, Buck Looker. +You’ll do what?â€</p> + +<p>Buck hesitated, for there was a note in Bob’s +voice that he did not like.</p> + +<p>“You’ll see what I’ll do,†he blustered. “You +get right out of my house.â€</p> + +<p>“Now listen, Buck Looker,†replied Bob. +“We’re going to get out of this house for just +two reasons. The first is that there’s nothing +especially attractive to keep us here, and the second +is that we’ve finished our work and were just +about to go anyway. But don’t fool yourself into +thinking that we’re going because you tell us to. +If your father told us to, we’d have to, because +it’s his property. But it isn’t yours and what +you say doesn’t interest us a little bit. Get +that?â€</p> + +<p>There was a growling response, of which they +did not catch the words, and Bob turned to his +companions.</p> + +<p>“Come along, fellows,†he said. “Let’s go +down and see what this terrible man-eater and his +cronies are going to do to us.â€</p> + +<p>“I only wish they’d give us an excuse for pitching +into them,†said Joe. “I’ve been aching to +give Buck Looker a licking ever since that time +Mr. Preston came along and stopped us.â€</p> + +<p>“No chance,†laughed Bob. “Buck is prudent +enough when any one comes face to face with +him. As a long distance fighter he’s a wonder, +but he wilts fast enough when a scrap seems +coming.â€</p> + +<p>The radio boys brushed off their clothes, restored +the tools to their places, and went downstairs +and out on the front porch, where they +found the bully and his friends in close conversation.</p> + +<p>“It’s time you got out of here!†exclaimed +Buck. “My father will have something to say +about this, and maybe he’ll have you all arrested +for burglary.â€</p> + +<p>At this the boys could not help laughing, and +Buck’s face grew red with fury, while a venomous +light glowed in his mean eyes.</p> + +<p>“You’ll laugh out of the other side of your +mouths when you find yourselves in jail,†he +shouted.</p> + +<p>“Now look here,†burst out Joe, taking a step +toward him, “you’ve gone quite far enough. You +keep a civil tongue in your head, or I’ll give you +what I’ve owed you ever since Mr. Preston came +between us. And there’s no Mr. Preston here +now.â€</p> + +<p>Bob put a restraining hand on his friend’s arm.</p> + +<p>“Easy, Joe,†he counseled.</p> + +<p>Then he turned to the bully.</p> + +<p>“We don’t owe you any explanation, Buck +Looker,†he said, “but we do owe one to your +father, and you can tell him what we say. We +were chased by a bear who had wandered away +from his master. We chose this house for safety +because it was the only place at hand and we +couldn’t do anything else. First we got up on the +roof of the porch, but the bear came after us +there and we had to take to the roof of the house +itself. While we were going across it, part of +it caved in and let us down into the attic. Afterward +we tried to repair the damage for the time, +and you can tell your father that we will pay +whatever is necessary to make the roof as good as +it was before.â€</p> + +<p>“Chased by a bear!†repeated Buck, with a +sneer. “That’s a likely story. There hasn’t been +a bear around these parts for a hundred years. +Tell that to the marines.â€</p> + +<p>“I suppose that means that I’m telling a falsehood,†+said Bob, his eyes taking on a steely glint.</p> + +<p>“I didn’t say that,†muttered Buck, as he stole +a glance at Bob’s clenched fist. “But you can +tell that to my father and see if he believes +it.â€</p> + +<p>“He can believe it or not as he sees fit,†replied +Bob. “Come along, fellows.â€</p> + +<p>“Just notice that we’re going of our own accord,†+put in Joe, as he prepared to follow his +friend down the steps. “Don’t you want to +throw us off the porch or any little thing like +that?†he inquired politely, pausing a moment for +an answer.</p> + +<p>But the only answer was a snarl, and the radio +boys left the bully there and went on to the place +a little way off where they had dropped their bags +when the bear came upon them.</p> + +<p>Jimmy, who was in the van, suddenly gave a +cry of dismay.</p> + +<p>“The bags are gone!†he exclaimed. “I +dropped mine right here, and now there are no +signs of it.â€</p> + +<p>“And mine was close by this tree,†cried Herb. +“That’s gone too.â€</p> + +<p>They hunted about for a few minutes, but the +search was fruitless.</p> + +<p>“Look here!†exclaimed Joe, at last. “Those +bags didn’t walk away of their own accord. +Somebody’s taken them.â€</p> + +<p>“And after working all day to fill them!†+groaned Jimmy.</p> + +<p>“Say, fellows,†said Bob. “The only ones that +have been around here have probably been +Buck Looker and his gang. There’s the +answer.â€</p> + +<p>“But they didn’t have any bags with them,†+interposed Herb.</p> + +<p>“They could have hidden them, intending to +come back after dark and get them,†replied Bob. +“I’m going to question them anyway. Buck +Looker isn’t going to put anything like that over +on us.â€</p> + +<p>“They’ll only lie out of it,†prophesied Jimmy +pessimistically.</p> + +<p>“We can see from the way they talk and act +whether they are lying or not,†returned Bob. +“At any rate I’m going to take a chance.â€</p> + +<p>They all went back rapidly toward the house, +and reached there just in time to see Buck and +his cronies vanishing around the back.</p> + +<p>“They’ve seen us coming and tried to dodge,†+cried Joe.</p> + +<p>“That won’t do them any good,†replied Bob, +quickening his speed. “We can beat them running +any day.â€</p> + +<p>The truth of his words was quickly demonstrated +when they drew up abreast of the three, +who slowed to a walk when they saw it was no +use trying to evade their pursuers.</p> + +<p>“What are you running away for?†queried +Bob, as he stepped in front of Buck.</p> + +<p>“None of your business,†answered Buck snapishly. +“I might ask you what you are running +for.â€</p> + +<p>“And if you did, I’d tell you mighty quick,†+answered Bob. “I was running after you to ask +you what you did with the bags of nuts you +found under the trees.â€</p> + +<p>Buck tried to put on a look of surprise, but the +attempt was a failure.</p> + +<p>“I—I don’t know what you’re talking about,†+he stammered.</p> + +<p>Every tone and every look betrayed that he +was not telling the truth, and Bob went straight +to the point.</p> + +<p>“Yes, you do,†he retorted. “You know perfectly +well what I’m talking about. You found +those bags under the trees where we had dropped +them when the bear chased us, and you’ve hidden +them somewhere intending to come back for them +later. We’ve got you dead to rights, and you’d +better come across and come across quick.â€</p> + +<p>Buck hesitated a moment, but the look in Bob’s +eyes told him what was in store for him if he +refused, and again he concluded that discretion +was the better part of valor.</p> + +<p>“Oh, were those yours?†he said, with an affectation +of surprise. “We did find a few nuts and +laid them aside for the owners if they should +come back for them. I had forgotten all about +it.â€</p> + +<p>“It’s too bad that your memory is so poor,†remarked +Bob grimly. “Suppose you come along +and show us where you laid them aside so carefully +for their owners.â€</p> + +<p>Again Buck hesitated and seemed inclined to +refuse, but the menace in Bob’s eyes had not +lessened, and he reluctantly shuffled back to the +woods in front of the house and pointed out a +hollow tree.</p> + +<p>“There you’ll find your old nuts,†he snarled +viciously. “That is, if they are yours. Ten to +one they belong to somebody else.†And with +this Parthian shot, which the boys disregarded in +their eagerness to regain their property, he slunk +away, followed by Lutz and Mooney, the discomfited +faces of the three of them as black as +thunder clouds.</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink05'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER V—A STARTLING ACCUSATION</a></h2> + +<p>Elated and triumphant, the radio boys +shouldered their bags and set out for home.</p> + +<p>“This is the end of a perfect day,†chanted Joe, +as they trudged along, tired in body but light in +heart.</p> + +<p>“For us perhaps, but not for Buck and his +crowd,†chuckled Herb.</p> + +<p>“And those sneak thieves were the fellows who +were talking about burglars,†laughed Jimmy.</p> + +<p>The sun had gone down before the radio boys +left the woods, and it was full night by the time +they reached their homes and disburdened themselves +of their load of nuts.</p> + +<p>“I was going to ask you fellows to come around +tonight and listen in on the broadcasting concert,†+said Bob, as they reached his gate; “but I +guess our folks will be so much excited about the +bear that they can’t talk or think of anything +else.â€</p> + +<p>“That’s bearly possible,†chuckled Herb, and +grinned at the indignation of his companions at +the pun.</p> + +<p>“But I think there’ll be something doing at +church tomorrow on the subject of radio,†continued +Bob. “You fellows must be sure to be +there. I heard Doctor Dale talking about it to +father.â€</p> + +<p>“I’ll be there if I can wake up in time,†said +Jimmy. “But just now I feel as if I could sleep +through the next twenty-four hours straight. I’ll +be like one of the seven sleepers of Pegasus.â€</p> + +<p>“Ephesus, I guess you mean,†laughed Bob. +“Pegasus was a horse.â€</p> + +<p>“Is that so?†replied Jimmy. “Well, that’s a +horse on me. Don’t hit me,†he begged, as Bob +made a pass at him. “I’m stiff and sore all over, +without having that big ham of yours land on +me.â€</p> + +<p>Bob laughed and went up the steps, while the +others made their ways to their respective homes +not many doors away.</p> + +<p>As they had anticipated, the telling of the adventures +that they had gone through that day was +listened to with breathless interest by all the members +of their families. At places in the story +there was laughter, but more frequently there +were exclamations of alarm mingled with great +relief that they had come through safely.</p> + +<p>“I tell you,†said Bob, as he finished telling of +the matter to his parents. “I felt mighty cheap to +think that I had run like mad from a bear that, +as the Italian said, was simply trying to ‘maka +frens’ with me.â€</p> + +<p>“It was rather amusing after it was all over,†+assented his father, with a smile. “But after all +you were very wise to act as you did. It isn’t by +any means certain that the bear would have been +as friendly with you as he was with his master, +and resistance of any kind might have awakened +all his savage instincts. I am very doubtful +about the bear thinking it was only a game when +he was climbing up after you. But even if he +did, you had no reason to suppose it. For all +you knew he might have escaped from a circus +or menagerie and might have been ready to tear +you in pieces.â€</p> + +<p>“That was my first thought; that is, as soon as +I could think calmly about anything,†answered +Bob. “But, after all, a miss is as good as a mile, +and he didn’t get us. He came mighty near it +though.â€</p> + +<p>“The most serious outcome of the whole thing +will probably be the matter of the broken roof,†+said Mr. Layton meditatively. “It will probably +cost considerable to put it in perfect shape again. +But, after all, that doesn’t count for anything as +long as you boys weren’t hurt. I’ll see Looker +about it on Monday and fix the matter up with +him.â€</p> + +<p>“And of course the fathers of the other fellows +will chip in on the expense,†said Bob. “I’d like +to hear what Buck is telling his father about it +tonight,†he continued, with a grin. “By the +time he gets through, we’ll have pulled the whole +house down.â€</p> + +<p>The next morning all the boys were at church +in time for the morning service, even Jimmy, who +walked very stiffly and smelled strongly of arnica.</p> + +<p>“You fellows needn’t sniff as though I had the +plague,†he protested, as his friends lifted their +nostrils inquiringly. “I was the fellow who was +underneath when you fell on me like a thousand +of brick. You got off easy, while I had all the +worst of it. But then I’m used to that,†he concluded, +sighing heavily.</p> + +<p>“Cheer up, old boy,†said Joe, clapping him on +the back, at which poor Jimmy winced. “The +first hundred years is the worst. After that you +won’t mind it. But now we’d better get in if we +want to sit together, for there’s a bigger congregation +here than usual.â€</p> + +<p>Doctor Dale, the friend and counselor of the +boys in radio, as in many other things, was in the +pulpit. He was a very eloquent preacher and +was always sure of a good congregation. But as +Joe had said, the church was even fuller than +usual that morning, and there was a general stir +of expectancy, as though something unusual was +in prospect.</p> + +<p>The attention of the boys was attracted at once +by a small disk-like contrivance right in front of +the preacher’s desk. It had never been there before. +They recognized it at once as a microphone, +but to the majority of the audience its +purpose was a complete mystery, and many +curious glances were fixed upon it.</p> + +<p>There were the customary preliminary services, +and then Doctor Dale came forward to the desk.</p> + +<p>“Before beginning my sermon this morning,†+he said, “I want to explain what will seem to some +an unusual departure from custom, but which I +hope will justify itself to such an extent as to become +a regular feature of our service.</p> + +<p>“There is no reason why the benefits of that +service should be confined to the persons gathered +within these four walls. There are thousands +outside who by the means of radio, that most +wonderful invention of the present century, can +hear every word of this service just as readily as +you who are seated in the pews. The prayers, +the hymns, the organ music, the sermon, the +benediction—they can hear it all. The only thing +they will miss will be the privilege of putting +their money in the collection plate.â€</p> + +<p>He paused for a moment, and a smile rippled +over the congregation.</p> + +<p>“I have said,†he resumed, “that they can hear +it. And if they can hear it, they ought to hear it—that +is if they want to. This is no new or +untried idea. It is being carried out today in +Pittsburgh, Washington, and other cities. The +pulpit becomes a religious broadcasting station, +from which the service is carried over an area of +hundreds of miles. Everybody within that area +who has a receiving set can hear it if they wish. +In some cases it is estimated that more than two +hundred thousand people are enjoying at the same +moment the same religious service. You can see +at once what that means in immeasurably extending +the usefulness and influence of the church.</p> + +<p>“Now it has occurred to me that we might do +here what is being done elsewhere on a larger +scale. So, after a conference with the officials of +the church, an adequate sending set has been installed +in the loft of the building. What is said +here is sent from this microphone to the loft, +where it is flung out into the ether. Arrangements +have been made with a number of churches +in this county, too poor and small to have a regular +pastor, by which they have installed loud +speaker receiving sets in their buildings. At this +moment there are a dozen scattered congregations +where the people have gathered to worship, and +where at this moment they are hearing everything +that is said just as plainly as you do.</p> + +<p>“And in addition to that,†he went on, “in +hundreds, perhaps thousands of homes, people +who cannot go to church because of illness or +some other reason are listening to this service. +The sick, the crippled, the blind—think of what +it means to have the church brought to them when +they cannot go to the church. You in the pews +are the visible congregation. But outside these +walls there is today an invisible congregation +many times greater, to whom this service is bringing +its message of help and healing.â€</p> + +<p>With this prelude, Doctor Dale announced his +text and preached his sermon, which, if anything, +was more eloquent than usual. It seemed as if he +were inspired by preaching to the greatest audience +that he had ever had in his whole career, +and the audience in the pews also felt a thrill as +they thought of the invisible listeners miles and +miles away. It seemed as though the natural +were being brought into close connection with the +supernatural, and the impression produced was +most powerful.</p> + +<p>If the doctor had had any misgivings as to the +attitude of his people toward this new departure, +these were quickly dissipated by the cordial congratulations +and approval that were expressed +after the service was over and he moved about +among them. It was the universal opinion that a +great advance had been made and that the innovation +had come to stay.</p> + +<p>The radio boys had been intensely interested in +this new application of their favorite study, and +after the sermon they went up into the loft and +examined the apparatus that had been used in +sending. It was a vacuum tube set with two +tubes and power enough to send messages out +over the whole county. It had been set up by +Dr. Dale himself, and that was proof enough +for the boys that it had worked perfectly in sending +out the morning service.</p> + +<p>“What will radio do next?†asked Bob, as the +boys were walking homeward.</p> + +<p>“What won’t it do next is the way you ought +to put it,†suggested Joe. “It seems as if there +were no limit. There are no such things as space +and distance any more. Radio has wiped them +out completely.â€</p> + +<p>“That’s true,†chimed in Herb. “The earth +used to be a monstrous big thing twenty-five thousand +miles round. Now it’s getting to be no +bigger than an orange.â€</p> + +<p>“What a fuss they made when it was proved +that one could travel around the world in eighty +days,†said Jimmy. “But radio can go round +the earth more than seven times in a single +second. Just about the time it takes to strike a +match.â€</p> + +<p>“Gee, but I’m glad we weren’t born a hundred +years ago,†remarked Bob. “What a lot of things +we would have missed. Automobiles, locomotives, +telegraph, telephone, phonograph, electric +light——â€</p> + +<p>“Yes,†interrupted Joe, “and radio would have +been the worst miss of all.â€</p> + +<p>“They’re doing in the colleges now, too, something +very like what the doctor did in the pulpit +this morning,†said Bob. “In Union College and +Tufts and a lot of others the professors are giving +their lectures by radio. Talk about University +Extension courses! Radio will beat them all +hollow. Think of a professor lecturing to an +audience of fifty thousand, instead of the hundred +or so that are gathered in his classroom. And +think of the thousands of young fellows who are +crazy to go to college and haven’t the money to +do it with. They can keep on working and get +their college education at home. I tell you what, +fellows, Mr. Brandon was right the other day +when he said that the surface of radio had only +been scratched so far.â€</p> + +<p>The next day at school the boys found that the +story of their experience with the bear had had +wide circulation, chiefly through the activity of +Buck Looker, who took care at the same time, +however, to express his belief that nothing of the +kind had happened. There was a good deal of +good-natured joking, and the boys in self-defense +had to explain the whole thing in all its details.</p> + +<p>At recess their story received unexpected confirmation, +for there, just outside the school yard, +was Tony putting Bruno, the bear, through his +tricks while a breathlessly interested crowd gathered +about the pair. Tony grinned at the boys +when he saw them and Jimmy asserted that Bruno +grinned too, but the rest of the radio boys thought +that that was due to Jimmy’s excess of imagination.</p> + +<p>A noticeable feature of the school work that day +was the scarcity of pupils. All the classes were +more or less sparsely attended, and the teachers +were called to a conference with Mr. Preston, the +principal.</p> + +<p>“What do you suppose the powwow of the +teachers was all about?†asked Bob, as the boys +were going home after the session of the school +was ended.</p> + +<p>“About so many fellows being away,†replied +Joe, who, as his father was the leading physician +of the town, was better informed than were his +friends as to the situation. “Dad says there’s an +awful lot of sickness in the town. He’s kept busy +day and night, and scarcely has time to breathe.â€</p> + +<p>“I wonder what the reason is,†remarked Herb.</p> + +<p>“Dad thinks the water supply may have something +to do with it,†answered Joe. “He says +there’s a regular epidemic of typhoid fever, and +that usually comes from impure water. He’s +called the attention of the town council and the +engineers of the reservoir to the matter, and +they’re going to have an investigation. Dad says +it may even be necessary to close the schools for +a time.â€</p> + +<p>“What’s that?†exclaimed Jimmy, with sudden +animation.</p> + +<p>“Don’t tell Jimmy anything like that,†mocked +Herb. “It would simply break his heart. If +there’s anything he’s stuck on it’s school.â€</p> + +<p>“You fellows wouldn’t be tickled to death either +if you thought you were going to get a vacation, +would you?†retorted Jimmy. “I know you +birds.â€</p> + +<p>“Say, wouldn’t it give us lots of time for +radio!†said Bob enthusiastically. “I want to get +all the new wrinkles in that latest set of ours, and +we don’t have time to do it in the few evenings we +can spare from our home work.â€</p> + +<p>“You bet,†agreed Herb. “I don’t want there +to be any more sickness, but I sure do hope they +find it necessary to close the schools. That would +be just what the doctor ordered—in more senses +than one.â€</p> + +<p>“I wouldn’t shed any bitter tears myself,†admitted +Joe. “There’s going to be a meeting of +the Board of Health to consider the subject soon, +and I’ll give you fellows the tip the minute I hear +anything definite about what they decide to do.â€</p> + +<p>“In the meantime, suppose you fellows drop +around this evening for a little while,†suggested +Bob. “I want to try out some long distance receiving +and listen in on Chicago.â€</p> + +<p>All agreed to be there at about eight o’clock.</p> + +<p>The Laytons had barely finished dinner that +night when the door bell rang. Bob answered +the bell.</p> + +<p>He was surprised to find that the callers were +Mr. Looker and his son Buck. Both had dark +and angry looks on their faces.</p> + +<p>“I want to know,†said Mr. Looker abruptly, +“what you and your companions mean by burning +down my cottage!â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink06'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER VI—THE BURNED COTTAGE</a></h2> + +<p>“Nonsense!†exclaimed Bob. “What makes +you think we’d do a trick like that?â€</p> + +<p>“Never mind about that!†exclaimed the elder +Looker, furiously. “I supposed you’d deny it. I +want to see your father, young man.â€</p> + +<p>“Here he is,†and Mr. Layton, who had been +attracted to the door by Mr. Looker’s loud and +angry tones, emerged on to the porch. “What +can I do for you, Mr. Looker?â€</p> + +<p>“You can pay me for my house that your boy +and his companions burnt down,†said Mr. Looker +in angry tones.</p> + +<p>“I rather think you must be mistaken,†said +Mr. Layton. “What grounds have you for making +such a serious accusation?â€</p> + +<p>“My boy caught them red-handed after they’d +broken into the house, and made them get off my +property. It wasn’t six hours later that the place +was burned, and there’s no doubt in my mind that +your boy and his friends set it on fire just to get +even. They’ve always had a grudge against Buckley, +anyway, and are always doing all they can +to make life miserable for the poor fellow.â€</p> + +<p>“You know that isn’t true, Dad,†protested +Bob, hotly, “neither about the fire, nor about +Buck. He’s always the one that starts trouble.â€</p> + +<p>“You’ve got plenty of nerve, Looker, to come +here and make an accusation like this to me,†remarked +Mr. Layton, his usually kindly face stern +and set. “There are many ways that fire could +have occurred besides being deliberately set, and +you know it. Likely enough some tramps had +decided to spend the night there, and set it on +fire by accident. You had better get off my +property before I am tempted to throw you off.â€</p> + +<p>“It might not be so easy as you think,†sneered +the elder Looker, but nevertheless he began edging +toward the sidewalk. “If you don’t pay, +I’ll see my lawyer and have him bring action in +court. See if I don’t.â€</p> + +<p>“Suit yourself,†answered Mr. Layton, shrugging +his shoulders. “Your lawyer will tell you, +though, that you haven’t the shadow of a case. +As for your boy, he looks big enough to take care +of himself, and if he can’t, I don’t see what business +that is of mine.â€</p> + +<p>“I’ll show you,†threatened Mr. Looker, as he +turned down the walk. “Don’t worry about that. +Maybe somebody will be arrested.â€</p> + +<p>“As you please,†said Mr. Layton, with a grim +smile.</p> + +<p>Mr. Looker and his promising son reached the +sidewalk in sullen silence, while Bob and his father +watched them until they turned the corner of +the street.</p> + +<p>“Young Looker is a young bully, just as you +say, and his father would like to be,†said Mr. +Layton, seating himself in a rocking chair. “I +suppose you and Joe and the others are sure +you didn’t light a match for any purpose while +you were there?â€</p> + +<p>“Absolutely not, Dad,†asserted Bob. “We +weren’t inside that shack more than five minutes +the first time, and, with that bear outside, lighting +matches was the last thing we’d have thought +of. As soon as the bear’s owner captured him, +we went outside. We worked on the roof both +from outside and inside, and tried to patch the +thing up. We struck no matches. We were doing +the last few things inside when Buck came +along.â€</p> + +<p>“Tell me just what happened then,†directed +Mr. Layton.</p> + +<p>“Why, then there was a bit of an argument +with Buck,†grinned Bob. “We knew that the +place belonged to his father, and that there was +nothing for us to do but clear out. We came +right home from there, though, and you know +that we were all here listening to radio that entire +evening.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes, I remember that,†nodded his father. +“And I guess that would be a pretty convincing +alibi if Looker really should carry the case to +court. My opinion is, though, that he’s just bluffing, +and we’ll never hear any more of it.â€</p> + +<p>“I wish I did know who <i>was</i> responsible,†+speculated Bob. “Do you really think tramps +were responsible, Dad?â€</p> + +<p>“Very likely. Several barns have been burned +in this neighborhood from the same cause, you +know. I’m rather sorry that you and your friends +were around there the same day it happened, because +unless the real cause is discovered the +Lookers will never stop talking about it. However, +it’s a small matter and we’ll not think any +more about it. From what you tell me, the place +must have been falling apart, anyway.â€</p> + +<p>“I should say so,†laughed Bob. “We were +a surprised bunch when that roof caved in with +us. The place was so rickety it’s a wonder it +didn’t all come down then.â€</p> + +<p>“I’ll bet you were a scared bunch,†bantered +his father, a twinkle in his eyes.</p> + +<p>“I’ll say we were,†admitted Bob, honestly. “If +we’d had a gun with us, it would have been a +different story, though. Tony would have been +out one large, brown bear.â€</p> + +<p>“It’s just as well you didn’t,†said Mr. Layton, +dryly. “We’d have had Tony threatening a lawsuit, +too, if you had killed his pet bear.â€</p> + +<p>“It would have been a shame to do it,†admitted +Bob.</p> + +<p>For a few minutes they both sat silent, each +busy with his own thoughts.</p> + +<p>“I expect I’ll have to be away from home most +of next week, Bob,†said Mr. Layton, at length. +Bob looked at him expectantly, and he continued. +“There is a store at Mountain Pass being +offered at a bargain, and I’m strongly tempted +to buy it and operate it as a branch. I’m going +to look the ground over, anyway, and if it looks +as good then as it does now, I think I’ll buy.â€</p> + +<p>“That will be fine!†exclaimed Bob. “I’ve +heard a good deal about that place lately, and it +seems to be getting more popular all the time. If +you go will you take mother with you?â€</p> + +<p>Mr. Layton nodded, and waited expectantly for +the question that he knew was coming. Nor was +he wrong.</p> + +<p>“How about taking me along, Dad?†said Bob, +eagerly. “It will be a peach of a trip. They say +the scenery through Mountain Pass is the best +ever.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, I’ve thought of that, too, because I was +pretty sure you’d want to come. But I’m afraid +they’ll have you too busy in the high school this +term for us to manage it. I may have to be gone +two or three weeks, and that would be a serious +break in your studies.â€</p> + +<p>Bob urged and pleaded, but his father was +adamant, and at last Bob was forced reluctantly +to give up the idea of going.</p> + +<p>When he told the other radio boys about the +visit of the Lookers, they were as indignant as +he.</p> + +<p>“‘Like father, like son,’†quoted Joe. +“They’re two of a kind, that pair. But I guess +they didn’t get much satisfaction out of your +father, Bob.â€</p> + +<p>“I should say not!†laughed Bob. “If they +had said much more, I think we’d have treated +ourselves to the pleasure of throwing them into +the street.â€</p> + +<p>Bob then told them about his father’s projected +trip to Mountain Pass, and his disappointment at +not being allowed to accompany his parents.</p> + +<p>“That’s pretty tough,†said Jimmy, sympathetically. +“I know how you must feel. It would be a +swell trip, and they say the meals at the Mountain +Rest Hotel up at Mountain Pass are about the +best ever.â€</p> + +<p>“There you go!†exclaimed Bob, laughing. +“It’s a lucky thing for the hotel that you’re not +going. They’d lose money on you, sure as shooting.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, I’d try to get my money’s worth,†said +Jimmy, complacently.</p> + +<p>“You’d get it, too, no fear of that,†said Joe, +confidently.</p> + +<p>When this conversation took place, the boys +never dreamed that they might all be going to +Mountain Pass together in the near future. But +as events shaped themselves in the next few +days, this began to assume an aspect of probability.</p> + +<p>The epidemic of typhoid increased, and there +was something nearly approaching a panic in +Clintonia. Families began leaving the town every +day, and Dr. Atwood, as head of the town Board +of Health, finally issued orders that the schools +must close until the epidemic had been gotten +under control.</p> + +<p>When Bob heard this news, he could not, in +spite of the seriousness of the situation, suppress +a feeling of exultation. With school closed, the +main objection to his accompanying his parents +to Mountain Pass was removed, and he had little +doubt now that he could persuade them to take +him.</p> + +<p>The task was even easier than he had anticipated, +for the Laytons, like all the other towns-people, +were greatly alarmed over the rapid spread +of the sickness, and when Bob broached the subject +to them they readily consented to having +him go with them.</p> + +<p>“It’s an ill wind that blows nobody any good,†+thought Bob, and hurried away to seek his friends +and tell them the good news.</p> + +<p>He found all three of them in a state of excitement +equal to his own.</p> + +<p>“Dad wants us all to leave town, too,†declared +Joe. “He says there must be something +wrong with the water supply, and he wants us all +away until the trouble has been located and remedied.â€</p> + +<p>“My father says the same thing,†said Herb. +“The trouble is, that we’ll have to go to different +places, and that breaks up our combination for +goodness knows how long.â€</p> + +<p>“Maybe we could get our folks to let us all +stick together and go to Mountain Pass with +Bob,†ventured Jimmy. “It seems too good to be +true, though.â€</p> + +<p>“It’s an idea, anyway,†declared Joe. “You +certainly come out strong once in a while, Doughnuts. +It won’t do any harm to try, at any rate.â€</p> + +<p>The others agreed with this, and that night +besieged their parents to let them go to the mountain +resort. They succeeded more easily than +they had hoped, as the older people were too +worried over the situation, and too busy packing +up, to offer much resistance to the impetuous +lads.</p> + +<p>Early the next morning first Joe, and then +Herb and Jimmy, dropped into the Layton home, +to report their success to Bob.</p> + +<p>“Well, that’s great!†exclaimed the latter. +“Jimmy, you win the celluloid frying pan for +making that suggestion yesterday.â€</p> + +<p>“Huh! that’s about as useful as anything I’ll +ever get from you Indians,†snorted Jimmy. “I +ought to make you pay in advance for my ideas, +instead of giving them away so carelessly.â€</p> + +<p>“You’ll never get rich that way,†remarked +Joe. “But let’s cut out the comedy, fellows, and +get down to business. When are your folks +going to start for Mountain Pass, Bob?â€</p> + +<p>“The day after tomorrow.â€</p> + +<p>“Whew!†whistled Herb. “That means that +we’ll have to flash a little speed, doesn’t it?â€</p> + +<p>“I sha’n’t worry about that,†grinned Bob. +“I’m all ready to start this minute, so I’ll sit back +and watch you fellows hustle. It will be lots of +fun.â€</p> + +<p>“You won’t be able to see me, on account of +the dust I’ll raise,†announced Jimmy.</p> + +<p>“You’re going to stay at the Mountain Rest +Hotel, aren’t you, Bob?†asked Joe.</p> + +<p>“Sure! It’s the best hotel up there. The only +one, in fact; though I believe some of the natives +take a few people into their homes.â€</p> + +<p>“By the way,†said Herb. “Who’s said anything +to Mrs. or Mr. Layton about our joining +their party? Seems incredible, but maybe they +won’t want us.â€</p> + +<p>“Gee!†gasped Joe. “I never thought of that. +But maybe it’s so.â€</p> + +<p>“There’s mother now,†announced Bob. “Let’s +put it up to her.â€</p> + +<p>This they did, and her son’s three friends were +assured by Mrs. Layton that if their parents were +willing they should go she and Mr. Layton +would be glad to have them in their party.</p> + +<p>“That’s fixed then,†announced Jimmy. “I’m +off now, fellows. Next stop, Mountain Pass.â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink07'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER VII—RADIO WONDERS</a></h2> + +<p>That day and the next were busy ones for the +radio boys. The party was to go in two big +automobiles that Mr. Layton had hired, and the +boys had secured permission to take a small radio +set with them. On the morning set for their +departure they were ready to the last detail, and +it was not long before they and their belongings +were snugly packed into the two automobiles and +they were all on their way to the mountain resort.</p> + +<p>Although it was still only mid-autumn, the air +had a keen edge to it, the sky was gray and overcast, +and there was the indefinable feel of snow +in the air. The big cars rolled crisply through +long drifts of dead leaves, going at a lively pace, +as it was quite a journey to the resort, with many +steep grades to be encountered on the way. The +boys were warmly wrapped, and the keen air +only gave zest and added to their high spirits.</p> + +<p>“These cars ought to be equipped with a radio +set,†remarked Bob, a short time after they had +started. “I saw a picture the other day of a car +that was rigged up that way, with an antenna +from the radiator to a mast in the rear.â€</p> + +<p>“It’s not a bad idea, at that,†said Joe. “If a +person were going on a long tour, he could keep +in touch with the weather forecasts, and know +just what to expect the next day.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes, and when he camped for lunch, he could +have music while the coffee pot was boiling,†+said Herb. “Pretty soft, I’ll say.â€</p> + +<p>“He’d be out of luck if the static were bad, +though,†observed Jimmy.</p> + +<p>“Oh, it won’t be long before they’ll get around +that static nuisance,†said Bob. “Have you heard +of the latest method of overcoming it?â€</p> + +<p>The others had not, and Bob proceeded to explain.</p> + +<p>“At Rocky Point, Long Island, they put up +twelve radio towers, each four hundred and ten +feet high, in a row three miles long. Then they +hitched up a couple of two hundred kilowatt +alternators so that they run in synchronism. That +means four hundred kilowatts on the aerial, and +I guess that can plough through the worst static +that ever happened.â€</p> + +<p>“Four hundred kilowatts!†exclaimed Joe. +“That’s an awful lot of juice, Bob.â€</p> + +<p>“You bet it is,†agreed Bob, nodding his head. +“But it does the work. When they tested out this +system signals were received in Nauen, Germany, +of almost maximum strength, in spite of bad +weather conditions. You know they have a numbered +scale, running from nothing to ten, which +is maximum. Well, the Rocky Point signals were +classed as number nine, which means they were +almost maximum strength.â€</p> + +<p>“It must have been a terrible job to synchronize +those two alternators,†commented Joe.</p> + +<p>“No doubt of it,†agreed Bob. “This article +stated that they had to experiment for months +before they succeeded. Those machines turn +over at somewhere around twenty-two thousand +revolutions per minute, you know.â€</p> + +<p>“About three hundred and sixty-six times a +second,†said Joe, after a short mental calculation. +“Nothing slow about that, is there?â€</p> + +<p>“It’s fast enough to do the trick, anyway,†+agreed Bob. “Wouldn’t it be great to be in +charge of a station like that?â€</p> + +<p>The others agreed that it would, and for some +time they discussed this latest marvel of radio. +Then their minds were drawn away by the wonderful +scenery through which they were passing. +The leaves still left on the trees were tinted in +rich reds and browns, and as the big cars climbed +to higher levels the party had some wonderful +views of high hills and spreading valleys.</p> + +<p>But the sky became continually more leaden +and overcast, and the drivers put on more speed +in an effort to reach their destination before the +impending storm should start. But they had gone +only a short distance further when a few white +flakes came swirling silently down from the leaden +sky. Scattered at first, they rapidly increased in +numbers until the air was filled with swirling +sheets of white. The snow packed over the windshields +and powdered the occupants of the two +cars, and the drivers were forced to stop and +put up the side curtains. The snow hissed +through the branches of the trees and whispered +to the dead leaves, making the only sound in a +world that was rapidly changing from autumn +brown to winter white.</p> + +<p>With the side curtains adjusted as snugly as +possible, the party resumed its journey. The +fine, dry snow searched out every chink and opening +between the curtains, penetrating in some mysterious +manner where rain would have been kept +out. In a surprisingly short time it had thrown +a thick mantle over the road, and the cars began +to feel the drag of ploughing through it. Another +stop had to be made to put on tire chains, +and by this time it was plainly to be seen that +the drivers were becoming worried.</p> + +<p>They had still about a third of the distance to +cover, which included some of the worst grades +in that part of the country. The road had changed +from smooth macadam to a rough trail that required +careful driving even under the most favorable +conditions, and now the snow, drifting into +holes and depressions, hid them from sight, the +first intimation of their presence being a jolt and +slam as the wheels dropped into some pit that the +driver could easily have avoided otherwise. The +passengers were shaken about unmercifully, and +had to hold fast to anything handy to keep from +being thrown against the roof.</p> + +<p>“Good night!†exclaimed Herb, as one particularly +heavy jolt threw him from the seat and +left him floundering on the floor. “We won’t +have any springs left on the cars by the time we +reach the hotel, provided we ever do. I know +people who have driven over this road, and they +never mentioned its being so bad.â€</p> + +<p>“So have I,†said Bob, peering out through the +side curtains. “My private opinion is, that we’ve +gotten off the main road altogether. There was +a fork a way back, and I thought then that the +drivers turned in the wrong direction.â€</p> + +<p>“That hardly seems possible, Bob,†said Mr. +Layton. “They are both experienced drivers, and +are supposed to know this road like a book.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, likely enough I’m wrong,†said his son. +“If they did take the wrong fork, though, I suppose +they’ll soon find it out and turn back.â€</p> + +<p>But Bob was gifted with a keen sense of +direction, and it was not long before the little party +found that he had been correct in his surmise. +The leading car halted, the other followed suit, +and the drivers, beating their numbed hands together, +held a conference in the road.</p> + +<p>After a struggle with the fastenings of the side-curtain, +Mr. Layton descended and joined them. +The boys followed suit, leaving Mrs. Layton in +sole possession of the two cars.</p> + +<p>“We don’t rightly know how it happened, sir,†+said one of the drivers, addressing Mr. Layton; +“but somehow we’ve got off the right road in this +confounded snow, and I guess there’s nothing for +it but to turn and try to get back on it at the +place where we branched off.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, let’s do it then, as quickly as possible,†+said Mr. Layton, decisively. “The snow is getting +deeper every minute, and we can’t afford to +lose any more time. I thought you men knew +the road too well to make a mistake like that.â€</p> + +<p>One of the drivers muttered something about +“snow†and “can’t see nothin’ ten feet ahead,†+and they climbed into their seats, while the others +scattered to their places inside.</p> + +<p>The driver of the leading car stepped on the +electric starter button, but instead of the engine +starting there was a shock, a sharp snap of breaking +steel, and the starter motor whirred idly +around with no more effect on the engine than +one of the thickly fallen snowflakes.</p> + +<p>The driver uttered a fierce exclamation. “There +goes that starter spring again!†he exclaimed. +“Now I’ll have to crank the blamed engine every +time I want to start for the rest of this trip.â€</p> + +<p>He fished around under the front seat, produced +a starting crank, and tried to turn the engine +over by hand. In his haste, however, he +had forgotten to retard the spark, and as he +lunged down on the crank with all his strength, +the motor backfired, the crank spun around several +times, and the driver staggered back, his +right arm hanging limp and useless.</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink08'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER VIII—A CLOSE SHAVE</a></h2> + +<p>Mrs. Layton uttered a scream, and the others +looked at each other a second with blank faces. +Then they jumped out and surrounded the unfortunate +driver, who was gazing at his injured +arm in a dazed fashion. Mr. Layton made a +quick examination, and pronounced that the wrist +was badly sprained. Fortunately, they had a +complete medical outfit in one of the cars, including +splints, and Mr. Layton contrived to bind +up the injured wrist after a fashion, and then +suspended the arm in a sling.</p> + +<p>“But who’s going to drive the car?†asked the +uninjured chauffeur, after this operation had been +completed. “If none of you people knows how +to drive, we’re in a pretty bad fix.â€</p> + +<p>“I’ll drive,†volunteered Bob. “You lead the +way, and I guess I’ll manage to keep near +you.â€</p> + +<p>“Are you sure you can do it, Bob?†questioned +his father, anxiously. He had great faith in +his son’s ability, and liked to have the lad take +a certain amount of responsibility.</p> + +<p>“Sure, Dad. Watch and see,†was the quick +answer.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know about this,†said the chauffeur, +with the professional’s distrust of the amateur. +“We could all pack in one car in a pinch, you +know, and leave the other here.â€</p> + +<p>“But that would so overload one car that we’d +have very little chance of getting there without a +breakdown,†argued Bob. “Don’t worry about +my driving. I’ll manage somehow.â€</p> + +<p>“I’ll bet you will,†said Joe. “You’ll have to +move lively to keep from being run over,†he +told the driver.</p> + +<p>“Quit your kiddin’,†said the chauffeur, unbelievingly. +“We’ll have to hit the high spots +from now on, and it ain’t goin’ to be an easy +job holdin’ those boilers on the road.â€</p> + +<p>Somewhat against his mother’s will, Bob +cranked the motor of the car he was to drive, +but took care to see that the spark was fully retarded, +in consequence of which he started the +engine without any trouble. The injured driver +occupied the other half of the driver’s seat, so +as to give Bob pointers in handling the car if +they were needed.</p> + +<p>But he soon found that Bob required very little +of his advice. It was some time since he had +driven a car, and at first he was a little slow at +gear shifting, but soon got the “feel†of that +particular car and from then on shifted with the +ease and deft certainty of an expert. As a matter +of fact, Bob possessed the knack of handling +machinery, without which no one can really claim +to be a good driver.</p> + +<p>The injured driver was not long in recognizing +this. Shortly after they had reached the main +road and were once more headed for their destination, +they encountered a steep grade, something +over a mile in length. Both cars were going at +a fair speed when they felt the first tug of gravity, +but so sharp was the grade that they lost way +rapidly, and it became necessary to shift into a +lower speed. Bob did not wait until they had +slowed down too much. With a quick shove he +disengaged the clutch, shifted into neutral, and +then dropped the clutch into the engagement, at +the same time accelerating the engine momentarily. +This causes the idle gears on the jack-shaft +to revolve, after which it is comparatively +easy to mesh the intermediate gear combination. +Bob had no difficulty in doing this, and with his +gears properly engaged, he let in the clutch again +and stepped on the accelerator. The car surged +forward, ploughing through the snow and skidding +from side to side as it fought its way up the +steep gradient.</p> + +<p>In a few moments they caught up with the leading +car, which was in difficulties. Its driver had +waited too long before attempting to shift, and +the car had slowed down so much by the time he +got into intermediate that it would not pick up +even in that speed, and he was forced to shift +into low.</p> + +<p>“I’ll bet that young feller that’s driving Jim’s +car is stalled somewhere at the bottom of this +hill,†he thought. “Hope I don’t have to wait +too long for him after I reach the top. This road +is no place for an amateur to drive, anyway. +I——â€</p> + +<p>Honk! Honk! The raucous note of Bob’s +horn broke in upon his thoughts, and he glanced, +startled, through the rear windows, to see the +other car looming through the drifting storm.</p> + +<p>Too late he tried frantically to speed up and +avoid the humiliation of being passed by one +whom he condescendingly termed an amateur. +Resistless as fate the pursuing car drew abreast, +and then went on past in a cloud of fine snow +kicked up by the spinning rear wheels. He muttered +morosely to himself as he caught a glimpse +of grinning faces through the dim windows of +the storm curtains, but was conscious of a feeling +of admiration, too, for the daring young +driver.</p> + +<p>“Say, son, I’ve got to hand it to you!†+exclaimed Jim, the injured chauffeur. “You know +how to handle a car with the best of ’em.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, I didn’t care so much about passing him, +but I didn’t want to slow down,†explained Bob, +never for an instant taking his eyes from the +road. “It’s against my principles to put on brakes +when I’m going up a hill.â€</p> + +<p>“I figure the same way myself,†admitted the +other. “Now that we’re ahead, we might as +well stay ahead. I’ll tell you which way to turn, +an’ I guess between us we’ll get through all right.â€</p> + +<p>But many miles still lay between them and +their destination, and the storm showed no sign +of abating. Softly, silently, but implacably the +white flakes continued to pile up that clinging +carpet over the road until driving became more +a matter of guesswork and instinct than anything +else. For a time the injured chauffeur gave Bob +directions and advice, but at length he came to +the conclusion that this boy behind the wheel was +very capable of doing the right thing in the right +place, and he sat silent, gripping the seat and +pressing on imaginary pedals when they got in +tight places.</p> + +<p>They were making good progress, considering +the adverse conditions, and were within perhaps +ten miles of their destination when suddenly, +through the whirling snow, Bob glimpsed another +car swinging into the main road not fifteen feet +from him. Both cars were going at a fast speed, +but the drivers caught sight of each other at almost +the same instant, and both jammed on their +brakes. The cars swayed and skidded, and the +occupants of both started from their seats, believing +a collision inevitable. Nothing could have +averted this had not Bob, quick as lightning, +wrenched his wheel around, bringing his car into +a course almost parallel with the other. For a +few brief seconds the outcome lay in the hand +of fate. When the two cars finally came to a +jarring halt, they were side by side, with not six +inches between their running boards.</p> + +<p>The door of the other car, which was a sedan, +burst open, and a small, red-faced and white-haired +man leaped out and shook a belligerent +fist at Bob.</p> + +<p>“What do you mean by driving that car at +such a rate of speed?†he shrilled. “You were +breaking every speed law there is, young man, +and I’ll make you sorry for it, or my name isn’t +Gilbert Salper.â€</p> + +<p>“But your car was going faster than ours, and +there isn’t any damage done, anyway,†Bob +pointed out, as he wriggled from behind the wheel +and descended to the road.</p> + +<p>“No damage done?†echoed the other, waving +his hands excitedly. “You almost scared my wife +and daughters into fits, and yet you have the +nerve to stand there and tell me there is no +damage done. What do you mean by it?â€</p> + +<p>Before Bob could make an indignant reply, a +lady wrapped in costly furs stepped from the +sedan and laid a soothing hand on the irate old +gentleman’s shoulder.</p> + +<p>“I’m sure it wasn’t the young man’s fault, +Gilbert,†she said, in a pleasant voice. “Indeed, +I think it was his quick action that prevented a +collision. Jules was at fault in coming on to the +main road without slowing down or blowing his +horn.â€</p> + +<p>“They were both going too fast, I say!†insisted +her husband. “But I suppose we ought +to be thankful that we are still alive, after undertaking +such a fool trip. Next time we’ll do +what I want and stay at home.â€</p> + +<p>The gentleman fumed and fussed a little +longer, but at length his wife and daughters succeeded +in enticing him back into his car. The +latter were both unusually pretty girls, and as +they coaxed their father back into good humor, +Joe, who was in the car driven by Bob, whispered +that he hoped they were also bound for the +Mountain Rest Hotel.</p> + +<p>Mr. Salper was a wealthy Wall Street broker, +whose pocketbook was much longer than his temper. +Although irascible and prone to “fly off +the handle†at the slightest provocation, he was +at bottom a kindly man, and one who would do +anything for those he cared for. Like many +others, his health had suffered in the process of +money making, and his physician had ordered him +to give up business for a month or two and rest.</p> + +<p>The broker owned a house not far from the big +hotel at Mountain Pass, and the family frequently +came to the place, both in the winter and +the summer. They were well known at the hotel +itself for they often ran over to take meals there +and to visit with some of the patrons.</p> + +<p>By the time his daughters had succeeded in +calming the broker’s excitement, the second car +of the Layton party came up, and it was decided +that the three cars should keep close together +for the rest of the journey, in order to render +mutual aid if it should be needed. The snow had +attained a depth of six or eight inches by this +time, and it was only with the greatest difficulty +that they even managed to start again. But +finally they got straightened out and resumed their +bucking of the hills and snow.</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink09'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER IX—BUCKING THE DRIFTS</a></h2> + +<p>It was heartbreaking work, for from that point +on the road ascended steadily toward the top of +the mountain, with hardly a level spot on it. A +mile ahead lay the Pass, a narrow gorge in which +the snow had drifted so deep as to make it almost +impassable.</p> + +<p>The car that Bob was driving was in the lead, +and as they neared this dangerous place the disabled +chauffeur gave him a word of advice.</p> + +<p>“Open ’er wide, son,†he counseled. “We’ll +have to buck drifts maybe two feet deep or more, +and if we once have to stop, it means we’ll stay +there until somebody comes and digs us out. +Give ’er all she’ll take, and hold her on the road +if you can.â€</p> + +<p>Bob nodded, and opened the throttle little by +little, while the chauffeur held his foot on the +muffler cut-out pedal, in order to relieve the engine +of all back pressure. Just before they +reached the Pass, by some freak of the wind the +road had been swept clear of snow for several +hundred feet, and this gave the car an opportunity +to gather speed.</p> + +<p>Faster and faster it flew, until the speedometer +needle registered fifty miles an hour. Then +through the driving snow the entrance to the +Pass loomed ahead, and the chauffeur gave an +exclamation.</p> + +<p>Before them was a snowdrift that looked almost +as high as their car, stretching solidly across +the road and leaving Bob not the shadow of a +chance to dodge. He set his teeth, opened the +throttle to the limit, and gripped the wheel with +wrists braced strong as steel bars.</p> + +<p>The heavy car hurtled into the drift with the +force of a projectile shot from a big gun, throwing +clouds of snow in every direction as it bored +resistlessly through. The car skidded and twisted +in every direction, and it was a supreme test of +Bob’s strength and skill to keep the powerful +machine on its course. Big rocks lined the road, +and more than once they shaved past these with +only inches to spare.</p> + +<p>Resistless with its initial momentum, the big +car was nevertheless gradually losing speed as it +penetrated further into the drift and the passive +but deadly resistance of the snow began more and +more to make itself felt. The engine began to +labor, and Bob was on the point of shifting +speeds, when suddenly the car broke through the +farther side of the drift, seemed to shake the +clinging flakes from it, and began to pick up +speed again.</p> + +<p>Those composing the little party never forgot +the gruelling battle against odds that followed. +The blustering wind had piled the snow in great +drifts in some places, and in others had swept the +road so clean that the frozen brown earth was +visible for some distance.</p> + +<p>On these stretches they would pick up speed, +and then charge into the drifts and repeat the +former battle. Over and over they did this, Bob +driving like a master, with steely blue eyes fastened +grimly on the road ahead, jaws set, and a +face that looked ten years older than it really +was. Those in the car spoke words of encouragement +from time to time, but he was too busy +and concentrated on his task to answer with anything +other than a brief nod.</p> + +<p>For what seemed like an age they ploughed +through one huge drift after another, with the +high rocky walls of the Pass frowning down at +them till at last the rugged hills fell back from the +road, the air lightened, and they were through the +Pass, with less than two miles between them and +the warmth and shelter of the hotel. The road +now ran along a high ridge, which the wind had +swept clear of snow, and Bob stopped the car and +relaxed with a great sigh.</p> + +<p>“Guess we’d better wait for the others to catch +up,†he said. “We broke a path for them, though, +and it ought to be a lot easier for them than it +was for us.â€</p> + +<p>“You must be all in, Bob,†said Joe. “You +handled this car like an old timer, but now it’s +about time you had a relief. Why not let me +take a hack at it for the rest of the way?â€</p> + +<p>But Bob laughed, and shook his head. “I +wouldn’t have missed that for a farm,†he said. +“It was hard work, but it was the best kind of +sport, too. Besides, Jim here says that the road +runs along this ridge almost to the doors of the +hotel, and it will be easy sailing the rest of the +way.â€</p> + +<p>“I wonder what has become of the other cars?†+said Mr. Layton, in a worried tone. “I hope nothing +has happened to them.â€</p> + +<p>He had hardly ceased speaking, when one of +the automobiles appeared, so covered with snow +that it was hard to believe that it was actually a +car at all. Shortly afterward the Salper car appeared, +came to a halt when its driver saw the +other two at a standstill, and its French chauffeur +descended and advanced stiffly to where Bob and +the driver of the second Layton car were standing.</p> + +<p>“Pah!†he exclaimed. “In all France there is +no road like that which I have just traverse. I +am hire to drive ze petrol car, not ze snow plough. +It eez ze so great mystery zat we have arrive so +far.â€</p> + +<p>“Mystery is right,†agreed Jim, the injured +driver. “The only casualty up to date is my +busted wing, which is a lot better than a busted +neck. But you’d better get back in your glass +house, Frenchy, because we’re all frozen stiff, +and the sooner we land at the hotel, the better. +My arm feels as though it must be broken in +twenty places.â€</p> + +<p>The Frenchman looked doubtfully at Jim when +he spoke of an injured “wing,†but evidently set +it down as being one more incomprehensible +vagary of the English language, for he only +shrugged his shoulders and returned to his car +without comment.</p> + +<p>The short day was drawing rapidly into night +when the little party at last saw the cheerful lights +of the hotel shining through the storm. Fifteen +minutes later the lads were all seated in front of +a roaring open fire in the big parlor and were +telling their experiences to the amazed guests.</p> + +<p>Bob was the only uncomfortable one in the +crowd, as he heard everybody speaking in praise +of the way he had risen to the emergency and +was thankful for more reasons than one when +dinner was announced.</p> + +<p>“Dinner!†exclaimed Jimmy, rapturously. +“Bob, I’ve got to hand it to you. Not only do +you get us here through a howling blizzard, but +you land us just in time for a turkey dinner. Oh +my, oh my!â€</p> + +<p>The Mountain Rest Hotel had a reputation for +serving generous meals, and for this the boys +were thankful that night. Through all the long, +cold day they had eaten nothing but a few sandwiches, +and now they strove to make up for lost +time. Not in vain, either. Even Jimmy had to +own up that he could not eat another mouthful, +which was a statement he could seldom truthfully +make.</p> + +<p>Owing to the sickness in Clintonia, there had +been an unprecedented rush of visitors to the +hotel, and the Layton party discovered that they +would have to take one of the small cottages adjoining +the hotel, although they would board in +the main establishment.</p> + +<p>The cottage was snug and comfortable, however, +and they were all delighted with it. Indeed, +it was better for the radio boys than rooms +in the hotel, because they could set up their receiving +set more readily. Of course, it was out +of the question to erect an outdoor aerial, but +they were not bothered by this and decided to use +a loop aerial instead. They had brought with +them a knock-down frame on which to wind their +antenna, and this frame could be moved around +and set against the wall when not in use.</p> + +<p>The first night at Mountain Pass they had little +thought, however, even for their beloved radio, +and were content to tumble into bed shortly after +dinner. But the next day they were up early, and +after a hearty breakfast set to work to put up +their set.</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink10'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER X—CONVINCING A SKEPTIC</a></h2> + +<p>It was a simple matter for the boys to wind +the loop aerial, for they had become expert in +the manipulation of wire, tape, and the numerous +other accessories that go with the art of wireless +telephony. After the aerial was completed +they unpacked their receiving set and quickly connected +it up. They worked skillfully and efficiently, +and before the lunch bell rang at noon +they were ready to receive signals.</p> + +<p>But even their enthusiasm was not proof against +the seductive summons of the genial looking old +darky who rang the bell, and they washed hastily +and started for the dining room at a pace that +would have reflected credit on the hungriest +boarder who ever lived.</p> + +<p>“Gang way, Bob!†panted Jimmy, as they +clattered down the last flight of stairs and dashed +for the entrance to the hotel. “I’m hungry, and, +therefore, desperate. Get out of the way before +I trip over you!â€</p> + +<p>“Good night!†shouted Bob. “You’re getting +too fresh to live, Jimmy,†and he picked up a +handful of snow and dropped it carefully and +with precision down Jimmy’s fat neck.</p> + +<p>“Ugh!†exclaimed that corpulent youth, stopping +short in his wild rush and digging snow +from under his collar. “I’ll get even with you +for that, Bob, you old hobo. Just you wait!â€</p> + +<p>“Can’t wait a second,†grinned Bob. “I don’t +want to be late and miss all the good things, even +if you do.â€</p> + +<p>“Come on, Doughnuts, don’t stand there all +day picking snow off you,†entreated Herb. “I +can’t see where there’s any fun in that.â€</p> + +<p>Jimmy reached down, packed a handful of +snow, and sent it flying after the others. They +were close to the door, however, and ducked in +unscathed, while the snowball spread out in a big +patch against the door casing.</p> + +<p>Jimmy did not allow himself to be delayed very +long at any time when there was food in prospect, +however, and his friends had hardly seated themselves +at the table when he came in, his collar +badly dampened, but his appetite in prime condition. +He shook his fist surreptitiously at the +others, but he was incapable of staying angry +long, and was soon his usual jolly and happy-go-lucky +self.</p> + +<p>The snowstorm had stopped during the night, +the weather had grown warmer, and a brilliant +sun now shone down on a dazzlingly white world. +The snow had come ahead of time, as all the +“regulars†at the Mountain Rest Hotel united in +asserting, and now it gave every indication of +disappearing as fast as it had come.</p> + +<p>The boys wanted to get back to their radio set +after dinner, but the snow looked so inviting that +they could not resist the temptation to have a +snow fight. Some of the men, seeing them hard +at it, cast dignity to the winds and joined them, +until quite a miniature battle was raging. Ammunition +was plentiful, and there was a good +deal of shouting and laughter before both sides +became tired and agreed to call it a draw.</p> + +<p>The radio boys were pretty damp with snow +water, and their hands were stiff with cold, but +trifling discomforts such as these did not bother +them much. They had had a good time, and they +knew that there is seldom any fun that does not +have its own drawbacks. They went to their +rooms, changed the wettest of their clothing for +dry articles, and were soon ready to test their +set.</p> + +<p>They were just making a final inspection of +their connections when Mr. Layton entered the +room, accompanied by two other gentlemen.</p> + +<p>Mr. Layton introduced the two latter as the +owners of the store he was thinking of purchasing.</p> + +<p>“Mr. Blackford and Mr. Robins are rather +skeptical about radio,†explained Mr. Layton, +when the introductions had been duly accomplished. +“I happened to mention it this morning, +and as they both seemed to think I was exaggerating +its possibilities, I asked them here to see and +hear for themselves.â€</p> + +<p>“It’s no trouble to show goods,†said Bob, +grinning. “We haven’t tested for signals yet, +but the set is all hooked up, and I guess all we’ll +have to do is tune up and get about anything you +want.â€</p> + +<p>“You seem pretty confident,†remarked one of +the two strangers, Mr. Robins. “My opinion is, +that this radio stuff is mostly bunk. A friend +of mine bought a set just a little while ago, and +he couldn’t hear a thing with it. Paid fifteen dollars +for it, too.â€</p> + +<p>“I shouldn’t imagine he could,†said Bob, drily. +“Mountain Pass must be at least a hundred miles +from the nearest broadcasting station, and that +set you speak of could never be expected to catch +anything more than twenty-five miles away, at the +most.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, I’ll bet dollars to doughnuts you can’t +hear anything with that outfit you’ve got there, +either,†broke in the other of the two strangers.</p> + +<p>“You’d lose your money, Blackford,†said Bob’s +father. “Go ahead and convince these doubting +Thomases, Bob.â€</p> + +<p>Bob adjusted a headset over his ears and +switched on the current through the vacuum bulb +filament. Then he manipulated the voltage of the +“B,†or high voltage, dry battery, and also varied +the current flowing through the filament by means +of a rheostat connected in series with it. Almost +immediately he caught a far-away sound of music, +and by manipulation of the variometer and condenser +knobs gradually increased the strength of +the sounds.</p> + +<p>Meantime Mr. Layton’s two acquaintances had +watched proceedings with open skepticism, and +often glanced knowingly at each other. But suddenly, +as Bob twisted the knob of the variable +condenser, the music became so loud that all in +the room could hear it, even though they had no +receivers over their ears.</p> + +<p>“If either of you two gentlemen will put these +receivers on, he’ll be convinced that radio is no +fake,†said Bob quietly, at the same time removing +his headset and holding it out.</p> + +<p>After a moment’s hesitation Mr. Robins donned +the receivers, and a startled look came over his +face, replacing the incredulous expression it had +worn heretofore.</p> + +<p>“Let’s hook up another set of phones, Bob, and +let Mr. Blackford listen at the same time,†suggested +Joe.</p> + +<p>This was done, and soon both skeptics were +listening to their first radio concert. Mr. Layton +regarded them with an amused smile. Mr. +Robins extended his hand curiously toward the +condenser knob, and immediately the music died +away. He pulled his hand hastily away, and the +sounds resumed their former volume.</p> + +<p>“Don’t be frightened,†laughed Mr. Layton. +“It won’t bite you.â€</p> + +<p>“But what made it fade away in that fashion?†+asked Mr. Robins.</p> + +<p>“Don’t ask me,†said Bob’s father. “I’m not +up on radio the way the boys are. I enjoy it, +without knowing much of the <i>modus operandi</i>.â€</p> + +<p>“That was caused by what is known as ‘body +capacity,’†explained Bob. “Every human being +is more or less of a natural condenser, and when +you get near the regular condenser in that set, it +puts more capacity into the circuit, and interferes +with its balance.â€</p> + +<p>The other nodded, although in reality he understood +very little of even this simple explanation. +He was too much absorbed in listening to what +was going on in the phones.</p> + +<p>As he listened, he heard the latest stock market +quotations given out, among them being the last +minute prices of some shares he happened to be +interested in. He slapped his knee enthusiastically, +and when the last quotations had been given, +he snatched off the headset and leaped to his feet.</p> + +<p>“I’m converted!†he fairly shouted. “I’ll buy +this outfit right as it stands for almost any price +you fellows want to put on it. What will you +sell it for?â€</p> + +<p>The boys were taken aback by this unexpected +offer, and all looked at Bob expectantly.</p> + +<p>“Why, we hadn’t even thought of selling the +set,†he said slowly. “We wouldn’t sell it right +now, at any price, I think. But when we leave +here to go back home, I suppose we might let you +have it. How about it, fellows?â€</p> + +<p>After some argument they agreed to this, but +Mr. Robins was so determined to have the set +that he would not be put off.</p> + +<p>“Now look here,†he said. “I’m a business +man, and I’ll make you a business proposition. +I’ll buy that outfit right now, before I leave this +room, at your own figure. But you fellows can +keep it here and have the use of it just the same +as you have now, only it will be understood that +I’ll have the privilege of coming over here once a +day in time to hear those market reports. At the +same time you can teach me something about +operating the thing. How does that strike you?†+and he threw himself back in his chair and waited +for his answer.</p> + +<p>“We’ll have to talk over that offer for a little +while,†said Bob. “Give us ten minutes or so, +and we’ll give you an answer.â€</p> + +<p>“That’s all right,†replied Mr. Robins. “While +I’m waiting I’ll just put on those ear pieces again +and see what’s doing.â€</p> + +<p>The radio boys left the room and held an excited +conference downstairs. After some discussion +they agreed to sell their set, as long as they +could have the use of it during their stay at the +resort, but the matter of price proved to be a +knotty problem. Bob produced pencil and paper, +and they figured the actual cost of the set to themselves, +and then what the same set would have +cost if bought ready made in a retail store.</p> + +<p>“The actual material in that set didn’t cost us +much over forty dollars, but we put a whole lot +of time and experience into it,†said Bob, “It +would cost him close to a hundred to get as good +a one in a store.â€</p> + +<p>“It’s a mighty good set, too,†said Joe, a note +of regret in his voice. “We might make another +as near like it as possible, and not get nearly as +good results.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, don’t worry. We’re some radio builders +by this time,†Herb reminded him. “Besides, +that isn’t the only set we’ve got.â€</p> + +<p>“Let’s ask him eighty dollars,†ventured +Jimmy. “He’ll be getting it cheaper then than he +could buy it retail, and we’ll be picking up a nice +piece of change.â€</p> + +<p>“I think that ought to be about the right +figure,†agreed Bob. “Does that suit this board +of directors? Eighty hard, round iron men?â€</p> + +<p>The others grinned assent, and they returned +to the room where the older men were still seated +about the radio set.</p> + +<p>“Well, what’s the verdict?†inquired Mr. +Robins, glancing keenly from one to the other.</p> + +<p>“We’ve decided to sell,†replied Bob. “The +price will be eighty dollars.â€</p> + +<p>Without a word Mr. Robins produced a roll of +greenbacks, and counted off the specified amount +in crisp bills.</p> + +<p>“You’ll want a receipt, won’t you, Robins?†inquired +Mr. Layton.</p> + +<p>“Not necessary,†replied the other. “I’ve got +a hunch that your son and his friends are on the +level and won’t try to cheat an old fellow like me. +I’ll have to be going now, but I’ll be around about +the same time tomorrow morning to get the +stock quotations. Coming, Blackford?â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink11'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XI—A MOUNTAIN RADIO STATION</a></h2> + +<p>Left to themselves, the boys looked at one another.</p> + +<p>“That’s what I call quick work,†remarked Joe. +“I hate to let the old set go, but they say you +should never mix sentiment with business.â€</p> + +<p>“Maybe this will lessen your grief,†said Bob. +“Eighty divided by four makes twenty, or at least +that’s what they always taught us in school. +Take these four five-dollar bills, Joe, and dry +your tears with them.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, boy!†exclaimed Joe.</p> + +<p>“Money, how welcome you are!†ejaculated +Herb, as he pocketed his share. “What I can’t +do with twenty dollars!â€</p> + +<p>“That will buy exactly two thousand doughnuts,†+calculated Jimmy, a rapturous expression +on his round countenance. “Hot doughnuts, +crisp brown doughnuts, doughnuts with jelly in +them, doughnuts——â€</p> + +<p>A human avalanche precipitated itself on the +corpulent youngster, and he found himself +writhing on the floor with his three companions seated +comfortably on different parts of his ample +anatomy.</p> + +<p>“Hey! Quit, quit!†stuttered Jimmy. “Get +off me, you hobos! You’ll have me flattened out +like a dog that’s just been run over by a steam +roller.â€</p> + +<p>“And serve you right, too,†retorted Joe. +“What do you mean by talking about doughnuts +when it’s almost dinner time, and we’re starved to +death, anyway. Besides, you know there isn’t a +place at Mountain Pass where we can buy them.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes, and if I’d known that before I started, I +would probably have stayed at home,†retorted +Jimmy. “Get off me, will you, before I throw +you off?â€</p> + +<p>“We’ll let you up, but I doubt if you should be +trusted with all that money,†returned Bob, grinning. +“You’d better whack it up among us, +Jimmy. You’ll just buy a lot of junk with it and +make yourself sick.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, I’ve got a right to get sick if I want to,†+said his rotund friend, struggling to his feet. +“If you get that twenty away from me, it will +have to be over my dead body.â€</p> + +<p>“It doesn’t seem worth while to kill him for +just twenty dollars,†said Bob, pretending to consider. +“That’s just a little over six dollars +apiece.â€</p> + +<p>“No good,†said Joe, decisively. “It would +cost more than that to bury him.â€</p> + +<p>“You’re a cold-blooded set of bandits,†complained +Jimmy, in an aggrieved tone. “I’m glad +I haven’t got a hundred dollars with me. I’d be +a mighty poor insurance risk then, I suppose.â€</p> + +<p>“I wouldn’t give a lead nickel for your +chances,†said Bob. “But don’t let that worry +you, Jimmy. You’ll probably never have that +much money all at one time as long as you live.â€</p> + +<p>“I won’t if I wait for you fellows to give it to +me,†admitted his friend. “But I’m going over +to the hotel and see if dinner is served yet. I’m +not going to be the last one in the dining room at +<i>every</i> meal.â€</p> + +<p>“When you get the hang of this place, you’ll +always be the first one,†said Herb. “After a +little while they’ll make you up a bunk in a corner, +and you can even sleep there.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, go chase yourself!†exclaimed Jimmy. +“You never learned how to eat, Herb, and that’s +why you’re such a human bean pole,†and with +this parting shot he slammed the door behind him +before Herb could think of a suitable reply.</p> + +<p>“He got you that time, Herb,†said Bob, with +a grin. “I guess we might as well all get ready +for dinner. Dad says they hate to have people +coming in late.â€</p> + +<p>Every day after that Mr. Robins dropped in in +time to hear the market reports, sometimes alone, +and at others accompanied by his partner, Mr. +Blackford. The latter was not quite so enthusiastic +as his colleague, but he was nevertheless +greatly interested, and was always glad to don a +head set and hear what was going on.</p> + +<p>True to their agreement, the boys instructed the +new owner of the set how to adjust it and get the +best results. He always paid the closest attention +to what they told him, and in a few days could +pick up signals and tune the set fairly well.</p> + +<p>“Not bad for an old fellow, eh?†he exclaimed +delightedly one day, when he had accomplished +the whole thing without any aid from the boys. +“If Blackford and I sell out to your father, Bob, +I’ll have a little leisure time, and blame it all if +I don’t think I’ll do some experimenting and possibly +some building myself.â€</p> + +<p>“You’re pretty badly bitten by the radio bug,†+observed his partner.</p> + +<p>“I won’t try to deny it,†said the other, emphatically. +“The more I think about it, the more +wonderful it seems. Besides, it’s got a mighty +practical side to it. I was holding on to some +shares a few days ago until I learned by way of +the radio that they were starting to fall. I sent +a telegram to my brokers, they sold out for me +just in the nick of time, and I made a profit on +the deal instead of having to take a loss. The +bottom dropped clean out of the market that same +afternoon, and if I’d been holding on to those +shares, I would have gotten bumped good and +hard.â€</p> + +<p>The other nodded. “It’s a good investment +when you look at it that way,†he admitted.</p> + +<p>“Good investment is right,†declared his partner. +“I saved a lot more in that deal than the +whole radio outfit cost me, and I still own the +set.â€</p> + +<p>“I wonder why the new government wireless +station doesn’t do something of the kind,†remarked +Mr. Blackford. “They might as well +make themselves useful as well as ornamental.â€</p> + +<p>“Government station!†exclaimed Bob and Joe +at once. “Is there a government station at Mountain +Pass?â€</p> + +<p>Mr. Blackford nodded. “I thought you fellows +knew about it, or I’d have mentioned it before,†+he said. “It was just opened a few weeks +ago, and I don’t think they’ve got all their equipment +in yet. There’s been some delay in getting +the stuff here, I understand.â€</p> + +<p>“What does the government want of a wireless +station away up here?†asked Bob.</p> + +<p>“This is the highest point in all the surrounding +country and makes an ideal lookout for forest +fires,†said his informant. “The station was supposed +to be ready for use last summer, but, as I +say, was delayed a good deal. But we expect it +to be of great service in the future. There have +been some disastrous forest fires around here in +the last few years, as you probably know.â€</p> + +<p>“We ought, to know it,†remarked Joe. “The +smoke has been so thick as far away as Clintonia +sometimes that you could cut it with a hatchet. +It’s about time something was done to stop it.â€</p> + +<p>Of course, once they heard about the government +station, the boys could think of nothing else +until they had visited it. Bob proposed that they +go right after lunch, and this met with the enthusiastic +approval of his friends. Poor Jimmy +was so rushed by his eager friends that he was +frustrated in his design of asking for a second +helping of chocolate pudding, and was hurried +away protesting vainly against such unseemly +haste.</p> + +<p>“What do you Indians think you’re doing?†he +grumbled. “Do you all want to die of indigestion? +Don’t you know you’re supposed to rest +after a meal and give your stomach a chance?â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, dry up,†said Joe, heartlessly. “If you +didn’t eat so much you wouldn’t want to lie +around for two hours after every meal like a +Brazilian anaconda. You know you didn’t want +another plate of that pudding, anyway.â€</p> + +<p>“Didn’t I!†said Jimmy, disconsolately. “That +was about the best pudding I ever tasted, bar +none. You fellows are such radio bugs that you +can’t even pay proper attention to what you’re +eating.â€</p> + +<p>“You give enough attention to that to make up +for the whole gang,†said Bob. “Stop your +growling and step along lively, old timer.â€</p> + +<p>Jimmy grumbled a little more in spite of this +admonition, but regained his usual cheery mood +when he saw the steel lattice-work towers with +the familiar antenna sweeping in graceful spans +between them, and forgot all about the missing +plate of pudding.</p> + +<p>The station was situated some distance from +the Mountain Rest Hotel in a clearing cut out of +the dense pine woods, and the boys ceased to +wonder why they had not discovered it on some +of their rambles. As they drew near they could +see that everything was solidly and substantially +built, as is usually the case with government work.</p> + +<p>The station, besides the towers, comprised a +large, comfortable building, which housed all the +sending and receiving equipment, and a smaller +building, in which the operators slept when off +duty, and where spare equipment was stored.</p> + +<p>The radio boys knocked at the door of the +larger building, and after a short wait it was +opened by a tall, rather frail looking young fellow, +who eyed them inquiringly.</p> + +<p>Bob explained that he and his friends were +radio fans, and were anxious to look over the +station, if it would not cause too much inconvenience.</p> + +<p>“Not a bit of it,†said the young operator, +heartily. “To tell you the truth, there is not +much doing here at this time of year, and company +is mighty welcome. Step in and I’ll be glad +to show you around the place.â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink12'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XII—THE MARVELOUS SCIENCE</a></h2> + +<p>Inside of half an hour the boys were on a +friendly footing with the young operator and felt +as though they had known him a long time. He +was only a few years older than themselves, and +had been a full-fledged operator for about six +months. The Mountain Pass station was his +first assignment, and he was inordinately proud +of the complicated apparatus that went to compose +it.</p> + +<p>“This is some little station that Uncle Sam has +rigged up here, and while there are plenty of +bigger ones, there are very few that are more +complete and up to date. Look at this three unit +generator set, for instance. Compact, neat, and +efficient, as you can easily see. It doesn’t take +up much room, but it can do a whole lot.â€</p> + +<p>“It does look as though it were built for business,†+admitted Bob. “I suppose that unit in the +center is the driving motor, isn’t it?â€</p> + +<p>“Right,†said the other. “And the one nearest +you is a two thousand volt generator for +supplying the plate circuit. The one at the other end +is a double current generator. That supplies direct +current at one hundred and twenty-five volts +and four amps for the exciter circuit, and alternating +current at eighty-eight volts and ten amps +for feeding that twelve volt filament heating transformer +that you see over there in the corner.â€</p> + +<p>“Pretty neat, I’ll say,†remarked Joe.</p> + +<p>“I think so,†said the other, and continued to +point out the salient and interesting features of +the equipment. “Over here, you see, is our main +instrument panel. These dials over here control +the variable condensers, and the other ones control +the variometers. But there!†he exclaimed, +catching himself up short. “I suppose none of +you ever heard of such things before, did you?â€</p> + +<p>The radio boys looked at each other, and +could not help laughing.</p> + +<p>“We’ve got a faint idea what they are, anyway,†+chuckled Bob. “We’ve made enough of +them to be on speaking terms, I should say.â€</p> + +<p>“Made them!†exclaimed the other, surprised +in his turn.</p> + +<p>“Sure thing,†grinned Bob. “We’ve made +crystal detector sets and vacuum tube sets, +and——â€</p> + +<p>“And other sets that we never knew just how +to describe,†interrupted the irrepressible Herb, +with a laugh.</p> + +<p>“Yes, that kind too,†admitted Bob, with a grin. +“But, anyway, we’ve made enough to know the +difference between a variometer and a condenser.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, I didn’t know I was talking to old +hands at the game,†said the operator. “I suppose +I might have known that you wouldn’t take +that long walk out here through the snow unless +you were pretty well interested in radio.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes, we’re dyed-in-the-wool fans,†admitted +Bob, and told the operator something of their +radio work.</p> + +<p>“I’m mighty glad to know that you fellows do +understand the subject,†said the operator, when +Bob had finished. “I’m so enthusiastic about it +myself, that it is a real pleasure to have somebody +to talk to that knows what I’m talking about. +So many of the people who come here seem to be +natural born dumb-bells—at least, on the subject +of radio.â€</p> + +<p>“Such as you took us for at first, eh?†asked +Jimmy, with a grin.</p> + +<p>“I apologize for that,†said the other, frankly. +“Please don’t hold it against me.â€</p> + +<p>“Personally, I don’t blame you a bit,†said Bob. +“We can’t expect you to be a mind reader.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, then, that’s settled; so let’s look at the +rest of the station,†said the operator, whose +name was Bert Thompson. “This is our +transmitter panel over here. It is very compact, as +you can see for yourselves.â€</p> + +<p>He opened two doors at the front, one at the +bottom, and raised the cover, thus exposing most +of the interior mechanism to view.</p> + +<p>“Here are all the fuse blocks down at the +bottom, you see,†Thompson continued. “The +various switches are conveniently arranged where +you can easily get at them while you are sitting +in front of the panel. Then up here are the +microphones, with their coils and wiring where +you can easily get at them for inspection or repairs. +Rather a neat lay-out, don’t you think?â€</p> + +<p>“No doubt of it!†exclaimed Bob, admiringly. +“We’ve never made a CW transmitting set yet, +but we hope to some day. A set like this would +cost a pile of money, even if you made it yourself.â€</p> + +<p>“Rather so,†admitted the young operator. “It +takes a rich old fellow like Uncle Sam to pony +up for a set like that.â€</p> + +<p>“We’re more interested in receiving sets just +at present,†said Joe. “Let’s take a look at that +end of the outfit.â€</p> + +<p>“Anything you like,†said Thompson, readily. +“That panel is located on this side of the room.â€</p> + +<p>“I suppose you use a regenerative circuit, don’t +you?†asked Bob.</p> + +<p>“Oh, yes,†answered the other. “That helps +out a lot in increasing the strength of the incoming +sounds.â€</p> + +<p>“I suppose you use a tickler coil in the plate +circuit, don’t you?†ventured Joe.</p> + +<p>“No, in this set we use a variometer in the +plate circuit instead,†said Thompson.</p> + +<p>“Speaking of regenerative circuits, have you +heard about Armstrong’s new invention?†asked +Bob.</p> + +<p>The operator shook his head. “Can’t say +that I have,†he said. “It must be something +very recent, isn’t it?â€</p> + +<p>“Yes, I believe it is,†said Bob. “I read about +it the other day in one of the latest radio magazines.â€</p> + +<p>“Do you remember how it worked?†asked +Thompson, eagerly. “I wish you’d tell me about +it, if you do.â€</p> + +<p>“I’ll do my best,†promised Bob. “The main +idea seems to be to make one tube do as much as +three tubes did before. Armstrong found that +the limit of amplification had been reached when +the negative charge in the tube approaches the +positive charge. By experimenting he found that +it was possible to increase the negative charge +temporarily, for something like one twenty-thousandth +of a second, I think it was. This is far +above the positive for that tiny fraction of a +second, and yet the average negative charge is +lower. It is this increase that makes the enormous +amplification possible, and lets the operator +discard two vacuum tubes.â€</p> + +<p>“Sounds good,†said Thompson. “Do you +suppose you could draw me a rough sketch of the +circuit?â€</p> + +<p>“Let’s have a pencil and some paper, and I’ll +make a try at it,†said Bob. “I doped it out at +the time, but likely I’ve forgotten it since then.â€</p> + +<p>Nevertheless, with the friendly aid of the eraser +on the end of the pencil, he sketched a circuit that +the experienced professional had no difficulty in +understanding.</p> + +<p>“You see,†explained Bob, “with this hook up +you use the regular Armstrong regenerative circuit, +with the second tube connected so that it acts as +an automatic switch, cutting in or out a few +turns of the secondary coil. The plate circuit +of the second tube is connected to the plate of +the detector tube through both capacity and inductance.â€</p> + +<p>“I get you,†nodded the operator. “According +to your sketch the plate and grid of the second +tube are coupled inductively, causing variation in +the positive resistance of the tuned circuit.â€</p> + +<p>“That’s the idea exactly,†agreed Bob. “You +see, this is done by means of the oscillating tube, +the grid circuit being connected through the tuned +circuit of the amplifying tube.â€</p> + +<p>“Say, that looks pretty good to me!†exclaimed +Thompson. “I wonder how Armstrong ever +came to dope that out. I’ve been trying to get +something of the kind for a long time, but I +never seemed to get quite the right combination.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, better luck next time,†said Bob, sympathetically. +“There are a lot of people working +at radio problems, and it seems to be a pretty +close race between the inventors. Something new +is being discovered almost every day.â€</p> + +<p>“If you fellows are building sets, you’re just as +likely to make some important discovery as anybody +else,†said Thompson. “That super-regenerative +circuit is a corker, though. I’m going to +keep that sketch you made, if you don’t mind, and +see if I can make a small set along those lines. +I have lots of spare time just at present.â€</p> + +<p>“It will repay you for your trouble, all right,†+remarked Joe. “We’re figuring on doing the +same thing when we get back home.â€</p> + +<p>Jimmy had tried faithfully to follow the technicalities +of the recent conversation, but his was +an easy-going nature, disinclined to delve deeply +into the intricate mysteries of science. Herbert +was somewhat the same way, and they two wandered +about the station, laughing and joking, +while Bob and Joe and the young wireless man +argued the merits of different equipments and +hook-ups.</p> + +<p>“Say!†exclaimed Jimmy, at length, “I hate to +break up the party, but don’t you think it’s about +time that we thought of getting back to the hotel? +Remember we’ve got a long way to go, and it’s +four-thirty already.â€</p> + +<p>“Gee!†said Bob, glancing in surprise at his +watch. “I guess Jimmy is right for once in his +life. We’ll have to hustle along now, but we’ll +drop in here often while we are at Mountain +Pass—unless you put up a ‘no admittance’ sign.â€</p> + +<p>“No danger of that,†laughed the other. “The +oftener you come, the better I’ll like it. This is +a lonely place, as you can see for yourselves.â€</p> + +<p>The radio boys shook hands with Bert Thompson, +and after thanking him for the trouble he +had taken to show them the station, they started +back for the hotel at a brisk pace.</p> + +<p>The days were growing very short, and it was +after dark when they reached the hotel. Very +warm and comfortable it looked as they approached +it, windows lighted and throwing cheerful +beams over the white snow outside. A red +glow filled the windows of the living room, and +the boys knew that a big wood fire was roaring +and crackling in the big fireplace. As they drew +close, a tempting aroma of cookery reached them, +and caused them to hasten their steps.</p> + +<p>They had barely time to get freshened up before +the dinner bell rang, and in a short time they +were making havoc with as fine a meal as any +of them ever tasted.</p> + +<p>When they told about their visit to the radio +station, Edna and Ruth Salper, the daughters of +the Wall Street broker they had met in the snowstorm, +were among the most interested of the +listeners.</p> + +<p>“We find it so dull over at our house we are +glad to come over here for meals and to visit,†+said Ruth Salper.</p> + +<p>“I suppose being in the woods in winter is +rather dull,†returned Joe, politely.</p> + +<p>“Did you boys really know enough about radio +to talk all afternoon with the man in charge of +the government station?†inquired Edna, curiously.</p> + +<p>“Why not?†asked Bob. “Don’t you think +radio is a broad enough subject to talk about for +an entire afternoon?â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, I suppose it is,†she admitted. “But why +don’t you share some of your fun with us?â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink13'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XIII—PRESSED INTO SERVICE</a></h2> + +<p>“Just what do you mean?†asked Bob. “Do +you want to talk radio with us all tomorrow afternoon?†+he went on, with an irritating grin.</p> + +<p>“No, of course I don’t, stupid,†she exclaimed. +“But why can’t you bring your old wireless things +into the hotel parlor and let us all hear some +music? We’d be ever so grateful if you would.â€</p> + +<p>The radio boys looked doubtfully at each other.</p> + +<p>“We’d do it, fast enough,†said Bob. “But we +didn’t bring a loud speaker with us, and without +that nobody could hear much unless he had a +set of telephone receivers.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, dear!†she exclaimed. “I just knew you’d +make some excuse or other.â€</p> + +<p>“A loud speaker is something that looks like +an old-fashioned phonograph horn, isn’t it?†+asked Ruth, the younger sister, before any of the +radio boys could refute the older girl’s accusation.</p> + +<p>“Well, yes, it looks like that; but the details +are different,†replied Bob.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but if you had a phonograph horn, +couldn’t you fix it up so that the music would +be loud enough for us all to hear it?†persisted +Ruth.</p> + +<p>“Good for you, Ruth!†exclaimed her sister. +“I know what you mean. You’re thinking of +that old phonograph they used to have in this +hotel, before they got the big new cabinet machine.â€</p> + +<p>“If Edna and I get that horn for you, it will +be easy for such experts as you boys are to make +a—a what-you-may-call-it—loud speaker—out of +it, won’t it?†asked Ruth, demurely.</p> + +<p>“I think they’re kidding us now, Bob,†said +Joe, grinning. “When a girl tells you you’re an +expert, you can bet she’s figuring to wish something +on you.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes, but it’s so unusual that we ought to do +something to encourage it,†laughed Bob. “Let’s +call their bluff. Probably they’ll never be able to +find a horn, anyway.â€</p> + +<p>“Don’t count too much on that,†said Edna, +with a dangerous smile. “We almost always get +what we ask for.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes, and you are everlastingly asking for +something, it seems to me,†grumbled her father, +who had joined the little group at that moment.</p> + +<p>“Now, Daddy, you know you love to give us +things,†chided Ruth. “If we suddenly had +everything we wanted, you’d be dreadfully disappointed.â€</p> + +<p>“There’s no danger of that happening,†said +her father, a smile softening his grim face. “But +what is it you’re after just at present?â€</p> + +<p>“We want that big phonograph horn they used +to have here in the hotel,†said Edna, with a provoking +side glance at the radio boys. “Will you +ask the manager to hunt it up and lend it to us?â€</p> + +<p>“I’ll see what I can do about it,†promised Mr. +Salper. “I remember the horn you mean, but +it was probably thrown away long ago.â€</p> + +<p>The radio boys rather wished that this might +prove to be the case, but they were not destined +to get off so easily. The first thing they saw when +they entered the dining room the next morning +was a large wooden horn, of a style in universal +use in the early years of the phonograph, standing +prominently near their table.</p> + +<p>“There, now!†exclaimed Jimmy, in a low +voice. “You see what you’ve let us in for, Bob. +Why didn’t you tell them that we didn’t have +time to waste building a loud speaker, and settle +the thing right then and there.â€</p> + +<p>“That’s easier said than done,†answered Bob. +“Why don’t you go over to the Salper’s house +and tell the girls that?â€</p> + +<p>“Yes, go right over and be rough with them,†+advised Joe. “Tell them that you’re not afraid +of girls, and they can’t put anything over on +you.â€</p> + +<p>“Aw, I would have, last night; but it’s too late +now,†said Jimmy, lamely.</p> + +<p>“Yes, you would!†jeered Herb. “After all, +it won’t be so much work. You’re an expert +carpenter, Jimmy, and can make a bang-up job +of it.â€</p> + +<p>“That’s always the way,†complained Jimmy, +heaving a dismal sigh. “You fellows think up a +good, hard job, and then I do the work. I’ve +never known it to fail yet.â€</p> + +<p>“Buck up, Doughnuts,†said Bob. “Think of +how the girls will thank you for it. You’ll be +the most popular fellow in the hotel.â€</p> + +<p>“Like fun I will!†returned the fat boy. “But +I’m not going to let it interfere with my appetite. +I can see where I’ve got a hard day ahead of me.â€</p> + +<p>It proved to be a busy morning for all the +radio boys. Immediately after breakfast they +fell to work on the horn, and after some three +hours of steady labor they had constructed a passable +loud-speaking horn, using one telephone receiver +clamped securely at the narrow end. They +mounted the whole thing on a solid wooden pedestal, +leaving two substantial shelves at the back to +hold their radio apparatus.</p> + +<p>It did not take them long to mount the receiving +outfit in a neat manner, and when this was +done they all drew a long breath and sat down to +admire the result of their labors. While still +engaged in this gratifying occupation, Edna and +Ruth Salper entered.</p> + +<p>“Oh!†exclaimed the former, with a gesture of +delight, “doesn’t it look simply beautiful? I never +thought you boys could make it so quickly.â€</p> + +<p>“You’ve got Jimmy to thank for that,†said +Bob. “I never saw him work so hard in his life +before. It was easy to see that he was thinking +of you and Ruth all the time, from the way he put +his heart into it.â€</p> + +<p>“I didn’t anything of the kind,†said the embarrassed +Jimmy. “I never thought of them once, +even.â€</p> + +<p>“What a dreadful thing to say,†laughed Ruth. +“I didn’t know you hated girls, Jimmy.â€</p> + +<p>“Who said I hated ’em?†demanded Jimmy, +getting as red as a beet. “I—I——â€</p> + +<p>“Love them,†Joe finished for him. “Is that +what you are trying to say, Jimmy?â€</p> + +<p>“Say, who asked you to butt in?†inquired +Jimmy, desperately. “Everybody is trying to tell +me what I mean, until I don’t know which is +right myself.â€</p> + +<p>“Never mind,†said Edna, coming to the rescue +of the floundering youth. “We are grateful to +you for working so hard for us, anyway.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, that’s all right,†mumbled Jimmy. “If +it works all right, we won’t worry about the labor +we put into it.â€</p> + +<p>“But don’t you expect it to work?†asked Edna, +teasingly.</p> + +<p>“Sure it will work,†asserted Bob, before +Jimmy could involve himself again. “That is, +you’ll hear music, all right, but it probably won’t +be very loud, even with the help of the horn. +We’re a long way from the broadcasting station, +you know. If we were within ten or fifteen miles +of it, I’d say surely that it would be a success.â€</p> + +<p>“I’ll go and get the loop aerial, Bob, and we +can test it right now,†suggested Joe. “What do +you think?â€</p> + +<p>Bob nodded, and Joe left the room, returning +a few minutes later with the loop. This was soon +connected with the set, and then Bob began tuning +for signals.</p> + +<p>“Mercy! what was that?†exclaimed Edna, +while Ruth gave a little scream.</p> + +<p>From the horn came an ear-piercing howl, +followed by whistles and weird unearthly shrieks. +But the boys only laughed heartily at the girls.</p> + +<p>“That’s nothing but old man static,†said Bob. +“We’ll soon get him off the wires.â€</p> + +<p>“Does he live near here?†asked Ruth, innocently.</p> + +<p>“Wow!†shouted Herb, and the boys could not +help laughing, although they stopped as soon as +they saw the mystified and somewhat hurt expression +in the girl’s eyes.</p> + +<p>“That was just Bob’s slangy way of talking,†+explained Joe, after he was sure that he had regained +control of his features. “Static is the +electricity that is always in the air, and gives us +radio fans a good deal of trouble.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, I see,†said Ruth, and she was a good +enough sport to laugh at her own mistake.</p> + +<p>Meantime Bob had finally got the set tuned to +the proper wave length, and the little group were +all delighted with the clarity and volume of the +resultant sounds. They were not nearly as loud +as an ordinary phonograph, but were sufficient +to be heard distinctly in a fairly large room.</p> + +<p>“It’s too bad we only have a one-stage amplifier,†+said Bob. “If we only had another transformer +and vacuum tube, we’d have a loud speaker +that you could hear all over the hotel.â€</p> + +<p>“I think this one is plenty good enough,†asserted +Edna.</p> + +<p>Both she and her sister were as excited as +children with a new toy, and they were both delighted +with the music.</p> + +<p>“You boys will have to bring this wonderful +thing into the parlor tonight, and let everybody +hear it,†coaxed Edna. “I know they will all +be tickled to death to hear a concert in this new +way.â€</p> + +<p>“They might not be as enthusiastic as you +think,†said Bob, doubtfully. “Maybe they’d +rather just talk, and wouldn’t thank us for interrupting +them.â€</p> + +<p>“What an idea!†exclaimed Ruth. “Just try +it once, just to please us, and you’ll soon find +out whether they like it or not.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, if it’s to please you, we’ll certainly do +that thing!†Bob gallantly remarked, and was +rewarded by a friendly smile.</p> + +<p>“Edna and I will speak to the manager about +it this afternoon, and I know it will be all right,†+she said. “We’ll tell you what he says at supper +time.â€</p> + +<p>The radio boys, although they were radio enthusiasts +themselves, did not actually realize how +deeply interested people had become in this new +and wonderful science. They were somewhat +surprised, therefore, when the manager sought +them out that afternoon and told them that he +would be more than delighted to have them give +a radio concert that evening.</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink14'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XIV—SCORING A TRIUMPH</a></h2> + +<p>When he had gone the boys grinned at one +another.</p> + +<p>“We’re getting to be popular around this +place,†remarked Bob.</p> + +<p>“We sha’n’t be quite so popular tomorrow, if +the concert broadcasted tonight isn’t a good one,†+said Joe.</p> + +<p>“I only wish we could get that loudspeaker to +speak just a bit louder,†said Herb. “It’s only +fair now, and those people will be expecting a lot, +I suppose.â€</p> + +<p>“I was thinking the same thing,†remarked +Bob. “And if we’re willing to pitch in this afternoon, +we can improve the strength of our set a +lotâ€</p> + +<p>The others looked incredulously at him.</p> + +<p>“Explain,†said Joe. “You’ve got us guessing, +Bob.â€</p> + +<p>“The way we’ve got our set hooked up now, +we’re using a loop antenna, aren’t we? Well,†+as the others nodded assent, “why not unwind +the loop and string a double aerial on the roof? +That would give us a lot more power, you know.â€</p> + +<p>“Right you are!†exclaimed Joe. “That should +make a lot of difference.â€</p> + +<p>“But if we do that, we’ll have to have a ground, +which isn’t necessary with the loop antenna,†+objected Herb.</p> + +<p>“That’s true enough,†agreed Bob. “But that’s +easy, after all. We can hook our ground wire +to one of the steam radiators.â€</p> + +<p>“Trust Bob to think of everything!†ejaculated +Jimmy.</p> + +<p>“Bob is thinking that we’d better get busy, +then,†said that individual. “Heave yourself off +that nice soft couch, Jimmy, and get your hat +and overcoat on.â€</p> + +<p>Jimmy emitted a dismal groan.</p> + +<p>“Have a heart, Bob,†he complained. “You +know I worked so hard this morning that I’m +all in.â€</p> + +<p>“All right, then, you stay there; but we’ll tell +Edna and Ruth that you refused to help,†said +Joe, cruelly.</p> + +<p>This threat had its effect, and Jimmy struggled +to his feet and had his outer clothing on almost +as soon as the others. It was a beautiful day +outside, and after they once got warmed up, they +thoroughly enjoyed the work of stringing the +aerial on the roof. They brought the leading-in +wire to one of the windows of the hotel parlor. +It was not necessary to insulate this with anything +heavier than friction tape, as this was to be only +a temporary installation. Before dark they had +everything ready, and then they went inside, +moved their receiving set into the parlor, and connected +it up to the leading-in wire. Following +Bob’s suggestion, they attached a ground wire to +a radiator, and found that everything worked +perfectly. As they had anticipated, the signals +were considerably louder, and the old phonograph +horn filled the big room with a satisfying volume +of sound.</p> + +<p>During dinner the boys were so excited that +they could hardly eat, and immediately afterward +they hurried into the parlor. The guests +had been notified of the impending concert, and +soon almost everybody in the hotel had crowded +into the room.</p> + +<p>The hotel manager made a little speech introducing +the boys to those who had not already +become acquainted with them, and mentioning +the concert that was to come. Then every one +waited expectantly for the promised entertainment.</p> + +<p>It proved unnecessary to do much tuning, as +the adjustment they had secured that afternoon +proved to be very nearly correct still.</p> + +<p>When the first clear notes floated into the room +many of the audience straightened up in their +chairs, while looks of astonishment passed over +their features. At first they were too engrossed +with the novelty of the thing to pay much attention +to the music, but gradually the golden notes +wove their magic net and held them all enthralled. +The night was an ideal one for radiophony, cold +and still, with hardly any static to annoy. One +selection after another came in clear and distinct, +and after each one the audience applauded instinctively, +hardly conscious of the fact that upward +of one hundred miles of bleak and snow-covered +mountains and valleys lay between them +and the performers.</p> + +<p>At length, to everybody’s regret, the last number +was played, and the receiving set was silent. +Not so the audience, however, who overwhelmed +the boys with thanks, and made them promise to +entertain them in a similar manner on other evenings.</p> + +<p>After most of the audience had drifted out +the Salper girls thanked the boys prettily for all +they had done, and they felt more than repaid +for the hard work of the day, even Jimmy admitting +afterward that “it was worth it.â€</p> + +<p>The next day the boys were eager to see Bert +Thompson, the radio man, and tell him about +their successful experiment, so they set out for +the government station soon after breakfast. It +had snowed in the early morning, but had now +stopped, and the air was cold and bracing.</p> + +<p>The four lads relieved the monotony of the +long walk with, more than one impromptu exchange +of snowballs. It seemed that they had +hardly started before they had traversed the miles +of difficult going and found themselves in the +snug interior of the wireless house.</p> + +<p>As they were approaching it, they were astonished +to see Mr. Salper emerge, a heavy frown +on his usually none-too-cheerful countenance. He +only nodded to the radio boys in passing, and +hurried away through the snow at a pace of +which they would never have believed him capable.</p> + +<p>When they entered the station they found Bert +Thompson excited and angry. When they opened +the door he started up, but when he saw who his +visitors were, sank back in his chair.</p> + +<p>“I’m glad it’s you fellows!†he exclaimed. “I +thought it was that Wall Street man coming back. +I’m not sure but I’ll throw him out if he does. +I’d like to, anyhow.â€</p> + +<p>“You are all up in the air,†said Bob. “Did +you have an argument with Mr. Salper?â€</p> + +<p>“Well, he did most of the arguing,†said the +other, with a faint smile. “He’s so blamed used +to having his own way that if any one doesn’t +do just as he wants, he gets mad.</p> + +<p>“I suppose I should make allowances for him, +because he has plenty to worry him,†went on +Thompson. “Some of those Wall Street manipulators +are a ruthless bunch, and when they aren’t +busy taking money from an innocent public, they +stage some battles between each other. Mr. Salper +has an idea that a bunch of them are trying +to swing the market against him while he’s up +here, and he seems to think that this is a public +radio station, with nothing to do but send and +receive messages for him all day. I’m working +for Uncle Sam, not for him.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, well, don’t let him get you all stirred up, +anyway,†said Bob. “He doesn’t mean half of +what he says. He was real decent last night while +we were giving our concert.â€</p> + +<p>“What do you mean, concert?†asked the wireless +man. “Are you in the entertainment game +now?â€</p> + +<p>“Something like that,†answered Bob, grinning, +and then he told the operator about the concert +of the previous evening.</p> + +<p>“That’s fine,†said Thompson heartily, when +he had finished. “That was a good idea, to use a +regular aerial instead of the loop. It certainly +catches a lot more.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes, but the loop is mighty handy, just the +same,†remarked Joe. “Especially in a portable +set. You can set it up in no time.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, it’s handy, there’s no doubt of that,†admitted +the young wireless man. “I wish I had +been there for the concert. I heard most of it +here, but it must have been fun to watch the +faces of the audience when you started in.â€</p> + +<p>“It was,†laughed Herb. “I think that some +of them imagined we had a phonograph hidden +somewhere because after the concert was over +a number of them looked all around the set as +though they were hunting for something suspicious.â€</p> + +<p>“Likely enough,†agreed Thompson. “Some +people are mighty hard to convince.â€</p> + +<p>After some further conversation the boys took +their leave, promising to come again for a longer +visit. On the way back the chief topic of discussion +was Mr. Salper, and the boys wondered +more than once just what the nature of the trouble +was that caused him to haunt the wireless station +and besiege the operator with a flood of messages.</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink15'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XV—THE SNOWSLIDE</a></h2> + +<p>“Well,†said Herb, philosophically, “‘it is +an ill wind that blows nobody any good.’â€</p> + +<p>Bob, who had been shaking a tree for nuts +and had shaken down more snow than anything +else, looked at Herb inquiringly.</p> + +<p>“Now what’s the poor nut raving about?†he +asked slangily of Jimmy and Joe, who were also +engaged in nut gathering.</p> + +<p>“I was just thinking,†said Herb, with an attempt +at dignity, “how sorry I am for all those +poor sick people in Clintonia.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, yes, you were,†scoffed Jimmy, who was +eating more nuts than he saved. “You were +thinking how lucky we are to be here picking +nuts in the woods instead of slaving away in +Clintonia High.â€</p> + +<p>“Gee, that fellow must be a mind reader!†+exclaimed Herb, grinning, and Bob, coming near, +made a pass at him.</p> + +<p>“Say, get busy, old bluffer,†he said. “You’re +getting slower than Doughnuts here. You +haven’t got half the nuts that I have.â€</p> + +<p>“But I’m having twice as much fun,†countered +Herb, unmoved “A fellow can’t work all +the time.â€</p> + +<p>“I wish I knew what was worrying Mr. +Salper,†said Joe, suddenly. “I wonder if that +Wall Street bunch, is really out after his money.â€</p> + +<p>“Gee, he sure does know how to change the +subject,†murmured Herb, and Bob threw a nut +at him, which he successfully ducked.</p> + +<p>“He seemed rather cut up about it, anyway,†+said Bob, in answer to Joe.</p> + +<p>“I wouldn’t trust those Wall Street sharpers +out of my sight myself,†added Jimmy +solemnly.</p> + +<p>“Gee, listen to the financier,†gibed Herb. +“He’s lost so many millions in Wall Street himself.â€</p> + +<p>“Not yet,†said Jimmy, plaintively. “But wait, +my boy, my life is all before me.â€</p> + +<p>“Say,†cried Joe, “if you two fellows don’t +look out I’ll put you in my pocket with the other +nuts.â€</p> + +<p>“Mr. Salper seems kind of a nut himself,†+said Joe, continuing with his own reflections. +“He seems to have a grouch on everything and +everybody.â€</p> + +<p>“No wonder, with all the worries he’s got,†+said Jimmy, adding dolefully: “You see the +penalties of extreme wealth.â€</p> + +<p>“One thing you’ll never have to worry about,†+said Herb, and Jimmy grinned good-naturedly.</p> + +<p>“I’d rather have my sweet disposition,†he +sighed, “than all of Salper’s wealth.â€</p> + +<p>“I don’t see why you think he’s so wealthy,†+Bob objected. “Everybody who trades in Wall +Street isn’t a millionaire, you know.â€</p> + +<p>“Say, wait a minute!†cried Bob suddenly, +with an imperative wave of his hand. “Did you +hear anything?â€</p> + +<p>They listened for a moment in breathless silence +and it came again, the call that Bob’s sharp ears +had first detected. In the distance it was, surely, +but a distinct cry for help, nevertheless.</p> + +<p>“Come on, fellows! We’re needed!†cried Bob, +and, dropping his bag of nuts in the snow, he +started off at a swift pace in the direction of the +sound.</p> + +<p>The rest of the radio boys needed no second +invitation. They started after Bob, pushing +swiftly through the deep snow.</p> + +<p>But as the seconds passed and they heard no +further outcry, they thought that they must have +been mistaken or that they had started in the +wrong direction.</p> + +<p>However, as they stopped to consider what to +do, the cries began again, louder this time, a fact +which told them they had been on the right track +all along.</p> + +<p>They hurried on again, sometimes plunging into +snowdrifts that reached nearly to their waists, +but keeping doggedly on to the rescue.</p> + +<p>It was enough for the radio boys that some one +was in trouble. Even roly-poly Jimmy, puffing +painfully, but running gallantly along in the rear, +had but one thought in his head, and that to help +whoever needed help.</p> + +<p>As they came nearer the cries became louder, +and they thought they could distinguish three +voices, and one seemed to be that of a woman.</p> + +<p>Another minute they came upon a cleared space +and stopped still for a moment to stare at the +amazing scene which met their eyes.</p> + +<p>A woman stood, nearly knee deep in snow, +waving her arms wildly, and even in that moment +of astonishment they recognized her as Mrs. +Salper. She was gesticulating toward something +in front of her and calling urgently to the boys +to hurry.</p> + +<p>Then the lads saw the cause of her distress. +At the foot of a steep rise of ground, almost a +small hill, was all that was to be seen of two girls. +These latter had their heads above the snow that +enveloped them and they were trying desperately +to work their arms free of the icy blanket. From +their expressions and from their wild cries for +help it could be seen they were panic-stricken.</p> + +<p>“A snowslide!†Joe, who was standing close to +Bob, heard him mutter. “Those girls had a narrow +escape to keep from being buried entirely!â€</p> + +<p>The next moment he was dashing off in the +direction of the two prisoners, shouting encouragement +to Mrs. Salper. The others were close +at his heels.</p> + +<p>“We’ll get you out all right,†he called to the +frightened girls, who had stopped their struggling +and were looking at him hopefully. “Just keep +still for a moment and save your breath. We’ll +have you out of there in a jiffy.</p> + +<p>“Dig, fellows, for all you’re worth,†he added +to the boys, who, as usual, looked to him for +directions. “These girls must be pretty cold by +this time.â€</p> + +<p>For answer the boys did dig manfully, the imprisoned +girls helping them as much as they could +with their numb fingers, and before many minutes +they had the snow cleared away sufficiently +to be able to struggle through it to a spot where +it was not so deep. The girls were, of course, +Edna and Ruth Salper, the pretty daughters of +the Wall Street broker.</p> + +<p>Edna and Ruth were trembling with cold and +with the shock of their recent accident, and Mrs. +Salper ran to them, putting an arm about each of +them protectingly and pouring out thanks to the +embarrassed boys.</p> + +<p>“That’s all right,†said Bob, modestly. “We +couldn’t very well have done anything else, you +know. I hope,†he added with a glance at the +shivering girls, “that the girls won’t take cold.â€</p> + +<p>“They will if I don’t get them home quickly,†+said Mrs. Salper, adding, with a worried frown: +“I wish we hadn’t come so far from the house.â€</p> + +<p>It was then that Joe broke in.</p> + +<p>“I tell you what,†he said, eagerly. “It isn’t +far to Mountain Rest——â€</p> + +<p>“And there’s sure to be a fire in the grate up +there,†Bob finished for him.</p> + +<p>“And it’s a fire that will warm you up in a +jiffy,†added Herb with his most friendly smile.</p> + +<p>“If we can only make it,†sighed Mrs. Salper.</p> + +<p>The radio boys knew of a short cut from this +spot to Mountain Rest and along this they led the +others as swiftly as they were able to travel. And +on the way they learned how it was that the girls +had happened to be in such a predicament.</p> + +<p>“I shouldn’t have let them do it.†It was Mrs. +Salper who told the story. The two girls were +still too shaken from their adventure to say anything. +All they could think of was the comforting +shelter of a room and an open grate fire.</p> + +<p>“They wanted to climb up that little hill to +see what was on the other side of it,†the lady +went on to explain. “I didn’t want them to, for +I saw that the snow was deep. But they were +in wild spirits, wouldn’t listen to me, said I didn’t +need to come if I didn’t want to—which I didn’t!—and +off they went.</p> + +<p>“When they had nearly reached the top Edna +started to fall——â€</p> + +<p>“No, it was Ruth, Mother,†corrected the girl, +showing the first sign of returning interest.</p> + +<p>“Well, it doesn’t matter,†said Mrs. Salper, +with a sigh. “The result was the same. One of +them clutched at the other and they both toppled +down the hill. Their fall must have loosened a +mass of the drifted snow and it came down on +top of them. Heavens!†she shuddered at the +memory. “It seemed as if the whole mountain +side were falling on top of them! I thought they +would be completely buried!â€</p> + +<p>“Well, we were, almost,†said Ruth, chafing +her cold hands to bring the circulation back into +them. “Anyway,†she added with a stiff smile, +“I feel almost as frozen as if I had been!â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink16'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XVI—THE MODERN MIRACLE</a></h2> + +<p>“I bet you’re cold,†said Bob, sympathetically. +“Never mind, we’ll have you warmed up in a +jiffy now.â€</p> + +<p>As a matter of fact, the big hotel was even +then looming before them, and in a moment more +they entered its doors, to find to their delight that +a roaring fire was burning in the grate of the +big living room.</p> + +<p>The two girls rushed to it joyfully, holding +out their chilled hands to the blaze, snuggling to +its warmth like two half-frozen kittens.</p> + +<p>They happened to have the big room all to +themselves at that moment, and, after having +drawn chairs up to the fire for Mrs. Salper and +the girls, the boys excused themselves and hurried +back to the spot where they had dropped their +bags of nuts when the cry for help had interrupted +them in their occupation.</p> + +<p>“Never do to lose the fruits of our labor,†+said Herb, grinning, as he picked up his own particular +bag.</p> + +<p>The other boys did likewise, and they were +soon hurrying back to the hotel again, talking +excitedly about the rescue of the Salper girls.</p> + +<p>“It’s mighty lucky we happened to be near +enough to hear the cries for help,†said Joe, +soberly. “It would have been pretty hard for +them to have forced their way through those +drifts alone, half numbed as they were.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes,†agreed Bob. “It’s pretty nice to think +of them warm and snug before the fire just now.â€</p> + +<p>“Queer,†observed Jimmy as they neared the +house, “that we should have been talking about +them just at the time the thing happened.â€</p> + +<p>“Queer,†said Herb patronizingly, “but not half +so queer, Doughnuts, as the modern miracles that +happen every day——â€</p> + +<p>“Take radio, for instance,†finished Bob, and +they entered the hotel laughing.</p> + +<p>They found the two girls recovered from their +fright and quite a good deal happier than they +had been a few minutes before. They regarded +the radio boys with interest, and it was clear that +the girls and Mrs. Salper had been talking about +them during their absence.</p> + +<p>“You’re often called the ‘radio boys,’ aren’t +you?†challenged Edna, as the boys drew chairs +up to the fire.</p> + +<p>“Why, I guess so,†said Bob, with a smile. +“Lots of folks call us that.â€</p> + +<p>“Dad was up at the radio station the other +day and the operator there was enthusiastic about +you,†said Ruth Salper, in her direct way. “Said +that if you kept on the way you were going, you +would soon know more about radio than he does +himself.â€</p> + +<p>“That’s mighty nice of him, but I’m afraid he +was boosting us too high,†replied Bob, trying +hard not to show how pleased he was.</p> + +<p>“That fellow at the station has forgotten more +about radio than we ever knew,†added Joe modestly, +but in his heart he was as pleased at the +praise as Bob was. It is always nice to receive +commendation from some one who is an authority.</p> + +<p>“You’re very modest,†teased Edna gaily. +“But when dad says anything nice about anybody +he generally means it. He doesn’t say nice +things very often——†She caught a glance of +reproof from her mother and bit her lip penitently.</p> + +<p>“You mustn’t say unkind things about your +father, Edna,†said Mrs. Salper, gently. “You +know he is worn to death with business worries. +If we could once succeed in making him forget +his responsibilities, he would be as jolly and fun-loving +as he used to be.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes, dad used to be no end of fun,†said Ruth, +adding, with a fierce little frown and a clenching +of her fists; “I just wish I could get hold of +whoever’s worrying him so. I’d give them something +to worry about for a change.â€</p> + +<p>Then, seeming to realize that the boys might +not be interested in her personal affairs—though +as a matter of fact they were interested, extremely +so—the girl tactfully turned the conversation to +something which she thought might interest them.</p> + +<p>“Could we see your radio set?†she asked, impulsively. +“We’d just love to have you tell us +about it. As much as we could understand,†she +added, with a smile for the boys.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Salper protested feebly, but so eager were +the boys to show off their set to the girl radio +fans that her opposition was overcome almost at +once.</p> + +<p>Then followed a happy hour during which the +radio boys talked learnedly of condensers and +amplifiers and different kinds of receivers until +the admiration of the girls mounted almost to +awe.</p> + +<p>“My, but it sounds worse than Greek!†cried +Edna Salper once, as she bent absorbedly over the +apparatus that worked such miracles and bore +such high-sounding names. “This is the tuning +apparatus, isn’t it?†she asked, gingerly touching +the wire coil. “It seems almost impossible that +you can tune to any wave length with this thing, +just as the piano tuner can tune the wires of his +instrument to the proper sound vibration.â€</p> + +<p>“It—the whole thing—seems impossible,†+added Ruth, while Mrs. Salper found herself quite +as interested as her daughters.</p> + +<p>“Yes, that’s the way it seemed to us at first,†+agreed Bob, his eyes shining. “When Doctor +Dale told us we could make a set for ourselves +we could hardly believe him. But it didn’t seem +a bit hard once we got started and learned the +hang of it.â€</p> + +<p>“You mean to say that you made this set yourselves?†+asked Mrs. Salper, with interest.</p> + +<p>“Oh, this is nothing. We’ve made lots of +’em,†said Jimmy proudly, at which Herb +promptly kicked him under the table. The injured +Jimmy glared at his assailant, but the others +were too much interested in the subject to notice +him.</p> + +<p>“You see this is a comparatively small set,†+Bob explained.</p> + +<p>“But we’re working on a powerful apparatus +now,†broke in Joe eagerly. “And when we have +that in working shape we’ll be able to send as +well as receive.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, I think you’re just as smart as father +said you were,†said Ruth, and at this candid +compliment the confused boys thought it time to +change the subject.</p> + +<p>“How about listening in a while?†suggested +Bob, struck by a sudden inspiration. “We ought +to be just about in time to catch the afternoon +concert—if there is one. Would you like to find +out?â€</p> + +<p>“Would we?†cried Edna, enthusiastically. +“Indeed we would!â€</p> + +<p>“Just try us,†added Ruth happily.</p> + +<p>So the boys showed them how to fit the head-phones, +not using the loudspeaker they had made +from the phonograph horn, and adjusted the +tuning apparatus to the proper wave length, and +the girls answered to the thrill of catching music +magically from the ether just as the boys had +done on that never-to-be-forgotten evening when +their first concert had reached them over the +wires of their first receiving set. Crude it seemed +to them now in the light of later improvements, +but an instrument of magic it had been to them +that night.</p> + +<p>No wonder that the boys felt a warm and real +friendship for the Salper girls—and Mrs. Salper, +too—a friendship that would have been surprising, +considering the shortness of their acquaintance, +had it not been that they were all radio +fans, dyed in the wool.</p> + +<p>So quickly did the time fly that Mrs. Salper +was amazed and apologetic when she found how +long they had lingered.</p> + +<p>“We must hurry!†she exclaimed, starting +toward the door, the girls reluctantly following. +“Your father will surely think we are all lost in +a snowdrift.â€</p> + +<p>“Which two of us came very near being,†+added Edna, with a laugh.</p> + +<p>“Don’t joke about it,†said Ruth, with a shiver. +“I must say being buried in a snowdrift wasn’t +very pleasant—while it lasted.â€</p> + +<p>The radio boys insisted upon accompanying +the Salpers home, explaining that they could show +them the shortest path. Gaily they started out +and before they had reached the Salper place +the friendship which had begun the evening of +the concert with their mutual interest in radio, +became steadily stronger.</p> + +<p>It was plain that, besides being grateful to +them for having come to the help of the girls, +Mrs. Salper liked the boys for their own sakes.</p> + +<p>When they reached the house she begged them +to come in with her so that Mr. Salper might have +the opportunity of thanking them for their kindness.</p> + +<p>The boys skillfully avoided accepting this invitation +by pointing out that it was getting late +and the path would be hard to find in the dusk.</p> + +<p>“Thanks ever so much for everything,†Ruth +Salper called after them as they started off, and +Edna added:</p> + +<p>“We’re going to frighten dad into getting us +a radio set by threatening to make one ourselves!â€</p> + +<p>“I shouldn’t wonder if they could make a set, +at that,†said Bob thoughtfully, as they tramped +on alone. “They’re smart enough.â€</p> + +<p>“For girls,†added Herb, condescendingly.</p> + +<p>Whereupon Jimmy turned and eyed him scornfully.</p> + +<p>“Say, where do you get that stuff?†he jeered. +“If those girls couldn’t make a better radio set +than you, I’d sure feel sorry for them.â€</p> + +<p>“Ha! I’ll wash your face for saying that,†+was the quick answer, and the next instant Jimmy +felt some snow on his ear. Then began a snow +battle between all the boys which lasted until they +reached the hotel.</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink17'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XVII—THRASHING A BULLY</a></h2> + +<p>After that the boys saw a good deal of Edna +and Ruth Salper. The latter were thoroughly +good sports and entered into the fun of the +moment with such enthusiasm that the radio boys +declared they were lots more fun than a good +many of the fellows they knew.</p> + +<p>They went nutting together, tramped through +the woods, read together the latest discoveries in +the radio field, until the girls became almost as +great enthusiasts as the boys.</p> + +<p>The boys were often asked to visit the Salper +home, but it was seldom that they took advantage +of these invitations.</p> + +<p>“It would be pleasant enough,†Herb declared, +“if only grouchy Mr. Salper were not always +around to put a damper on the sport.â€</p> + +<p>As a matter of fact, on the rare occasions +when they happened to meet, Mr. Salper hardly +uttered a word, but it was this very silence of his +that made the boys uneasy.</p> + +<p>“I feel sometimes,†Jimmy remarked, “as if +I’d like to put a tack on his chair, just to see if +he’d say ‘ouch’ when it stuck into him.â€</p> + +<p>“He’d probably say a sight worse than that,†+Bob replied, with a laugh,</p> + +<p>However, they were having too good a time +to allow Mr. Salper and his grouches to interfere +much with them.</p> + +<p>They became familiar figures at the sending +and receiving station, and the operator always +received them cordially. They often had long +and interesting discussions which were not only +delightful to the boys but extremely helpful as +well.</p> + +<p>“It seems,†said Jimmy, with a grin, “as if all +the radio inventors were running a race with each +other to see who can get the greatest number of +inventions on the market in the shortest space +of time.â€</p> + +<p>“You said something that time, boy,†the +operator replied ruefully. “The smart fellows +are keeping us dubs on the jump trying to catch +up with them. Not that I intend to put you in +the ‘dub’ class with myself,†he added, with a +grin.</p> + +<p>“I only wish we knew half as much about the +game as you do,†Bob returned heartily. “I +think we’d be mighty well satisfied.â€</p> + +<p>One day when the radio boys had left Edna and +Ruth Salper and were tramping through the +woods alone, they spoke of the operator admiringly.</p> + +<p>“He sure does know a lot about radio,†said +Joe. “He must stay up all night studying.â€</p> + +<p>“Guess that’s what’s the matter with him,†remarked +Bob, soberly. “He spends too much of +his time indoors, boning. He should get out in +the open more.â€</p> + +<p>“Looks as if a little fresh air might tone him +up some,†Herb admitted. “He looks as if a +breath of air might blow him away.â€</p> + +<p>“If I looked as thin as he does, I’d go see a +doctor,†said Jimmy emphatically.</p> + +<p>It was a fact that the operator at the station, +while looking far from strong when the boys +had first seen him, had grown thinner and thinner +and paler and paler until now he seemed to be +positively going into a decline.</p> + +<p>Because they had a sincere regard for Bert +Thompson, the boys had tried to lure him out +into the open, but he had been proof against all +their blandishments. And after a while the boys +had given up trying.</p> + +<p>“If he wants to kill himself,†Bob had grumbled, +“I suppose we’ll have to let him have his +own way about it.â€</p> + +<p>And now at this particular time when the boys +were at peace with the world, something suddenly +happened that gave them a rude jolt.</p> + +<p>Talking happily of improvements they expected +to apply to their new radio outfit, they came suddenly +upon—Buck Looker and his crowd.</p> + +<p>To say they were surprised would not have +half expressed it. They were dumbfounded and +mad—clear through. So here were these rascals, +turning up as they always did, just in time to +spoil the fun.</p> + +<p>That Buck and his cronies had been talking +about them was evident from the fact that at the +appearance of the radio boys they stopped short +in what they were saying and looked sullenly +abashed. And from their confusion Bob guessed +that the meeting was as much a surprise to the +“gang†as it was to themselves.</p> + +<p>The boys would have gone on without speaking, +hoping to avoid trouble if it was possible, +but Buck hailed them boisterously.</p> + +<p>“Say, what are you guys doing here?†he +asked, sneeringly, thrusting himself almost directly +in front of Bob, so that the latter would be +forced to step aside in order to pass him.</p> + +<p>“That’s what I’d like to ask you,†returned +Bob, feeling himself grow hot all over. “Get out +of my way, Buck. You’re cramping the scenery.â€</p> + +<p>“Aw, what’s your awful rush?†asked Buck, +refusing to move, while Carl Lutz and Terry +Mooney sidled over to the bully, keeping a wary +eye on Bob’s right fist, nevertheless.</p> + +<p>“Say, get out of here, Buck Looker, and get +quick!†It was Joe who spoke this time, and +any one not as stupid as Buck Looker would +have known it was time to do as he was +told.</p> + +<p>But because of the fire that had burned to the +ground his father’s disreputable cottage in the +woods and which he and his followers had blamed +upon the radio boys, Buck Looker thought himself +safe in taunting the latter as much as he +wished. He assumed that they would not dare +resent anything he said or did, for fear he would +make public the matter of the fire and accuse +them openly.</p> + +<p>It was a chance of a lifetime for Buck—or so +he thought—and he was determined not to over-look +it. So his manner became more insulting +than ever and his face took on a wider grin as +his glance shifted from Bob to Joe.</p> + +<p>“So you’re in a hurry, too, are you?†he +sneered. “Going to set some more houses on fire, +eh?â€</p> + +<p>He turned to his cronies with a grin and they +piped up together as if by a prearranged signal:</p> + +<p>“Firebrands!â€</p> + +<p>This undeserved insult was more than the radio +boys could stand, and all stepped forward with +clenched fists.</p> + +<p>“You take that back, Buck Looker!†cried Joe, +with flashing eyes.</p> + +<p>“Take back nothing!†answered the bully.</p> + +<p>“Yes, you will!†broke in Bob, and caught +Buck by the arm.</p> + +<p>At once the bully aimed a savage blow at Bob’s +head. But the latter ducked, and an instant later +his clenched fist landed upon Buck’s chin with +such weight that the bully was sent over backward +into the snow.</p> + +<p>At the instant when Buck made his attack on +Bob, Terry Mooney tried to hit Joe with a stick +he carried. Joe promptly caught hold of the +stick, and, putting out his foot, sent Terry backward +into a snowdrift. Seeing this, Carl Lutz +started to run away, but both Herb and Jimmy +went after him and knocked him flat.</p> + +<p>“You let me alone! I didn’t do anything!†+blubbered Carl, who was a thorough coward.</p> + +<p>“You can’t call me a firebrand,†answered Herb, +and while fat Jimmy sat on the luckless Carl, +Herb rammed some snow into his ear and down +his neck.</p> + +<p>While this was going on both Buck and Terry +had scrambled to their feet, and then began a +fierce fight between that pair and Bob and Joe. +Blows were freely exchanged, but soon the radio +boys had the better of it, and when Terry’s lip +was bleeding and swelling rapidly, and Buck had +received a crack in the left eye and it was also +swelling, all three of the cronies were only too +glad to back away.</p> + +<p>“Have you had enough?†demanded Bob, pantingly.</p> + +<p>“If you haven’t, we’ll give you some more,†+added Joe.</p> + +<p>“You just wait! We’ll get square with you +some other time,†muttered Buck. And thereupon +he and his cronies lost no time in sneaking +away into the woods.</p> + +<p>“Of all the mean fellows that ever lived!†cried +Herb.</p> + +<p>“I guess they’ll leave us alone—for a while, +anyway,†came from Joe, as he felt of his +shoulder where he had received a blow.</p> + +<p>“I wonder what those fellows are doing around +here, anyway,†said Bob thoughtfully. “Do you +suppose they’re putting up at the Mountain Rest +Hotel, too?â€</p> + +<p>“More than likely,†answered Joe, gloomily. +“Perhaps they’ve been driven out of Clintonia, +too, on account of the epidemic. I heard quite +a number of the other young folks were getting +out. The whole town is pretty well scared.â€</p> + +<p>“They are sure trying their best to make trouble +for us,†added Jimmy.</p> + +<p>“That fire in the woods was just nuts for +them,†said Bob, with a frown. “They’ve been +trying for a long time to get something on us, +and now they think they’ve got it. They think +we’re afraid to beat ’em up now as they deserve, +for fear they’ll tell everybody we set that old +shack on fire.â€</p> + +<p>“It was a funny thing,†remarked Joe, musingly, +“how that fire started, anyway.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, what’s the use of worrying?†added Herb, +carelessly. “I reckon the memory of that licking +will keep Buck quiet for a while. Say, that was +a fine piece of work you did, Bob! The memory +lingers.â€</p> + +<p>Bob grinned.</p> + +<p>“How about yourselves?†he asked, adding, +with a gleam in his eyes: “I didn’t notice Terry +Mooney and Carl Lutz looking very happy!â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink18'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XVIII—A NEST OF CONSPIRATORS</a></h2> + +<p>The radio boys saw Buck Looker often—all +too often—in the days that followed. As the +boys had feared, Buck and his crowd were staying +at the Mountain Rest Hotel, and it was almost +impossible to help encountering them.</p> + +<p>Several times there were arguments which almost +resulted in blows, but Buck always managed +to sneak off at the critical moment, leaving the +boys to fume helplessly.</p> + +<p>“Wish we could find out how that shack of +theirs caught fire,†Joe grumbled on one of these +occasions. “Then we could stop their mouths +on that firebrand question once and for all.â€</p> + +<p>“Wouldn’t make any difference,†remarked +Herb gloomily. “If they couldn’t make trouble +for us on that score, they’d think up something +else.â€</p> + +<p>But about this time something happened that +took the minds of the radio boys from Buck +Looker and his trouble making.</p> + +<p>One day, as they were tramping through the +woods in the still deep snow, they came upon a +little decrepit-looking one-room shack, standing +dejectedly within a circle of skeleton trees.</p> + +<p>They had wandered further than usual from +camp in exploring the surrounding country and +had come upon the tiny cabin unexpectedly. +Jimmy was about to utter a gleeful shout at +sight of the interesting-looking place when Bob +clapped a warning hand over his mouth.</p> + +<p>“Keep still,†he whispered sharply. “I hear +voices in there.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, what if you do?†demanded Joe, but +he kept his voice cautiously lowered just the same. +“Probably some harmless dubs——â€</p> + +<p>“Like ourselves,†finished Jimmy, with a grin, +“seeking shelter from the bitter weather.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, whoever they are, they sure are mad +about something,†said Bob, hardly knowing why +he should be so excited.</p> + +<p>The voices inside that one-room shack had been +raised in altercation, but now, as the boys listened, +somebody evidently cautioned silence, for once +more the tones were lowered almost to a whisper.</p> + +<p>“There’s something mysterious about this,†+said Bob, his eyes gleaming joyfully. “I vote +we look into it.â€</p> + +<p>“Right-o,†agreed Joe, following the leader as +Bob started softly toward the shack.</p> + +<p>What they expected to find they had no idea. +But it was an understood, though unspoken, rule +with the radio boys never to pass by anything +that looked in the least mysterious. And certainly +this queer little shack in the woods bore all the +air of mystery.</p> + +<p>There was one small window near where they +were standing and the four boys crowded up to +this, jostling each other in the attempt to be the +first to see through the dingy pane.</p> + +<p>“Hey!†whispered Jimmy in anguish, as Joe’s +foot clamped firmly down upon his. “Quit parking +on my toe, will you? There’s lots of room +on the ground.â€</p> + +<p>Joe snickered derisively and that small sound +came near to proving their undoing. For inside +the cabin it happened that for a moment +every one had stopped talking and in the silence +Joe’s laugh was distinctly audible.</p> + +<p>“Some one’s getting in on this,†they heard one +of the voices say, as though its owner were nervous, +yet was trying his best to hide his uneasiness. +“Let’s take a look around, boys. You never can +be too sure.â€</p> + +<p>The radio boys looked at each other in consternation. +There was no time to get away, even +if they had wanted to. And now that they were +convinced there was crooked work going on in +the shack, they certainly did not want to leave.</p> + +<p>Bob flattened himself against the wall and motioned +to his chums to do likewise. If the fellows +found them and wanted to put up a fight, “well, +they’d get their money’s worth, anyway.â€</p> + +<p>But it so happened that the lads were not discovered. +The door of the shack was on the opposite +side from them, and either the men were too +lazy to search carefully or they were too confident +of the obscurity of their meeting place. At any +rate, they went to the door, looked around, and, +finding no one within sight, evidently decided that +they had been mistaken in thinking they had heard +a suspicious noise and reëntered the shack without +searching further.</p> + +<p>“You’re crazy, Mohun,†the boys heard one of +them remark, in an irritable voice. “You’re letting +your imagination—and your nerves—run +away with you.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, this deal is enough to get on anybody’s +nerves,†was the grumbled reply, evidently from +the person addressed as Mohun. “If we don’t +put it across pretty quick I’m going to quit. I’ve +told you too much delay would be fatal.â€</p> + +<p>The boys glanced at each other, and the relief +they had felt at not being discovered was closely +followed by huge excitement as they became more +and more certain that they were on the verge +of making an important discovery.</p> + +<p>They crowded closer to the window though, +mindful of how close they had come to discovery, +they were careful to make not the slightest sound.</p> + +<p>Bob, who was closest to the window, could, +by exercising the greatest caution, peer into the +shadows of the room. He put out his hand as a +warning to Joe, who was crowding him closely.</p> + +<p>“Don’t push,†he said, in the merest whisper. +“I have a notion this is going to be good.â€</p> + +<p>So had the other boys, but they were mad +clean through at the fate that prevented their +getting a glimpse into the tumbled-down shanty. +However, they held back, knowing that if they +were too eager they would spoil everything. Discovery +then would mean that they would never +hear the secret these men were about to disclose.</p> + +<p>The old shack had evidently once been lived +in, for it was fitted up with furniture of a crude +sort. Along one side of the room ran two long +bunks, one above the other, and on the walls were +some old dilapidated-looking pictures, evidently +cut out of magazines or news periodicals.</p> + +<p>There was a three-legged, rickety table in the +center of the room, and about this the conspirators—for +such they were—were gathered. Two +of the men had chairs, patently home-made, for +seats, while the third, who sat facing Bob, had +merely an empty wooden box turned on end.</p> + +<p>It was this last fellow who was now speaking +and who had been addressed by the name of +Mohun. He was short and of fair complexion, +with protruding, horsey teeth that stuck out disagreeably +over his lip.</p> + +<p>Another of the trio was a giant of a fellow, +tall, dark and heavy-browed, while the third, +who sat with his back to Bob, was of slighter +build, but nearly as tall.</p> + +<p>Mohun seemed to be the leader of the party, +for now he was leaning across the rickety table, +talking earnestly and emphasizing his remarks +with blows of his fist upon it.</p> + +<p>“I tell you, Merriweather,†he said, addressing +the giant, “this is our time to act. You are +merely pussy-footing when you ask delay. I am +convinced that delay means suicide.â€</p> + +<p>Jimmy, catching the last word, gasped involuntarily +and Bob nudged him warningly.</p> + +<p>“Keep still,†he hissed. “This sure is going +to be good!â€</p> + +<p>The two other men looked uncertain but the +fellow called Mohun was pushing the point home.</p> + +<p>“This is our chance,†he cried vehemently. +“Salper is out of the way for the present, but +we never know when he may take the notion to +go back to the old job. They say he is getting +mighty restive already.â€</p> + +<p>At the mention of Mr. Salper’s name Bob fell +back in his amazement and landed on Joe’s foot, +whereupon the latter emitted a squeak of pain +that he immediately stifled.</p> + +<p>“Did you hear that?†demanded Bob in an excited +whisper, without a thought for poor Joe’s +foot. “They’re talking about Mr. Salper.â€</p> + +<p>Eagerly he turned back to the window while +Herb whispered in an awed tone:</p> + +<p>“Maybe they’re going to murder the old +fellow.â€</p> + +<p>“Say, keep still, can’t you?†said Bob impatiently, +as he strained his ears to catch the lowered +tones of the three men.</p> + +<p>Herb subsided, and the four of them waited +with bated breath to find out what these three +conspirators had to do with Gilbert Salper.</p> + +<p>“Maybe you’re right, Mohun,†the tall man +with the craggy brows answered reluctantly. “But +I can’t help thinking that to strike now is a poor +move.â€</p> + +<p>“In two or three weeks we’ll have everything +just as we want it,†added the man who sat with +his back to Bob. “We’ll have a sure thing then, +while now——â€</p> + +<p>The man called Mohun threw up his hands in +a gesture of despair.</p> + +<p>“Pussy-footing again!†he cried disgustedly. +“What kind of gamblers are you, anyway, to +wait until you have a sure thing before you test +your luck? Don’t you know that the big deals +down on the Street that have been successful +have been put through because the fellows doing +it had nerve?â€</p> + +<p>“Yes, but not many of the deals have been as +big or as important as this,†said the giant quietly.</p> + +<p>“All the more reason to strike quickly,†argued +Mohun, with heat, adding in a lowered tone: +“I tell you this absence of Salper from Wall Street +is the chance of a lifetime. It’s the thing we’ve +been waiting for. With him on the Street we +haven’t a chance for our lives. With him away, +we have everything in our own hands. Now it’s +up to you whether we make the most of our luck, +or throw it in the rubbish heap.â€</p> + +<p>“But Salper is up here for an indefinite length +of time,†argued the man with his back to Bob. +“It is said he will stay at least a month, maybe +two. And a week—two at the outside—is all +we need to make sure of relieving him of some +of his ill-gotten wealth.â€</p> + +<p>The man laughed noisily at this poor attempt +at humor, and Mohun glanced nervously about +him.</p> + +<p>“Better look out,†he said, peevishly. “You +never can tell who’s listening. They say the trees +have ears around this way.â€</p> + +<p>“Your nerves are getting the best of you, +I think,†cried the big man. “Just because +you’ve got cold feet is no reason why we should +take the chance of losing out on the biggest deal +we’ve had the chance of handling for many a day. +Get a good sleep, man, and you’ll think the way +we do, tomorrow.â€</p> + +<p>For a moment it seemed as though Mohun +were about to spring upon the big man and Bob +held his breath, expecting a struggle. Mohun’s +face turned a brick red and his lips drew back +from his protruding upper teeth as though in a +snarl. His hands clenched, he took a step toward +the bigger man who had half risen from his chair.</p> + +<p>“Then I’ll tell you one thing, you pussy-footers!†+he cried furiously. “If this deal isn’t pulled +through by the end of a week and if by that time +we haven’t our hands on a good chunk of Salper’s +money, then I’m through. Do you hear that? I +quit!â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink19'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XIX—ON GUARD</a></h2> + +<p>The radio boys had heard enough. Silently +they tiptoed from their vantage point, putting off +the tremendous desire to exclaim about what they +had heard until they had put a good distance between +themselves and the shack.</p> + +<p>Then they overflowed with wonder and excitement.</p> + +<p>“Say, wait till we spring this news on Mr. +Salper!†cried Herb. “The man will near go off +his head.â€</p> + +<p>“Gosh, you couldn’t blame him,†said Joe, in +an awed tone. “I wouldn’t like to have those +three fellows after my hard-earned cash myself.â€</p> + +<p>“Then he was right when he thought there was +somebody after his money,†said Bob, striding +along so swiftly in his excitement that poor +Jimmy had hard work to keep up with him. “We +thought he was kind of crazy, but I guess he knew +what he was talking about all the time.â€</p> + +<p>“But I say, you got all the best of it, Bob,†+said Herb. “Why couldn’t you let the rest of us +get a glimpse of some honest-to-goodness sharpers?â€</p> + +<p>“They weren’t much to look at,†said Bob, with +a frown. “That man they called Mohun was +one of the ugliest scoundrels I’ve ever seen.â€</p> + +<p>“Was he any worse than Cassey?†asked +Jimmy, curiously.</p> + +<p>“If he was he must have been going some,†+added Herb, with conviction.</p> + +<p>“I guess nobody could be much worse than +Cassey,†said Bob, frowning at the memory of +the stuttering scoundrel’s evil acts. “But he’s +just as bad. When he jumped at that big fellow +with the bushy eyebrows I thought he was going +to bite him. He has teeth that stick away out +over his under lip.â€</p> + +<p>“Must be a beauty,†commented Herb.</p> + +<p>“I say,†said poor Jimmy, fairly running in +his effort to keep up with the other boys, “you’re +not going toward the hotel, Bob. May I ask +where you are going?â€</p> + +<p>“Why, Doughnuts, you shouldn’t have to ask,†+broke in Joe, before Bob could respond. “Don’t +you know there is only one place where we could +be going after hearing such rotten news as we’ve +just heard?â€</p> + +<p>“We’re going to the Salpers, of course,†finished +Herb, with a condescending air that irritated +the plump and puffing Jimmy.</p> + +<p>“Well, you needn’t be so fresh about it,†he +grumbled, rubbing his empty stomach ruefully. +“It’s nearly dark——â€</p> + +<p>“And it’s dinner time,†added Joe, with a grin. +“How well we know you, Doughnuts.â€</p> + +<p>“Well,†grumbled Jimmy, grinning reluctantly, +“I don’t see why the Salpers can’t wait till we can +get something to eat.â€</p> + +<p>“It won’t take us long,†said Bob, who had been +thinking hard as they tramped along. “We’ll +just stop in and tell them what we’ve heard and +then go on. I don’t suppose there is anything +that we can do.â€</p> + +<p>“I guess Mr. Salper will do all that’s necessary +when he finds his money threatened,†said Joe +significantly.</p> + +<p>“I reckon he’s had a hunch that something of +this kind has been going on for a long time—in +fact, he as much as told us so,†said Bob. “But +I guess these rascals were so clever he couldn’t +put his finger on them.â€</p> + +<p>“I wonder what kind of deal they were talking +about,†mused Herb.</p> + +<p>“It was a crooked one, anyway,†said Bob, decidedly. +“All you had to do was to look at them +to know that.â€</p> + +<p>The little shack in the woods was a long way +from the Salper place, and so, in spite of their +hurry, the boys did not reach it until just on the +edge of dark.</p> + +<p>The entire family was gathered in the living +room of the Salper cottage, even Mr. Salper himself, +and the boys threw their bomb right into the +midst of them.</p> + +<p>Mr. Salper had seemed inclined, as he usually +did, to draw apart by himself, but at the very beginning +of the boys’ story, he evinced an almost +fierce interest.</p> + +<p>He questioned them minutely while the girls +and Mrs. Salper listened wonderingly.</p> + +<p>“You said the name of one of the men was +Mohun?†he asked, throwing away the cigar he +had been smoking and bending earnestly toward +Bob. “What did he look like?â€</p> + +<p>The disagreeable impression the man had made +upon him was still so vivid that Bob had no +trouble at all in giving a graphic description of +the fellow.</p> + +<p>Mr. Salper’s face grew blacker and blacker as +he listened and he pulled out another cigar, biting +off the end of it viciously.</p> + +<p>“That’s the fellow I’ve been suspecting all +along,†he said, finally. “Slick fellow, that +Mohun. Whenever a man gets too eager to +do things for you I’ve learned to suspect him. +Yet, closely as I’ve watched this man, I haven’t +been able to get a thing on him. As far as we +could find out, he was perfectly square. But, +by Jove, this puts an entirely new face on things.â€</p> + +<p>He paused for a moment, puffing hard on his +cigar while the others all watched him anxiously. +The ill humor which had been hanging over him +for so long seemed magically to have vanished. +Now that his suspicions had been so unexpectedly +justified, bringing with them the need for action, +the broker was a different man, entirely. His +brow had cleared and there was an eager light +in his keen eyes.</p> + +<p>“You fellows have done me the greatest of +possible services,†he said, turning to the radio +boys—he had forgotten up to that time to thank +them for what they had done. “If you could +know what it means to me to have this information——â€</p> + +<p>He broke off, running his hand excitedly +through his hair, his eyes gazing unseeingly out +of the window.</p> + +<p>“I must act and act quickly,†he muttered, +after a minute. “There is surely no time to lose. +You said this man Mohun was urging haste?†+he added, turning to Bob.</p> + +<p>The latter nodded. “Said he’d quit if they +didn’t get a move on, or words to that effect,†+he told his questioner, and Mr. Salper smiled a +preoccupied smile in response.</p> + +<p>“Then Mohun will get what he wants. He +has a way of getting what he wants,†he said, +again with that air of speaking to himself. “I’m +glad to know it’s Mohun—very glad!â€</p> + +<p>Although Bob had given as good a description +as was possible of the other two men who had +been in the shack with Mohun, Mr. Salper did +not recognize them.</p> + +<p>“Probably a couple of dark horses,†he said, +and dismissed the subject. Evidently, to him, +Mohun was the most important of the rascals +and the one it was necessary to deal with at once.</p> + +<p>After repeated thanks from Mr. Salper and +outspoken gratitude on the part of Mrs. Salper +and the girls, the boys managed to get away.</p> + +<p>They hurried on toward the Mountain Rest +Hotel, talking excitedly of what had happened.</p> + +<p>“That was sure just dumb luck,†remarked Joe +as he sniffed of the cold brisk air and began to +realize that he was very hungry. “Our happening +on that little shack just as we did,†he added +in response to an enquiring look from Bob.</p> + +<p>“You bet,†agreed Herb. “That was the time +our luck was running strong. It will do me +good if those scoundrels get come up with, especially +the one with the big teeth.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, stop talking and hurry up,†begged +Jimmy, who, in his eagerness to get back to the +hotel and dinner, was actually leading the others. +“It seems ten miles to the house when your poor +old system is crying aloud for grub.â€</p> + +<p>They laughed at him but followed his example +just the same, for they had been tramping many +hours and their appetites were never of the uncertain +variety.</p> + +<p>But just before they reached the welcome lights +of the cottage they realized to their surprise that +it was snowing again. So fast were the flakes +coming that by the time they reached the door of +the hotel they were well powdered with them.</p> + +<p>“Hooray!†shouted Herb. “We sure are getting +our money’s worth of snow this winter.â€</p> + +<p>“You bet,†agreed Bob, adding happily: “And +this one looks like a ‘lallapaloosa.’â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink20'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XX—BROKEN WIRES</a></h2> + +<p>True to Bob’s prediction, the snowstorm +proved to be a fierce one even for this season of +unusual snows, and when the boys awoke the +next morning they found that the ground had +taken on an extra covering and the branches of +the trees were weighted down with the heavy fall.</p> + +<p>“Say, fellows, look what’s here!†cried Joe as +he roused his mates, sleepy-eyed from their comfortable +beds. “Old Jack Frost sure was busy +last night.â€</p> + +<p>“Guess he thinks it’s Thanksgiving,†Bob +agreed as he hurried into his clothes, keeping one +eye on the frosty landscape and fairly aching to +make part of it. “Hurry up, fellows, let’s go out +and have a snow fight.â€</p> + +<p>“You’re on,†agreed Joe, and then began the +race to see who would get from their cottage to +the hotel and to the breakfast table first.</p> + +<p>They arrived there—at the breakfast table, that +is—at one and the same time and ate as +ravenously as though they had not broken their fast in +a week. Mr. and Mrs. Layton watched them and +smiled, wishing that they might once more eat +with such lusty appetites.</p> + +<p>Before the boys had finished breakfast, it had +begun to snow again, making the landscape appear +more than ever blizzardy and bleak. +Eagerly the boys buttoned up heavy sweaters, +prepared to fight the storm to a finish.</p> + +<p>It seemed that they were not the only ones +whom the storm had lured forth. There were a +number of people gathered in front of the hotel +and, since they seemed rather excited about something, +three of the boys joined them to find out +what the fuss was all about, Jimmy remaining +behind for the time being to take a nail from his +shoe.</p> + +<p>“The telegraph wires are all down,†said a man +in response to Bob’s question. “There’s a man +been raving around here like a crazy man, declaring +he has to send a telegram. Nobody can +seem to make him understand that since the wires +are all down such a thing is impossible.â€</p> + +<p>“He might telephone,†Joe suggested, but the +man who had been their informant took him up +quickly.</p> + +<p>“They’re down too,†he said. “We’re as +marooned here, as far as any communication with +the outside world is concerned, as though we were +stranded on an island in the midst of the ocean. +This storm has done considerable damage.â€</p> + +<p>“I should say so,†remarked Joe, as the gentleman +turned to some one else and the boys started +on a tour of the place to look over the prospect. +“I’ll call it some damage to knock down both telephone +and telegraph wires at one fell swoop.â€</p> + +<p>“That talk about our being just as badly off +for communication with the outside world as +though we were on an island isn’t quite correct,†+observed Herb. “That fellow seemed to forget +all about trains.â€</p> + +<p>“I suppose he meant quick communication,†+said Bob. “We could send a message by wire in +an hour or less, while it would take two or three +times that time to send the same message by rail.â€</p> + +<p>“That’s so,†agreed Herb, staring up at the +wires which had fallen beneath their weight of +snow. “I’d hate to <i>have</i> to get a message through +for any reason just now. But look,†he added, +pointing to the hotel. “Our aerials are still up +anyway.â€</p> + +<p>“I wonder who the fellow was who was so +anxious to telegraph,†said Joe, after a few +minutes. “He must think himself in bad luck.â€</p> + +<p>Bob brought his gaze from the damaged wires +and stared at the boys, and at Jimmy who just +then came puffing up.</p> + +<p>“Say, I bet that was Mr. Salper,†Bob said. +“Don’t you remember last night that he said he +must get a message through to his broker first +thing in the morning?â€</p> + +<p>“By Jove, the storm knocked it clear out of my +head!†exclaimed Joe. “Say, I feel sorry for +him, all right.â€</p> + +<p>“Wish we could help him some way,†said +Herb anxiously. “It would never do to let that +fellow Mohun and his pals get off with the filthy +lucre just when we thought we’d double-crossed +them so nicely.â€</p> + +<p>“I guess that’s where Mr. Salper would agree +with you,†said Jimmy, with a grin. “Especially +since the filthy lucre belongs to him.â€</p> + +<p>They walked on in silence for a few moments, +chagrined at the thought that the storm had +played so into the hands of Mr. Salper’s enemies.</p> + +<p>They had learned from Mr. Salper the night +before that Mohun of the protruding teeth was +not the kind of man to let a golden opportunity +pass. He would rush the “deal†through while +Salper was out of town, and, from the latter’s +impatience, they had gathered that the next few +hours would, in all probability, be the crucial +time.</p> + +<p>“Burr-r-r!†cried Jimmy suddenly, wrapping +his arms as far as they would go about his chubby +body and shivering with the cold. “This weather +sure does make a fellow wish for a fur overcoat. +The thermometer must have gone down twenty +degrees over night.â€</p> + +<p>“Hear who’s talking!†scoffed Herb. “With +all that fat on your bones, Doughnuts, you haven’t +a chance in the world of feeling cold.â€</p> + +<p>“I suppose you know more than I do about it—not +being me,†retorted Jimmy, scathingly. +“I’d just like you to feel the way I do; that’s all.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, it isn’t what you might call unpleasantly +hot,†observed Bob. “I must say I’m not sweltering, +myself.â€</p> + +<p>“Guess it isn’t much colder than this up at the +North Pole,†agreed Joe, as he turned his sweater +collar up higher about his ears. “Might as well +rig up as an Eskimo and be done with it.â€</p> + +<p>“Reminds me of that Norwegian, Amundsen,†+said Bob. “He sure intends to discover the +North Pole with all the fancy trimmings, this +time.â€</p> + +<p>“What do you mean?†asked Herb, with +interest.</p> + +<p>“Do you mean to say you haven’t read about +it?†demanded Jimmy, indulgently. “Why, he’s +the fellow who is going to have his ship all +dressed up with wireless so that when he smashes +his ship against the North Pole he can let everybody +know about it.â€</p> + +<p>“It’s a great idea, I call it,†said Joe, enthusiastically. +“Up to this time, explorers +haven’t had any way of communicating with the +outside world, and so if they got in trouble they +just had to get out of it the best way they could +or die in the attempt.â€</p> + +<p>“While now,†Bob took him up eagerly, “his +wireless messages will be picked up by hundreds +of stations all over the world and in case of need +ships and teams of huskies and even aeroplanes +can be rushed to his rescue.â€</p> + +<p>“Exploring de luxe,†murmured Herb, with a +comical look. “Pretty soon there won’t be any +such thing as adventure because there won’t be +any danger. We’ll have radio to watch over us +and keep us from all harm.â€</p> + +<p>“It’s all right for you to talk that way,†said +Jimmy. “But I bet if you were one of these explorer +chaps you’d be mighty glad to have something +watch over you and help you out of a tight +fix.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes, I guess those fellows need all the help +they can get,†agreed Bob, soberly. “It isn’t any +joke to be away out there with hundreds of miles +of ice and water between them and civilization.â€</p> + +<p>“They say even the sledges are to be equipped +with radio,†Joe broke in. “So that they can +keep in touch with the ship all the time and +through the medium of the powerful sending set +aboard the boat the ship itself can be kept in constant +touch with the outside world.â€</p> + +<p>“There are planes too, equipped with radio,†+added Bob. “And they say each plane is outfitted +with skids so that it can land safely on the +ice.â€</p> + +<p>“I should think there would be danger in +that,†remarked Jimmy, rubbing his hands vigorously +to set the blood circulating again. “They +say the ice is awfully rough and bumpy and +spattered with small hills of ice. I should think +a pilot would have a jolly time trying to make a +landing under those conditions.â€</p> + +<p>“They intend to cut out the ice about the ship +so as to make landing possible,†explained Bob. +“And in the other places the skids help them to +make a sure landing. Say, wouldn’t I like to +make one of that expedition!†he added, with enthusiasm.</p> + +<p>“I wonder how long they expect this expedition +to take,†said Herb. The idea of exploring +the arctic with radio as a companion was a fascinating +one to him and at that moment he would +have made one of Amundsen’s hardy crew, if +such a thing were possible, with the greatest +joy.</p> + +<p>“They expect it will take them five years, +maybe six.†It was Bob who answered the question. +“Their idea is to travel as far as possible +north before the ice gets thick. Then when the +floes close in about them they will drift with the +ice over the pole—or, at least, that’s what they +hope to do.â€</p> + +<p>“What gets me,†said Jimmy plaintively, “is +how they are going to know when they get to the +pole anyway.â€</p> + +<p>Herb made a pass at him which the fat boy +nimbly avoided.</p> + +<p>“Why, you poor fish,†said the former witheringly, +“you sure will be a full-sized nut if you +ever live to grow up. I suppose if you got to the +North Pole you’d expect to see a clothes pole +with the clothes line wrapped around it, ready for +use.â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink21'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XXI—A SUDDEN INSPIRATION</a></h2> + +<p>Unconsciously their feet had carried the +radio boys in the direction of the radio station +and now they were surprised to find themselves +confronted by the building itself.</p> + +<p>“We’ve come some way,†Herb began with a +chuckle, but Bob cut him short excitedly.</p> + +<p>“Look!†he cried. “Didn’t I tell you that +radio was the best ever? Just cast your eye on +that aerial. You don’t see that trailing on the +ground, do you?â€</p> + +<p>For a moment the other radio boys failed to +grasp the significance of his words. Then they +let out a great shout of triumph. For what Bob +had said was true. Where other means of communication +with the outside world failed, radio +stood firm.</p> + +<p>The aerial was there, towering as serenely +against the slaty sky as though there was no such +thing as a snowstorm. The great marvel of radio! +For no wires, other than the antenna, were +needed to carry its messages to the farthermost +parts of the world!</p> + +<p>For a moment the boys were awed as the real +significance of the modern miracle was borne +home to them. It was magnificent, it was inspiring +merely to have the privilege of living in such +an age.</p> + +<p>“Well, Mr. Salper doesn’t need to worry,†said +Joe, at last. “There’s always radio on the job +if he wants to get a quick message through to +New York.â€</p> + +<p>“It’s queer he didn’t think of it,†agreed Bob, +adding, as the intense cold struck still more +deeply into his bones: “Come on in, fellows. +I’d like to see what the operator has to say to all +this excitement.â€</p> + +<p>“You bet,†said Jimmy, adding fervently: +“And it will give us a chance to thaw out.â€</p> + +<p>When the boys reached the room which had +become so familiar to them, they found that here +too, the old régime had been interrupted. Several +men were gathered in the far corner of the room, +talking earnestly, and the long table where the +operator could be seen daily bending earnestly +over his beloved apparatus was vacant. The +operator himself was nowhere to be seen.</p> + +<p>Sensing something unusual, the boys came forward +hesitantly. At sight of them one of the +men detached himself from the group of his +companions and came quickly over to them. The +boys did not know his name, but his face was +familiar to them.</p> + +<p>“A most unfortunate thing has happened,†+burst out this man nervously, without even an attempt +at a preface. “The operator here has been +taken very ill with a fever and we are at a loss +to find any one who can take his place in this +emergency.â€</p> + +<p>The modesty of the radio boys was such that +at that moment no thought of the possibility of +their being able to take the experienced operator’s +place entered their heads. They were earnestly +sorry for the misfortune which had overtaken +their friend, and they told the man so. It seemed +to them that the latter was rather disappointed +about something, and he listened to their words of +sympathy absently. After a moment he left them +and rejoined his companions at the other end of +the room.</p> + +<p>“Say, that’s tough luck,†said Jimmy, his round +face comically long. “I knew that fellow would +get into trouble if he didn’t take more exercise.â€</p> + +<p>Bob fumbled with the familiar apparatus on +the table, his face troubled.</p> + +<p>“If he’s out of his head with fever, he must be +pretty sick,†he muttered, as though talking to +himself. “And that means that he won’t be able +to attend to radio for a good long time to come.â€</p> + +<p>“And with telegraph and telephone wires all +down, that’s pretty much of a calamity,†added +Joe, his eyes meeting Bob’s with a look of understanding.</p> + +<p>“Say!†cried Herb, suddenly seeing what they +were driving at, “that knocks out Mr. Salper’s +last chance of getting even with those crooks.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes,†said Bob, soberly, “I guess the game’s +up, as far as he’s concerned.â€</p> + +<p>“Let’s go over to the hotel and inquire for the +sick man,†Joe suggested, adding hopefully, +“maybe he isn’t as sick as they make out.â€</p> + +<p>The operator had a room at the hotel, and the +boys had been there once or twice to talk over +points on radio with him and so they knew exactly +where to go.</p> + +<p>However, if they had treasured any hope that +Bert Thompson’s sickness had been exaggerated, +they were promptly undeceived. No one was +allowed to speak to him, the nurse at the hotel +told them, adding, in her briskly professional +manner, that it would be no use to speak to him +anyway, since he was delirious and recognized +nobody.</p> + +<p>But before they went, softened by their real +concern, she said, quite kindly, that as soon as +the patient was able to receive visitors at all she +would let them know.</p> + +<p>They thanked her and went out into the +freezing air again. The snow had stopped and the +wind had died down completely but in the atmosphere +was a deadly chill, a biting cold that seemed +to penetrate to their very marrow.</p> + +<p>“Suppose we go to the Salpers,†Bob suggested. +“Mrs. Salper and the girls may need help, for I +imagine Mr. Salper isn’t in a very pleasant +mood.â€</p> + +<p>“I wonder,†said Joe, as with common consent +they turned in the direction of the Salper home, +“if Mr. Salper has heard yet that even the radio +is out of business.â€</p> + +<p>“Give it up,†said Herb, while Jimmy added, +with a grin: “I’d hate to be the one to break the +news to him.â€</p> + +<p>But, as it happened, that was just what they +had to do. They saw Mr. Salper coming and +tried to pretend that they did not, but he would +have none of it.</p> + +<p>He made for them directly, with a scowl on +his face as fierce as if they had been the cause of +all his trouble.</p> + +<p>“This is a fine business, isn’t it?†he asked, +waving his hand in the direction of the snow-weighted +wires. “No telegraph, no telephone—only +the radio left. I’m on my way to the station +to try to get the message through, though that +operator is a stubborn young donkey and has before +this refused to send messages for me.â€</p> + +<p>Herb and Jimmy made frantic motions to Bob +to keep quiet, for they saw that he was about to +tell the news. And Bob did.</p> + +<p>“I’m sorry, Mr. Salper,†he said quietly. “But +the operator at the wireless station has become +suddenly very ill and there’s no one there to +operate the apparatus.â€</p> + +<p>For a moment Mr. Salper simply glared while +the news sank home. Then he gazed wildly about +him as though to escape from his own worrisome +thoughts. Then the fierce scowl returned to his +face and he made an angry motion toward the +boys.</p> + +<p>“The operator sick!†he muttered. “And not +a doctor up here!â€</p> + +<p>The boys started and looked at him queerly.</p> + +<p>“Do you need a doctor?†asked Bob quickly, +thinking immediately of Mrs. Salper and the +girls. “Is some one sick?â€</p> + +<p>“Yes,†snapped Mr. Salper. “My wife is sick, +very sick. And if I can’t get any sort of word +through, even by radio——†He paused and his +mouth looked as though he were grinding his +teeth.</p> + +<p>He turned back toward his house, and the +boys accompanied him with some vague idea of +at least offering their sympathy, even if they +could not do anything to help.</p> + +<p>They found Edna and Ruth nearly frantic +with fright.</p> + +<p>“Mother is dreadfully ill,†said Edna, between +sobs. “Her hands and face are burning up and +she talks queerly. I’m afraid it’s pneumonia, +and if she doesn’t get a doctor pretty quick she’ll +d-die!†And with a sob she fled into the room +where the sick woman lay.</p> + +<p>The boys felt awkward, and, since there was +nothing they could do to help, deeply concerned +over the trouble of these friends of theirs.</p> + +<p>“There’s some good in Mr. Salper, anyway,†+said Joe, as they tramped along. “He was so +worried over Mrs. Salper that he didn’t mention +those Wall Street scoundrels.â€</p> + +<p>“I reckon it’s worrying him just the same,†+said Jimmy.</p> + +<p>“If only there was something we could do——†+began Bob, then stopped short, a great idea leaping +to his eyes. “Say, fellows, what’s the matter +with our sending that message?â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink22'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XXII—PUTTING IT THROUGH</a></h2> + +<p>The boys stared at him for a moment as +though he had gone suddenly crazy. Then the +light of adventure dawned in their eyes, and they +grinned joyously.</p> + +<p>“Say, old boy,†said Joe in an awed voice, +“that sure is some swell idea. But do you think +we could swing it? We know a lot about receiving, +but when it comes to sending——â€</p> + +<p>“We’re a bunch of nuts,†finished Jimmy, decidedly.</p> + +<p>“Maybe,†retorted Bob. “But at this time, +even a bunch of nuts might be better than +nothing.â€</p> + +<p>“We’ve been studying the code,†said Joe +thoughtfully. “We might be able to handle it +all right. It isn’t the first time, if we’re not experts. +Of course we can do it.â€</p> + +<p>“But not for old Salper,†said Herb. “He’s +so impatient he’d make us forget in five minutes +everything we ever knew.â€</p> + +<p>“Maybe,†said Bob again, adding, stoutly: +“But I’m game to make a try at it anyway. +There’s no one else to do it, and Mr. Salper stands +to lose his wife and a lot of money besides if +some one doesn’t help him out.â€</p> + +<p>“Well, let’s make him the proposition,†suggested +Joe, pausing and looking back at the Salper +house. “I’m with Bob in this thing.â€</p> + +<p>“So say we all of us,†sang Herb cheerily, as +they turned back.</p> + +<p>“So long as Bob’s the goat,†finished Jimmy.</p> + +<p>They found Mr. Salper in the living room of +the bungalow, savagely smoking a cigar. He +scarcely looked at the boys when the girls let them +in, and Bob was forced to speak his name before +he gave them his attention.</p> + +<p>“Well, what is it?†he said gruffly, his tone +adding plainly: “What are you doing here anyway? +I wish you’d get out.â€</p> + +<p>The tone made Bob mad, as it did the other +boys, and when he spoke his own tone was not +as pleasant as usual.</p> + +<p>“We’ve decided to try to help you out, if we +can, Mr. Salper,†he said, and the man looked at +him with a mixture of surprise and incredulity.</p> + +<p>“In what way?†he asked, in the same curt +tone.</p> + +<p>“We know something about sending and receiving +messages by radio,†Bob went on, getting +madder and madder. “And we thought maybe +we might get a message through for you to a +doctor and to your brokers, as well. Of course,†+he added, modestly, “we haven’t had very much +experience——â€</p> + +<p>Bob was too modest to say anything about how +he had once sent messages to some ships at sea, +(as related in detail in “The Radio Boys at Ocean +Point,â€) and how he had tried to send on other +occasions.</p> + +<p>“Experience be hanged!†cried Mr. Salper, so +suddenly that the boys jumped. “You mean to +tell me you can operate that radio contraption?â€</p> + +<p>“I think so,†said Bob, still modestly. “We +haven’t done much along that end of it——â€</p> + +<p>“You’ll do,†cried Mr. Salper, while Edna and +Ruth stared at him with tear-reddened eyes. +“Are you ready to go with me right away to the +station?â€</p> + +<p>The boys nodded and the older man shrugged +into his great coat, reaching quickly for his cap.</p> + +<p>“Take care of your mother,†he said to the +girls. “I’ll stop on my way over to the hotel and +send a nurse over for her. I hear there are two +of them there. Don’t see why the physician +there didn’t send some one to take his place if he +had to leave.â€</p> + +<p>In a moment the radio boys found themselves +once more in the freezing air of the out-of-doors, +being hurried along by the erratic Mr. Salper.</p> + +<p>Poor Jimmy suffered on that forced march. +Although he uttered no word of protest, his face +was purple and his breath came in little puffing +gasps before they had reached the hotel.</p> + +<p>Once there, they had a little respite, however, +while Mr. Salper went to arrange about having a +nurse sent over to his wife. Jimmy waited in the +hotel lobby in a state nearing collapse while the +other boys went up to inquire once more about +their friend, the operator.</p> + +<p>They found him no better—worse, if anything—and +their faces were very solemn when they rejoined +Jimmy in the lobby.</p> + +<p>“Guess it will be nip and tuck if he gets +through at all,†said Bob, anxiously. “I don’t +see why such hard luck had to pick him out for +the victim.â€</p> + +<p>“I suppose they’ll appoint another operator +right away,†suggested Herb.</p> + +<p>“I suppose so,†agreed Jimmy. “But it will +be hard to get any one for a week or more on +account of the heavy weather.â€</p> + +<p>“And in a week’s time without communication +with the outside world a lot of Mr. Salper’s +money will probably have gone up in smoke,†said +Joe.</p> + +<p>“Yes, it’s us on the job all right,†said Bob, +looking a bit worried. “I only hope we can live +up to what’s expected of us.â€</p> + +<p>“All right, boys,†said Mr. Salper, on returning, +in his eyes the preoccupied look of the man +of affairs. “If you can help me out of this fix, +I will surely be deeply in your debt.â€</p> + +<p>These genial words—almost the first that they +had heard from the self-absorbed man—warmed +the boys’ hearts and they resolved to do the best +they could for him, and, through him, for his +daughters.</p> + +<p>When they reached the station they found it +deserted save for one man who sat at a desk, +humped over in a dispirited fashion, reading a +magazine.</p> + +<p>At the entrance of Mr. Salper and the boys +he looked up, then got up and came over to +them as though he were glad of their companionship.</p> + +<p>“How do you do, Mr. Salper?†he said, addressing +the older man with marked respect. +“Is there anything I can do for you?â€</p> + +<p>“Nothing, unless you can work this contrivance,†+returned Mr. Salper, with a comprehensive +wave of his hand toward the cluttered radio +table.</p> + +<p>“I’m sorry,†said the other, a frown of anxiety +lining his forehead. “The operator is sick, and +because of the heavy weather it is doubtful if we +shall be able to secure another one within the +week.â€</p> + +<p>“A week!†cried Mr. Salper. “That amount +of time, my friend, may very easily spell ruin for +me. It is necessary that I communicate with +New York immediately. Are you ready, boys?â€</p> + +<p>The man looked with surprise, first at the radio +boys and then back to Mr. Salper.</p> + +<p>“Am I to understand——†he began, when Mr. +Salper cut him short with an imperative wave of +the hand.</p> + +<p>“These boys,†he said, “know something of +radio. How much they know I am about to find +out.</p> + +<p>“Are you ready?†he asked, sharply, as the +boys still hesitated. “A delay of even a few +minutes would be regrettable.â€</p> + +<p>The boys looked at each other, and since no +one else made a move to approach the apparatus, +Bob saw that it was up to him. And right there +he realized the great difference that there is between +theory and practice. Of course they had +had some practice in sending and they were fairly +familiar with the code, but never before had they +been called upon to make use of their knowledge +in such a matter as this.</p> + +<p>Then too, Mr. Salper was not the kind of person +to inspire self-confidence. He was a driver, +and it is hard to do good thinking when one is +being driven.</p> + +<p>However, having gone so far, there was no +possibility of backing out and with a show of confidence, +Bob approached the apparatus. The man +who had addressed Mr. Salper regarded him with +not a little distrust. He had heard of the radio +boys, as who at Mountain Pass had not, but he +certainly did not think them competent to send a +message of any importance.</p> + +<p>And at that moment, neither did Bob.</p> + +<p>“Will you send your message phone or code?†+he asked, looking up at Mr. Salper inquiringly. +“We can do either here.â€</p> + +<p>Mr. Salper hesitated for a moment, then with +a significant glance at the other man, who was +hovering curiously near, he snapped out, “Code.â€</p> + +<p>“Do you know the letters of the station to be +called?†asked Bob.</p> + +<p>The broker consulted a notebook which he took +from his pocket.</p> + +<p>“Call HRSA,†he returned. “That is our +Stock Exchange station,†he explained. “They +ought to be on the job while the Exchange is open. +They will relay a message to my brokers.â€</p> + +<p>Joe was standing beside Bob and saw that his +chum’s hand trembled somewhat as he took hold +of the ticker.</p> + +<p>“Don’t get rattled, Bob,†he whispered. “Take +your time and don’t let him scare you. Remember, +it’s you that’s doing the favor.â€</p> + +<p>Bob grinned, and then began sending out the +call. Across the ether traveled the letters HRSA +and the call was presently caught up in New York +and then another message was relayed to the +office of a well-known brokerage firm.</p> + +<p>“Hey, Bill,†called a well-dressed young man +seated at a desk in the far end of the office. +“Here’s WBZA calling us. These are the letters +of the station at Mountain Pass——â€</p> + +<p>“Where the Honorable Mr. Gilbert Salper is +taking his rest cure,†finished another man, flinging +away his cigarette and coming to stand beside +his partner. “Do you suppose it’s the old boy +himself calling?â€</p> + +<p>“We’ll soon find out,†returned the other, and +without delay sent in a message to the New York +sending station. In a few seconds they were being +radioed into the ether.</p> + +<p>Bob’s face beamed as he transcribed the dots +and dashes into words. The message read thus:</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>“WBZA heard from. HRSA awaiting message.â€</p> + +<p>Mr. Salper, who had been striding up and +down, hurried to Bob’s side in answer to the +lad’s hail. The other boys were peering eagerly +over Bob’s shoulder.</p> + +<p>“I’ve reached HRSA and through them H. +& D.,†explained the young operator proudly. +“H. & D. are waiting for your message.â€</p> + +<p>“Fine! Fine!†cried Mr. Salper, and his face +showed great enthusiasm. “Those are my +brokers, Hanson and Debbs. Got ’em right off +the reel, didn’t you, boy? Great work! Can +you get my message through at once?â€</p> + +<p>“I don’t know of anything to stop me,†answered +Bob. It seemed too good to be true that +he had picked up the right station so quickly.</p> + +<p>“Send this, then,†Mr. Salper directed. And +in a firm hand he wrote down the following message:</p> + +<div class='bq'> +<p>“Mohun is a crook and plots to ruin me. Find out +his scheme and check him.</p> + +<p style='text-align:right; margin:0 0ex 0 auto'>Gilbert Salper.â€</p> +</div> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink23'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XXIII—THE MIDNIGHT CALL</a></h2> + +<p>Skillfully Bob tapped out the message and +in an inconceivably small space of time it had +been received by the station HRSA and relayed +to H. & D. The boys would have been interested +if they could have known the sensation caused by +the few words.</p> + +<p>“Oh, boy!†cried Hanson, of the firm of Hanson +and Debbs. “I’ve suspected this slick fellow +Mohun for a long time. Now with Salper’s authority +we can go in and clean him out.â€</p> + +<p>“Salper wouldn’t make an accusation of that +sort,†said Debbs thoughtfully, “if there wasn’t +something in it. He’s had some sort of inside +tip all right.â€</p> + +<p>“Well,†returned the other briskly, “we’ll let +the old man know we’re on the job, and then get +busy.â€</p> + +<p>Accordingly, a few minutes later Bob received +and transcribed this message:</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>“Right. We’ll have him inside of twenty-four hours.â€</p> + +<p>At the confidence contained in the message Mr. +Salper straightened his shoulders as if a great +load had been lifted from them and held out a +friendly hand to Bob.</p> + +<p>“I can’t tell you what you have done for me,†+he said, cordially. “Of course I’m not safe yet +from the crooked work of these men, but at least +Hanson and Debbs have been warned to look out. +And that’s two-thirds of the battle.â€</p> + +<p>“I’m mighty glad we’ve been able to help,†said +Bob, adding earnestly: “If there’s anything else +we can do please call on us. Mrs. Salper——â€</p> + +<p>He paused, for at mention of his wife’s name +the relief disappeared from Mr. Salper’s face and +in its place was the old worried frown.</p> + +<p>“Yes—my wife,†he muttered, and, without +another word to the boys, turned and stalked out +of the room. The man, who had all this time +lingered near them, turned and went out after Mr. +Salper and the boys were left alone.</p> + +<p>“Say, you sure did turn the trick that time,†+said Herb admiringly. “If they succeed in getting +those crooks, Mr. Salper will love you all the +rest of his life.â€</p> + +<p>“It was more luck than anything else,†Bob +repeated. “Imagine getting that station first throw +out of the box.â€</p> + +<p>“Never mind,†said Joe, adding truthfully: +“No one else about this place would have been +able to do as much.â€</p> + +<p>They lingered for a while, talking over the exciting +events of the day and tinkering with the +complicated apparatus.</p> + +<p>“Did you hear the latest prediction of Marconi?†+asked Joe. “He says that he has positive +proof that in the near future a radio set will be +perfected which will send messages entirely +around the world.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes,†said Bob eagerly. “He even declares +that we’ll be able to put a sending and receiving +set side by side on the same table and receive +the messages that a moment before we’ve sent +out.â€</p> + +<p>“It only takes a second of time too,†said Herb. +“Imagine sending messages completely around the +world at such speed. If Marconi didn’t say it +could be done, I sure wouldn’t believe it.â€</p> + +<p>“We’ll be talking with Venus or Mars pretty +soon,†said Bob. “Marconi says he has already +received messages that don’t come from anywhere +on the earth.â€</p> + +<p>Although they said little about it, the boys +were elated at Bob’s success with the code, and +it was surely a pleasant thought that they had +helped Mr. Salper, if only that they might make +Mrs. Salper and the girls happy. They had even, +despite his usual gruffness, begun to feel a sort of +liking for Mr. Salper himself.</p> + +<p>During the long snow-bound afternoon they +thought often of Mrs. Salper and wondered if +she were better. They wanted to inquire, but +they were afraid of making themselves a +nuisance.</p> + +<p>Toward evening they strolled over to the hotel +to ask after the operator and found to their delight +that he was better. The nurse, who had become +very friendly toward them, said she thought +the trouble had been checked in time and that the +sick man’s recovery, though it might be slow, was +sure.</p> + +<p>With hearts lightened on that score they went +home. After dinner at the hotel they spent some +time tinkering with their set. One time they +noticed that in a vacuum tube was a pale blue +glow, and Joe was at a loss to know how to account +for it.</p> + +<p>“We’ve got too high a voltage on the B battery,†+said Bob, after a moment of study.</p> + +<p>“But how would that affect it?†asked Herb, +interested.</p> + +<p>“Why,†answered Bob, thoughtfully, “the high +voltage causes a sort of electrical breakdown of +the gas in the tube and it’s apt to affect the receiving.â€</p> + +<p>“Say, Bob’s getting to be a regular blue stocking,†+commented Jimmy admiringly. “We’ll +have to get a move on to catch up with him.â€</p> + +<p>“You bet <i>you</i> will,†said Herb, with insulting +emphasis on the pronoun. However, Jimmy was +too interested to notice.</p> + +<p>“Let’s reduce the voltage, Bob,†Joe was saying +eagerly. “We’ll test out the theory.â€</p> + +<p>“It isn’t a theory,†replied Bob, as he reduced +the voltage and the blue glow disappeared as +though by magic. “You can see for yourself +that it’s a fact.â€</p> + +<p>This discussion led to others, and they sat for +some time eagerly experimenting with their set. +It was just as well that they did for they had just +gone over to their cottage and thus were able to +answer quickly the imperative summons that came +to them a few minutes later.</p> + +<p>In response to a knock on the door they found +Mr. Salper standing outside in the bitter night +air looking so white and shaken that they were +startled.</p> + +<p>He came just inside the door and spoke in +quick, jerky sentences like a man talking in his +sleep.</p> + +<p>“My wife is dangerously ill,†he said. “She +seems so much worse tonight that there is +imperative need of a doctor. There is no doctor up +here, and in this weather it would take too long +to summon one. The trained nurse who is with +her suggests that we try to get in touch with a +doctor by radio and ask his advice. The idea is +far-fetched, but it seems about our only hope. If +that fails——†he paused and Joe broke in +eagerly.</p> + +<p>“My father’s a doctor, Mr. Salper,†he said, +and there was pride in his voice.</p> + +<p>“A doctor, eh?†returned the broker quickly. +“Oh, if only he were here!â€</p> + +<p>“I don’t see how you are going to get hold of +your father,†broke in Herb. “He’s in Clintonia. +Even if he got our message, through Doctor Dale +or somebody else with a receiving set, he couldn’t +send any message here.â€</p> + +<p>“But he isn’t in Clintonia!†shouted Joe, +eagerly. “He went to Newark, New Jersey, to +attend some sort of medical convention and see +if he couldn’t find out more about the epidemic +that hit Clintonia.â€</p> + +<p>“Newark!†came simultaneously from Joe’s +chums.</p> + +<p>“Why, the big radio sending station is there!†+exclaimed Bob.</p> + +<p>“Why can’t you send a message to that station +and ask them to get hold of your father?†broke +in Jimmy.</p> + +<p>“Maybe I could do it,†announced Joe. And +then he looked at Bob. “Perhaps you had better +do the sending. You’ll probably have to call +them in code.â€</p> + +<p>Bob was willing, but first he went up to tell his +mother and father where he and his chums were +going and beg them not to worry if they did not +come back soon.</p> + +<p>On the way to the radio station they stopped +at the Salper bungalow, where the calm-faced +nurse was waiting for them. She had left the +Salper girls in charge of their mother, giving +them minute instructions as to what to do, and +was going with Mr. Salper in the hope that they +might possibly secure medical advice by radio.</p> + +<p>The station was finally reached. It looked deserted +and gloomy at that hour of the night, and +as Bob sent a call for help vibrating through the +ether he felt a creepy sensation, as though he +were, in some way, dealing with ghosts.</p> + +<p>There was just the slightest chance in the world +that they would reach Doctor Atwood. Just a +chance, but if they did not take that chance Mrs. +Salper would die.</p> + +<p>For a long time they tried while the nurse sat +quietly in the shadows and Mr. Salper strode up +and down, up and down, his face drawn and +white, his usually elastic step heavy and dragging.</p> + +<p>Again and again went out the call for the +Newark station. Minute after minute passed, +and still Mr. Salper walked up and down uneasily.</p> + +<p>“I guess you’ll have to give it up——†Herb +was beginning when suddenly Bob motioned for +silence. The radio was speaking, and he was +taking down the message as well as he was able.</p> + +<p>“I’ve got Newark!†the young operator cried +excitedly. “Now I’ll put in a call for your father, +Joe. Where is he staying?â€</p> + +<p>“At the Robert Treat Hotel.â€</p> + +<p>Once more Bob went to work rather excitedly +and even a little clumsily, yet his message went +through. In reply he received another, stating +that Dr. Atwood had been called by telephone +and would be at the sending station inside of +fifteen minutes.</p> + +<p>“And the best of it is, he is to radiophone,†+added Bob to Joe. “So you can talk to him +direct.â€</p> + +<p>After that the minutes passed slowly, both for +Mr. Salper and the boys. They thought the end +of the wait would never come. But at last the +words so eagerly awaited reached them.</p> + +<p>There was no mistaking it, even though static +interfered and the tuning was not good—Dr. Atwood’s +voice, cheery, reassuring, helpful. In his +joy at the sound of it, Joe shouted aloud.</p> + +<p>“Hello, WBZA,†came the voice. “If this is +Joe talking, give me the high sign, my boy.â€</p> + +<p>During the message Bob had tuned in the right +frequency and, with static eliminated one might +have thought the speaker was in the same room.</p> + +<p>Then there followed a battle with death that +the boys would remember as long as they lived. +As soon as Doctor Atwood was made to understand +the nature of the service asked of him, he +became immediately his brisk, professional self.</p> + +<p>The nurse, instantly alert herself, gave him a +description of the case and it was wonderful as +soon as the connection was switched off to hear +his kindly voice responding, giving full directions +for the care of the patient. He declared that he +would be on call all during the night and requested +that some one call him every hour—oftener, +if it became necessary—to report the +progress of the patient.</p> + +<p>The nurse hurried off, accompanied by Mr. Salper, +and for the rest of the night the boys kept +busy, marking a trail between the Salper cottage +and the radio station, taking reports from the +nurse and carrying directions from Doctor Atwood.</p> + +<p>It seemed strange and weird, yet wonderful and +soul-stirring, this tending of a patient by a doctor +many miles away. Once, during the night, hope +almost failed. Mrs. Salper scarcely breathed and +lay so still that Edna and Ruth were sure the +end had come. They clung to each other +sobbing, while Mr. Salper strode up and down, up +and down the room as though if he stopped he +would die too.</p> + +<p>Then came another message from Doctor Atwood. +The nurse followed his directions and +once more hope came back to the Salper home. +The patient rallied, stirred, and for that time at +least, the danger was past.</p> + +<p>So dawn came at last and Joe and the two +younger boys went back to their cottage to try to +catch a few hours of sleep. Bob remained at the +station, declaring that he felt not at all tired and +as soon as the other boys had rested they could +come to his relief.</p> + +<p>A hard vigil that for Bob. In spite of all he +could do, his head would nod and his heavy eyelids +close, to be jerked open next moment by the +arrival of some one from the Salper home or a +message from Doctor Atwood.</p> + +<p>News of the struggle had spread all over +Mountain Pass, and people watched with admiration +and interest the brave fight that was being +made for a woman’s life. And sometimes it +seemed that, despite all their efforts, the struggle +must end in failure.</p> + +<p>All that day the battle waged and the next +night—the boys taking turns at the radio board, +untiring in their determination not to lose. And +Doctor Atwood was as determined as they.</p> + +<p>And then, on the morning of the second day +came news that the patient had passed the much-dreaded +crisis and, with the most careful nursing, +was sure to recover.</p> + +<p>“She’ll be all right now,†came Doctor Atwood’s +cheery voice. “It’s been a hard pull, but +she’s past the danger point now. Keep in touch +with me, boys, so that, in case of a relapse, I can +tell you what to do.â€</p> + +<p>Joe turned to the boys with the light of pride +and affection in his eyes.</p> + +<p>“That’s some dad I’ve got!†he said.</p> + +<p>Later, when the boys walked over to the Salper +home to offer congratulations, the girls received +them with literally open arms.</p> + +<p>“You’ve saved mother’s life!†cried Ruth, with +a catch in her voice.</p> + +<p>“And we love you for it!†added Edna gratefully. +“You just wait till mother knows!â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink24'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XXIV—A PLOT THAT WENT WRONG</a></h2> + +<p>“So far, so good,†breathed Bob happily, as +the boys were discussing the news that Mrs. +Salper had passed the crisis and was now probably +on the road to recovery. “That’s one thing +we can set down to the credit of radio.â€</p> + +<p>“And it’s not the only thing of the same sort,†+put in Joe. “Do you remember what Mr. Brandon +told us of that ship with thirty men and no +doctor on board, where twenty-four of the men +were down with a mysterious disease? The captain +got a message by wireless to shore telling of +his plight, and one of the best doctors in New +York City went to the radio station there and got +in touch with the captain. He talked to him by +radio for hours, had him describe just the symptoms, +and then told the captain just what to do. +A couple of days later the captain wirelessed in +that he had followed directions and that all of the +men had recovered and were fit for duty.â€</p> + +<p>“Yes,†said Herb, “and about that other case, +too, where a man had an infected hand and they +were afraid he was going to have lockjaw. A +doctor on land told the captain how to treat it and +the man got along all right.â€</p> + +<p>“Trust radio, and you won’t go wrong,†+summed up Bob. “On land and sea it’s right on +the job.â€</p> + +<p>“I only hope it will be as effective in saving +Mr. Salper’s money,†observed Joe.</p> + +<p>“I think very likely it will,†replied Bob. +“He’s about as keen as they make them, and now +that he knows what those rascals are plotting +against him it’s dollars to doughnuts that he’ll get +the best of them. Their only chance was in taking +him by surprise and putting over that deal +while his back was turned. And now that he’s +got in touch with his brokers I guess the game +is up.â€</p> + +<p>“I wonder how long it will be before we know +how it turned out,†conjectured Herb.</p> + +<p>“Oh, probably not more than two or three +days,†replied Bob. “Things move pretty fast in +Wall Street when a fight is on for control.â€</p> + +<p>“I hope he comes out on top,†observed Joe. +“He’s a good deal of a crab, and I was mighty +sore at him when he landed on us the way he did +the day we were coming up here. Acted as +though he thought we ought to be shot at sunrise. +But since that time I’ve seen a good deal about +him to like and I’ve come to the conclusion that +he’s a regular fellow after all.â€</p> + +<p>“You can tell by the fondness that the girls +have for him that he can’t be so bad,†said Bob. +“That’s a pretty good sign to go by. They know +him better than any one else except his wife, and +she seems to think, too, that the sun rises and sets +in him.â€</p> + +<p>“I want him to come out ahead not only for +his own sake but because I want to see that fellow +Mohun downed,†put in Jimmy. “I’m sore +at him right down to the ground. I don’t like his +eyes, I don’t like his voice, I don’t like his teeth, I +don’t like his character——â€</p> + +<p>“Outside of that, though, I suppose he’s all +right,†suggested Joe, grinning. “He seems to +be just about as popular with you as a rattlesnake.â€</p> + +<p>“That’s what he reminds me of, anyway,†admitted +Jimmy.</p> + +<p>“Talking of rattlesnakes,†put in Herb, “here +come three of them now,†and he indicated Buck +Looker, who, with Lutz and Mooney, was coming +along the road. For some time now the +Looker crowd had kept out of the radio boys’ +way.</p> + +<p>“I wonder what trick they’re up to now,†said +Bob, as he saw that the bunch had their heads together +in earnest conversation.</p> + +<p>“No knowing,†answered Joe; “but it’s a safe +bet that it’s something cheap and low down. +Buck would think the day was wasted if he didn’t +have something of the kind on hand.â€</p> + +<p>The groups passed each other without speaking, +though Buck darted a look at Bob in passing +that had in it the usual malignance, mingled with +a touch of triumph.</p> + +<p>“Did you see that look?†queried Herb, with +interest. “Seemed as if he had something up his +sleeve.â€</p> + +<p>“I know what it meant well enough,†answered +Bob, with a shade of soberness. “My dad was +telling me that he’d been notified that a suit had +been started against him and the fathers of you +other fellows by Mr. Looker to recover the value +of the cottage that he said we set on fire.â€</p> + +<p>“That’s all bunk!†cried Herb indignantly. +“He couldn’t prove it in a hundred years. A +lawsuit, eh? Huh!â€</p> + +<p>“Dad doesn’t think Looker has much of a +case,†replied Bob. “Still, he says that you can +never tell what a man like Looker and the kind +of lawyer he would hire may do. Of course we +can’t get away from the fact that we were in the +house the day before it burned, and that looks +bad. We know we didn’t set it on fire, but nobody +else knows we didn’t. At any rate, even if +Looker loses his case, our folks will have to hire +lawyers and lose a lot of time in attending court, +so that all in all it makes a pretty bad mess.â€</p> + +<p>“So that’s what Buck was looking so tickled +about!†exclaimed Joe. “I’d like to wipe that +look off his face.â€</p> + +<p>“It might be a little satisfaction,†laughed Bob. +“But it wouldn’t help us win the lawsuit.â€</p> + +<p>By this time their walk had taken them near +the vicinity of the radio station; and as they approached +it they caught sight of Mr. Salper pacing +back and forth in a state of impatience.</p> + +<p>“Seems to be stirred up about something,†remarked +Joe.</p> + +<p>“Did you ever see him when he wasn’t?†+laughed Jimmy.</p> + +<p>At this moment Mr. Salper caught sight of the +boys and came hastily toward them.</p> + +<p>“I want some messages sent and taken,†he +said, in his usual abrupt way, though there was +none of the sharpness in his voice that had usually +been in evidence when he spoke to them. “I +wonder if you could do this for me,†and his +eyes rested inquiringly upon Bob.</p> + +<p>“I’ll do my best, Mr. Salper,†replied the latter, +and the whole group went into the wireless room.</p> + +<p>“I suppose you have permission to use this +plant?†came from Joe.</p> + +<p>“Oh, yes. If it hadn’t been for that I couldn’t +have used it as I did those other times,†answered +the broker.</p> + +<p>Bob seated himself at the sending key and, +following the financier’s directions, got in touch +with the Wall Street house that had figured in the +previous communications.</p> + +<p>For an hour or more there was an interchange +of messages that were mostly nonunderstandable +to Bob and his friends who listened with the +keenest interest. There was talk of stocks and +bonds and of consolidations and controls and +proxies and a host of other things that bore on +financial deals.</p> + +<p>At the beginning, Mr. Salper sat with furrowed +brows and an air of intense concentration. But +as the answers came in to his various inquiries, +his brow gradually cleared and he relaxed somewhat +in his chair.</p> + +<p>Finally there came an answer that stirred him +mightily. He jumped to his feet and slapped his +thigh.</p> + +<p>“I’ve got him!†he cried jubilantly. “By Jove, +I’ve got him!â€</p> + +<h2 class='chapter' id='clink25'><a href='#toc'>CHAPTER XXV—SOLVING THE MYSTERY</a></h2> + +<p>Just whom Mr. Salper had got the radio boys +could not tell with certainty, but they had a +shrewd suspicion that Mohun was the hapless individual.</p> + +<p>The financier walked happily and springily +about the office, chuckling to himself, and Jimmy +declared afterward that if they had not been there +he would have danced a jig.</p> + +<p>At last, when he had given sufficient vent to +his elation, Mr. Salper turned to Bob.</p> + +<p>“I’m sure I can’t tell you how I thank you,†+he declared, with a cordiality and heartiness that +they had never yet seen in him. “This matter +was one of the most important that has come to +me in the whole course of my life. Hundreds of +thousands of dollars were involved in it, and I’d +surely have lost out if I hadn’t had your services +in this extremity. And now I’m going to prove +my gratitude. A check—â€</p> + +<p>“No, thank you, Mr. Salper,†interrupted Bob +hastily. “We don’t want money for the service +we’ve been to you. It’s been exciting and interesting +work for us, and I, at least, have been more +than paid in the experience I’ve got through sending.â€</p> + +<p>“Well then I’m going to get you the finest +radio set that money can buy,†persisted Mr. +Salper.</p> + +<p>“Not even that, thank you,†returned Bob, +smiling. “It’s awfully good of you, and we appreciate +it, but we’ve learned more of radio by +building our own sets than we possibly could +have done in any other way. If you want to send +a check to the Red Cross or some other society of +the kind, it would suit us better than anything +else.â€</p> + +<p>“You’re a stubborn young rascal,†said Mr. +Salper, with a smile, “and I suppose I’ll have to +let you have your way. But just bear in mind +that you boys have a friend in me for life, and +if I can ever be of service to any of you in business +or anything else, let me know and I’ll be +only too glad to do it.â€</p> + +<p>He bade them good-by and went off briskly +toward his bungalow to tell his family of the +news that had lifted such a heavy burden from his +brain and heart.</p> + +<p>The third day after the episode at the radio +station the radio boys had gone further afield +than usual and came upon a little shack that had +evidently been used by workmen as a place for +storing their tools. It was little more than a +shed, and the boys, bestowing on it only a casual +glance, had come nearly abreast of it when Bob, +who was slightly in advance, heard a voice that +he recognized as that of Buck Looker.</p> + +<p>He stopped dead in his tracks, and his companions +did the same as he held up his hand in +warning.</p> + +<p>“We certainly did put it over on those boobs +all right,†Buck was saying, and the remark was +followed by laughs of satisfaction.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but we’re not yet out of the woods,†+came the voice of Carl Lutz, with a touch of uneasiness +in the tone. “Suppose when they put us +on the stand to testify that we found Bob Layton +and the other fellows in the cottage the evening +before it burned, their lawyer asks us if we were +in it too?â€</p> + +<p>“Well, let them ask,†replied Buck. “All we’ll +have to do is to deny it. We know they were in +it. They don’t know we were in it. Who knows +that we slipped in later and sat there until nearly +midnight smoking cigarettes?â€</p> + +<p>With a bound Bob was at the door of the +shack.</p> + +<p>“I know it!†he cried. “I didn’t know it till +just this minute, but now I know it by your own +confession.â€</p> + +<p>“We all heard it,†echoed Joe, as he, with +Herb and Jimmy, followed Bob into the shack.</p> + +<p>Consternation and conscious guilt was written +on every one of the three faces.</p> + +<p>Buck was the first of the cronies to recover +some measure of self-possession.</p> + +<p>“Think you’ve put something over, don’t you?†+he sneered. “Well, you’ve got another think +coming to you. This won’t do you a bit of good +in court. I’ll simply swear that I didn’t say anything +of the kind and that you’ve made up the +story out of whole cloth. It’ll be simply my word +against yours, and you’d be interested witnesses +trying to help your fathers out by cooking up this +story. So what are you going to do about it?â€</p> + +<p>“I’ll show you what we’re going to do about +it!†cried Joe, starting forward.</p> + +<p>But Bob stopped him.</p> + +<p>“Wait a minute, Joe,†he said. Then he +turned to Buck. “Do you mean to say,†he demanded, +“that you’d take a solemn oath in court +to tell the truth, and then go on the stand and +swear to a downright lie?â€</p> + +<p>The contempt in his tone stung Buck into fury.</p> + +<p>“You can put it any way you like,†he shouted. +“I’m simply not going to let you get the best of +me. Who cares for the old confession as you +call it? You can have as many of those as you +like and it won’t do you any good. Here’s another +one now for good measure. We were in +the house late that night. We were smoking +cigarettes. Probably that’s what caused the fire +to break out later. I tell you these things just because +it won’t do you any good. In court I’ll +deny that I ever said them. You’ll say I did. +But the court will know that you have as much +interest in lying as I have, and it’ll just be a standoff. +You’d have to have a disinterested witness, +and that you haven’t got.â€</p> + +<p>“Oh, yes, they have,†came a voice from the +doorway, and Mr. Salper stepped into the shack.</p> + +<p>An exclamation of delight broke from the lips +of the radio boys, while Buck and his cronies +slunk back in terror and confusion.</p> + +<p>“I was out taking a stroll,†explained Mr. Salper, +“and as I heard loud voices coming from the +shack I stepped up to see what was the matter. I +was just in time to hear the full confession of this +estimable young manâ€â€”here he turned a withering +glance on Buck—“and while I’m here, I guess +I’ll take it down.â€</p> + +<p>He drew from his pocket a notebook and a +fountain pen and wrote rapidly, while Buck and +his companions looked at each other like so many +trapped animals.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes Mr. Salper had finished. +Then he read in a clear voice just what he had +written. It was a complete confession similar to +that which Buck had made, with date and place +affixed. He handed this over to Buck with the +fountain pen, with a crisp demand that he sign +it.</p> + +<p>Buck hesitated as long as he dared, but with +those keen eyes used to command fixed upon him +from beneath Mr. Salper’s beetling brows, he +finally signed his name, and Lutz and Mooney +shamefacedly followed suit.</p> + +<p>“I guess that will settle the law case,†Mr. Salper +remarked, with a smile, as he handed the +precious document to Bob, who folded it carefully +and put it in his breast pocket. “Now perhaps +we would better go and leave these worthy young +gentlemen to their meditations. I don’t think +they’ll be especially pleasant ones.â€</p> + +<p>The radio boys left the shack, followed by the +black looks of the discomfited conspirators.</p> + +<p>“You certainly came along in the nick of time, +Mr. Salper,†said Bob. “We’re very grateful to +you.â€</p> + +<p>“I’m glad if I’ve been able to be of service to +you,†replied Mr. Salper. “It’s only paying back +in small measure what you’ve done for me. The +bulk of the obligation is still on my side.â€</p> + +<p>It was a happy group of radio boys that +returned to the Mountain Rest Hotel that afternoon.</p> + +<p>“Adventures have surely crowded in on us +lately,†remarked Bob.</p> + +<p>“More than they ever will again,†prophesied +Joe.</p> + +<p>But that he had not foretold the future correctly +will be seen by those who read the following +volume of this series, entitled: “The Radio +Boys Trailing a Voice; Or, Solving a Wireless +Mystery.â€</p> + +<p>That very night they sent the news of the confession +to Dr. Atwood with the request that he +would communicate the tidings to the fathers of +the rest of the boys. The lawsuit, of course, was +dropped at once, and Buck and his cronies slunk +home in disgrace.</p> + +<p>“Radio is lots of work, but it’s also lots of +fun,†remarked Joe that night, as they sat late reviewing +the events of the day.</p> + +<p>“Radio,†repeated Bob. “It’s more than fun. +It’s excitement. It’s romance. It’s adventure. +It’s life!â€</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>THE END</p> +<hr style='border:none; border-bottom:1px solid silver; width:70%; margin:2em auto' /> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'><i>This Isn’t All!</i></p> + +<p>Would you like to know what +became of the good friends you +have made in this book?</p> + +<p>Would you like to read other +stories continuing their adventures +and experiences, or other books +quite as entertaining by the same +author?</p> + +<p>On the <i>reverse side</i> of the wrapper +which comes with this book, +you will find a wonderful list of +stories which you can buy at the +same store where you got this book.</p> + +<p><i>Don’t throw away the Wrapper</i></p> + +<p><i>Use it as a handy catalog of the books +you want some day to have. But in +case you do mislay it, write to the +Publishers for a complete catalog.</i></p> +<hr style='border:none; border-bottom:1px solid silver; width:70%; margin:2em auto' /> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>THE RADIO BOYS SERIES</p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:0.8em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>(Trademark Registered)</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>By ALLEN CHAPMAN</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>Author of the “Railroad Series,†Etc.</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>Individual Colored Wrappers. Illustrated.</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>Every Volume Complete in Itself.</p> + +<p>A new series for boys giving full details of radio work, +both in sending and receiving—telling how small and +large amateur sets can be made and operated, and how +some boys got a lot of fun and adventure out of what they +did. Each volume from first to last is so thoroughly fascinating, +so strictly up-to-date and accurate, we feel sure +all lads will peruse them with great delight.</p> + +<p>Each volume has a Foreword by Jack Binns, the well-known +radio expert.</p> + +<p> +     THE RADIO BOYS’ FIRST WIRELESS<br/> +     THE RADIO BOYS AT OCEAN POINT<br/> +     THE RADIO BOYS AT THE SENDING STATION<br/> +     THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS<br/> +     THE RADIO BOYS TRAILING A VOICE<br/> +     THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE FOREST RANGERS<br/> +     THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE ICEBERG PATROL<br/> +     THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE FLOOD FIGHTERS<br/> +     THE RADIO BOYS ON SIGNAL ISLAND<br/> +     THE RADIO BOYS IN GOLD VALLEY<br/> +</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>GROSSET & DUNLAP, <i>Publishers</i>, NEW YORK</p> +<hr style='border:none; border-bottom:1px solid silver; width:70%; margin:2em auto' /> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>THE DON STURDY SERIES</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>By VICTOR APPLETON</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>Individual Colored Wrappers and Text Illustrations by</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>WALTER S. ROGERS</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>Every Volume Complete in Itself.</p> + +<p>In company with his uncles, one a mighty hunter and +the other a noted scientist, Don Sturdy travels far and +wide, gaining much useful knowledge and meeting many +thrilling adventures.</p> + +<p>DON STURDY ON THE DESERT OF MYSTERY;</p> + +<p>An engrossing tale of the Sahara Desert, of encounters with +wild animals and crafty Arabs.</p> + +<p>DON STURDY WITH THE BIG SNAKE HUNTERS;</p> + +<p>Don’s uncle, the hunter, took an order for some of the biggest +snakes to be found in South America—to be delivered alive!</p> + +<p>DON STURDY IN THE TOMBS OF GOLD;</p> + +<p>A fascinating tale of exploration and adventure in the Valley +of Kings in Egypt.</p> + +<p>DON STURDY ACROSS THE NORTH POLE;</p> + +<p>A great polar blizzard nearly wrecks the airship of the +explorers.</p> + +<p>DON STURDY IN THE LAND OF VOLCANOES;</p> + +<p>An absorbing tale of adventures among the volcanoes of +Alaska.</p> + +<p>DON STURDY IN THE PORT OF LOST SHIPS;</p> + +<p>This story is just full of exciting and fearful experiences on +the sea.</p> + +<p>DON STURDY AMONG THE GORILLAS;</p> + +<p>A thrilling story of adventure in darkest Africa. Don is +carried over a mighty waterfall into the heart of gorilla land.</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>GROSSET & DUNLAP, <i>Publishers</i>, NEW YORK</p> +<hr style='border:none; border-bottom:1px solid silver; width:70%; margin:2em auto' /> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>THE TOM SWIFT SERIES</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>By VICTOR APPLETON</p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:0.8em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>Uniform Style of Binding. Individual Colored Wrappers.</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>Every Volume Complete in Itself.</p> + +<p>Every boy possesses some form of inventive genius. +Tom Swift is a bright, ingenious boy and his inventions +and adventures make the most interesting kind of reading.</p> + +<p> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS<br/> +     TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE<br/> +     TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER<br/> +     TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL<br/> +     TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS WAR TANK<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR SCOUT<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS UNDERSEA SEARCH<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AMONG THE FIRE FIGHTERS<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS FLYING BOAT<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT OIL GUSHER<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS CHEST OF SECRETS<br/> +     TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRLINE EXPRESS<br/> +</p> + +<p><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Grosset & Dunlap, Publishers, New York</span></p> +<hr style='border:none; border-bottom:1px solid silver; width:70%; margin:2em auto' /> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>THE RIDDLE CLUB BOOKS</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>By ALICE DALE HARDY</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>Individual Colored Wrappers. Attractively Illustrated.</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>Every Volume Complete in Itself.</p> + +<p>Here is as ingenious a series of books for little folks as +has ever appeared since “Alice in Wonderland.†The idea +of the Riddle books is a little group of children—three girls +and three boys decide to form a riddle club. Each book is +full of the adventures and doings of these six youngsters, +but as an added attraction each book is filled with a lot of +the best riddles you ever heard.</p> + +<p>THE RIDDLE CLUB AT HOME</p> + +<p>An absorbing tale that all boys and girls will enjoy reading. +How the members of the club fixed up a clubroom in the Larue +barn, and how they, later on, helped solve a most mysterious +happening, and how one of the members won a valuable prize, +is told in a manner to please every young reader.</p> + +<p>THE RIDDLE CLUB IN CAMP</p> + +<p>The club members went into camp on the edge of a beautiful +lake. Here they had rousing good times swimming, boating +and around the campfire. They fell in with a mysterious old man +known as The Hermit of Triangle Island. Nobody knew his +real name or where he came from until the propounding of a +riddle solved these perplexing questions.</p> + +<p>THE RIDDLE CLUB THROUGH THE HOLIDAYS</p> + +<p>This volume takes in a great number of winter sports, including +skating and sledding and the building of a huge snowman. +It also gives the particulars of how the club treasurer lost the +dues entrusted to his care and what the melting of the great +snowman revealed.</p> + +<p>THE RIDDLE CLUB AT SUNRISE BEACH</p> + +<p>This volume tells how the club journeyed to the seashore and +how they not only kept up their riddles but likewise had good +times on the sand and on the water. Once they got lost in a fog +and are marooned on an island. Here they made a discovery +that greatly pleased the folks at home.</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>GROSSET & DUNLAP, <span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Publishers</span>, NEW YORK</p> +<hr style='border:none; border-bottom:1px solid silver; width:70%; margin:2em auto' /> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>FOOTBALL AND BASEBALL STORIES</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>Durably Bound. Illustrated. Colored Wrappers.</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>Every Volume Complete in Itself.</p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>The Ralph Henry Barbour Books for Boys</p> + +<p>In these up-to-the-minute, spirited genuine stories of +boy life there is something which will appeal to every boy +with the love of manliness, cleanness and sportsmanship +in his heart.</p> + +<p> +     LEFT END EDWARDS<br/> +     LEFT TACKLE THAYER<br/> +     LEFT GUARD GILBERT<br/> +     CENTER RUSH ROWLAND<br/> +     FULLBACK FOSTER<br/> +     LEFT HALF HARMON<br/> +     RIGHT END EMERSON<br/> +     RIGHT GUARD GRANT<br/> +     QUARTERBACK BATES<br/> +     RIGHT TACKLE TODD<br/> +     RIGHT HALF HOLLINS<br/> +</p> + +<p class='center' style='font-size:1.2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>The Christy Mathewson Books for Boys</p> + +<p>Every boy wants to know how to play ball in the fairest +and squarest way. These books about boys and baseball +are full of wholesome and manly interest and information.</p> + +<p> +     PITCHER POLLOCK<br/> +     CATCHER CRAIG<br/> +     FIRST BASE FAULKNER<br/> +     SECOND BASE SLOAN<br/> +     PITCHING IN A PINCH<br/> +</p> + +<p>THIRD BASE THATCHER, By Everett Scott</p> + +<p class='center' style='margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>GROSSET & DUNLAP, <i>Publishers</i>, NEW YORK</p> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass, by Allen Chapman + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS *** + +***** This file should be named 38453-h.htm or 38453-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/8/4/5/38453/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/38453-h/images/illus-001.jpg b/38453-h/images/illus-001.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..39e7faf --- /dev/null +++ b/38453-h/images/illus-001.jpg diff --git a/38453.txt b/38453.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..823d1aa --- /dev/null +++ b/38453.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6292 @@ +Project Gutenberg's The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass, by Allen Chapman + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass + The Midnight Call for Assistance + +Author: Allen Chapman + +Release Date: January 1, 2012 [EBook #38453] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + +[Illustration: "LOOK! OUR AERIAL IS STILL UP"] + + + + +_THE RADIO BOYS SERIES_ + +(Trademark Registered) + +THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS + +OR + +THE MIDNIGHT CALL FOR ASSISTANCE + +BY ALLEN CHAPMAN + +AUTHOR OF + + THE RADIO BOYS' FIRST WIRELESS + THE RADIO BOYS AT OCEAN POINT + RALPH OF THE ROUNDHOUSE + RALPH THE TRAIN DESPATCHER, ETC. + +WITH FORWARD BY + +JACK BINNS + +_ILLUSTRATED_ + +NEW YORK + +GROSSET & DUNLAP + +PUBLISHERS + +Made in the United States of America + + + + +BOOKS FOR BOYS + +By Allen Chapman + +12mo. Cloth. Illustrated. + +THE RADIO BOYS SERIES + +(Trademark Registered) + + THE RADIO BOYS' FIRST WIRELESS + Or Winning the Ferberton Prize + + THE RADIO BOYS AT OCEAN POINT + Or The Message that Saved the Ship + + THE RADIO BOYS AT THE SENDING STATION + Or Making Good in the Wireless Room + + THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS + Or The Midnight Call for Assistance + + THE RADIO BOYS TRAILING A VOICE + Or Solving a Wireless Mystery + +THE RAILROAD SERIES + + RALPH OF THE ROUNDHOUSE + Or Bound to Become a Railroad Man + + RALPH IN THE SWITCH TOWER + Or Clearing the Track + + RALPH ON THE ENGINE + Or The Young Fireman of the Limited Mail + + RALPH ON THE OVERLAND EXPRESS + Or The Trials and Triumphs of a Young Engineer + + RALPH THE TRAIN DESPATCHER + Or The Mystery of the Pay Car + + RALPH ON THE ARMY TRAIN + Or The Young Railroader's Most Daring Exploit + +GROSSET & DUNLAP, Publishers, New York + +Copyright, 1922, by + +GROSSET & DUNLAP + +_The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass_ + + + + + FOREWORD + + By Jack Binns + + In the first chapter of this volume there appears a statement + by "Bob," one of the Radio Boys, as follows: "Marconi is one + of those fellows that can never rest satisfied with what's + been done up to date." + + Perhaps no more concise summary of the driving force back of + the men responsible for the tremendous development of radio + could be made. It is just that refusal to be satisfied with + what has been accomplished that has made wireless the greatest + wonder development in the history of mankind. + + Although the radio boys in this case are but creatures of the + author's imagination, nevertheless they are typical of all the + men who have taken part in bringing radio to its present + stage. Even Marconi himself likes to take pride in the + assertion that he too was at one time an amateur, because he + insists that during his early experiments he was only a boy + amateur tinkering with a little known subject. + + There is undoubtedly a great deal of truth in his claim, + because the experiments that led to his success were made + while he was a youth studying at the Bologna University in + Italy. + + What is true of Marconi is equally true of all the others. We + have only to think of a name prominent in the field of wireless, + and then trace back the history of the man who bears it, + and you will come to an enthusiastic amateur. + + There is another fascinating thing about wireless, and it is + the fact that no matter how much work one may really expend in + tinkering with it, and no matter how valuable the results, it + does not seem like real work. This is aptly phrased by Joe in + the book who says: + + "I'd like to take it up as a regular profession. Think of what + it must be for fellows like Armstrong and Edison, and De + Forest and Marconi. I'll bet they don't think it's work." + + There is no doubt that Joe wins his bet. + + Jack Binns + + + + +CONTENTS + +I--The Bear Pursues +II--An Exciting Chase +III--An Amazing Discovery +IV--The Bully Appears +V--A Startling Accusation +VI--The Burned Cottage +VII--Radio Wonders +VIII--A Close Shave +IX--Bucking the Drifts +X--Convincing a Skeptic +XI--A Mountain Radio Station +XII--The Marvelous Science +XIII--Pressed into Service +XIV--Scoring a Triumph +XV--The Snowslide +XVI--The Modern Miracle +XVII--Thrashing a Bully +XVIII--A Nest of Conspirators +XIX--On Guard +XX--Broken Wires +XXI--A Sudden Inspiration +XXII--Putting It Through +XXIII--The Midnight Call +XXIV--A Plot That Went Wrong +XXV--Solving the Mystery + + + + +THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE BEAR PURSUES + + +"Nothing to do till tomorrow!" sang out Bob Layton, as he came out of +high school at Clintonia on Friday afternoon, his books slung over his +shoulder, and bounded down the steps three at a time. + +"And not much to do then, except just what we want to," chimed in Joe +Atwood, throwing his cap into the air and catching it deftly as it +came down. + +"You fellows do just love to work, don't you?" put in Herb Fennington, +with an air of self-righteousness that was belied by the merry twinkle +in his eyes. + +"Oh, we just dote on it," replied Bob. + +"Work is our middle name," asserted Joe. "In fact we lie awake nights +trying to conjure up something to do." + +"Regular pair of Work Hard twins--I don't think," declared Jimmy +Plummer. "Now as for me----" + +"Yes?" said Herb, with an assumption of polite interest. + +"As for me," repeated Jimmy, not at all daunted by the incredulity in +Herb's tone, "I've been working like a horse all this season. A little +more and I'll be only skin and bone." + +As Jimmy was by all odds the fattest boy in school, this assertion was +greeted by a roar of laughter. + +"Now I know why you look like a string bean," chuckled Joe. + +"That explains why his clothes hang on him so loosely," laughed Bob, +pointing to Jimmy's trousers which were so filled out that they +resembled tights. "Jimmy, you may be an unconscious humorist, but +you're a humorist just the same." + +Jimmy glared at his tormentors and tried to look wan and haggard, but +the attempt was not a pronounced success. + +"All the same," he protested, "Doc. Preston has been rushing us like +the old Harry all this fall, and what with school work and home work +and radio work----" + +"Radio!" interrupted Bob. "You don't call that work, do you? Why it's +fun, the greatest fun in the world." + +"You bet it is," chimed in Joe enthusiastically. "We never knew what +real fun was until we took it up. Look at the adventures it's brought +us. If it hadn't been for radio, we wouldn't have won those Ferberton +prizes; we wouldn't have run down Dan Cassey and made him give back +the mortgage he was trying to cheat Miss Berwick out of; and we +wouldn't have got back the money he nearly got away with when he +knocked out Brandon Harvey." + +"Right you are," agreed Bob. "And probably that boat our folks were on +would have gone down with all on board if it hadn't been for the radio +message that brought help to it. And see the good it did for Larry and +the experience we had in sending out from the broadcasting station in +Newark!" + +"I tell you, fellows, there's nothing like radio in the universe!" +agreed Jimmy. + +"I'd like to take it up as a regular profession," said Joe. "Think of +what it must be for fellows like Armstrong and Edison and De Forest +and Marconi. I'll bet they don't think it's work. They're eager to get +at it in the morning and sorry to knock off at night. There's no +drudgery in a profession like that." + +"Speaking of Marconi," remarked Herb, "I see that he's just come over +to America again on that yacht of his where he thought he heard +signals that might have been from Mars. I wonder if he's heard any +more of them." + +"I don't know," replied Bob thoughtfully. "Though I've become so used +to what seem to be almost miracles that I'm prepared for almost +anything. At any rate, the only thing one can do nowadays is to keep +an open mind and not say beforehand that anything is impossible. It +would be great, wouldn't it, if we could get in touch with another +planet? And if we could with one, there doesn't seem to be any reason +why we couldn't with all, that is if there's life and intelligence on +them. But after all, at present that's only speculation. What +interests me more just now is the discovery that Marconi is said to +have made by which he is able to send out radio waves in one given +direction." + +"I hadn't heard of that," remarked Joe. "I thought they spread out +equally in all directions and that anybody who had a receiving set +could take them." + +"So they have up to now," replied Bob. "But Marconi's one of those +fellows that can never rest satisfied with what's been done up to +date. That's what makes him great. I'm not exactly clear about this +new idea of his, but the gist of it is that he throws a radio wave in +a certain direction, much as a mirror throws a ray of light. He uses a +reflector apparatus and the wave is caught at the receiving end on a +horizontal metal standard. With a wave of only three and one half +meters he has thrown a shaft nearly a hundred miles in just the +direction he wanted it to go. The article I read said that he had some +sort of semicircular reflector covered with wires that resembled a +dish cut in half. When the open side is turned toward the receiving +station he wants to reach, the signals are heard loud and clear. When +the open part is turned away, the signals can't be heard. The whole +idea is concentration. Just what a burning glass does with the rays of +the sun, his device does with the radio waves. Marconi's a wizard, and +that's all there is about it. There's no knowing what he may do next. +But you can be sure that it'll be something new and valuable." + +"He's a wonder," agreed Joe heartily. "And if he's the 'father of +wireless,' we've got to admit that he has a good healthy baby. I'm +going to try to get on friendly terms with that baby." + +"We've already been introduced to it, if we haven't got much further," +laughed Bob. "But say, fellows, what's the program for tomorrow?" + +"Three square meals," was Jimmy's suggestion. + +"Sure," agreed Herb. "Though in your run-down condition you ought to +have at least six." + +"He'll get them, don't worry," chaffed Joe, unmoved by the reproach in +Jimmy's eyes. + +"I was thinking----" Bob began. + +"How do you get that way?" inquired Herb composedly. + +"You'll never get that way," retorted Bob severely. "As I was saying +when this lowbrow interrupted me, I was thinking that it might be a +good idea to go nutting. The trees are full of nuts this year, and +that frost we had a couple of nights ago will make it easy to get a +raft of them. What do you say?" + +"I say yes with a capital Y," replied Joe. + +"Hits me just right," assented Herb. + +"It's the cat's high hat," was the inelegant way that Jimmy phrased +it. + +"It's a go then," said Bob. "Come around to my house a little after +eight tomorrow morning and we'll get an early start. Every fellow +brings his own lunch, and we'll take some potatoes along to roast in +the woods." + +"Here's hoping it will be a dandy day," said Herb, as the boys parted +at Bob's gate. + +"It looks as though it were going to be," replied Bob, looking at the +sky. "But after supper I'll tune in and get the weather report by +radio." + +"Anything you don't do by radio?" asked Joe, with a grin. + +"Oh, I set my watch by the Arlington signal every night and a few +other things," laughed Bob. "Fact is, I'm hanging around the receiving +set every spare minute I have for fear I'll let something get by me. +Radio has got me, and got me for fair." + +The weather report was favorable and Bob slept in peace. And when he +opened his eyes on the following morning he found that Uncle Sam's +weather bureau had been right in this particular instance, for a +lovelier fall morning, to his way of thinking, had never dawned. + +He ate breakfast a little more quickly than usual, and had barely +finished when the other radio boys were at his door loaded with +lunches and ready to start. Jimmy especially was well furnished in the +matter of provisions, for he carried two packages while the rest of +the boys were content with one. + +"Aren't you afraid you'll be hunchbacked carrying both those bales of +goods?" asked Herb, with mock anxiety. + +"Not a bit," responded Jimmy cheerfully. "One of them is full of +doughnuts, and I expect to eat them on the way. You see I was in such +a hurry that I didn't eat much of a breakfast----" + +"What?" exclaimed Bob. + +"Can I believe my ears?" asked Herb plaintively. + +"Say it again and say it slow," urged Joe. + +"I mean," Jimmy hurried to correct himself, "not so much as I might +have eaten. I had a bit of cereal----" + +"Catch on to that 'bit,'" murmured Herb. + +"And some bacon and eggs and a slice of cold meat from the roast last +night and some hot rolls and----" + +"Outside of that you didn't have anything to eat," said Joe. "All +right, Jimmy, old boy, we understand. But shake a leg now and let's +get under way. This is too fine a day to be spending it in a chinfest, +and besides we can have plenty of that as we go along." + +The air was brisk and stimulating, with just enough warmth imparted by +the sun to prevent its being cold, and a soft autumnal haze hung over +the landscape and clothed it in mellow beauty. It was the kind of day +when Nature is at her best and when it is good just to be alive. + +The boys were like so many young colts turned out to pasture, and +joked and jested as they went along. Laughter came easily to their +lips and shone through their eyes, while the joy of youth ran through +their veins and made them tingle to their finger-tips. Life was +roseate and they had not a care in the world. + +A walk of between two and three miles brought them to the woods for +which they had set out. The forest covered a great many acres and was +full of noble trees, chestnut, hickory, and many other varieties. + +As Bob had said, the year had been an unusually good one for nuts, and +the trees were loaded with them. The frost of a little time before had +been just sufficient to make them ready to pick, and the ground was +already strewn with the half-opened burrs of many that had been shaken +from the trees. Others still hung to the boughs by so slender and +brittle a thread that it was only necessary to hurl clubs up into the +trees to have them come down in showers. + +The boys had brought big bags along with them to carry the nuts they +might gather, and before long these had most of the wrinkles spread +out of them by the steadily accumulating collection of chestnuts that +formed the bulk of their treasure, although they had a good many +hickory nuts as well. + +The active work gave them all an appetite, a thing that came to them +very easily under almost any circumstances, and a little before noon +they ceased for a while from gathering the nuts and bestirred +themselves in gathering leaves and brushwood for a fire. Their bags +were more than half full, and from what they had seen they knew they +would have little trouble in finishing filling them up to the very +drawing strings. + +They gathered together a little cairn of rocks and built the fire +inside of it, keeping it fed to such effect that before long the +stones were at a white heat. Then they drew the fire away and on the +heated stones roasted their potatoes and a large number of the +chestnuts they had gathered. They had brought plenty of salt and +butter along, and when at last the potatoes were done they seasoned +them and ate them with a relish exceeding anything that would have +attended the eating of them at a regular meal in their homes. An +epicure might have complained of the smoky flavor, but to the boys, +seated on the leaf-carpeted ground flecked with the sunlight that +sifted through the trees, the food was simply ambrosial. + +With the potatoes they dispatched the rest of the food they had +brought along. Then, with a feeling of absolute content, they +stretched out luxuriously on the ground and munched the roasted +chestnuts in beatific indolence. + +For an hour or two they rested there, and then Bob rose and stretched +himself and called his reluctant friends to action. + +"It would be a sin and a shame to go out of these woods without having +our bags crammed to bursting," he said. "Let's get a hustle on, and +just for variety let's try another part of the woods." + +"All right," assented Joe, while Herb and Jimmy, though more slowly, +roused themselves. + +They picked up their bags and moved from place to place, choosing +those sections where the trees grew thickest and the outlook for nuts +was most promising. + +"Better be a little careful," warned Joe, after they had gone a +considerable distance. "Part of this wood belongs to Buck Looker's +father, and perhaps he'd have some objection to our nutting here." + +"I don't think any one would kick," responded Bob. "Everybody around +here regards the woods as common property, as far as nutting is +concerned. Besides, there's no way of telling, as far as I know, what +section belongs to him and what to other people." + +"There's something that will give us the tip," remarked Herb, pointing +through the trees to a clearing in which they saw a two-story cottage. +"That house belongs to Mr. Looker, though nobody has lived in it for a +long while and I guess he's just letting it go to rack and ruin." + +The house did indeed look shaky and dilapidated. Some of the railing +and boards of the low veranda had been broken in or rotted away, and +the whole place bore the look of decay that comes to houses that for a +long time have been destitute of occupants. + +"Looks as if it would fall to pieces if you breathed on it," said +Herb. + +"Old enough to have false teeth," commented Jimmy. "I suppose Mr. +Looker lets it stand simply because it's cheaper than pulling it +down." + +The boys gathered nuts for perhaps two hours longer, and then they had +to stop because their bags would not hold any more. Jimmy was already +groaning in anticipation of having to carry his home. + +"That'll weigh a ton by the time we get to Clintonia," he grumbled, as +he eyed it with considerable apprehension. + +"Hard to please some people," commented Herb. "You'd be kicking like a +steer if you didn't have any to carry, and now you're sore because +you've got enough to last all winter." + +"Might as well leave enough for other people," said Jimmy, with a +spasm of generosity. + +"There are more nuts here than will ever be picked," replied Herb. +"For that matter, some other people are getting them now. I've heard +them thrashing about in the brush for the last few minutes only a +little way from here." + +"Funny we don't hear voices then," said Joe. + +"Perhaps they're deaf mutes," suggested Jimmy, and adroitly ducked the +pass that Joe made at him. + +The noise persisted and seemed to be coming nearer and nearer. There +was a crashing of bushes, as though some heavy body were being pushed +through them. + +"Seem to be making heavy weather of it," commented Herb. "Don't see +why any one should make extra work for himself when there are plenty +of paths through the woods. Now if--Look!" + +His voice rose in a shout that startled his comrades. + +They turned and looked in the direction of his pointing finger. And +what they saw froze the blood in their veins. + +A great shaggy bear had emerged from the brush into a path not more +than a hundred feet away and was lumbering rapidly toward them! + + + + +CHAPTER II + +AN EXCITING CHASE + + +For a single instant the boys stood motionless and silent, stupefied +by the sudden apparition. Then, as though shocked by a galvanic +battery, they woke to life. + +"Quick!" shouted Bob. "To the bungalow! It's our only chance!" + +Like a flash he was off, followed by his comrades. Even Jimmy's feet +seemed winged, and they reached the porch in record time. + +Frantically Bob grasped the knob of the front door. The door was +locked. He threw himself against it, but his weight was not +sufficient, and although the door groaned it refused to yield. He +glanced at his comrades, surrounding him in a panting group, and then +at the bear. The latter was still coming, and seemed to have increased +his speed. + +The roof of the veranda was supported by half a dozen wooden pillars. + +"Shin up these!" shouted Bob, throwing his arms and legs about one and +setting the example. + +In a trice they were all climbing desperately. Fortunately they had +not far to go, for the roof of the veranda was not high. But they felt +as though they were in a nightmare, and although they were really +making surprisingly good time, it seemed as though they would never +get to the top. + +Bob reached there first and swung himself over the roof. Not waiting a +moment to rest, he rushed over to the post that Jimmy had chosen, +reached over his hand and caught one of Jimmy's wrists. There was a +mad scramble and then Jimmy lay on the roof, gasping. + +Joe and Herb needed no help, as they had reached the roof only a +second later than Bob. + +For the moment at least they were safe, and they sat panting and +trying to get their breath. + +And while with fast-beating hearts they are wondering how they are to +escape from the monster below them, it may be well, for the benefit of +those who have not read the preceding volumes of this series, to tell +who the radio boys were and what had been their adventures up to the +time this story opens. + +Bob Layton was the son of a prosperous chemist who was a leading +citizen of the town of Clintonia, a wideawake, thriving, little city +with a population of about ten thousand. The town was located on the +banks of the Shagary River, and was about seventy-five miles from New +York. Bob, at the time these incidents occurred, was in his sixteenth +year. He was tall and well built, of rather dark complexion and frank, +merry eyes that always looked straight at one. He was good in his +studies and a leader in athletic sports among boys of his own age. He +had a firm, decided character, and was always at his best in an +emergency that demanded cool thinking and quick action. + +His closest friend was Joe Atwood, whose father was a physician with a +large practice. Joe was fair in complexion, while Bob was dark, and +they differed in more than mere physical qualities. Joe had a fiery +temper and was apt to speak or act first and think afterward, and Bob +many times served as a brake on the impulsive temperament of his +friend. + +Herb Fennington was a year younger than Bob and Joe, and of a more +indolent, easy-going disposition. He was full of fun and jokes and +nobody could long have the blues when Herb was about. + +A fourth member of the group was Jimmy Plummer, whose father was a +carpenter and contractor and a highly respected citizen of the town. +Jimmy was fat, red-faced and good-natured, with a special partiality +for the good things of life. He had gained the nickname of +"Doughnuts," because of his fondness for that famous product of the +kitchen, and did his best to deserve the name. + +Besides the liking that drew the boys together, there was an added +link in their interest in radio, which by its wonders had taken a firm +hold on their youthful imaginations. In delving into the mysteries of +this new and fascinating science, they had been greatly assisted by +the kindly help afforded them by the Reverend Doctor Dale, the pastor +of the Old First Church of Clintonia. His suggestions had been of +immense value in helping them to master the elements of the science, +and whenever they got into a quandary they had no hesitation in +appealing to him for help that was never refused. + +What gave the boys an added stimulus was the offer by the member of +Congress for the district in which Clintonia was situated of prizes +for the best radio sets made by the boys themselves. The contest was +open to all the boys residing in the Congressional district, and Bob, +Joe, and Jimmy entered into it with enthusiasm. Herb, with his natural +indolence, did not go into the competition and was sorry afterward +that he had not. The first prize was a hundred dollars, and the +second, fifty. To the boys this seemed a whole lot of money and well +worth the winning. + +It was hard work though, and made the harder by the obstacles put in +their way by Buck Looker, the bully of the town, assisted by Carl Lutz +and Terry Mooney, two of his cronies almost as worthless as himself. +Buck tried to wreck Bob's aerial and got a richly deserved thrashing +in consequence. Later on the trio tried to steal Jimmy's set, but the +radio boys got it back in a way that brought a good deal of +discomfiture to the Looker crowd. + +While the radio sets were in the making, an exciting incident occurred +in town that drew the boys into a series of adventures. An automobile +running wild and dashing through the windows of a paint and hardware +store in the town gave Bob and Joe an opportunity to rescue the +occupant, a Miss Nellie Berwick, and to learn her story of having been +swindled out of some property by a rascal. How by the means of radio +they got on the track of the scoundrel and forced him to make +restitution, how they overcame all the machinations of their enemies +and came out ahead in the competition, is told in the first volume of +this series, entitled: "The Radio Boys' First Wireless; Or, Winning +the Ferberton Prize." + +Shortly after Bob had won the first prize and Joe the second, the +radio boys went down to Ocean Point on the seacoast to spend the +summer. A colony had been established there by several of the +Clintonia families, including those of the radio boys, and they had +great fun on the beach and in the surf. Here too they made marked +advances in their knowledge of radio, in which they were greatly +helped by Brandon Harvey, the wireless operator at the Ocean Point +sending station. How they repaid this by pursuing and capturing the +man who had assaulted him and looted the safe at the station, what +exciting adventures they met with in the pursuit and capture, how +their knowledge of radio enabled them to send help to a ship in peril +on which their own families were voyaging, are told in the second +volume of this series, entitled: "The Radio Boys At Ocean Point; Or, +The Message that Saved the Ship." + +Their summer at Ocean Point was further marked by a gallant rescue of +two young vaudeville performers who had been run down by reckless +thieves in a stolen motor boat. How they finally brought these men to +justice, how they managed to bring congenial employment to a crippled +friend, and how in doing this they found scope for their own talents +in the fascinating work of radio broadcasting, are told in the third +volume of this series entitled: "The Radio Boys At the Sending +Station; Or, Making Good in the Wireless Room." + +And now to return to the boys, who found themselves in the woods on +the roof of the porch of the cottage where they had taken refuge from +the pursuit of the bear. + +That refuge promised to be only a temporary one and exceedingly +precarious. The roof was none too strongly built in the first place, +and had fallen into decay from stress of weather and lack of repairs. +Already there was an ominous creaking as it sagged crazily under the +weight of the four boys. + +Beneath them was the bear, who looked up at them, his jaws slavering +and his little red eyes flaming. He was an enormous beast, capable of +tearing any one of them in pieces if he once got them within his +clutches. + +"If we only had a gun!" groaned Bob, as a terrifying rumbling came +from the throat of the bear. + +"I'd rather have a stick of dynamite to throw at his feet and blow him +into kingdom come," muttered Joe, as he gingerly shifted his position +to find a more solid support than the part of the roof that was +sagging under him. + +"'If wishes were horses, beggars might ride,'" remarked Herb. "The +question is what are we going to do?" + +"Seems to me the question is what is the bear going to do?" put in +Jimmy. + +"What he'll do is plenty," said Joe. "He's got us trapped good and +proper, and the next move is up to him." + +The bear himself seemed to be in something of a quandary as to what +that next move was to be. He paced clumsily up and down before the +veranda while he was making up his mind. But to the boys' dismay there +was no sign that he was inclined to relinquish the prey that was so +nearly within his reach. + +Finally he seemed to come to a decision. He moved from one to the +other of the pillars supporting the veranda roof, sniffing at each as +if calculating which was the strongest. Then to the horror of the boys +he threw his paws about one of the pillars and commenced to climb. + +"He's coming up!" cried Bob, and even as he spoke they could see the +shaggy hair of the beast's head come in sight on a level with the +porch roof. "Up on the other roof, fellows! Maybe he can't follow us +there." + +The roof of the house proper extended over the side and front of the +second story and there were several protruding points that offered +support to the feet and hands. In addition there were shutters to the +windows, the tops of which reached nearly to the roof. + +There was a wild scramble for whatever support came nearest to hand. +How the boys did it they could not for the life of them remember +afterwards, but somehow, with the spur given to them by the knowledge +that the bear was close behind, they got up on the roof of the house, +their clothes torn and their fingers bruised and bleeding. + +"Let's go along the roof toward the back of the house," panted Joe. +"There may be an extension kitchen there on which we can drop and then +from there to the ground. It may not be so easy for the bear to get +down after us as it has been to get up." + +They followed this suggestion at once and made their way as rapidly as +possible across the shaky roof. It would have been more prudent of +them to have left some interval between them, but they were so excited +that they did not think of that and crowded close on one another's +heels. + +Suddenly a shout rose from Bob. + +"Back, fellows!" he cried. "The roof's caving in!" + +But the warning came too late. There was an ominous cracking and +splintering, and then with a roar a section of the roof collapsed, +carrying the boys down with it. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +AN AMAZING DISCOVERY + + +There was a chorus of shouts as the boys felt themselves falling, +followed by a heavy thud as they brought up on the floor of the attic +in a blinding cloud of dust and plaster. + +They had been so close together that they all came down in a heap, in +a waving confusion of arms and legs. + +Fortunately the distance had been only a few feet, but it was enough +to knock the breath out of them, especially out of Jimmy, who had the +misfortune of finding himself at the bottom of the heap. + +For a minute or two they were too dazed by the suddenness of the fall +to speak coherently, or in fact to speak at all. Then gradually they +disentangled themselves and got to their feet. + +Their first sensation had been that of alarm and the second of shock. +But after they had in some measure recovered from these, there came a +third sensation of immense relief. + +For what had seemed at first a disaster revealed itself as a blessing +in disguise when they realized that at least they had escaped from +their pursuer. They were inside the house and had a number of ways of +escape through the doors or windows available to them. The tables had +been turned, and now it was the bear that was at a disadvantage. + +They rubbed their eyes to get the dust out of them, and had barely +begun to see clearly when they heard a voice calling from outside the +house. The accents were foreign and they could not catch clearly what +was said, but the words, whatever they were, were promptly followed by +a scratching and clawing that seemed to indicate that the bear was +sliding down one of the pillars of the porch to the ground. + +"We must warn him!" cried Bob. "The bear will get him, sure!" + +They rushed down the stairs to the ground floor and looked through one +of the front windows. At a few yards' distance stood a man, short and +stocky and of a swarthy complexion. A bandana handkerchief was wound +around his head and earrings dangled from his ears. + +As they looked, the great body of the bear dropped from the lower part +of the pillar to the ground, and the beast turned and rushed toward +the man. + +"He'll be killed!" yelled Joe, in great apprehension. "Killed right +before our eyes! Why doesn't he run? Can it be that he is blind?" + +They all shouted in unison to warn the newcomer of his danger. + +Then an amazing thing happened. The man not only stood his ground, but +advanced toward the bear. The huge brute reared on his hind legs and +threw his great paws over the man's shoulders. But even while the boys +shuddered at the nearness of the tragedy that seemed about to be +enacted, the man laughed joyously and passed his hand caressingly over +the shaggy head and playfully pulled one of the brute's ears. + +The boys looked at each other in amazement. The look gradually changed +from one of wonderment to one of sheepishness. Then Bob turned the +lock of the front door, threw it open and stepped out on the porch. + +"Hello there!" he called. + +The man turned around and looked at him in surprise. It was evident +that he had not known until that moment that there was anybody in the +house. + +"Hello, you'sel'!" he replied, with a smile that showed a row of +gleaming white teeth. + +"Is that your bear?" inquired Bob, while his comrades, who had also +come out on the porch, taking care, however, to leave the door open in +case a quick retreat should seem desirable, clustered about him. + +"Sure data mya bear," was the response. "He verra gooda bear. He dance +an' maka tricks while I sing and we maka lota da mon. Mya name Tony +Moretto. I coma from da Italy two, nearly tree years ago. I spika da +Inglis good," he continued, with evident pride in his accomplishments. + +"Doesn't he ever get cross and ugly?" asked Bob. "He looks as though +he could eat you in two mouthfuls." + +"What dat?" asked Tony, in a tone of aggrieved surprise. "Bruno get +ugly? Nevair! He verra tame." And to prove it, he thrust his hand into +the bear's mouth and took hold of his tongue. + +Instead of this evoking any protest, Bruno took it as part of a game, +and acted just as a big good-natured mastiff might while romping with +his master. + +"You see," said Tony, with evident pride. "He lova me. I show you how +he minda me." + +He gave a word or two of command and began a monotonous chant, to the +notes of which the bear began to dance with an agility that was +surprising in so clumsy an animal. Then he lay down and played dead, +turned somersaults and went through his whole repertoire of tricks for +the edification of the boys, who looked on with very different +emotions from those they had felt only a little while before. + +"What I tella you?" said Tony complacently. "Bruno verra nice bear." + +"What made him chase us then?" asked Joe. "We thought he was going to +eat us alive." + +"He chasa you?" said Tony, in surprise. "No, no. You mus' be mistake. +He wan' to maka frens--to playa wi' you. Dat' ees it. He tink eet was +a game." + +"I wish we'd known that half an hour ago," murmured Joe to his +companions. "It would have saved us a whole lot of trouble." + +"How did he come to get away from you?" asked Herb. + +"I verra tired," answered Tony. "I go sleepa in de woods. When I waka +up I no finda him. He hunt for grub in da woods. Den he seea you and +try to maka frens wi' you." + +He took a chain from his pocket and fastened it to a collar on the +bear's neck. + +"Coma, Bruno," he said. "We go now." + +"Wait," called Bob, and he and his companions emptied their pockets of +what loose change they had and pressed it on the Italian, who at first +shook his head. + +"No," he said. "Bruno maka you much trubbeel." + +"Never mind that," replied Bob. "You've given us a good show, and this +will buy some grub for Bruno. He's a good old sport, and we don't bear +him any malice, even if he did give us the scare of our lives." + +He was so insistent that Tony finally pocketed the money, and with a +smile and another flash of his white teeth trudged off through the +woods with Bruno lumbering along clumsily beside him. + +The boys watched the pair until they were out of sight and then turned +and looked at each other. Then the comical aspect of the whole affair +appealed to them and they burst into inextinguishable laughter. + +"Stung!" cried Bob, when at last he could get his breath. "Stung good +and plenty." + +"Running away like all possessed when the bear was only lonely and +wanted company," gasped Joe, wiping his eyes. + +"He lova us, he wanta maka frens with us," chuckled Herb, and again +they went into convulsions of mirth. + +"Well, fellows," said Bob, when they had regained some degree of +composure, "there's no doubt but that the joke is on us. But, after +all, we've nothing to reproach ourselves for, because we're not mind +readers and couldn't be supposed to know Bruno's intentions when he +came galloping toward us. There isn't a man on earth who wouldn't have +done just as we did under the circumstances." + +"We can't say we haven't had excitement enough for one day," remarked +Jimmy. "Gee, I feel as though I'd been drawn through a knothole. When +you fellows came down on me in the attic, I felt sure that you'd drive +me through the floor." + +"We showed good judgment in letting you fall first," said Joe, with a +grin. "It was as good as falling on a rubber cushion." + +"I guess I was born to be the goat," sighed Jimmy. "I'll bet I'm black +and blue all over." + +"It's a safe bet that we're all pretty tired and sore," said Bob. "And +that's too bad too, for we've got a lot of work to do before we leave +this old shebang. And we won't have any more than time to do it, for +it's getting on pretty late in the afternoon." + +"What do you mean?" asked Herb. "Seems to me we've worked hard enough +for one day." + +"All the same we've got to fix up that roof before we go," explained +Bob. "It wouldn't be fair to leave it open to the wind and rain after +we smashed it in." + +"I tell you what!" exclaimed Herb, struck with a bright idea. "Jimmy's +the one to do that to the queen's taste. He's had a lot of experience +in his father's carpenter shop, and he could make a far better job of +it than any of us could. It'll be a real treat to see him go at it." + +"Sure," said Jimmy sarcastically. "Just the thing. I told you that I +was the goat. But all the same don't you try to hold your breath till +you see me do it." + +"We'll all go at it," declared Bob. "And we'll get it done in jig +time. Probably it won't be done like cabinet work, but we can make it +reasonably tight and snug just the same. Come along now and let's get +busy." + +They picked themselves up and made their way to the attic and set to +work. They were hampered at first by lack of tools, but search of the +house brought to light a couple of rusty hammers and saws, and they +managed to make a fairly good job of it. At least they had made it +secure against rain or snow, and that was all they could hope to do +under the circumstances. + +The sun was getting low in the western sky as they were putting in the +last nails. Suddenly Herb stopped and listened. + +"Who's that calling?" he asked. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +THE BULLY APPEARS + + +Joe went to a window in the side of the attic and peered out. Then he +gave a low whistle. + +"What's the game?" inquired Bob curiously. + +"It's Buck Looker and his gang," replied his chum. "How in the world +did they happen to get here just at this minute? Five minutes more and +we'd have been gone." + +"Now I suppose it will all come out about the bear," said Herb +regretfully. "I was hoping we could keep that to ourselves." + +"Perhaps it's just as well," said Bob thoughtfully. "We'd have to +explain anyhow how we came to fall through the roof, and of course +we'd tell the truth about it. What we've done now is only a makeshift +job, and we'll have to get some carpenter to make a perfect thing of +it at our expense. That's the only fair thing to do." + +"Hello, up there!" came a voice from below, which they recognized as +Buck Looker's. "Who's up there and what are you doing?" + +Bob, who had come up to Joe's side, thrust his head out of the window. + +"Some of my friends and myself are here," he answered. "We broke +through the roof of the house and we've just been fixing it up." + +"Broke through the roof!" came in a gasp from below. "What business +did you have on the roof of my house? You're going to get into trouble +for this." + +"Oh, I don't know," replied Bob. "We're not worrying much about it." + +"Well, you'd better worry," growled Buck truculently. "You come right +down and get out of my house as fast as your legs can carry you or +I'll--I'll----" + +"Yes," said Bob quietly, "go right ahead with what you were going to +say, Buck Looker. You'll do what?" + +Buck hesitated, for there was a note in Bob's voice that he did not +like. + +"You'll see what I'll do," he blustered. "You get right out of my +house." + +"Now listen, Buck Looker," replied Bob. "We're going to get out of +this house for just two reasons. The first is that there's nothing +especially attractive to keep us here, and the second is that we've +finished our work and were just about to go anyway. But don't fool +yourself into thinking that we're going because you tell us to. If +your father told us to, we'd have to, because it's his property. But +it isn't yours and what you say doesn't interest us a little bit. Get +that?" + +There was a growling response, of which they did not catch the words, +and Bob turned to his companions. + +"Come along, fellows," he said. "Let's go down and see what this +terrible man-eater and his cronies are going to do to us." + +"I only wish they'd give us an excuse for pitching into them," said +Joe. "I've been aching to give Buck Looker a licking ever since that +time Mr. Preston came along and stopped us." + +"No chance," laughed Bob. "Buck is prudent enough when any one comes +face to face with him. As a long distance fighter he's a wonder, but +he wilts fast enough when a scrap seems coming." + +The radio boys brushed off their clothes, restored the tools to their +places, and went downstairs and out on the front porch, where they +found the bully and his friends in close conversation. + +"It's time you got out of here!" exclaimed Buck. "My father will have +something to say about this, and maybe he'll have you all arrested for +burglary." + +At this the boys could not help laughing, and Buck's face grew red +with fury, while a venomous light glowed in his mean eyes. + +"You'll laugh out of the other side of your mouths when you find +yourselves in jail," he shouted. + +"Now look here," burst out Joe, taking a step toward him, "you've gone +quite far enough. You keep a civil tongue in your head, or I'll give +you what I've owed you ever since Mr. Preston came between us. And +there's no Mr. Preston here now." + +Bob put a restraining hand on his friend's arm. + +"Easy, Joe," he counseled. + +Then he turned to the bully. + +"We don't owe you any explanation, Buck Looker," he said, "but we do +owe one to your father, and you can tell him what we say. We were +chased by a bear who had wandered away from his master. We chose this +house for safety because it was the only place at hand and we couldn't +do anything else. First we got up on the roof of the porch, but the +bear came after us there and we had to take to the roof of the house +itself. While we were going across it, part of it caved in and let us +down into the attic. Afterward we tried to repair the damage for the +time, and you can tell your father that we will pay whatever is +necessary to make the roof as good as it was before." + +"Chased by a bear!" repeated Buck, with a sneer. "That's a likely +story. There hasn't been a bear around these parts for a hundred +years. Tell that to the marines." + +"I suppose that means that I'm telling a falsehood," said Bob, his +eyes taking on a steely glint. + +"I didn't say that," muttered Buck, as he stole a glance at Bob's +clenched fist. "But you can tell that to my father and see if he +believes it." + +"He can believe it or not as he sees fit," replied Bob. "Come along, +fellows." + +"Just notice that we're going of our own accord," put in Joe, as he +prepared to follow his friend down the steps. "Don't you want to throw +us off the porch or any little thing like that?" he inquired politely, +pausing a moment for an answer. + +But the only answer was a snarl, and the radio boys left the bully +there and went on to the place a little way off where they had dropped +their bags when the bear came upon them. + +Jimmy, who was in the van, suddenly gave a cry of dismay. + +"The bags are gone!" he exclaimed. "I dropped mine right here, and now +there are no signs of it." + +"And mine was close by this tree," cried Herb. "That's gone too." + +They hunted about for a few minutes, but the search was fruitless. + +"Look here!" exclaimed Joe, at last. "Those bags didn't walk away of +their own accord. Somebody's taken them." + +"And after working all day to fill them!" groaned Jimmy. + +"Say, fellows," said Bob. "The only ones that have been around here +have probably been Buck Looker and his gang. There's the answer." + +"But they didn't have any bags with them," interposed Herb. + +"They could have hidden them, intending to come back after dark and +get them," replied Bob. "I'm going to question them anyway. Buck +Looker isn't going to put anything like that over on us." + +"They'll only lie out of it," prophesied Jimmy pessimistically. + +"We can see from the way they talk and act whether they are lying or +not," returned Bob. "At any rate I'm going to take a chance." + +They all went back rapidly toward the house, and reached there just in +time to see Buck and his cronies vanishing around the back. + +"They've seen us coming and tried to dodge," cried Joe. + +"That won't do them any good," replied Bob, quickening his speed. "We +can beat them running any day." + +The truth of his words was quickly demonstrated when they drew up +abreast of the three, who slowed to a walk when they saw it was no use +trying to evade their pursuers. + +"What are you running away for?" queried Bob, as he stepped in front +of Buck. + +"None of your business," answered Buck snapishly. "I might ask you +what you are running for." + +"And if you did, I'd tell you mighty quick," answered Bob. "I was +running after you to ask you what you did with the bags of nuts you +found under the trees." + +Buck tried to put on a look of surprise, but the attempt was a +failure. + +"I--I don't know what you're talking about," he stammered. + +Every tone and every look betrayed that he was not telling the truth, +and Bob went straight to the point. + +"Yes, you do," he retorted. "You know perfectly well what I'm talking +about. You found those bags under the trees where we had dropped them +when the bear chased us, and you've hidden them somewhere intending to +come back for them later. We've got you dead to rights, and you'd +better come across and come across quick." + +Buck hesitated a moment, but the look in Bob's eyes told him what was +in store for him if he refused, and again he concluded that discretion +was the better part of valor. + +"Oh, were those yours?" he said, with an affectation of surprise. "We +did find a few nuts and laid them aside for the owners if they should +come back for them. I had forgotten all about it." + +"It's too bad that your memory is so poor," remarked Bob grimly. +"Suppose you come along and show us where you laid them aside so +carefully for their owners." + +Again Buck hesitated and seemed inclined to refuse, but the menace in +Bob's eyes had not lessened, and he reluctantly shuffled back to the +woods in front of the house and pointed out a hollow tree. + +"There you'll find your old nuts," he snarled viciously. "That is, if +they are yours. Ten to one they belong to somebody else." And with +this Parthian shot, which the boys disregarded in their eagerness to +regain their property, he slunk away, followed by Lutz and Mooney, the +discomfited faces of the three of them as black as thunder clouds. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +A STARTLING ACCUSATION + + +Elated and triumphant, the radio boys shouldered their bags and set +out for home. + +"This is the end of a perfect day," chanted Joe, as they trudged +along, tired in body but light in heart. + +"For us perhaps, but not for Buck and his crowd," chuckled Herb. + +"And those sneak thieves were the fellows who were talking about +burglars," laughed Jimmy. + +The sun had gone down before the radio boys left the woods, and it was +full night by the time they reached their homes and disburdened +themselves of their load of nuts. + +"I was going to ask you fellows to come around tonight and listen in +on the broadcasting concert," said Bob, as they reached his gate; "but +I guess our folks will be so much excited about the bear that they +can't talk or think of anything else." + +"That's bearly possible," chuckled Herb, and grinned at the +indignation of his companions at the pun. + +"But I think there'll be something doing at church tomorrow on the +subject of radio," continued Bob. "You fellows must be sure to be +there. I heard Doctor Dale talking about it to father." + +"I'll be there if I can wake up in time," said Jimmy. "But just now I +feel as if I could sleep through the next twenty-four hours straight. +I'll be like one of the seven sleepers of Pegasus." + +"Ephesus, I guess you mean," laughed Bob. "Pegasus was a horse." + +"Is that so?" replied Jimmy. "Well, that's a horse on me. Don't hit +me," he begged, as Bob made a pass at him. "I'm stiff and sore all +over, without having that big ham of yours land on me." + +Bob laughed and went up the steps, while the others made their ways to +their respective homes not many doors away. + +As they had anticipated, the telling of the adventures that they had +gone through that day was listened to with breathless interest by all +the members of their families. At places in the story there was +laughter, but more frequently there were exclamations of alarm mingled +with great relief that they had come through safely. + +"I tell you," said Bob, as he finished telling of the matter to his +parents. "I felt mighty cheap to think that I had run like mad from a +bear that, as the Italian said, was simply trying to 'maka frens' with +me." + +"It was rather amusing after it was all over," assented his father, +with a smile. "But after all you were very wise to act as you did. It +isn't by any means certain that the bear would have been as friendly +with you as he was with his master, and resistance of any kind might +have awakened all his savage instincts. I am very doubtful about the +bear thinking it was only a game when he was climbing up after you. +But even if he did, you had no reason to suppose it. For all you knew +he might have escaped from a circus or menagerie and might have been +ready to tear you in pieces." + +"That was my first thought; that is, as soon as I could think calmly +about anything," answered Bob. "But, after all, a miss is as good as a +mile, and he didn't get us. He came mighty near it though." + +"The most serious outcome of the whole thing will probably be the +matter of the broken roof," said Mr. Layton meditatively. "It will +probably cost considerable to put it in perfect shape again. But, +after all, that doesn't count for anything as long as you boys weren't +hurt. I'll see Looker about it on Monday and fix the matter up with +him." + +"And of course the fathers of the other fellows will chip in on the +expense," said Bob. "I'd like to hear what Buck is telling his father +about it tonight," he continued, with a grin. "By the time he gets +through, we'll have pulled the whole house down." + +The next morning all the boys were at church in time for the morning +service, even Jimmy, who walked very stiffly and smelled strongly of +arnica. + +"You fellows needn't sniff as though I had the plague," he protested, +as his friends lifted their nostrils inquiringly. "I was the fellow +who was underneath when you fell on me like a thousand of brick. You +got off easy, while I had all the worst of it. But then I'm used to +that," he concluded, sighing heavily. + +"Cheer up, old boy," said Joe, clapping him on the back, at which poor +Jimmy winced. "The first hundred years is the worst. After that you +won't mind it. But now we'd better get in if we want to sit together, +for there's a bigger congregation here than usual." + +Doctor Dale, the friend and counselor of the boys in radio, as in many +other things, was in the pulpit. He was a very eloquent preacher and +was always sure of a good congregation. But as Joe had said, the +church was even fuller than usual that morning, and there was a +general stir of expectancy, as though something unusual was in +prospect. + +The attention of the boys was attracted at once by a small disk-like +contrivance right in front of the preacher's desk. It had never been +there before. They recognized it at once as a microphone, but to the +majority of the audience its purpose was a complete mystery, and many +curious glances were fixed upon it. + +There were the customary preliminary services, and then Doctor Dale +came forward to the desk. + +"Before beginning my sermon this morning," he said, "I want to explain +what will seem to some an unusual departure from custom, but which I +hope will justify itself to such an extent as to become a regular +feature of our service. + +"There is no reason why the benefits of that service should be +confined to the persons gathered within these four walls. There are +thousands outside who by the means of radio, that most wonderful +invention of the present century, can hear every word of this service +just as readily as you who are seated in the pews. The prayers, the +hymns, the organ music, the sermon, the benediction--they can hear it +all. The only thing they will miss will be the privilege of putting +their money in the collection plate." + +He paused for a moment, and a smile rippled over the congregation. + +"I have said," he resumed, "that they can hear it. And if they can +hear it, they ought to hear it--that is if they want to. This is no +new or untried idea. It is being carried out today in Pittsburgh, +Washington, and other cities. The pulpit becomes a religious +broadcasting station, from which the service is carried over an area +of hundreds of miles. Everybody within that area who has a receiving +set can hear it if they wish. In some cases it is estimated that more +than two hundred thousand people are enjoying at the same moment the +same religious service. You can see at once what that means in +immeasurably extending the usefulness and influence of the church. + +"Now it has occurred to me that we might do here what is being done +elsewhere on a larger scale. So, after a conference with the officials +of the church, an adequate sending set has been installed in the loft +of the building. What is said here is sent from this microphone to the +loft, where it is flung out into the ether. Arrangements have been +made with a number of churches in this county, too poor and small to +have a regular pastor, by which they have installed loud speaker +receiving sets in their buildings. At this moment there are a dozen +scattered congregations where the people have gathered to worship, and +where at this moment they are hearing everything that is said just as +plainly as you do. + +"And in addition to that," he went on, "in hundreds, perhaps thousands +of homes, people who cannot go to church because of illness or some +other reason are listening to this service. The sick, the crippled, +the blind--think of what it means to have the church brought to them +when they cannot go to the church. You in the pews are the visible +congregation. But outside these walls there is today an invisible +congregation many times greater, to whom this service is bringing its +message of help and healing." + +With this prelude, Doctor Dale announced his text and preached his +sermon, which, if anything, was more eloquent than usual. It seemed as +if he were inspired by preaching to the greatest audience that he had +ever had in his whole career, and the audience in the pews also felt a +thrill as they thought of the invisible listeners miles and miles +away. It seemed as though the natural were being brought into close +connection with the supernatural, and the impression produced was most +powerful. + +If the doctor had had any misgivings as to the attitude of his people +toward this new departure, these were quickly dissipated by the +cordial congratulations and approval that were expressed after the +service was over and he moved about among them. It was the universal +opinion that a great advance had been made and that the innovation had +come to stay. + +The radio boys had been intensely interested in this new application +of their favorite study, and after the sermon they went up into the +loft and examined the apparatus that had been used in sending. It was +a vacuum tube set with two tubes and power enough to send messages out +over the whole county. It had been set up by Dr. Dale himself, and +that was proof enough for the boys that it had worked perfectly in +sending out the morning service. + +"What will radio do next?" asked Bob, as the boys were walking +homeward. + +"What won't it do next is the way you ought to put it," suggested Joe. +"It seems as if there were no limit. There are no such things as space +and distance any more. Radio has wiped them out completely." + +"That's true," chimed in Herb. "The earth used to be a monstrous big +thing twenty-five thousand miles round. Now it's getting to be no +bigger than an orange." + +"What a fuss they made when it was proved that one could travel around +the world in eighty days," said Jimmy. "But radio can go round the +earth more than seven times in a single second. Just about the time it +takes to strike a match." + +"Gee, but I'm glad we weren't born a hundred years ago," remarked Bob. +"What a lot of things we would have missed. Automobiles, locomotives, +telegraph, telephone, phonograph, electric light----" + +"Yes," interrupted Joe, "and radio would have been the worst miss of +all." + +"They're doing in the colleges now, too, something very like what the +doctor did in the pulpit this morning," said Bob. "In Union College +and Tufts and a lot of others the professors are giving their lectures +by radio. Talk about University Extension courses! Radio will beat +them all hollow. Think of a professor lecturing to an audience of +fifty thousand, instead of the hundred or so that are gathered in his +classroom. And think of the thousands of young fellows who are crazy +to go to college and haven't the money to do it with. They can keep on +working and get their college education at home. I tell you what, +fellows, Mr. Brandon was right the other day when he said that the +surface of radio had only been scratched so far." + +The next day at school the boys found that the story of their +experience with the bear had had wide circulation, chiefly through the +activity of Buck Looker, who took care at the same time, however, to +express his belief that nothing of the kind had happened. There was a +good deal of good-natured joking, and the boys in self-defense had to +explain the whole thing in all its details. + +At recess their story received unexpected confirmation, for there, +just outside the school yard, was Tony putting Bruno, the bear, +through his tricks while a breathlessly interested crowd gathered +about the pair. Tony grinned at the boys when he saw them and Jimmy +asserted that Bruno grinned too, but the rest of the radio boys +thought that that was due to Jimmy's excess of imagination. + +A noticeable feature of the school work that day was the scarcity of +pupils. All the classes were more or less sparsely attended, and the +teachers were called to a conference with Mr. Preston, the principal. + +"What do you suppose the powwow of the teachers was all about?" asked +Bob, as the boys were going home after the session of the school was +ended. + +"About so many fellows being away," replied Joe, who, as his father +was the leading physician of the town, was better informed than were +his friends as to the situation. "Dad says there's an awful lot of +sickness in the town. He's kept busy day and night, and scarcely has +time to breathe." + +"I wonder what the reason is," remarked Herb. + +"Dad thinks the water supply may have something to do with it," +answered Joe. "He says there's a regular epidemic of typhoid fever, +and that usually comes from impure water. He's called the attention of +the town council and the engineers of the reservoir to the matter, and +they're going to have an investigation. Dad says it may even be +necessary to close the schools for a time." + +"What's that?" exclaimed Jimmy, with sudden animation. + +"Don't tell Jimmy anything like that," mocked Herb. "It would simply +break his heart. If there's anything he's stuck on it's school." + +"You fellows wouldn't be tickled to death either if you thought you +were going to get a vacation, would you?" retorted Jimmy. "I know you +birds." + +"Say, wouldn't it give us lots of time for radio!" said Bob +enthusiastically. "I want to get all the new wrinkles in that latest +set of ours, and we don't have time to do it in the few evenings we +can spare from our home work." + +"You bet," agreed Herb. "I don't want there to be any more sickness, +but I sure do hope they find it necessary to close the schools. That +would be just what the doctor ordered--in more senses than one." + +"I wouldn't shed any bitter tears myself," admitted Joe. "There's +going to be a meeting of the Board of Health to consider the subject +soon, and I'll give you fellows the tip the minute I hear anything +definite about what they decide to do." + +"In the meantime, suppose you fellows drop around this evening for a +little while," suggested Bob. "I want to try out some long distance +receiving and listen in on Chicago." + +All agreed to be there at about eight o'clock. + +The Laytons had barely finished dinner that night when the door bell +rang. Bob answered the bell. + +He was surprised to find that the callers were Mr. Looker and his son +Buck. Both had dark and angry looks on their faces. + +"I want to know," said Mr. Looker abruptly, "what you and your +companions mean by burning down my cottage!" + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE BURNED COTTAGE + + +"Nonsense!" exclaimed Bob. "What makes you think we'd do a trick like +that?" + +"Never mind about that!" exclaimed the elder Looker, furiously. "I +supposed you'd deny it. I want to see your father, young man." + +"Here he is," and Mr. Layton, who had been attracted to the door by +Mr. Looker's loud and angry tones, emerged on to the porch. "What can +I do for you, Mr. Looker?" + +"You can pay me for my house that your boy and his companions burnt +down," said Mr. Looker in angry tones. + +"I rather think you must be mistaken," said Mr. Layton. "What grounds +have you for making such a serious accusation?" + +"My boy caught them red-handed after they'd broken into the house, and +made them get off my property. It wasn't six hours later that the +place was burned, and there's no doubt in my mind that your boy and +his friends set it on fire just to get even. They've always had a +grudge against Buckley, anyway, and are always doing all they can to +make life miserable for the poor fellow." + +"You know that isn't true, Dad," protested Bob, hotly, "neither about +the fire, nor about Buck. He's always the one that starts trouble." + +"You've got plenty of nerve, Looker, to come here and make an +accusation like this to me," remarked Mr. Layton, his usually kindly +face stern and set. "There are many ways that fire could have occurred +besides being deliberately set, and you know it. Likely enough some +tramps had decided to spend the night there, and set it on fire by +accident. You had better get off my property before I am tempted to +throw you off." + +"It might not be so easy as you think," sneered the elder Looker, but +nevertheless he began edging toward the sidewalk. "If you don't pay, +I'll see my lawyer and have him bring action in court. See if I +don't." + +"Suit yourself," answered Mr. Layton, shrugging his shoulders. "Your +lawyer will tell you, though, that you haven't the shadow of a case. +As for your boy, he looks big enough to take care of himself, and if +he can't, I don't see what business that is of mine." + +"I'll show you," threatened Mr. Looker, as he turned down the walk. +"Don't worry about that. Maybe somebody will be arrested." + +"As you please," said Mr. Layton, with a grim smile. + +Mr. Looker and his promising son reached the sidewalk in sullen +silence, while Bob and his father watched them until they turned the +corner of the street. + +"Young Looker is a young bully, just as you say, and his father would +like to be," said Mr. Layton, seating himself in a rocking chair. "I +suppose you and Joe and the others are sure you didn't light a match +for any purpose while you were there?" + +"Absolutely not, Dad," asserted Bob. "We weren't inside that shack +more than five minutes the first time, and, with that bear outside, +lighting matches was the last thing we'd have thought of. As soon as +the bear's owner captured him, we went outside. We worked on the roof +both from outside and inside, and tried to patch the thing up. We +struck no matches. We were doing the last few things inside when Buck +came along." + +"Tell me just what happened then," directed Mr. Layton. + +"Why, then there was a bit of an argument with Buck," grinned Bob. "We +knew that the place belonged to his father, and that there was nothing +for us to do but clear out. We came right home from there, though, and +you know that we were all here listening to radio that entire +evening." + +"Yes, I remember that," nodded his father. "And I guess that would be +a pretty convincing alibi if Looker really should carry the case to +court. My opinion is, though, that he's just bluffing, and we'll never +hear any more of it." + +"I wish I did know who _was_ responsible," speculated Bob. "Do you +really think tramps were responsible, Dad?" + +"Very likely. Several barns have been burned in this neighborhood from +the same cause, you know. I'm rather sorry that you and your friends +were around there the same day it happened, because unless the real +cause is discovered the Lookers will never stop talking about it. +However, it's a small matter and we'll not think any more about it. +From what you tell me, the place must have been falling apart, +anyway." + +"I should say so," laughed Bob. "We were a surprised bunch when that +roof caved in with us. The place was so rickety it's a wonder it +didn't all come down then." + +"I'll bet you were a scared bunch," bantered his father, a twinkle in +his eyes. + +"I'll say we were," admitted Bob, honestly. "If we'd had a gun with +us, it would have been a different story, though. Tony would have been +out one large, brown bear." + +"It's just as well you didn't," said Mr. Layton, dryly. "We'd have had +Tony threatening a lawsuit, too, if you had killed his pet bear." + +"It would have been a shame to do it," admitted Bob. + +For a few minutes they both sat silent, each busy with his own +thoughts. + +"I expect I'll have to be away from home most of next week, Bob," said +Mr. Layton, at length. Bob looked at him expectantly, and he +continued. "There is a store at Mountain Pass being offered at a +bargain, and I'm strongly tempted to buy it and operate it as a +branch. I'm going to look the ground over, anyway, and if it looks as +good then as it does now, I think I'll buy." + +"That will be fine!" exclaimed Bob. "I've heard a good deal about that +place lately, and it seems to be getting more popular all the time. If +you go will you take mother with you?" + +Mr. Layton nodded, and waited expectantly for the question that he +knew was coming. Nor was he wrong. + +"How about taking me along, Dad?" said Bob, eagerly. "It will be a +peach of a trip. They say the scenery through Mountain Pass is the +best ever." + +"Well, I've thought of that, too, because I was pretty sure you'd want +to come. But I'm afraid they'll have you too busy in the high school +this term for us to manage it. I may have to be gone two or three +weeks, and that would be a serious break in your studies." + +Bob urged and pleaded, but his father was adamant, and at last Bob was +forced reluctantly to give up the idea of going. + +When he told the other radio boys about the visit of the Lookers, they +were as indignant as he. + +"'Like father, like son,'" quoted Joe. "They're two of a kind, that +pair. But I guess they didn't get much satisfaction out of your +father, Bob." + +"I should say not!" laughed Bob. "If they had said much more, I think +we'd have treated ourselves to the pleasure of throwing them into the +street." + +Bob then told them about his father's projected trip to Mountain Pass, +and his disappointment at not being allowed to accompany his parents. + +"That's pretty tough," said Jimmy, sympathetically. "I know how you +must feel. It would be a swell trip, and they say the meals at the +Mountain Rest Hotel up at Mountain Pass are about the best ever." + +"There you go!" exclaimed Bob, laughing. "It's a lucky thing for the +hotel that you're not going. They'd lose money on you, sure as +shooting." + +"Well, I'd try to get my money's worth," said Jimmy, complacently. + +"You'd get it, too, no fear of that," said Joe, confidently. + +When this conversation took place, the boys never dreamed that they +might all be going to Mountain Pass together in the near future. But +as events shaped themselves in the next few days, this began to assume +an aspect of probability. + +The epidemic of typhoid increased, and there was something nearly +approaching a panic in Clintonia. Families began leaving the town +every day, and Dr. Atwood, as head of the town Board of Health, +finally issued orders that the schools must close until the epidemic +had been gotten under control. + +When Bob heard this news, he could not, in spite of the seriousness of +the situation, suppress a feeling of exultation. With school closed, +the main objection to his accompanying his parents to Mountain Pass +was removed, and he had little doubt now that he could persuade them +to take him. + +The task was even easier than he had anticipated, for the Laytons, +like all the other towns-people, were greatly alarmed over the rapid +spread of the sickness, and when Bob broached the subject to them they +readily consented to having him go with them. + +"It's an ill wind that blows nobody any good," thought Bob, and +hurried away to seek his friends and tell them the good news. + +He found all three of them in a state of excitement equal to his own. + +"Dad wants us all to leave town, too," declared Joe. "He says there +must be something wrong with the water supply, and he wants us all +away until the trouble has been located and remedied." + +"My father says the same thing," said Herb. "The trouble is, that +we'll have to go to different places, and that breaks up our +combination for goodness knows how long." + +"Maybe we could get our folks to let us all stick together and go to +Mountain Pass with Bob," ventured Jimmy. "It seems too good to be +true, though." + +"It's an idea, anyway," declared Joe. "You certainly come out strong +once in a while, Doughnuts. It won't do any harm to try, at any rate." + +The others agreed with this, and that night besieged their parents to +let them go to the mountain resort. They succeeded more easily than +they had hoped, as the older people were too worried over the +situation, and too busy packing up, to offer much resistance to the +impetuous lads. + +Early the next morning first Joe, and then Herb and Jimmy, dropped +into the Layton home, to report their success to Bob. + +"Well, that's great!" exclaimed the latter. "Jimmy, you win the +celluloid frying pan for making that suggestion yesterday." + +"Huh! that's about as useful as anything I'll ever get from you +Indians," snorted Jimmy. "I ought to make you pay in advance for my +ideas, instead of giving them away so carelessly." + +"You'll never get rich that way," remarked Joe. "But let's cut out the +comedy, fellows, and get down to business. When are your folks going +to start for Mountain Pass, Bob?" + +"The day after tomorrow." + +"Whew!" whistled Herb. "That means that we'll have to flash a little +speed, doesn't it?" + +"I sha'n't worry about that," grinned Bob. "I'm all ready to start +this minute, so I'll sit back and watch you fellows hustle. It will be +lots of fun." + +"You won't be able to see me, on account of the dust I'll raise," +announced Jimmy. + +"You're going to stay at the Mountain Rest Hotel, aren't you, Bob?" +asked Joe. + +"Sure! It's the best hotel up there. The only one, in fact; though I +believe some of the natives take a few people into their homes." + +"By the way," said Herb. "Who's said anything to Mrs. or Mr. Layton +about our joining their party? Seems incredible, but maybe they won't +want us." + +"Gee!" gasped Joe. "I never thought of that. But maybe it's so." + +"There's mother now," announced Bob. "Let's put it up to her." + +This they did, and her son's three friends were assured by Mrs. Layton +that if their parents were willing they should go she and Mr. Layton +would be glad to have them in their party. + +"That's fixed then," announced Jimmy. "I'm off now, fellows. Next +stop, Mountain Pass." + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +RADIO WONDERS + + +That day and the next were busy ones for the radio boys. The party was +to go in two big automobiles that Mr. Layton had hired, and the boys +had secured permission to take a small radio set with them. On the +morning set for their departure they were ready to the last detail, +and it was not long before they and their belongings were snugly +packed into the two automobiles and they were all on their way to the +mountain resort. + +Although it was still only mid-autumn, the air had a keen edge to it, +the sky was gray and overcast, and there was the indefinable feel of +snow in the air. The big cars rolled crisply through long drifts of +dead leaves, going at a lively pace, as it was quite a journey to the +resort, with many steep grades to be encountered on the way. The boys +were warmly wrapped, and the keen air only gave zest and added to +their high spirits. + +"These cars ought to be equipped with a radio set," remarked Bob, a +short time after they had started. "I saw a picture the other day of a +car that was rigged up that way, with an antenna from the radiator to +a mast in the rear." + +"It's not a bad idea, at that," said Joe. "If a person were going on a +long tour, he could keep in touch with the weather forecasts, and know +just what to expect the next day." + +"Yes, and when he camped for lunch, he could have music while the +coffee pot was boiling," said Herb. "Pretty soft, I'll say." + +"He'd be out of luck if the static were bad, though," observed Jimmy. + +"Oh, it won't be long before they'll get around that static nuisance," +said Bob. "Have you heard of the latest method of overcoming it?" + +The others had not, and Bob proceeded to explain. + +"At Rocky Point, Long Island, they put up twelve radio towers, each +four hundred and ten feet high, in a row three miles long. Then they +hitched up a couple of two hundred kilowatt alternators so that they +run in synchronism. That means four hundred kilowatts on the aerial, +and I guess that can plough through the worst static that ever +happened." + +"Four hundred kilowatts!" exclaimed Joe. "That's an awful lot of +juice, Bob." + +"You bet it is," agreed Bob, nodding his head. "But it does the work. +When they tested out this system signals were received in Nauen, +Germany, of almost maximum strength, in spite of bad weather +conditions. You know they have a numbered scale, running from nothing +to ten, which is maximum. Well, the Rocky Point signals were classed +as number nine, which means they were almost maximum strength." + +"It must have been a terrible job to synchronize those two +alternators," commented Joe. + +"No doubt of it," agreed Bob. "This article stated that they had to +experiment for months before they succeeded. Those machines turn over +at somewhere around twenty-two thousand revolutions per minute, you +know." + +"About three hundred and sixty-six times a second," said Joe, after a +short mental calculation. "Nothing slow about that, is there?" + +"It's fast enough to do the trick, anyway," agreed Bob. "Wouldn't it +be great to be in charge of a station like that?" + +The others agreed that it would, and for some time they discussed this +latest marvel of radio. Then their minds were drawn away by the +wonderful scenery through which they were passing. The leaves still +left on the trees were tinted in rich reds and browns, and as the big +cars climbed to higher levels the party had some wonderful views of +high hills and spreading valleys. + +But the sky became continually more leaden and overcast, and the +drivers put on more speed in an effort to reach their destination +before the impending storm should start. But they had gone only a +short distance further when a few white flakes came swirling silently +down from the leaden sky. Scattered at first, they rapidly increased +in numbers until the air was filled with swirling sheets of white. The +snow packed over the windshields and powdered the occupants of the two +cars, and the drivers were forced to stop and put up the side +curtains. The snow hissed through the branches of the trees and +whispered to the dead leaves, making the only sound in a world that +was rapidly changing from autumn brown to winter white. + +With the side curtains adjusted as snugly as possible, the party +resumed its journey. The fine, dry snow searched out every chink and +opening between the curtains, penetrating in some mysterious manner +where rain would have been kept out. In a surprisingly short time it +had thrown a thick mantle over the road, and the cars began to feel +the drag of ploughing through it. Another stop had to be made to put +on tire chains, and by this time it was plainly to be seen that the +drivers were becoming worried. + +They had still about a third of the distance to cover, which included +some of the worst grades in that part of the country. The road had +changed from smooth macadam to a rough trail that required careful +driving even under the most favorable conditions, and now the snow, +drifting into holes and depressions, hid them from sight, the first +intimation of their presence being a jolt and slam as the wheels +dropped into some pit that the driver could easily have avoided +otherwise. The passengers were shaken about unmercifully, and had to +hold fast to anything handy to keep from being thrown against the +roof. + +"Good night!" exclaimed Herb, as one particularly heavy jolt threw him +from the seat and left him floundering on the floor. "We won't have +any springs left on the cars by the time we reach the hotel, provided +we ever do. I know people who have driven over this road, and they +never mentioned its being so bad." + +"So have I," said Bob, peering out through the side curtains. "My +private opinion is, that we've gotten off the main road altogether. +There was a fork a way back, and I thought then that the drivers +turned in the wrong direction." + +"That hardly seems possible, Bob," said Mr. Layton. "They are both +experienced drivers, and are supposed to know this road like a book." + +"Well, likely enough I'm wrong," said his son. "If they did take the +wrong fork, though, I suppose they'll soon find it out and turn back." + +But Bob was gifted with a keen sense of direction, and it was not long +before the little party found that he had been correct in his surmise. +The leading car halted, the other followed suit, and the drivers, +beating their numbed hands together, held a conference in the road. + +After a struggle with the fastenings of the side-curtain, Mr. Layton +descended and joined them. The boys followed suit, leaving Mrs. Layton +in sole possession of the two cars. + +"We don't rightly know how it happened, sir," said one of the drivers, +addressing Mr. Layton; "but somehow we've got off the right road in +this confounded snow, and I guess there's nothing for it but to turn +and try to get back on it at the place where we branched off." + +"Well, let's do it then, as quickly as possible," said Mr. Layton, +decisively. "The snow is getting deeper every minute, and we can't +afford to lose any more time. I thought you men knew the road too well +to make a mistake like that." + +One of the drivers muttered something about "snow" and "can't see +nothin' ten feet ahead," and they climbed into their seats, while the +others scattered to their places inside. + +The driver of the leading car stepped on the electric starter button, +but instead of the engine starting there was a shock, a sharp snap of +breaking steel, and the starter motor whirred idly around with no more +effect on the engine than one of the thickly fallen snowflakes. + +The driver uttered a fierce exclamation. "There goes that starter +spring again!" he exclaimed. "Now I'll have to crank the blamed engine +every time I want to start for the rest of this trip." + +He fished around under the front seat, produced a starting crank, and +tried to turn the engine over by hand. In his haste, however, he had +forgotten to retard the spark, and as he lunged down on the crank with +all his strength, the motor backfired, the crank spun around several +times, and the driver staggered back, his right arm hanging limp and +useless. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +A CLOSE SHAVE + + +Mrs. Layton uttered a scream, and the others looked at each other a +second with blank faces. Then they jumped out and surrounded the +unfortunate driver, who was gazing at his injured arm in a dazed +fashion. Mr. Layton made a quick examination, and pronounced that the +wrist was badly sprained. Fortunately, they had a complete medical +outfit in one of the cars, including splints, and Mr. Layton contrived +to bind up the injured wrist after a fashion, and then suspended the +arm in a sling. + +"But who's going to drive the car?" asked the uninjured chauffeur, +after this operation had been completed. "If none of you people knows +how to drive, we're in a pretty bad fix." + +"I'll drive," volunteered Bob. "You lead the way, and I guess I'll +manage to keep near you." + +"Are you sure you can do it, Bob?" questioned his father, anxiously. +He had great faith in his son's ability, and liked to have the lad +take a certain amount of responsibility. + +"Sure, Dad. Watch and see," was the quick answer. + +"I don't know about this," said the chauffeur, with the professional's +distrust of the amateur. "We could all pack in one car in a pinch, you +know, and leave the other here." + +"But that would so overload one car that we'd have very little chance +of getting there without a breakdown," argued Bob. "Don't worry about +my driving. I'll manage somehow." + +"I'll bet you will," said Joe. "You'll have to move lively to keep +from being run over," he told the driver. + +"Quit your kiddin'," said the chauffeur, unbelievingly. "We'll have to +hit the high spots from now on, and it ain't goin' to be an easy job +holdin' those boilers on the road." + +Somewhat against his mother's will, Bob cranked the motor of the car +he was to drive, but took care to see that the spark was fully +retarded, in consequence of which he started the engine without any +trouble. The injured driver occupied the other half of the driver's +seat, so as to give Bob pointers in handling the car if they were +needed. + +But he soon found that Bob required very little of his advice. It was +some time since he had driven a car, and at first he was a little slow +at gear shifting, but soon got the "feel" of that particular car and +from then on shifted with the ease and deft certainty of an expert. As +a matter of fact, Bob possessed the knack of handling machinery, +without which no one can really claim to be a good driver. + +The injured driver was not long in recognizing this. Shortly after +they had reached the main road and were once more headed for their +destination, they encountered a steep grade, something over a mile in +length. Both cars were going at a fair speed when they felt the first +tug of gravity, but so sharp was the grade that they lost way rapidly, +and it became necessary to shift into a lower speed. Bob did not wait +until they had slowed down too much. With a quick shove he disengaged +the clutch, shifted into neutral, and then dropped the clutch into the +engagement, at the same time accelerating the engine momentarily. This +causes the idle gears on the jack-shaft to revolve, after which it is +comparatively easy to mesh the intermediate gear combination. Bob had +no difficulty in doing this, and with his gears properly engaged, he +let in the clutch again and stepped on the accelerator. The car surged +forward, ploughing through the snow and skidding from side to side as +it fought its way up the steep gradient. + +In a few moments they caught up with the leading car, which was in +difficulties. Its driver had waited too long before attempting to +shift, and the car had slowed down so much by the time he got into +intermediate that it would not pick up even in that speed, and he was +forced to shift into low. + +"I'll bet that young feller that's driving Jim's car is stalled +somewhere at the bottom of this hill," he thought. "Hope I don't have +to wait too long for him after I reach the top. This road is no place +for an amateur to drive, anyway. I----" + +Honk! Honk! The raucous note of Bob's horn broke in upon his thoughts, +and he glanced, startled, through the rear windows, to see the other +car looming through the drifting storm. + +Too late he tried frantically to speed up and avoid the humiliation of +being passed by one whom he condescendingly termed an amateur. +Resistless as fate the pursuing car drew abreast, and then went on +past in a cloud of fine snow kicked up by the spinning rear wheels. He +muttered morosely to himself as he caught a glimpse of grinning faces +through the dim windows of the storm curtains, but was conscious of a +feeling of admiration, too, for the daring young driver. + +"Say, son, I've got to hand it to you!" exclaimed Jim, the injured +chauffeur. "You know how to handle a car with the best of 'em." + +"Oh, I didn't care so much about passing him, but I didn't want to +slow down," explained Bob, never for an instant taking his eyes from +the road. "It's against my principles to put on brakes when I'm going +up a hill." + +"I figure the same way myself," admitted the other. "Now that we're +ahead, we might as well stay ahead. I'll tell you which way to turn, +an' I guess between us we'll get through all right." + +But many miles still lay between them and their destination, and the +storm showed no sign of abating. Softly, silently, but implacably the +white flakes continued to pile up that clinging carpet over the road +until driving became more a matter of guesswork and instinct than +anything else. For a time the injured chauffeur gave Bob directions +and advice, but at length he came to the conclusion that this boy +behind the wheel was very capable of doing the right thing in the +right place, and he sat silent, gripping the seat and pressing on +imaginary pedals when they got in tight places. + +They were making good progress, considering the adverse conditions, +and were within perhaps ten miles of their destination when suddenly, +through the whirling snow, Bob glimpsed another car swinging into the +main road not fifteen feet from him. Both cars were going at a fast +speed, but the drivers caught sight of each other at almost the same +instant, and both jammed on their brakes. The cars swayed and skidded, +and the occupants of both started from their seats, believing a +collision inevitable. Nothing could have averted this had not Bob, +quick as lightning, wrenched his wheel around, bringing his car into a +course almost parallel with the other. For a few brief seconds the +outcome lay in the hand of fate. When the two cars finally came to a +jarring halt, they were side by side, with not six inches between +their running boards. + +The door of the other car, which was a sedan, burst open, and a small, +red-faced and white-haired man leaped out and shook a belligerent fist +at Bob. + +"What do you mean by driving that car at such a rate of speed?" he +shrilled. "You were breaking every speed law there is, young man, and +I'll make you sorry for it, or my name isn't Gilbert Salper." + +"But your car was going faster than ours, and there isn't any damage +done, anyway," Bob pointed out, as he wriggled from behind the wheel +and descended to the road. + +"No damage done?" echoed the other, waving his hands excitedly. "You +almost scared my wife and daughters into fits, and yet you have the +nerve to stand there and tell me there is no damage done. What do you +mean by it?" + +Before Bob could make an indignant reply, a lady wrapped in costly +furs stepped from the sedan and laid a soothing hand on the irate old +gentleman's shoulder. + +"I'm sure it wasn't the young man's fault, Gilbert," she said, in a +pleasant voice. "Indeed, I think it was his quick action that +prevented a collision. Jules was at fault in coming on to the main +road without slowing down or blowing his horn." + +"They were both going too fast, I say!" insisted her husband. "But I +suppose we ought to be thankful that we are still alive, after +undertaking such a fool trip. Next time we'll do what I want and stay +at home." + +The gentleman fumed and fussed a little longer, but at length his wife +and daughters succeeded in enticing him back into his car. The latter +were both unusually pretty girls, and as they coaxed their father back +into good humor, Joe, who was in the car driven by Bob, whispered that +he hoped they were also bound for the Mountain Rest Hotel. + +Mr. Salper was a wealthy Wall Street broker, whose pocketbook was much +longer than his temper. Although irascible and prone to "fly off the +handle" at the slightest provocation, he was at bottom a kindly man, +and one who would do anything for those he cared for. Like many +others, his health had suffered in the process of money making, and +his physician had ordered him to give up business for a month or two +and rest. + +The broker owned a house not far from the big hotel at Mountain Pass, +and the family frequently came to the place, both in the winter and +the summer. They were well known at the hotel itself for they often +ran over to take meals there and to visit with some of the patrons. + +By the time his daughters had succeeded in calming the broker's +excitement, the second car of the Layton party came up, and it was +decided that the three cars should keep close together for the rest of +the journey, in order to render mutual aid if it should be needed. The +snow had attained a depth of six or eight inches by this time, and it +was only with the greatest difficulty that they even managed to start +again. But finally they got straightened out and resumed their bucking +of the hills and snow. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +BUCKING THE DRIFTS + + +It was heartbreaking work, for from that point on the road ascended +steadily toward the top of the mountain, with hardly a level spot on +it. A mile ahead lay the Pass, a narrow gorge in which the snow had +drifted so deep as to make it almost impassable. + +The car that Bob was driving was in the lead, and as they neared this +dangerous place the disabled chauffeur gave him a word of advice. + +"Open 'er wide, son," he counseled. "We'll have to buck drifts maybe +two feet deep or more, and if we once have to stop, it means we'll +stay there until somebody comes and digs us out. Give 'er all she'll +take, and hold her on the road if you can." + +Bob nodded, and opened the throttle little by little, while the +chauffeur held his foot on the muffler cut-out pedal, in order to +relieve the engine of all back pressure. Just before they reached the +Pass, by some freak of the wind the road had been swept clear of snow +for several hundred feet, and this gave the car an opportunity to +gather speed. + +Faster and faster it flew, until the speedometer needle registered +fifty miles an hour. Then through the driving snow the entrance to the +Pass loomed ahead, and the chauffeur gave an exclamation. + +Before them was a snowdrift that looked almost as high as their car, +stretching solidly across the road and leaving Bob not the shadow of a +chance to dodge. He set his teeth, opened the throttle to the limit, +and gripped the wheel with wrists braced strong as steel bars. + +The heavy car hurtled into the drift with the force of a projectile +shot from a big gun, throwing clouds of snow in every direction as it +bored resistlessly through. The car skidded and twisted in every +direction, and it was a supreme test of Bob's strength and skill to +keep the powerful machine on its course. Big rocks lined the road, and +more than once they shaved past these with only inches to spare. + +Resistless with its initial momentum, the big car was nevertheless +gradually losing speed as it penetrated further into the drift and the +passive but deadly resistance of the snow began more and more to make +itself felt. The engine began to labor, and Bob was on the point of +shifting speeds, when suddenly the car broke through the farther side +of the drift, seemed to shake the clinging flakes from it, and began +to pick up speed again. + +Those composing the little party never forgot the gruelling battle +against odds that followed. The blustering wind had piled the snow in +great drifts in some places, and in others had swept the road so clean +that the frozen brown earth was visible for some distance. + +On these stretches they would pick up speed, and then charge into the +drifts and repeat the former battle. Over and over they did this, Bob +driving like a master, with steely blue eyes fastened grimly on the +road ahead, jaws set, and a face that looked ten years older than it +really was. Those in the car spoke words of encouragement from time to +time, but he was too busy and concentrated on his task to answer with +anything other than a brief nod. + +For what seemed like an age they ploughed through one huge drift after +another, with the high rocky walls of the Pass frowning down at them +till at last the rugged hills fell back from the road, the air +lightened, and they were through the Pass, with less than two miles +between them and the warmth and shelter of the hotel. The road now ran +along a high ridge, which the wind had swept clear of snow, and Bob +stopped the car and relaxed with a great sigh. + +"Guess we'd better wait for the others to catch up," he said. "We +broke a path for them, though, and it ought to be a lot easier for +them than it was for us." + +"You must be all in, Bob," said Joe. "You handled this car like an old +timer, but now it's about time you had a relief. Why not let me take a +hack at it for the rest of the way?" + +But Bob laughed, and shook his head. "I wouldn't have missed that for +a farm," he said. "It was hard work, but it was the best kind of +sport, too. Besides, Jim here says that the road runs along this ridge +almost to the doors of the hotel, and it will be easy sailing the rest +of the way." + +"I wonder what has become of the other cars?" said Mr. Layton, in a +worried tone. "I hope nothing has happened to them." + +He had hardly ceased speaking, when one of the automobiles appeared, +so covered with snow that it was hard to believe that it was actually +a car at all. Shortly afterward the Salper car appeared, came to a +halt when its driver saw the other two at a standstill, and its French +chauffeur descended and advanced stiffly to where Bob and the driver +of the second Layton car were standing. + +"Pah!" he exclaimed. "In all France there is no road like that which I +have just traverse. I am hire to drive ze petrol car, not ze snow +plough. It eez ze so great mystery zat we have arrive so far." + +"Mystery is right," agreed Jim, the injured driver. "The only casualty +up to date is my busted wing, which is a lot better than a busted +neck. But you'd better get back in your glass house, Frenchy, because +we're all frozen stiff, and the sooner we land at the hotel, the +better. My arm feels as though it must be broken in twenty places." + +The Frenchman looked doubtfully at Jim when he spoke of an injured +"wing," but evidently set it down as being one more incomprehensible +vagary of the English language, for he only shrugged his shoulders and +returned to his car without comment. + +The short day was drawing rapidly into night when the little party at +last saw the cheerful lights of the hotel shining through the storm. +Fifteen minutes later the lads were all seated in front of a roaring +open fire in the big parlor and were telling their experiences to the +amazed guests. + +Bob was the only uncomfortable one in the crowd, as he heard everybody +speaking in praise of the way he had risen to the emergency and was +thankful for more reasons than one when dinner was announced. + +"Dinner!" exclaimed Jimmy, rapturously. "Bob, I've got to hand it to +you. Not only do you get us here through a howling blizzard, but you +land us just in time for a turkey dinner. Oh my, oh my!" + +The Mountain Rest Hotel had a reputation for serving generous meals, +and for this the boys were thankful that night. Through all the long, +cold day they had eaten nothing but a few sandwiches, and now they +strove to make up for lost time. Not in vain, either. Even Jimmy had +to own up that he could not eat another mouthful, which was a +statement he could seldom truthfully make. + +Owing to the sickness in Clintonia, there had been an unprecedented +rush of visitors to the hotel, and the Layton party discovered that +they would have to take one of the small cottages adjoining the hotel, +although they would board in the main establishment. + +The cottage was snug and comfortable, however, and they were all +delighted with it. Indeed, it was better for the radio boys than rooms +in the hotel, because they could set up their receiving set more +readily. Of course, it was out of the question to erect an outdoor +aerial, but they were not bothered by this and decided to use a loop +aerial instead. They had brought with them a knock-down frame on which +to wind their antenna, and this frame could be moved around and set +against the wall when not in use. + +The first night at Mountain Pass they had little thought, however, +even for their beloved radio, and were content to tumble into bed +shortly after dinner. But the next day they were up early, and after a +hearty breakfast set to work to put up their set. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +CONVINCING A SKEPTIC + + +It was a simple matter for the boys to wind the loop aerial, for they +had become expert in the manipulation of wire, tape, and the numerous +other accessories that go with the art of wireless telephony. After +the aerial was completed they unpacked their receiving set and quickly +connected it up. They worked skillfully and efficiently, and before +the lunch bell rang at noon they were ready to receive signals. + +But even their enthusiasm was not proof against the seductive summons +of the genial looking old darky who rang the bell, and they washed +hastily and started for the dining room at a pace that would have +reflected credit on the hungriest boarder who ever lived. + +"Gang way, Bob!" panted Jimmy, as they clattered down the last flight +of stairs and dashed for the entrance to the hotel. "I'm hungry, and, +therefore, desperate. Get out of the way before I trip over you!" + +"Good night!" shouted Bob. "You're getting too fresh to live, Jimmy," +and he picked up a handful of snow and dropped it carefully and with +precision down Jimmy's fat neck. + +"Ugh!" exclaimed that corpulent youth, stopping short in his wild rush +and digging snow from under his collar. "I'll get even with you for +that, Bob, you old hobo. Just you wait!" + +"Can't wait a second," grinned Bob. "I don't want to be late and miss +all the good things, even if you do." + +"Come on, Doughnuts, don't stand there all day picking snow off you," +entreated Herb. "I can't see where there's any fun in that." + +Jimmy reached down, packed a handful of snow, and sent it flying after +the others. They were close to the door, however, and ducked in +unscathed, while the snowball spread out in a big patch against the +door casing. + +Jimmy did not allow himself to be delayed very long at any time when +there was food in prospect, however, and his friends had hardly seated +themselves at the table when he came in, his collar badly dampened, +but his appetite in prime condition. He shook his fist surreptitiously +at the others, but he was incapable of staying angry long, and was +soon his usual jolly and happy-go-lucky self. + +The snowstorm had stopped during the night, the weather had grown +warmer, and a brilliant sun now shone down on a dazzlingly white +world. The snow had come ahead of time, as all the "regulars" at the +Mountain Rest Hotel united in asserting, and now it gave every +indication of disappearing as fast as it had come. + +The boys wanted to get back to their radio set after dinner, but the +snow looked so inviting that they could not resist the temptation to +have a snow fight. Some of the men, seeing them hard at it, cast +dignity to the winds and joined them, until quite a miniature battle +was raging. Ammunition was plentiful, and there was a good deal of +shouting and laughter before both sides became tired and agreed to +call it a draw. + +The radio boys were pretty damp with snow water, and their hands were +stiff with cold, but trifling discomforts such as these did not bother +them much. They had had a good time, and they knew that there is +seldom any fun that does not have its own drawbacks. They went to +their rooms, changed the wettest of their clothing for dry articles, +and were soon ready to test their set. + +They were just making a final inspection of their connections when Mr. +Layton entered the room, accompanied by two other gentlemen. + +Mr. Layton introduced the two latter as the owners of the store he was +thinking of purchasing. + +"Mr. Blackford and Mr. Robins are rather skeptical about radio," +explained Mr. Layton, when the introductions had been duly +accomplished. "I happened to mention it this morning, and as they both +seemed to think I was exaggerating its possibilities, I asked them +here to see and hear for themselves." + +"It's no trouble to show goods," said Bob, grinning. "We haven't +tested for signals yet, but the set is all hooked up, and I guess all +we'll have to do is tune up and get about anything you want." + +"You seem pretty confident," remarked one of the two strangers, Mr. +Robins. "My opinion is, that this radio stuff is mostly bunk. A friend +of mine bought a set just a little while ago, and he couldn't hear a +thing with it. Paid fifteen dollars for it, too." + +"I shouldn't imagine he could," said Bob, drily. "Mountain Pass must +be at least a hundred miles from the nearest broadcasting station, and +that set you speak of could never be expected to catch anything more +than twenty-five miles away, at the most." + +"Well, I'll bet dollars to doughnuts you can't hear anything with that +outfit you've got there, either," broke in the other of the two +strangers. + +"You'd lose your money, Blackford," said Bob's father. "Go ahead and +convince these doubting Thomases, Bob." + +Bob adjusted a headset over his ears and switched on the current +through the vacuum bulb filament. Then he manipulated the voltage of +the "B," or high voltage, dry battery, and also varied the current +flowing through the filament by means of a rheostat connected in +series with it. Almost immediately he caught a far-away sound of +music, and by manipulation of the variometer and condenser knobs +gradually increased the strength of the sounds. + +Meantime Mr. Layton's two acquaintances had watched proceedings with +open skepticism, and often glanced knowingly at each other. But +suddenly, as Bob twisted the knob of the variable condenser, the music +became so loud that all in the room could hear it, even though they +had no receivers over their ears. + +"If either of you two gentlemen will put these receivers on, he'll be +convinced that radio is no fake," said Bob quietly, at the same time +removing his headset and holding it out. + +After a moment's hesitation Mr. Robins donned the receivers, and a +startled look came over his face, replacing the incredulous expression +it had worn heretofore. + +"Let's hook up another set of phones, Bob, and let Mr. Blackford +listen at the same time," suggested Joe. + +This was done, and soon both skeptics were listening to their first +radio concert. Mr. Layton regarded them with an amused smile. Mr. +Robins extended his hand curiously toward the condenser knob, and +immediately the music died away. He pulled his hand hastily away, and +the sounds resumed their former volume. + +"Don't be frightened," laughed Mr. Layton. "It won't bite you." + +"But what made it fade away in that fashion?" asked Mr. Robins. + +"Don't ask me," said Bob's father. "I'm not up on radio the way the +boys are. I enjoy it, without knowing much of the _modus operandi_." + +"That was caused by what is known as 'body capacity,'" explained Bob. +"Every human being is more or less of a natural condenser, and when +you get near the regular condenser in that set, it puts more capacity +into the circuit, and interferes with its balance." + +The other nodded, although in reality he understood very little of +even this simple explanation. He was too much absorbed in listening to +what was going on in the phones. + +As he listened, he heard the latest stock market quotations given out, +among them being the last minute prices of some shares he happened to +be interested in. He slapped his knee enthusiastically, and when the +last quotations had been given, he snatched off the headset and leaped +to his feet. + +"I'm converted!" he fairly shouted. "I'll buy this outfit right as it +stands for almost any price you fellows want to put on it. What will +you sell it for?" + +The boys were taken aback by this unexpected offer, and all looked at +Bob expectantly. + +"Why, we hadn't even thought of selling the set," he said slowly. "We +wouldn't sell it right now, at any price, I think. But when we leave +here to go back home, I suppose we might let you have it. How about +it, fellows?" + +After some argument they agreed to this, but Mr. Robins was so +determined to have the set that he would not be put off. + +"Now look here," he said. "I'm a business man, and I'll make you a +business proposition. I'll buy that outfit right now, before I leave +this room, at your own figure. But you fellows can keep it here and +have the use of it just the same as you have now, only it will be +understood that I'll have the privilege of coming over here once a day +in time to hear those market reports. At the same time you can teach +me something about operating the thing. How does that strike you?" and +he threw himself back in his chair and waited for his answer. + +"We'll have to talk over that offer for a little while," said Bob. +"Give us ten minutes or so, and we'll give you an answer." + +"That's all right," replied Mr. Robins. "While I'm waiting I'll just +put on those ear pieces again and see what's doing." + +The radio boys left the room and held an excited conference +downstairs. After some discussion they agreed to sell their set, as +long as they could have the use of it during their stay at the resort, +but the matter of price proved to be a knotty problem. Bob produced +pencil and paper, and they figured the actual cost of the set to +themselves, and then what the same set would have cost if bought ready +made in a retail store. + +"The actual material in that set didn't cost us much over forty +dollars, but we put a whole lot of time and experience into it," said +Bob, "It would cost him close to a hundred to get as good a one in a +store." + +"It's a mighty good set, too," said Joe, a note of regret in his +voice. "We might make another as near like it as possible, and not get +nearly as good results." + +"Oh, don't worry. We're some radio builders by this time," Herb +reminded him. "Besides, that isn't the only set we've got." + +"Let's ask him eighty dollars," ventured Jimmy. "He'll be getting it +cheaper then than he could buy it retail, and we'll be picking up a +nice piece of change." + +"I think that ought to be about the right figure," agreed Bob. "Does +that suit this board of directors? Eighty hard, round iron men?" + +The others grinned assent, and they returned to the room where the +older men were still seated about the radio set. + +"Well, what's the verdict?" inquired Mr. Robins, glancing keenly from +one to the other. + +"We've decided to sell," replied Bob. "The price will be eighty +dollars." + +Without a word Mr. Robins produced a roll of greenbacks, and counted +off the specified amount in crisp bills. + +"You'll want a receipt, won't you, Robins?" inquired Mr. Layton. + +"Not necessary," replied the other. "I've got a hunch that your son +and his friends are on the level and won't try to cheat an old fellow +like me. I'll have to be going now, but I'll be around about the same +time tomorrow morning to get the stock quotations. Coming, Blackford?" + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +A MOUNTAIN RADIO STATION + + +Left to themselves, the boys looked at one another. + +"That's what I call quick work," remarked Joe. "I hate to let the old +set go, but they say you should never mix sentiment with business." + +"Maybe this will lessen your grief," said Bob. "Eighty divided by four +makes twenty, or at least that's what they always taught us in school. +Take these four five-dollar bills, Joe, and dry your tears with them." + +"Oh, boy!" exclaimed Joe. + +"Money, how welcome you are!" ejaculated Herb, as he pocketed his +share. "What I can't do with twenty dollars!" + +"That will buy exactly two thousand doughnuts," calculated Jimmy, a +rapturous expression on his round countenance. "Hot doughnuts, crisp +brown doughnuts, doughnuts with jelly in them, doughnuts----" + +A human avalanche precipitated itself on the corpulent youngster, and +he found himself writhing on the floor with his three companions +seated comfortably on different parts of his ample anatomy. + +"Hey! Quit, quit!" stuttered Jimmy. "Get off me, you hobos! You'll +have me flattened out like a dog that's just been run over by a steam +roller." + +"And serve you right, too," retorted Joe. "What do you mean by talking +about doughnuts when it's almost dinner time, and we're starved to +death, anyway. Besides, you know there isn't a place at Mountain Pass +where we can buy them." + +"Yes, and if I'd known that before I started, I would probably have +stayed at home," retorted Jimmy. "Get off me, will you, before I throw +you off?" + +"We'll let you up, but I doubt if you should be trusted with all that +money," returned Bob, grinning. "You'd better whack it up among us, +Jimmy. You'll just buy a lot of junk with it and make yourself sick." + +"Well, I've got a right to get sick if I want to," said his rotund +friend, struggling to his feet. "If you get that twenty away from me, +it will have to be over my dead body." + +"It doesn't seem worth while to kill him for just twenty dollars," +said Bob, pretending to consider. "That's just a little over six +dollars apiece." + +"No good," said Joe, decisively. "It would cost more than that to bury +him." + +"You're a cold-blooded set of bandits," complained Jimmy, in an +aggrieved tone. "I'm glad I haven't got a hundred dollars with me. I'd +be a mighty poor insurance risk then, I suppose." + +"I wouldn't give a lead nickel for your chances," said Bob. "But don't +let that worry you, Jimmy. You'll probably never have that much money +all at one time as long as you live." + +"I won't if I wait for you fellows to give it to me," admitted his +friend. "But I'm going over to the hotel and see if dinner is served +yet. I'm not going to be the last one in the dining room at _every_ +meal." + +"When you get the hang of this place, you'll always be the first one," +said Herb. "After a little while they'll make you up a bunk in a +corner, and you can even sleep there." + +"Oh, go chase yourself!" exclaimed Jimmy. "You never learned how to +eat, Herb, and that's why you're such a human bean pole," and with +this parting shot he slammed the door behind him before Herb could +think of a suitable reply. + +"He got you that time, Herb," said Bob, with a grin. "I guess we might +as well all get ready for dinner. Dad says they hate to have people +coming in late." + +Every day after that Mr. Robins dropped in in time to hear the market +reports, sometimes alone, and at others accompanied by his partner, +Mr. Blackford. The latter was not quite so enthusiastic as his +colleague, but he was nevertheless greatly interested, and was always +glad to don a head set and hear what was going on. + +True to their agreement, the boys instructed the new owner of the set +how to adjust it and get the best results. He always paid the closest +attention to what they told him, and in a few days could pick up +signals and tune the set fairly well. + +"Not bad for an old fellow, eh?" he exclaimed delightedly one day, +when he had accomplished the whole thing without any aid from the +boys. "If Blackford and I sell out to your father, Bob, I'll have a +little leisure time, and blame it all if I don't think I'll do some +experimenting and possibly some building myself." + +"You're pretty badly bitten by the radio bug," observed his partner. + +"I won't try to deny it," said the other, emphatically. "The more I +think about it, the more wonderful it seems. Besides, it's got a +mighty practical side to it. I was holding on to some shares a few +days ago until I learned by way of the radio that they were starting +to fall. I sent a telegram to my brokers, they sold out for me just in +the nick of time, and I made a profit on the deal instead of having to +take a loss. The bottom dropped clean out of the market that same +afternoon, and if I'd been holding on to those shares, I would have +gotten bumped good and hard." + +The other nodded. "It's a good investment when you look at it that +way," he admitted. + +"Good investment is right," declared his partner. "I saved a lot more +in that deal than the whole radio outfit cost me, and I still own the +set." + +"I wonder why the new government wireless station doesn't do something +of the kind," remarked Mr. Blackford. "They might as well make +themselves useful as well as ornamental." + +"Government station!" exclaimed Bob and Joe at once. "Is there a +government station at Mountain Pass?" + +Mr. Blackford nodded. "I thought you fellows knew about it, or I'd +have mentioned it before," he said. "It was just opened a few weeks +ago, and I don't think they've got all their equipment in yet. There's +been some delay in getting the stuff here, I understand." + +"What does the government want of a wireless station away up here?" +asked Bob. + +"This is the highest point in all the surrounding country and makes an +ideal lookout for forest fires," said his informant. "The station was +supposed to be ready for use last summer, but, as I say, was delayed a +good deal. But we expect it to be of great service in the future. +There have been some disastrous forest fires around here in the last +few years, as you probably know." + +"We ought, to know it," remarked Joe. "The smoke has been so thick as +far away as Clintonia sometimes that you could cut it with a hatchet. +It's about time something was done to stop it." + +Of course, once they heard about the government station, the boys +could think of nothing else until they had visited it. Bob proposed +that they go right after lunch, and this met with the enthusiastic +approval of his friends. Poor Jimmy was so rushed by his eager friends +that he was frustrated in his design of asking for a second helping of +chocolate pudding, and was hurried away protesting vainly against such +unseemly haste. + +"What do you Indians think you're doing?" he grumbled. "Do you all +want to die of indigestion? Don't you know you're supposed to rest +after a meal and give your stomach a chance?" + +"Oh, dry up," said Joe, heartlessly. "If you didn't eat so much you +wouldn't want to lie around for two hours after every meal like a +Brazilian anaconda. You know you didn't want another plate of that +pudding, anyway." + +"Didn't I!" said Jimmy, disconsolately. "That was about the best +pudding I ever tasted, bar none. You fellows are such radio bugs that +you can't even pay proper attention to what you're eating." + +"You give enough attention to that to make up for the whole gang," +said Bob. "Stop your growling and step along lively, old timer." + +Jimmy grumbled a little more in spite of this admonition, but regained +his usual cheery mood when he saw the steel lattice-work towers with +the familiar antenna sweeping in graceful spans between them, and +forgot all about the missing plate of pudding. + +The station was situated some distance from the Mountain Rest Hotel in +a clearing cut out of the dense pine woods, and the boys ceased to +wonder why they had not discovered it on some of their rambles. As +they drew near they could see that everything was solidly and +substantially built, as is usually the case with government work. + +The station, besides the towers, comprised a large, comfortable +building, which housed all the sending and receiving equipment, and a +smaller building, in which the operators slept when off duty, and +where spare equipment was stored. + +The radio boys knocked at the door of the larger building, and after a +short wait it was opened by a tall, rather frail looking young fellow, +who eyed them inquiringly. + +Bob explained that he and his friends were radio fans, and were +anxious to look over the station, if it would not cause too much +inconvenience. + +"Not a bit of it," said the young operator, heartily. "To tell you the +truth, there is not much doing here at this time of year, and company +is mighty welcome. Step in and I'll be glad to show you around the +place." + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE MARVELOUS SCIENCE + + +Inside of half an hour the boys were on a friendly footing with the +young operator and felt as though they had known him a long time. He +was only a few years older than themselves, and had been a +full-fledged operator for about six months. The Mountain Pass station +was his first assignment, and he was inordinately proud of the +complicated apparatus that went to compose it. + +"This is some little station that Uncle Sam has rigged up here, and +while there are plenty of bigger ones, there are very few that are +more complete and up to date. Look at this three unit generator set, +for instance. Compact, neat, and efficient, as you can easily see. It +doesn't take up much room, but it can do a whole lot." + +"It does look as though it were built for business," admitted Bob. "I +suppose that unit in the center is the driving motor, isn't it?" + +"Right," said the other. "And the one nearest you is a two thousand +volt generator for supplying the plate circuit. The one at the other +end is a double current generator. That supplies direct current at one +hundred and twenty-five volts and four amps for the exciter circuit, +and alternating current at eighty-eight volts and ten amps for feeding +that twelve volt filament heating transformer that you see over there +in the corner." + +"Pretty neat, I'll say," remarked Joe. + +"I think so," said the other, and continued to point out the salient +and interesting features of the equipment. "Over here, you see, is our +main instrument panel. These dials over here control the variable +condensers, and the other ones control the variometers. But there!" he +exclaimed, catching himself up short. "I suppose none of you ever +heard of such things before, did you?" + +The radio boys looked at each other, and could not help laughing. + +"We've got a faint idea what they are, anyway," chuckled Bob. "We've +made enough of them to be on speaking terms, I should say." + +"Made them!" exclaimed the other, surprised in his turn. + +"Sure thing," grinned Bob. "We've made crystal detector sets and +vacuum tube sets, and----" + +"And other sets that we never knew just how to describe," interrupted +the irrepressible Herb, with a laugh. + +"Yes, that kind too," admitted Bob, with a grin. "But, anyway, we've +made enough to know the difference between a variometer and a +condenser." + +"Well, I didn't know I was talking to old hands at the game," said the +operator. "I suppose I might have known that you wouldn't take that +long walk out here through the snow unless you were pretty well +interested in radio." + +"Yes, we're dyed-in-the-wool fans," admitted Bob, and told the +operator something of their radio work. + +"I'm mighty glad to know that you fellows do understand the subject," +said the operator, when Bob had finished. "I'm so enthusiastic about +it myself, that it is a real pleasure to have somebody to talk to that +knows what I'm talking about. So many of the people who come here seem +to be natural born dumb-bells--at least, on the subject of radio." + +"Such as you took us for at first, eh?" asked Jimmy, with a grin. + +"I apologize for that," said the other, frankly. "Please don't hold it +against me." + +"Personally, I don't blame you a bit," said Bob. "We can't expect you +to be a mind reader." + +"Well, then, that's settled; so let's look at the rest of the +station," said the operator, whose name was Bert Thompson. "This is +our transmitter panel over here. It is very compact, as you can see +for yourselves." + +He opened two doors at the front, one at the bottom, and raised the +cover, thus exposing most of the interior mechanism to view. + +"Here are all the fuse blocks down at the bottom, you see," Thompson +continued. "The various switches are conveniently arranged where you +can easily get at them while you are sitting in front of the panel. +Then up here are the microphones, with their coils and wiring where +you can easily get at them for inspection or repairs. Rather a neat +lay-out, don't you think?" + +"No doubt of it!" exclaimed Bob, admiringly. "We've never made a CW +transmitting set yet, but we hope to some day. A set like this would +cost a pile of money, even if you made it yourself." + +"Rather so," admitted the young operator. "It takes a rich old fellow +like Uncle Sam to pony up for a set like that." + +"We're more interested in receiving sets just at present," said Joe. +"Let's take a look at that end of the outfit." + +"Anything you like," said Thompson, readily. "That panel is located on +this side of the room." + +"I suppose you use a regenerative circuit, don't you?" asked Bob. + +"Oh, yes," answered the other. "That helps out a lot in increasing the +strength of the incoming sounds." + +"I suppose you use a tickler coil in the plate circuit, don't you?" +ventured Joe. + +"No, in this set we use a variometer in the plate circuit instead," +said Thompson. + +"Speaking of regenerative circuits, have you heard about Armstrong's +new invention?" asked Bob. + +The operator shook his head. "Can't say that I have," he said. "It +must be something very recent, isn't it?" + +"Yes, I believe it is," said Bob. "I read about it the other day in +one of the latest radio magazines." + +"Do you remember how it worked?" asked Thompson, eagerly. "I wish +you'd tell me about it, if you do." + +"I'll do my best," promised Bob. "The main idea seems to be to make +one tube do as much as three tubes did before. Armstrong found that +the limit of amplification had been reached when the negative charge +in the tube approaches the positive charge. By experimenting he found +that it was possible to increase the negative charge temporarily, for +something like one twenty-thousandth of a second, I think it was. This +is far above the positive for that tiny fraction of a second, and yet +the average negative charge is lower. It is this increase that makes +the enormous amplification possible, and lets the operator discard two +vacuum tubes." + +"Sounds good," said Thompson. "Do you suppose you could draw me a +rough sketch of the circuit?" + +"Let's have a pencil and some paper, and I'll make a try at it," said +Bob. "I doped it out at the time, but likely I've forgotten it since +then." + +Nevertheless, with the friendly aid of the eraser on the end of the +pencil, he sketched a circuit that the experienced professional had no +difficulty in understanding. + +"You see," explained Bob, "with this hook up you use the regular +Armstrong regenerative circuit, with the second tube connected so that +it acts as an automatic switch, cutting in or out a few turns of the +secondary coil. The plate circuit of the second tube is connected to +the plate of the detector tube through both capacity and inductance." + +"I get you," nodded the operator. "According to your sketch the plate +and grid of the second tube are coupled inductively, causing variation +in the positive resistance of the tuned circuit." + +"That's the idea exactly," agreed Bob. "You see, this is done by means +of the oscillating tube, the grid circuit being connected through the +tuned circuit of the amplifying tube." + +"Say, that looks pretty good to me!" exclaimed Thompson. "I wonder how +Armstrong ever came to dope that out. I've been trying to get +something of the kind for a long time, but I never seemed to get quite +the right combination." + +"Well, better luck next time," said Bob, sympathetically. "There are a +lot of people working at radio problems, and it seems to be a pretty +close race between the inventors. Something new is being discovered +almost every day." + +"If you fellows are building sets, you're just as likely to make some +important discovery as anybody else," said Thompson. "That +super-regenerative circuit is a corker, though. I'm going to keep that +sketch you made, if you don't mind, and see if I can make a small set +along those lines. I have lots of spare time just at present." + +"It will repay you for your trouble, all right," remarked Joe. "We're +figuring on doing the same thing when we get back home." + +Jimmy had tried faithfully to follow the technicalities of the recent +conversation, but his was an easy-going nature, disinclined to delve +deeply into the intricate mysteries of science. Herbert was somewhat +the same way, and they two wandered about the station, laughing and +joking, while Bob and Joe and the young wireless man argued the merits +of different equipments and hook-ups. + +"Say!" exclaimed Jimmy, at length, "I hate to break up the party, but +don't you think it's about time that we thought of getting back to the +hotel? Remember we've got a long way to go, and it's four-thirty +already." + +"Gee!" said Bob, glancing in surprise at his watch. "I guess Jimmy is +right for once in his life. We'll have to hustle along now, but we'll +drop in here often while we are at Mountain Pass--unless you put up a +'no admittance' sign." + +"No danger of that," laughed the other. "The oftener you come, the +better I'll like it. This is a lonely place, as you can see for +yourselves." + +The radio boys shook hands with Bert Thompson, and after thanking him +for the trouble he had taken to show them the station, they started +back for the hotel at a brisk pace. + +The days were growing very short, and it was after dark when they +reached the hotel. Very warm and comfortable it looked as they +approached it, windows lighted and throwing cheerful beams over the +white snow outside. A red glow filled the windows of the living room, +and the boys knew that a big wood fire was roaring and crackling in +the big fireplace. As they drew close, a tempting aroma of cookery +reached them, and caused them to hasten their steps. + +They had barely time to get freshened up before the dinner bell rang, +and in a short time they were making havoc with as fine a meal as any +of them ever tasted. + +When they told about their visit to the radio station, Edna and Ruth +Salper, the daughters of the Wall Street broker they had met in the +snowstorm, were among the most interested of the listeners. + +"We find it so dull over at our house we are glad to come over here +for meals and to visit," said Ruth Salper. + +"I suppose being in the woods in winter is rather dull," returned Joe, +politely. + +"Did you boys really know enough about radio to talk all afternoon +with the man in charge of the government station?" inquired Edna, +curiously. + +"Why not?" asked Bob. "Don't you think radio is a broad enough subject +to talk about for an entire afternoon?" + +"Oh, I suppose it is," she admitted. "But why don't you share some of +your fun with us?" + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +PRESSED INTO SERVICE + + +"Just what do you mean?" asked Bob. "Do you want to talk radio with us +all tomorrow afternoon?" he went on, with an irritating grin. + +"No, of course I don't, stupid," she exclaimed. "But why can't you +bring your old wireless things into the hotel parlor and let us all +hear some music? We'd be ever so grateful if you would." + +The radio boys looked doubtfully at each other. + +"We'd do it, fast enough," said Bob. "But we didn't bring a loud +speaker with us, and without that nobody could hear much unless he had +a set of telephone receivers." + +"Oh, dear!" she exclaimed. "I just knew you'd make some excuse or +other." + +"A loud speaker is something that looks like an old-fashioned +phonograph horn, isn't it?" asked Ruth, the younger sister, before any +of the radio boys could refute the older girl's accusation. + +"Well, yes, it looks like that; but the details are different," +replied Bob. + +"Yes, but if you had a phonograph horn, couldn't you fix it up so that +the music would be loud enough for us all to hear it?" persisted Ruth. + +"Good for you, Ruth!" exclaimed her sister. "I know what you mean. +You're thinking of that old phonograph they used to have in this +hotel, before they got the big new cabinet machine." + +"If Edna and I get that horn for you, it will be easy for such experts +as you boys are to make a--a what-you-may-call-it--loud speaker--out +of it, won't it?" asked Ruth, demurely. + +"I think they're kidding us now, Bob," said Joe, grinning. "When a +girl tells you you're an expert, you can bet she's figuring to wish +something on you." + +"Yes, but it's so unusual that we ought to do something to encourage +it," laughed Bob. "Let's call their bluff. Probably they'll never be +able to find a horn, anyway." + +"Don't count too much on that," said Edna, with a dangerous smile. "We +almost always get what we ask for." + +"Yes, and you are everlastingly asking for something, it seems to me," +grumbled her father, who had joined the little group at that moment. + +"Now, Daddy, you know you love to give us things," chided Ruth. "If we +suddenly had everything we wanted, you'd be dreadfully disappointed." + +"There's no danger of that happening," said her father, a smile +softening his grim face. "But what is it you're after just at +present?" + +"We want that big phonograph horn they used to have here in the +hotel," said Edna, with a provoking side glance at the radio boys. +"Will you ask the manager to hunt it up and lend it to us?" + +"I'll see what I can do about it," promised Mr. Salper. "I remember +the horn you mean, but it was probably thrown away long ago." + +The radio boys rather wished that this might prove to be the case, but +they were not destined to get off so easily. The first thing they saw +when they entered the dining room the next morning was a large wooden +horn, of a style in universal use in the early years of the +phonograph, standing prominently near their table. + +"There, now!" exclaimed Jimmy, in a low voice. "You see what you've +let us in for, Bob. Why didn't you tell them that we didn't have time +to waste building a loud speaker, and settle the thing right then and +there." + +"That's easier said than done," answered Bob. "Why don't you go over +to the Salper's house and tell the girls that?" + +"Yes, go right over and be rough with them," advised Joe. "Tell them +that you're not afraid of girls, and they can't put anything over on +you." + +"Aw, I would have, last night; but it's too late now," said Jimmy, +lamely. + +"Yes, you would!" jeered Herb. "After all, it won't be so much work. +You're an expert carpenter, Jimmy, and can make a bang-up job of it." + +"That's always the way," complained Jimmy, heaving a dismal sigh. "You +fellows think up a good, hard job, and then I do the work. I've never +known it to fail yet." + +"Buck up, Doughnuts," said Bob. "Think of how the girls will thank you +for it. You'll be the most popular fellow in the hotel." + +"Like fun I will!" returned the fat boy. "But I'm not going to let it +interfere with my appetite. I can see where I've got a hard day ahead +of me." + +It proved to be a busy morning for all the radio boys. Immediately +after breakfast they fell to work on the horn, and after some three +hours of steady labor they had constructed a passable loud-speaking +horn, using one telephone receiver clamped securely at the narrow end. +They mounted the whole thing on a solid wooden pedestal, leaving two +substantial shelves at the back to hold their radio apparatus. + +It did not take them long to mount the receiving outfit in a neat +manner, and when this was done they all drew a long breath and sat +down to admire the result of their labors. While still engaged in this +gratifying occupation, Edna and Ruth Salper entered. + +"Oh!" exclaimed the former, with a gesture of delight, "doesn't it +look simply beautiful? I never thought you boys could make it so +quickly." + +"You've got Jimmy to thank for that," said Bob. "I never saw him work +so hard in his life before. It was easy to see that he was thinking of +you and Ruth all the time, from the way he put his heart into it." + +"I didn't anything of the kind," said the embarrassed Jimmy. "I never +thought of them once, even." + +"What a dreadful thing to say," laughed Ruth. "I didn't know you hated +girls, Jimmy." + +"Who said I hated 'em?" demanded Jimmy, getting as red as a beet. +"I--I----" + +"Love them," Joe finished for him. "Is that what you are trying to +say, Jimmy?" + +"Say, who asked you to butt in?" inquired Jimmy, desperately. +"Everybody is trying to tell me what I mean, until I don't know which +is right myself." + +"Never mind," said Edna, coming to the rescue of the floundering +youth. "We are grateful to you for working so hard for us, anyway." + +"Oh, that's all right," mumbled Jimmy. "If it works all right, we +won't worry about the labor we put into it." + +"But don't you expect it to work?" asked Edna, teasingly. + +"Sure it will work," asserted Bob, before Jimmy could involve himself +again. "That is, you'll hear music, all right, but it probably won't +be very loud, even with the help of the horn. We're a long way from +the broadcasting station, you know. If we were within ten or fifteen +miles of it, I'd say surely that it would be a success." + +"I'll go and get the loop aerial, Bob, and we can test it right now," +suggested Joe. "What do you think?" + +Bob nodded, and Joe left the room, returning a few minutes later with +the loop. This was soon connected with the set, and then Bob began +tuning for signals. + +"Mercy! what was that?" exclaimed Edna, while Ruth gave a little +scream. + +From the horn came an ear-piercing howl, followed by whistles and +weird unearthly shrieks. But the boys only laughed heartily at the +girls. + +"That's nothing but old man static," said Bob. "We'll soon get him off +the wires." + +"Does he live near here?" asked Ruth, innocently. + +"Wow!" shouted Herb, and the boys could not help laughing, although +they stopped as soon as they saw the mystified and somewhat hurt +expression in the girl's eyes. + +"That was just Bob's slangy way of talking," explained Joe, after he +was sure that he had regained control of his features. "Static is the +electricity that is always in the air, and gives us radio fans a good +deal of trouble." + +"Oh, I see," said Ruth, and she was a good enough sport to laugh at +her own mistake. + +Meantime Bob had finally got the set tuned to the proper wave length, +and the little group were all delighted with the clarity and volume of +the resultant sounds. They were not nearly as loud as an ordinary +phonograph, but were sufficient to be heard distinctly in a fairly +large room. + +"It's too bad we only have a one-stage amplifier," said Bob. "If we +only had another transformer and vacuum tube, we'd have a loud speaker +that you could hear all over the hotel." + +"I think this one is plenty good enough," asserted Edna. + +Both she and her sister were as excited as children with a new toy, +and they were both delighted with the music. + +"You boys will have to bring this wonderful thing into the parlor +tonight, and let everybody hear it," coaxed Edna. "I know they will +all be tickled to death to hear a concert in this new way." + +"They might not be as enthusiastic as you think," said Bob, +doubtfully. "Maybe they'd rather just talk, and wouldn't thank us for +interrupting them." + +"What an idea!" exclaimed Ruth. "Just try it once, just to please us, +and you'll soon find out whether they like it or not." + +"Well, if it's to please you, we'll certainly do that thing!" Bob +gallantly remarked, and was rewarded by a friendly smile. + +"Edna and I will speak to the manager about it this afternoon, and I +know it will be all right," she said. "We'll tell you what he says at +supper time." + +The radio boys, although they were radio enthusiasts themselves, did +not actually realize how deeply interested people had become in this +new and wonderful science. They were somewhat surprised, therefore, +when the manager sought them out that afternoon and told them that he +would be more than delighted to have them give a radio concert that +evening. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +SCORING A TRIUMPH + + +When he had gone the boys grinned at one another. + +"We're getting to be popular around this place," remarked Bob. + +"We sha'n't be quite so popular tomorrow, if the concert broadcasted +tonight isn't a good one," said Joe. + +"I only wish we could get that loudspeaker to speak just a bit +louder," said Herb. "It's only fair now, and those people will be +expecting a lot, I suppose." + +"I was thinking the same thing," remarked Bob. "And if we're willing +to pitch in this afternoon, we can improve the strength of our set a +lot" + +The others looked incredulously at him. + +"Explain," said Joe. "You've got us guessing, Bob." + +"The way we've got our set hooked up now, we're using a loop antenna, +aren't we? Well," as the others nodded assent, "why not unwind the +loop and string a double aerial on the roof? That would give us a lot +more power, you know." + +"Right you are!" exclaimed Joe. "That should make a lot of +difference." + +"But if we do that, we'll have to have a ground, which isn't necessary +with the loop antenna," objected Herb. + +"That's true enough," agreed Bob. "But that's easy, after all. We can +hook our ground wire to one of the steam radiators." + +"Trust Bob to think of everything!" ejaculated Jimmy. + +"Bob is thinking that we'd better get busy, then," said that +individual. "Heave yourself off that nice soft couch, Jimmy, and get +your hat and overcoat on." + +Jimmy emitted a dismal groan. + +"Have a heart, Bob," he complained. "You know I worked so hard this +morning that I'm all in." + +"All right, then, you stay there; but we'll tell Edna and Ruth that +you refused to help," said Joe, cruelly. + +This threat had its effect, and Jimmy struggled to his feet and had +his outer clothing on almost as soon as the others. It was a beautiful +day outside, and after they once got warmed up, they thoroughly +enjoyed the work of stringing the aerial on the roof. They brought the +leading-in wire to one of the windows of the hotel parlor. It was not +necessary to insulate this with anything heavier than friction tape, +as this was to be only a temporary installation. Before dark they had +everything ready, and then they went inside, moved their receiving set +into the parlor, and connected it up to the leading-in wire. Following +Bob's suggestion, they attached a ground wire to a radiator, and found +that everything worked perfectly. As they had anticipated, the signals +were considerably louder, and the old phonograph horn filled the big +room with a satisfying volume of sound. + +During dinner the boys were so excited that they could hardly eat, and +immediately afterward they hurried into the parlor. The guests had +been notified of the impending concert, and soon almost everybody in +the hotel had crowded into the room. + +The hotel manager made a little speech introducing the boys to those +who had not already become acquainted with them, and mentioning the +concert that was to come. Then every one waited expectantly for the +promised entertainment. + +It proved unnecessary to do much tuning, as the adjustment they had +secured that afternoon proved to be very nearly correct still. + +When the first clear notes floated into the room many of the audience +straightened up in their chairs, while looks of astonishment passed +over their features. At first they were too engrossed with the novelty +of the thing to pay much attention to the music, but gradually the +golden notes wove their magic net and held them all enthralled. The +night was an ideal one for radiophony, cold and still, with hardly any +static to annoy. One selection after another came in clear and +distinct, and after each one the audience applauded instinctively, +hardly conscious of the fact that upward of one hundred miles of bleak +and snow-covered mountains and valleys lay between them and the +performers. + +At length, to everybody's regret, the last number was played, and the +receiving set was silent. Not so the audience, however, who +overwhelmed the boys with thanks, and made them promise to entertain +them in a similar manner on other evenings. + +After most of the audience had drifted out the Salper girls thanked +the boys prettily for all they had done, and they felt more than +repaid for the hard work of the day, even Jimmy admitting afterward +that "it was worth it." + +The next day the boys were eager to see Bert Thompson, the radio man, +and tell him about their successful experiment, so they set out for +the government station soon after breakfast. It had snowed in the +early morning, but had now stopped, and the air was cold and bracing. + +The four lads relieved the monotony of the long walk with, more than +one impromptu exchange of snowballs. It seemed that they had hardly +started before they had traversed the miles of difficult going and +found themselves in the snug interior of the wireless house. + +As they were approaching it, they were astonished to see Mr. Salper +emerge, a heavy frown on his usually none-too-cheerful countenance. He +only nodded to the radio boys in passing, and hurried away through the +snow at a pace of which they would never have believed him capable. + +When they entered the station they found Bert Thompson excited and +angry. When they opened the door he started up, but when he saw who +his visitors were, sank back in his chair. + +"I'm glad it's you fellows!" he exclaimed. "I thought it was that Wall +Street man coming back. I'm not sure but I'll throw him out if he +does. I'd like to, anyhow." + +"You are all up in the air," said Bob. "Did you have an argument with +Mr. Salper?" + +"Well, he did most of the arguing," said the other, with a faint +smile. "He's so blamed used to having his own way that if any one +doesn't do just as he wants, he gets mad. + +"I suppose I should make allowances for him, because he has plenty to +worry him," went on Thompson. "Some of those Wall Street manipulators +are a ruthless bunch, and when they aren't busy taking money from an +innocent public, they stage some battles between each other. Mr. +Salper has an idea that a bunch of them are trying to swing the market +against him while he's up here, and he seems to think that this is a +public radio station, with nothing to do but send and receive messages +for him all day. I'm working for Uncle Sam, not for him." + +"Oh, well, don't let him get you all stirred up, anyway," said Bob. +"He doesn't mean half of what he says. He was real decent last night +while we were giving our concert." + +"What do you mean, concert?" asked the wireless man. "Are you in the +entertainment game now?" + +"Something like that," answered Bob, grinning, and then he told the +operator about the concert of the previous evening. + +"That's fine," said Thompson heartily, when he had finished. "That was +a good idea, to use a regular aerial instead of the loop. It certainly +catches a lot more." + +"Yes, but the loop is mighty handy, just the same," remarked Joe. +"Especially in a portable set. You can set it up in no time." + +"Oh, it's handy, there's no doubt of that," admitted the young +wireless man. "I wish I had been there for the concert. I heard most +of it here, but it must have been fun to watch the faces of the +audience when you started in." + +"It was," laughed Herb. "I think that some of them imagined we had a +phonograph hidden somewhere because after the concert was over a +number of them looked all around the set as though they were hunting +for something suspicious." + +"Likely enough," agreed Thompson. "Some people are mighty hard to +convince." + +After some further conversation the boys took their leave, promising +to come again for a longer visit. On the way back the chief topic of +discussion was Mr. Salper, and the boys wondered more than once just +what the nature of the trouble was that caused him to haunt the +wireless station and besiege the operator with a flood of messages. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +THE SNOWSLIDE + + +"Well," said Herb, philosophically, "'it is an ill wind that blows +nobody any good.'" + +Bob, who had been shaking a tree for nuts and had shaken down more +snow than anything else, looked at Herb inquiringly. + +"Now what's the poor nut raving about?" he asked slangily of Jimmy and +Joe, who were also engaged in nut gathering. + +"I was just thinking," said Herb, with an attempt at dignity, "how +sorry I am for all those poor sick people in Clintonia." + +"Oh, yes, you were," scoffed Jimmy, who was eating more nuts than he +saved. "You were thinking how lucky we are to be here picking nuts in +the woods instead of slaving away in Clintonia High." + +"Gee, that fellow must be a mind reader!" exclaimed Herb, grinning, +and Bob, coming near, made a pass at him. + +"Say, get busy, old bluffer," he said. "You're getting slower than +Doughnuts here. You haven't got half the nuts that I have." + +"But I'm having twice as much fun," countered Herb, unmoved "A fellow +can't work all the time." + +"I wish I knew what was worrying Mr. Salper," said Joe, suddenly. "I +wonder if that Wall Street bunch, is really out after his money." + +"Gee, he sure does know how to change the subject," murmured Herb, and +Bob threw a nut at him, which he successfully ducked. + +"He seemed rather cut up about it, anyway," said Bob, in answer to +Joe. + +"I wouldn't trust those Wall Street sharpers out of my sight myself," +added Jimmy solemnly. + +"Gee, listen to the financier," gibed Herb. "He's lost so many +millions in Wall Street himself." + +"Not yet," said Jimmy, plaintively. "But wait, my boy, my life is all +before me." + +"Say," cried Joe, "if you two fellows don't look out I'll put you in +my pocket with the other nuts." + +"Mr. Salper seems kind of a nut himself," said Joe, continuing with +his own reflections. "He seems to have a grouch on everything and +everybody." + +"No wonder, with all the worries he's got," said Jimmy, adding +dolefully: "You see the penalties of extreme wealth." + +"One thing you'll never have to worry about," said Herb, and Jimmy +grinned good-naturedly. + +"I'd rather have my sweet disposition," he sighed, "than all of +Salper's wealth." + +"I don't see why you think he's so wealthy," Bob objected. "Everybody +who trades in Wall Street isn't a millionaire, you know." + +"Say, wait a minute!" cried Bob suddenly, with an imperative wave of +his hand. "Did you hear anything?" + +They listened for a moment in breathless silence and it came again, +the call that Bob's sharp ears had first detected. In the distance it +was, surely, but a distinct cry for help, nevertheless. + +"Come on, fellows! We're needed!" cried Bob, and, dropping his bag of +nuts in the snow, he started off at a swift pace in the direction of +the sound. + +The rest of the radio boys needed no second invitation. They started +after Bob, pushing swiftly through the deep snow. + +But as the seconds passed and they heard no further outcry, they +thought that they must have been mistaken or that they had started in +the wrong direction. + +However, as they stopped to consider what to do, the cries began +again, louder this time, a fact which told them they had been on the +right track all along. + +They hurried on again, sometimes plunging into snowdrifts that reached +nearly to their waists, but keeping doggedly on to the rescue. + +It was enough for the radio boys that some one was in trouble. Even +roly-poly Jimmy, puffing painfully, but running gallantly along in the +rear, had but one thought in his head, and that to help whoever needed +help. + +As they came nearer the cries became louder, and they thought they +could distinguish three voices, and one seemed to be that of a woman. + +Another minute they came upon a cleared space and stopped still for a +moment to stare at the amazing scene which met their eyes. + +A woman stood, nearly knee deep in snow, waving her arms wildly, and +even in that moment of astonishment they recognized her as Mrs. +Salper. She was gesticulating toward something in front of her and +calling urgently to the boys to hurry. + +Then the lads saw the cause of her distress. At the foot of a steep +rise of ground, almost a small hill, was all that was to be seen of +two girls. These latter had their heads above the snow that enveloped +them and they were trying desperately to work their arms free of the +icy blanket. From their expressions and from their wild cries for help +it could be seen they were panic-stricken. + +"A snowslide!" Joe, who was standing close to Bob, heard him mutter. +"Those girls had a narrow escape to keep from being buried entirely!" + +The next moment he was dashing off in the direction of the two +prisoners, shouting encouragement to Mrs. Salper. The others were +close at his heels. + +"We'll get you out all right," he called to the frightened girls, who +had stopped their struggling and were looking at him hopefully. "Just +keep still for a moment and save your breath. We'll have you out of +there in a jiffy. + +"Dig, fellows, for all you're worth," he added to the boys, who, as +usual, looked to him for directions. "These girls must be pretty cold +by this time." + +For answer the boys did dig manfully, the imprisoned girls helping +them as much as they could with their numb fingers, and before many +minutes they had the snow cleared away sufficiently to be able to +struggle through it to a spot where it was not so deep. The girls +were, of course, Edna and Ruth Salper, the pretty daughters of the +Wall Street broker. + +Edna and Ruth were trembling with cold and with the shock of their +recent accident, and Mrs. Salper ran to them, putting an arm about +each of them protectingly and pouring out thanks to the embarrassed +boys. + +"That's all right," said Bob, modestly. "We couldn't very well have +done anything else, you know. I hope," he added with a glance at the +shivering girls, "that the girls won't take cold." + +"They will if I don't get them home quickly," said Mrs. Salper, +adding, with a worried frown: "I wish we hadn't come so far from the +house." + +It was then that Joe broke in. + +"I tell you what," he said, eagerly. "It isn't far to Mountain +Rest----" + +"And there's sure to be a fire in the grate up there," Bob finished +for him. + +"And it's a fire that will warm you up in a jiffy," added Herb with +his most friendly smile. + +"If we can only make it," sighed Mrs. Salper. + +The radio boys knew of a short cut from this spot to Mountain Rest and +along this they led the others as swiftly as they were able to travel. +And on the way they learned how it was that the girls had happened to +be in such a predicament. + +"I shouldn't have let them do it." It was Mrs. Salper who told the +story. The two girls were still too shaken from their adventure to say +anything. All they could think of was the comforting shelter of a room +and an open grate fire. + +"They wanted to climb up that little hill to see what was on the other +side of it," the lady went on to explain. "I didn't want them to, for +I saw that the snow was deep. But they were in wild spirits, wouldn't +listen to me, said I didn't need to come if I didn't want to--which I +didn't!--and off they went. + +"When they had nearly reached the top Edna started to fall----" + +"No, it was Ruth, Mother," corrected the girl, showing the first sign +of returning interest. + +"Well, it doesn't matter," said Mrs. Salper, with a sigh. "The result +was the same. One of them clutched at the other and they both toppled +down the hill. Their fall must have loosened a mass of the drifted +snow and it came down on top of them. Heavens!" she shuddered at the +memory. "It seemed as if the whole mountain side were falling on top +of them! I thought they would be completely buried!" + +"Well, we were, almost," said Ruth, chafing her cold hands to bring +the circulation back into them. "Anyway," she added with a stiff +smile, "I feel almost as frozen as if I had been!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +THE MODERN MIRACLE + + +"I bet you're cold," said Bob, sympathetically. "Never mind, we'll +have you warmed up in a jiffy now." + +As a matter of fact, the big hotel was even then looming before them, +and in a moment more they entered its doors, to find to their delight +that a roaring fire was burning in the grate of the big living room. + +The two girls rushed to it joyfully, holding out their chilled hands +to the blaze, snuggling to its warmth like two half-frozen kittens. + +They happened to have the big room all to themselves at that moment, +and, after having drawn chairs up to the fire for Mrs. Salper and the +girls, the boys excused themselves and hurried back to the spot where +they had dropped their bags of nuts when the cry for help had +interrupted them in their occupation. + +"Never do to lose the fruits of our labor," said Herb, grinning, as he +picked up his own particular bag. + +The other boys did likewise, and they were soon hurrying back to the +hotel again, talking excitedly about the rescue of the Salper girls. + +"It's mighty lucky we happened to be near enough to hear the cries for +help," said Joe, soberly. "It would have been pretty hard for them to +have forced their way through those drifts alone, half numbed as they +were." + +"Yes," agreed Bob. "It's pretty nice to think of them warm and snug +before the fire just now." + +"Queer," observed Jimmy as they neared the house, "that we should have +been talking about them just at the time the thing happened." + +"Queer," said Herb patronizingly, "but not half so queer, Doughnuts, +as the modern miracles that happen every day----" + +"Take radio, for instance," finished Bob, and they entered the hotel +laughing. + +They found the two girls recovered from their fright and quite a good +deal happier than they had been a few minutes before. They regarded +the radio boys with interest, and it was clear that the girls and Mrs. +Salper had been talking about them during their absence. + +"You're often called the 'radio boys,' aren't you?" challenged Edna, +as the boys drew chairs up to the fire. + +"Why, I guess so," said Bob, with a smile. "Lots of folks call us +that." + +"Dad was up at the radio station the other day and the operator there +was enthusiastic about you," said Ruth Salper, in her direct way. +"Said that if you kept on the way you were going, you would soon know +more about radio than he does himself." + +"That's mighty nice of him, but I'm afraid he was boosting us too +high," replied Bob, trying hard not to show how pleased he was. + +"That fellow at the station has forgotten more about radio than we +ever knew," added Joe modestly, but in his heart he was as pleased at +the praise as Bob was. It is always nice to receive commendation from +some one who is an authority. + +"You're very modest," teased Edna gaily. "But when dad says anything +nice about anybody he generally means it. He doesn't say nice things +very often----" She caught a glance of reproof from her mother and bit +her lip penitently. + +"You mustn't say unkind things about your father, Edna," said Mrs. +Salper, gently. "You know he is worn to death with business worries. +If we could once succeed in making him forget his responsibilities, he +would be as jolly and fun-loving as he used to be." + +"Yes, dad used to be no end of fun," said Ruth, adding, with a fierce +little frown and a clenching of her fists; "I just wish I could get +hold of whoever's worrying him so. I'd give them something to worry +about for a change." + +Then, seeming to realize that the boys might not be interested in her +personal affairs--though as a matter of fact they were interested, +extremely so--the girl tactfully turned the conversation to something +which she thought might interest them. + +"Could we see your radio set?" she asked, impulsively. "We'd just love +to have you tell us about it. As much as we could understand," she +added, with a smile for the boys. + +Mrs. Salper protested feebly, but so eager were the boys to show off +their set to the girl radio fans that her opposition was overcome +almost at once. + +Then followed a happy hour during which the radio boys talked +learnedly of condensers and amplifiers and different kinds of +receivers until the admiration of the girls mounted almost to awe. + +"My, but it sounds worse than Greek!" cried Edna Salper once, as she +bent absorbedly over the apparatus that worked such miracles and bore +such high-sounding names. "This is the tuning apparatus, isn't it?" +she asked, gingerly touching the wire coil. "It seems almost +impossible that you can tune to any wave length with this thing, just +as the piano tuner can tune the wires of his instrument to the proper +sound vibration." + +"It--the whole thing--seems impossible," added Ruth, while Mrs. Salper +found herself quite as interested as her daughters. + +"Yes, that's the way it seemed to us at first," agreed Bob, his eyes +shining. "When Doctor Dale told us we could make a set for ourselves +we could hardly believe him. But it didn't seem a bit hard once we got +started and learned the hang of it." + +"You mean to say that you made this set yourselves?" asked Mrs. +Salper, with interest. + +"Oh, this is nothing. We've made lots of 'em," said Jimmy proudly, at +which Herb promptly kicked him under the table. The injured Jimmy +glared at his assailant, but the others were too much interested in +the subject to notice him. + +"You see this is a comparatively small set," Bob explained. + +"But we're working on a powerful apparatus now," broke in Joe eagerly. +"And when we have that in working shape we'll be able to send as well +as receive." + +"Well, I think you're just as smart as father said you were," said +Ruth, and at this candid compliment the confused boys thought it time +to change the subject. + +"How about listening in a while?" suggested Bob, struck by a sudden +inspiration. "We ought to be just about in time to catch the afternoon +concert--if there is one. Would you like to find out?" + +"Would we?" cried Edna, enthusiastically. "Indeed we would!" + +"Just try us," added Ruth happily. + +So the boys showed them how to fit the head-phones, not using the +loudspeaker they had made from the phonograph horn, and adjusted the +tuning apparatus to the proper wave length, and the girls answered to +the thrill of catching music magically from the ether just as the boys +had done on that never-to-be-forgotten evening when their first +concert had reached them over the wires of their first receiving set. +Crude it seemed to them now in the light of later improvements, but an +instrument of magic it had been to them that night. + +No wonder that the boys felt a warm and real friendship for the Salper +girls--and Mrs. Salper, too--a friendship that would have been +surprising, considering the shortness of their acquaintance, had it +not been that they were all radio fans, dyed in the wool. + +So quickly did the time fly that Mrs. Salper was amazed and apologetic +when she found how long they had lingered. + +"We must hurry!" she exclaimed, starting toward the door, the girls +reluctantly following. "Your father will surely think we are all lost +in a snowdrift." + +"Which two of us came very near being," added Edna, with a laugh. + +"Don't joke about it," said Ruth, with a shiver. "I must say being +buried in a snowdrift wasn't very pleasant--while it lasted." + +The radio boys insisted upon accompanying the Salpers home, explaining +that they could show them the shortest path. Gaily they started out +and before they had reached the Salper place the friendship which had +begun the evening of the concert with their mutual interest in radio, +became steadily stronger. + +It was plain that, besides being grateful to them for having come to +the help of the girls, Mrs. Salper liked the boys for their own sakes. + +When they reached the house she begged them to come in with her so +that Mr. Salper might have the opportunity of thanking them for their +kindness. + +The boys skillfully avoided accepting this invitation by pointing out +that it was getting late and the path would be hard to find in the +dusk. + +"Thanks ever so much for everything," Ruth Salper called after them as +they started off, and Edna added: + +"We're going to frighten dad into getting us a radio set by +threatening to make one ourselves!" + +"I shouldn't wonder if they could make a set, at that," said Bob +thoughtfully, as they tramped on alone. "They're smart enough." + +"For girls," added Herb, condescendingly. + +Whereupon Jimmy turned and eyed him scornfully. + +"Say, where do you get that stuff?" he jeered. "If those girls +couldn't make a better radio set than you, I'd sure feel sorry for +them." + +"Ha! I'll wash your face for saying that," was the quick answer, and +the next instant Jimmy felt some snow on his ear. Then began a snow +battle between all the boys which lasted until they reached the hotel. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +THRASHING A BULLY + + +After that the boys saw a good deal of Edna and Ruth Salper. The +latter were thoroughly good sports and entered into the fun of the +moment with such enthusiasm that the radio boys declared they were +lots more fun than a good many of the fellows they knew. + +They went nutting together, tramped through the woods, read together +the latest discoveries in the radio field, until the girls became +almost as great enthusiasts as the boys. + +The boys were often asked to visit the Salper home, but it was seldom +that they took advantage of these invitations. + +"It would be pleasant enough," Herb declared, "if only grouchy Mr. +Salper were not always around to put a damper on the sport." + +As a matter of fact, on the rare occasions when they happened to meet, +Mr. Salper hardly uttered a word, but it was this very silence of his +that made the boys uneasy. + +"I feel sometimes," Jimmy remarked, "as if I'd like to put a tack on +his chair, just to see if he'd say 'ouch' when it stuck into him." + +"He'd probably say a sight worse than that," Bob replied, with a +laugh, + +However, they were having too good a time to allow Mr. Salper and his +grouches to interfere much with them. + +They became familiar figures at the sending and receiving station, and +the operator always received them cordially. They often had long and +interesting discussions which were not only delightful to the boys but +extremely helpful as well. + +"It seems," said Jimmy, with a grin, "as if all the radio inventors +were running a race with each other to see who can get the greatest +number of inventions on the market in the shortest space of time." + +"You said something that time, boy," the operator replied ruefully. +"The smart fellows are keeping us dubs on the jump trying to catch up +with them. Not that I intend to put you in the 'dub' class with +myself," he added, with a grin. + +"I only wish we knew half as much about the game as you do," Bob +returned heartily. "I think we'd be mighty well satisfied." + +One day when the radio boys had left Edna and Ruth Salper and were +tramping through the woods alone, they spoke of the operator +admiringly. + +"He sure does know a lot about radio," said Joe. "He must stay up all +night studying." + +"Guess that's what's the matter with him," remarked Bob, soberly. "He +spends too much of his time indoors, boning. He should get out in the +open more." + +"Looks as if a little fresh air might tone him up some," Herb +admitted. "He looks as if a breath of air might blow him away." + +"If I looked as thin as he does, I'd go see a doctor," said Jimmy +emphatically. + +It was a fact that the operator at the station, while looking far from +strong when the boys had first seen him, had grown thinner and thinner +and paler and paler until now he seemed to be positively going into a +decline. + +Because they had a sincere regard for Bert Thompson, the boys had +tried to lure him out into the open, but he had been proof against all +their blandishments. And after a while the boys had given up trying. + +"If he wants to kill himself," Bob had grumbled, "I suppose we'll have +to let him have his own way about it." + +And now at this particular time when the boys were at peace with the +world, something suddenly happened that gave them a rude jolt. + +Talking happily of improvements they expected to apply to their new +radio outfit, they came suddenly upon--Buck Looker and his crowd. + +To say they were surprised would not have half expressed it. They were +dumbfounded and mad--clear through. So here were these rascals, +turning up as they always did, just in time to spoil the fun. + +That Buck and his cronies had been talking about them was evident from +the fact that at the appearance of the radio boys they stopped short +in what they were saying and looked sullenly abashed. And from their +confusion Bob guessed that the meeting was as much a surprise to the +"gang" as it was to themselves. + +The boys would have gone on without speaking, hoping to avoid trouble +if it was possible, but Buck hailed them boisterously. + +"Say, what are you guys doing here?" he asked, sneeringly, thrusting +himself almost directly in front of Bob, so that the latter would be +forced to step aside in order to pass him. + +"That's what I'd like to ask you," returned Bob, feeling himself grow +hot all over. "Get out of my way, Buck. You're cramping the scenery." + +"Aw, what's your awful rush?" asked Buck, refusing to move, while Carl +Lutz and Terry Mooney sidled over to the bully, keeping a wary eye on +Bob's right fist, nevertheless. + +"Say, get out of here, Buck Looker, and get quick!" It was Joe who +spoke this time, and any one not as stupid as Buck Looker would have +known it was time to do as he was told. + +But because of the fire that had burned to the ground his father's +disreputable cottage in the woods and which he and his followers had +blamed upon the radio boys, Buck Looker thought himself safe in +taunting the latter as much as he wished. He assumed that they would +not dare resent anything he said or did, for fear he would make public +the matter of the fire and accuse them openly. + +It was a chance of a lifetime for Buck--or so he thought--and he was +determined not to over-look it. So his manner became more insulting +than ever and his face took on a wider grin as his glance shifted from +Bob to Joe. + +"So you're in a hurry, too, are you?" he sneered. "Going to set some +more houses on fire, eh?" + +He turned to his cronies with a grin and they piped up together as if +by a prearranged signal: + +"Firebrands!" + +This undeserved insult was more than the radio boys could stand, and +all stepped forward with clenched fists. + +"You take that back, Buck Looker!" cried Joe, with flashing eyes. + +"Take back nothing!" answered the bully. + +"Yes, you will!" broke in Bob, and caught Buck by the arm. + +At once the bully aimed a savage blow at Bob's head. But the latter +ducked, and an instant later his clenched fist landed upon Buck's chin +with such weight that the bully was sent over backward into the snow. + +At the instant when Buck made his attack on Bob, Terry Mooney tried to +hit Joe with a stick he carried. Joe promptly caught hold of the +stick, and, putting out his foot, sent Terry backward into a +snowdrift. Seeing this, Carl Lutz started to run away, but both Herb +and Jimmy went after him and knocked him flat. + +"You let me alone! I didn't do anything!" blubbered Carl, who was a +thorough coward. + +"You can't call me a firebrand," answered Herb, and while fat Jimmy +sat on the luckless Carl, Herb rammed some snow into his ear and down +his neck. + +While this was going on both Buck and Terry had scrambled to their +feet, and then began a fierce fight between that pair and Bob and Joe. +Blows were freely exchanged, but soon the radio boys had the better of +it, and when Terry's lip was bleeding and swelling rapidly, and Buck +had received a crack in the left eye and it was also swelling, all +three of the cronies were only too glad to back away. + +"Have you had enough?" demanded Bob, pantingly. + +"If you haven't, we'll give you some more," added Joe. + +"You just wait! We'll get square with you some other time," muttered +Buck. And thereupon he and his cronies lost no time in sneaking away +into the woods. + +"Of all the mean fellows that ever lived!" cried Herb. + +"I guess they'll leave us alone--for a while, anyway," came from Joe, +as he felt of his shoulder where he had received a blow. + +"I wonder what those fellows are doing around here, anyway," said Bob +thoughtfully. "Do you suppose they're putting up at the Mountain Rest +Hotel, too?" + +"More than likely," answered Joe, gloomily. "Perhaps they've been +driven out of Clintonia, too, on account of the epidemic. I heard +quite a number of the other young folks were getting out. The whole +town is pretty well scared." + +"They are sure trying their best to make trouble for us," added Jimmy. + +"That fire in the woods was just nuts for them," said Bob, with a +frown. "They've been trying for a long time to get something on us, +and now they think they've got it. They think we're afraid to beat 'em +up now as they deserve, for fear they'll tell everybody we set that +old shack on fire." + +"It was a funny thing," remarked Joe, musingly, "how that fire +started, anyway." + +"Oh, what's the use of worrying?" added Herb, carelessly. "I reckon +the memory of that licking will keep Buck quiet for a while. Say, that +was a fine piece of work you did, Bob! The memory lingers." + +Bob grinned. + +"How about yourselves?" he asked, adding, with a gleam in his eyes: "I +didn't notice Terry Mooney and Carl Lutz looking very happy!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +A NEST OF CONSPIRATORS + + +The radio boys saw Buck Looker often--all too often--in the days that +followed. As the boys had feared, Buck and his crowd were staying at +the Mountain Rest Hotel, and it was almost impossible to help +encountering them. + +Several times there were arguments which almost resulted in blows, but +Buck always managed to sneak off at the critical moment, leaving the +boys to fume helplessly. + +"Wish we could find out how that shack of theirs caught fire," Joe +grumbled on one of these occasions. "Then we could stop their mouths +on that firebrand question once and for all." + +"Wouldn't make any difference," remarked Herb gloomily. "If they +couldn't make trouble for us on that score, they'd think up something +else." + +But about this time something happened that took the minds of the +radio boys from Buck Looker and his trouble making. + +One day, as they were tramping through the woods in the still deep +snow, they came upon a little decrepit-looking one-room shack, +standing dejectedly within a circle of skeleton trees. + +They had wandered further than usual from camp in exploring the +surrounding country and had come upon the tiny cabin unexpectedly. +Jimmy was about to utter a gleeful shout at sight of the +interesting-looking place when Bob clapped a warning hand over his +mouth. + +"Keep still," he whispered sharply. "I hear voices in there." + +"Well, what if you do?" demanded Joe, but he kept his voice cautiously +lowered just the same. "Probably some harmless dubs----" + +"Like ourselves," finished Jimmy, with a grin, "seeking shelter from +the bitter weather." + +"Well, whoever they are, they sure are mad about something," said Bob, +hardly knowing why he should be so excited. + +The voices inside that one-room shack had been raised in altercation, +but now, as the boys listened, somebody evidently cautioned silence, +for once more the tones were lowered almost to a whisper. + +"There's something mysterious about this," said Bob, his eyes gleaming +joyfully. "I vote we look into it." + +"Right-o," agreed Joe, following the leader as Bob started softly +toward the shack. + +What they expected to find they had no idea. But it was an understood, +though unspoken, rule with the radio boys never to pass by anything +that looked in the least mysterious. And certainly this queer little +shack in the woods bore all the air of mystery. + +There was one small window near where they were standing and the four +boys crowded up to this, jostling each other in the attempt to be the +first to see through the dingy pane. + +"Hey!" whispered Jimmy in anguish, as Joe's foot clamped firmly down +upon his. "Quit parking on my toe, will you? There's lots of room on +the ground." + +Joe snickered derisively and that small sound came near to proving +their undoing. For inside the cabin it happened that for a moment +every one had stopped talking and in the silence Joe's laugh was +distinctly audible. + +"Some one's getting in on this," they heard one of the voices say, as +though its owner were nervous, yet was trying his best to hide his +uneasiness. "Let's take a look around, boys. You never can be too +sure." + +The radio boys looked at each other in consternation. There was no +time to get away, even if they had wanted to. And now that they were +convinced there was crooked work going on in the shack, they certainly +did not want to leave. + +Bob flattened himself against the wall and motioned to his chums to do +likewise. If the fellows found them and wanted to put up a fight, +"well, they'd get their money's worth, anyway." + +But it so happened that the lads were not discovered. The door of the +shack was on the opposite side from them, and either the men were too +lazy to search carefully or they were too confident of the obscurity +of their meeting place. At any rate, they went to the door, looked +around, and, finding no one within sight, evidently decided that they +had been mistaken in thinking they had heard a suspicious noise and +reentered the shack without searching further. + +"You're crazy, Mohun," the boys heard one of them remark, in an +irritable voice. "You're letting your imagination--and your +nerves--run away with you." + +"Well, this deal is enough to get on anybody's nerves," was the +grumbled reply, evidently from the person addressed as Mohun. "If we +don't put it across pretty quick I'm going to quit. I've told you too +much delay would be fatal." + +The boys glanced at each other, and the relief they had felt at not +being discovered was closely followed by huge excitement as they +became more and more certain that they were on the verge of making an +important discovery. + +They crowded closer to the window though, mindful of how close they +had come to discovery, they were careful to make not the slightest +sound. + +Bob, who was closest to the window, could, by exercising the greatest +caution, peer into the shadows of the room. He put out his hand as a +warning to Joe, who was crowding him closely. + +"Don't push," he said, in the merest whisper. "I have a notion this is +going to be good." + +So had the other boys, but they were mad clean through at the fate +that prevented their getting a glimpse into the tumbled-down shanty. +However, they held back, knowing that if they were too eager they +would spoil everything. Discovery then would mean that they would +never hear the secret these men were about to disclose. + +The old shack had evidently once been lived in, for it was fitted up +with furniture of a crude sort. Along one side of the room ran two +long bunks, one above the other, and on the walls were some old +dilapidated-looking pictures, evidently cut out of magazines or news +periodicals. + +There was a three-legged, rickety table in the center of the room, and +about this the conspirators--for such they were--were gathered. Two of +the men had chairs, patently home-made, for seats, while the third, +who sat facing Bob, had merely an empty wooden box turned on end. + +It was this last fellow who was now speaking and who had been +addressed by the name of Mohun. He was short and of fair complexion, +with protruding, horsey teeth that stuck out disagreeably over his +lip. + +Another of the trio was a giant of a fellow, tall, dark and +heavy-browed, while the third, who sat with his back to Bob, was of +slighter build, but nearly as tall. + +Mohun seemed to be the leader of the party, for now he was leaning +across the rickety table, talking earnestly and emphasizing his +remarks with blows of his fist upon it. + +"I tell you, Merriweather," he said, addressing the giant, "this is +our time to act. You are merely pussy-footing when you ask delay. I am +convinced that delay means suicide." + +Jimmy, catching the last word, gasped involuntarily and Bob nudged him +warningly. + +"Keep still," he hissed. "This sure is going to be good!" + +The two other men looked uncertain but the fellow called Mohun was +pushing the point home. + +"This is our chance," he cried vehemently. "Salper is out of the way +for the present, but we never know when he may take the notion to go +back to the old job. They say he is getting mighty restive already." + +At the mention of Mr. Salper's name Bob fell back in his amazement and +landed on Joe's foot, whereupon the latter emitted a squeak of pain +that he immediately stifled. + +"Did you hear that?" demanded Bob in an excited whisper, without a +thought for poor Joe's foot. "They're talking about Mr. Salper." + +Eagerly he turned back to the window while Herb whispered in an awed +tone: + +"Maybe they're going to murder the old fellow." + +"Say, keep still, can't you?" said Bob impatiently, as he strained his +ears to catch the lowered tones of the three men. + +Herb subsided, and the four of them waited with bated breath to find +out what these three conspirators had to do with Gilbert Salper. + +"Maybe you're right, Mohun," the tall man with the craggy brows +answered reluctantly. "But I can't help thinking that to strike now is +a poor move." + +"In two or three weeks we'll have everything just as we want it," +added the man who sat with his back to Bob. "We'll have a sure thing +then, while now----" + +The man called Mohun threw up his hands in a gesture of despair. + +"Pussy-footing again!" he cried disgustedly. "What kind of gamblers +are you, anyway, to wait until you have a sure thing before you test +your luck? Don't you know that the big deals down on the Street that +have been successful have been put through because the fellows doing +it had nerve?" + +"Yes, but not many of the deals have been as big or as important as +this," said the giant quietly. + +"All the more reason to strike quickly," argued Mohun, with heat, +adding in a lowered tone: "I tell you this absence of Salper from Wall +Street is the chance of a lifetime. It's the thing we've been waiting +for. With him on the Street we haven't a chance for our lives. With +him away, we have everything in our own hands. Now it's up to you +whether we make the most of our luck, or throw it in the rubbish +heap." + +"But Salper is up here for an indefinite length of time," argued the +man with his back to Bob. "It is said he will stay at least a month, +maybe two. And a week--two at the outside--is all we need to make sure +of relieving him of some of his ill-gotten wealth." + +The man laughed noisily at this poor attempt at humor, and Mohun +glanced nervously about him. + +"Better look out," he said, peevishly. "You never can tell who's +listening. They say the trees have ears around this way." + +"Your nerves are getting the best of you, I think," cried the big man. +"Just because you've got cold feet is no reason why we should take the +chance of losing out on the biggest deal we've had the chance of +handling for many a day. Get a good sleep, man, and you'll think the +way we do, tomorrow." + +For a moment it seemed as though Mohun were about to spring upon the +big man and Bob held his breath, expecting a struggle. Mohun's face +turned a brick red and his lips drew back from his protruding upper +teeth as though in a snarl. His hands clenched, he took a step toward +the bigger man who had half risen from his chair. + +"Then I'll tell you one thing, you pussy-footers!" he cried furiously. +"If this deal isn't pulled through by the end of a week and if by that +time we haven't our hands on a good chunk of Salper's money, then I'm +through. Do you hear that? I quit!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +ON GUARD + + +The radio boys had heard enough. Silently they tiptoed from their +vantage point, putting off the tremendous desire to exclaim about what +they had heard until they had put a good distance between themselves +and the shack. + +Then they overflowed with wonder and excitement. + +"Say, wait till we spring this news on Mr. Salper!" cried Herb. "The +man will near go off his head." + +"Gosh, you couldn't blame him," said Joe, in an awed tone. "I wouldn't +like to have those three fellows after my hard-earned cash myself." + +"Then he was right when he thought there was somebody after his +money," said Bob, striding along so swiftly in his excitement that +poor Jimmy had hard work to keep up with him. "We thought he was kind +of crazy, but I guess he knew what he was talking about all the time." + +"But I say, you got all the best of it, Bob," said Herb. "Why couldn't +you let the rest of us get a glimpse of some honest-to-goodness +sharpers?" + +"They weren't much to look at," said Bob, with a frown. "That man they +called Mohun was one of the ugliest scoundrels I've ever seen." + +"Was he any worse than Cassey?" asked Jimmy, curiously. + +"If he was he must have been going some," added Herb, with conviction. + +"I guess nobody could be much worse than Cassey," said Bob, frowning +at the memory of the stuttering scoundrel's evil acts. "But he's just +as bad. When he jumped at that big fellow with the bushy eyebrows I +thought he was going to bite him. He has teeth that stick away out +over his under lip." + +"Must be a beauty," commented Herb. + +"I say," said poor Jimmy, fairly running in his effort to keep up with +the other boys, "you're not going toward the hotel, Bob. May I ask +where you are going?" + +"Why, Doughnuts, you shouldn't have to ask," broke in Joe, before Bob +could respond. "Don't you know there is only one place where we could +be going after hearing such rotten news as we've just heard?" + +"We're going to the Salpers, of course," finished Herb, with a +condescending air that irritated the plump and puffing Jimmy. + +"Well, you needn't be so fresh about it," he grumbled, rubbing his +empty stomach ruefully. "It's nearly dark----" + +"And it's dinner time," added Joe, with a grin. "How well we know you, +Doughnuts." + +"Well," grumbled Jimmy, grinning reluctantly, "I don't see why the +Salpers can't wait till we can get something to eat." + +"It won't take us long," said Bob, who had been thinking hard as they +tramped along. "We'll just stop in and tell them what we've heard and +then go on. I don't suppose there is anything that we can do." + +"I guess Mr. Salper will do all that's necessary when he finds his +money threatened," said Joe significantly. + +"I reckon he's had a hunch that something of this kind has been going +on for a long time--in fact, he as much as told us so," said Bob. "But +I guess these rascals were so clever he couldn't put his finger on +them." + +"I wonder what kind of deal they were talking about," mused Herb. + +"It was a crooked one, anyway," said Bob, decidedly. "All you had to +do was to look at them to know that." + +The little shack in the woods was a long way from the Salper place, +and so, in spite of their hurry, the boys did not reach it until just +on the edge of dark. + +The entire family was gathered in the living room of the Salper +cottage, even Mr. Salper himself, and the boys threw their bomb right +into the midst of them. + +Mr. Salper had seemed inclined, as he usually did, to draw apart by +himself, but at the very beginning of the boys' story, he evinced an +almost fierce interest. + +He questioned them minutely while the girls and Mrs. Salper listened +wonderingly. + +"You said the name of one of the men was Mohun?" he asked, throwing +away the cigar he had been smoking and bending earnestly toward Bob. +"What did he look like?" + +The disagreeable impression the man had made upon him was still so +vivid that Bob had no trouble at all in giving a graphic description +of the fellow. + +Mr. Salper's face grew blacker and blacker as he listened and he +pulled out another cigar, biting off the end of it viciously. + +"That's the fellow I've been suspecting all along," he said, finally. +"Slick fellow, that Mohun. Whenever a man gets too eager to do things +for you I've learned to suspect him. Yet, closely as I've watched this +man, I haven't been able to get a thing on him. As far as we could +find out, he was perfectly square. But, by Jove, this puts an entirely +new face on things." + +He paused for a moment, puffing hard on his cigar while the others all +watched him anxiously. The ill humor which had been hanging over him +for so long seemed magically to have vanished. Now that his suspicions +had been so unexpectedly justified, bringing with them the need for +action, the broker was a different man, entirely. His brow had cleared +and there was an eager light in his keen eyes. + +"You fellows have done me the greatest of possible services," he said, +turning to the radio boys--he had forgotten up to that time to thank +them for what they had done. "If you could know what it means to me to +have this information----" + +He broke off, running his hand excitedly through his hair, his eyes +gazing unseeingly out of the window. + +"I must act and act quickly," he muttered, after a minute. "There is +surely no time to lose. You said this man Mohun was urging haste?" he +added, turning to Bob. + +The latter nodded. "Said he'd quit if they didn't get a move on, or +words to that effect," he told his questioner, and Mr. Salper smiled a +preoccupied smile in response. + +"Then Mohun will get what he wants. He has a way of getting what he +wants," he said, again with that air of speaking to himself. "I'm glad +to know it's Mohun--very glad!" + +Although Bob had given as good a description as was possible of the +other two men who had been in the shack with Mohun, Mr. Salper did not +recognize them. + +"Probably a couple of dark horses," he said, and dismissed the +subject. Evidently, to him, Mohun was the most important of the +rascals and the one it was necessary to deal with at once. + +After repeated thanks from Mr. Salper and outspoken gratitude on the +part of Mrs. Salper and the girls, the boys managed to get away. + +They hurried on toward the Mountain Rest Hotel, talking excitedly of +what had happened. + +"That was sure just dumb luck," remarked Joe as he sniffed of the cold +brisk air and began to realize that he was very hungry. "Our happening +on that little shack just as we did," he added in response to an +enquiring look from Bob. + +"You bet," agreed Herb. "That was the time our luck was running +strong. It will do me good if those scoundrels get come up with, +especially the one with the big teeth." + +"Oh, stop talking and hurry up," begged Jimmy, who, in his eagerness +to get back to the hotel and dinner, was actually leading the others. +"It seems ten miles to the house when your poor old system is crying +aloud for grub." + +They laughed at him but followed his example just the same, for they +had been tramping many hours and their appetites were never of the +uncertain variety. + +But just before they reached the welcome lights of the cottage they +realized to their surprise that it was snowing again. So fast were the +flakes coming that by the time they reached the door of the hotel they +were well powdered with them. + +"Hooray!" shouted Herb. "We sure are getting our money's worth of snow +this winter." + +"You bet," agreed Bob, adding happily: "And this one looks like a +'lallapaloosa.'" + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +BROKEN WIRES + + +True to Bob's prediction, the snowstorm proved to be a fierce one even +for this season of unusual snows, and when the boys awoke the next +morning they found that the ground had taken on an extra covering and +the branches of the trees were weighted down with the heavy fall. + +"Say, fellows, look what's here!" cried Joe as he roused his mates, +sleepy-eyed from their comfortable beds. "Old Jack Frost sure was busy +last night." + +"Guess he thinks it's Thanksgiving," Bob agreed as he hurried into his +clothes, keeping one eye on the frosty landscape and fairly aching to +make part of it. "Hurry up, fellows, let's go out and have a snow +fight." + +"You're on," agreed Joe, and then began the race to see who would get +from their cottage to the hotel and to the breakfast table first. + +They arrived there--at the breakfast table, that is--at one and the +same time and ate as ravenously as though they had not broken their +fast in a week. Mr. and Mrs. Layton watched them and smiled, wishing +that they might once more eat with such lusty appetites. + +Before the boys had finished breakfast, it had begun to snow again, +making the landscape appear more than ever blizzardy and bleak. +Eagerly the boys buttoned up heavy sweaters, prepared to fight the +storm to a finish. + +It seemed that they were not the only ones whom the storm had lured +forth. There were a number of people gathered in front of the hotel +and, since they seemed rather excited about something, three of the +boys joined them to find out what the fuss was all about, Jimmy +remaining behind for the time being to take a nail from his shoe. + +"The telegraph wires are all down," said a man in response to Bob's +question. "There's a man been raving around here like a crazy man, +declaring he has to send a telegram. Nobody can seem to make him +understand that since the wires are all down such a thing is +impossible." + +"He might telephone," Joe suggested, but the man who had been their +informant took him up quickly. + +"They're down too," he said. "We're as marooned here, as far as any +communication with the outside world is concerned, as though we were +stranded on an island in the midst of the ocean. This storm has done +considerable damage." + +"I should say so," remarked Joe, as the gentleman turned to some one +else and the boys started on a tour of the place to look over the +prospect. "I'll call it some damage to knock down both telephone and +telegraph wires at one fell swoop." + +"That talk about our being just as badly off for communication with +the outside world as though we were on an island isn't quite correct," +observed Herb. "That fellow seemed to forget all about trains." + +"I suppose he meant quick communication," said Bob. "We could send a +message by wire in an hour or less, while it would take two or three +times that time to send the same message by rail." + +"That's so," agreed Herb, staring up at the wires which had fallen +beneath their weight of snow. "I'd hate to _have_ to get a message +through for any reason just now. But look," he added, pointing to the +hotel. "Our aerials are still up anyway." + +"I wonder who the fellow was who was so anxious to telegraph," said +Joe, after a few minutes. "He must think himself in bad luck." + +Bob brought his gaze from the damaged wires and stared at the boys, +and at Jimmy who just then came puffing up. + +"Say, I bet that was Mr. Salper," Bob said. "Don't you remember last +night that he said he must get a message through to his broker first +thing in the morning?" + +"By Jove, the storm knocked it clear out of my head!" exclaimed Joe. +"Say, I feel sorry for him, all right." + +"Wish we could help him some way," said Herb anxiously. "It would +never do to let that fellow Mohun and his pals get off with the filthy +lucre just when we thought we'd double-crossed them so nicely." + +"I guess that's where Mr. Salper would agree with you," said Jimmy, +with a grin. "Especially since the filthy lucre belongs to him." + +They walked on in silence for a few moments, chagrined at the thought +that the storm had played so into the hands of Mr. Salper's enemies. + +They had learned from Mr. Salper the night before that Mohun of the +protruding teeth was not the kind of man to let a golden opportunity +pass. He would rush the "deal" through while Salper was out of town, +and, from the latter's impatience, they had gathered that the next few +hours would, in all probability, be the crucial time. + +"Burr-r-r!" cried Jimmy suddenly, wrapping his arms as far as they +would go about his chubby body and shivering with the cold. "This +weather sure does make a fellow wish for a fur overcoat. The +thermometer must have gone down twenty degrees over night." + +"Hear who's talking!" scoffed Herb. "With all that fat on your bones, +Doughnuts, you haven't a chance in the world of feeling cold." + +"I suppose you know more than I do about it--not being me," retorted +Jimmy, scathingly. "I'd just like you to feel the way I do; that's +all." + +"Well, it isn't what you might call unpleasantly hot," observed Bob. +"I must say I'm not sweltering, myself." + +"Guess it isn't much colder than this up at the North Pole," agreed +Joe, as he turned his sweater collar up higher about his ears. "Might +as well rig up as an Eskimo and be done with it." + +"Reminds me of that Norwegian, Amundsen," said Bob. "He sure intends +to discover the North Pole with all the fancy trimmings, this time." + +"What do you mean?" asked Herb, with interest. + +"Do you mean to say you haven't read about it?" demanded Jimmy, +indulgently. "Why, he's the fellow who is going to have his ship all +dressed up with wireless so that when he smashes his ship against the +North Pole he can let everybody know about it." + +"It's a great idea, I call it," said Joe, enthusiastically. "Up to +this time, explorers haven't had any way of communicating with the +outside world, and so if they got in trouble they just had to get out +of it the best way they could or die in the attempt." + +"While now," Bob took him up eagerly, "his wireless messages will be +picked up by hundreds of stations all over the world and in case of +need ships and teams of huskies and even aeroplanes can be rushed to +his rescue." + +"Exploring de luxe," murmured Herb, with a comical look. "Pretty soon +there won't be any such thing as adventure because there won't be any +danger. We'll have radio to watch over us and keep us from all harm." + +"It's all right for you to talk that way," said Jimmy. "But I bet if +you were one of these explorer chaps you'd be mighty glad to have +something watch over you and help you out of a tight fix." + +"Yes, I guess those fellows need all the help they can get," agreed +Bob, soberly. "It isn't any joke to be away out there with hundreds of +miles of ice and water between them and civilization." + +"They say even the sledges are to be equipped with radio," Joe broke +in. "So that they can keep in touch with the ship all the time and +through the medium of the powerful sending set aboard the boat the +ship itself can be kept in constant touch with the outside world." + +"There are planes too, equipped with radio," added Bob. "And they say +each plane is outfitted with skids so that it can land safely on the +ice." + +"I should think there would be danger in that," remarked Jimmy, +rubbing his hands vigorously to set the blood circulating again. "They +say the ice is awfully rough and bumpy and spattered with small hills +of ice. I should think a pilot would have a jolly time trying to make +a landing under those conditions." + +"They intend to cut out the ice about the ship so as to make landing +possible," explained Bob. "And in the other places the skids help them +to make a sure landing. Say, wouldn't I like to make one of that +expedition!" he added, with enthusiasm. + +"I wonder how long they expect this expedition to take," said Herb. +The idea of exploring the arctic with radio as a companion was a +fascinating one to him and at that moment he would have made one of +Amundsen's hardy crew, if such a thing were possible, with the +greatest joy. + +"They expect it will take them five years, maybe six." It was Bob who +answered the question. "Their idea is to travel as far as possible +north before the ice gets thick. Then when the floes close in about +them they will drift with the ice over the pole--or, at least, that's +what they hope to do." + +"What gets me," said Jimmy plaintively, "is how they are going to know +when they get to the pole anyway." + +Herb made a pass at him which the fat boy nimbly avoided. + +"Why, you poor fish," said the former witheringly, "you sure will be a +full-sized nut if you ever live to grow up. I suppose if you got to +the North Pole you'd expect to see a clothes pole with the clothes +line wrapped around it, ready for use." + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +A SUDDEN INSPIRATION + + +Unconsciously their feet had carried the radio boys in the direction +of the radio station and now they were surprised to find themselves +confronted by the building itself. + +"We've come some way," Herb began with a chuckle, but Bob cut him +short excitedly. + +"Look!" he cried. "Didn't I tell you that radio was the best ever? +Just cast your eye on that aerial. You don't see that trailing on the +ground, do you?" + +For a moment the other radio boys failed to grasp the significance of +his words. Then they let out a great shout of triumph. For what Bob +had said was true. Where other means of communication with the outside +world failed, radio stood firm. + +The aerial was there, towering as serenely against the slaty sky as +though there was no such thing as a snowstorm. The great marvel of +radio! For no wires, other than the antenna, were needed to carry its +messages to the farthermost parts of the world! + +For a moment the boys were awed as the real significance of the modern +miracle was borne home to them. It was magnificent, it was inspiring +merely to have the privilege of living in such an age. + +"Well, Mr. Salper doesn't need to worry," said Joe, at last. "There's +always radio on the job if he wants to get a quick message through to +New York." + +"It's queer he didn't think of it," agreed Bob, adding, as the intense +cold struck still more deeply into his bones: "Come on in, fellows. +I'd like to see what the operator has to say to all this excitement." + +"You bet," said Jimmy, adding fervently: "And it will give us a chance +to thaw out." + +When the boys reached the room which had become so familiar to them, +they found that here too, the old regime had been interrupted. Several +men were gathered in the far corner of the room, talking earnestly, +and the long table where the operator could be seen daily bending +earnestly over his beloved apparatus was vacant. The operator himself +was nowhere to be seen. + +Sensing something unusual, the boys came forward hesitantly. At sight +of them one of the men detached himself from the group of his +companions and came quickly over to them. The boys did not know his +name, but his face was familiar to them. + +"A most unfortunate thing has happened," burst out this man nervously, +without even an attempt at a preface. "The operator here has been +taken very ill with a fever and we are at a loss to find any one who +can take his place in this emergency." + +The modesty of the radio boys was such that at that moment no thought +of the possibility of their being able to take the experienced +operator's place entered their heads. They were earnestly sorry for +the misfortune which had overtaken their friend, and they told the man +so. It seemed to them that the latter was rather disappointed about +something, and he listened to their words of sympathy absently. After +a moment he left them and rejoined his companions at the other end of +the room. + +"Say, that's tough luck," said Jimmy, his round face comically long. +"I knew that fellow would get into trouble if he didn't take more +exercise." + +Bob fumbled with the familiar apparatus on the table, his face +troubled. + +"If he's out of his head with fever, he must be pretty sick," he +muttered, as though talking to himself. "And that means that he won't +be able to attend to radio for a good long time to come." + +"And with telegraph and telephone wires all down, that's pretty much +of a calamity," added Joe, his eyes meeting Bob's with a look of +understanding. + +"Say!" cried Herb, suddenly seeing what they were driving at, "that +knocks out Mr. Salper's last chance of getting even with those +crooks." + +"Yes," said Bob, soberly, "I guess the game's up, as far as he's +concerned." + +"Let's go over to the hotel and inquire for the sick man," Joe +suggested, adding hopefully, "maybe he isn't as sick as they make +out." + +The operator had a room at the hotel, and the boys had been there once +or twice to talk over points on radio with him and so they knew +exactly where to go. + +However, if they had treasured any hope that Bert Thompson's sickness +had been exaggerated, they were promptly undeceived. No one was +allowed to speak to him, the nurse at the hotel told them, adding, in +her briskly professional manner, that it would be no use to speak to +him anyway, since he was delirious and recognized nobody. + +But before they went, softened by their real concern, she said, quite +kindly, that as soon as the patient was able to receive visitors at +all she would let them know. + +They thanked her and went out into the freezing air again. The snow +had stopped and the wind had died down completely but in the +atmosphere was a deadly chill, a biting cold that seemed to penetrate +to their very marrow. + +"Suppose we go to the Salpers," Bob suggested. "Mrs. Salper and the +girls may need help, for I imagine Mr. Salper isn't in a very pleasant +mood." + +"I wonder," said Joe, as with common consent they turned in the +direction of the Salper home, "if Mr. Salper has heard yet that even +the radio is out of business." + +"Give it up," said Herb, while Jimmy added, with a grin: "I'd hate to +be the one to break the news to him." + +But, as it happened, that was just what they had to do. They saw Mr. +Salper coming and tried to pretend that they did not, but he would +have none of it. + +He made for them directly, with a scowl on his face as fierce as if +they had been the cause of all his trouble. + +"This is a fine business, isn't it?" he asked, waving his hand in the +direction of the snow-weighted wires. "No telegraph, no +telephone--only the radio left. I'm on my way to the station to try to +get the message through, though that operator is a stubborn young +donkey and has before this refused to send messages for me." + +Herb and Jimmy made frantic motions to Bob to keep quiet, for they saw +that he was about to tell the news. And Bob did. + +"I'm sorry, Mr. Salper," he said quietly. "But the operator at the +wireless station has become suddenly very ill and there's no one there +to operate the apparatus." + +For a moment Mr. Salper simply glared while the news sank home. Then +he gazed wildly about him as though to escape from his own worrisome +thoughts. Then the fierce scowl returned to his face and he made an +angry motion toward the boys. + +"The operator sick!" he muttered. "And not a doctor up here!" + +The boys started and looked at him queerly. + +"Do you need a doctor?" asked Bob quickly, thinking immediately of +Mrs. Salper and the girls. "Is some one sick?" + +"Yes," snapped Mr. Salper. "My wife is sick, very sick. And if I can't +get any sort of word through, even by radio----" He paused and his +mouth looked as though he were grinding his teeth. + +He turned back toward his house, and the boys accompanied him with +some vague idea of at least offering their sympathy, even if they +could not do anything to help. + +They found Edna and Ruth nearly frantic with fright. + +"Mother is dreadfully ill," said Edna, between sobs. "Her hands and +face are burning up and she talks queerly. I'm afraid it's pneumonia, +and if she doesn't get a doctor pretty quick she'll d-die!" And with a +sob she fled into the room where the sick woman lay. + +The boys felt awkward, and, since there was nothing they could do to +help, deeply concerned over the trouble of these friends of theirs. + +"There's some good in Mr. Salper, anyway," said Joe, as they tramped +along. "He was so worried over Mrs. Salper that he didn't mention +those Wall Street scoundrels." + +"I reckon it's worrying him just the same," said Jimmy. + +"If only there was something we could do----" began Bob, then stopped +short, a great idea leaping to his eyes. "Say, fellows, what's the +matter with our sending that message?" + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +PUTTING IT THROUGH + + +The boys stared at him for a moment as though he had gone suddenly +crazy. Then the light of adventure dawned in their eyes, and they +grinned joyously. + +"Say, old boy," said Joe in an awed voice, "that sure is some swell +idea. But do you think we could swing it? We know a lot about +receiving, but when it comes to sending----" + +"We're a bunch of nuts," finished Jimmy, decidedly. + +"Maybe," retorted Bob. "But at this time, even a bunch of nuts might +be better than nothing." + +"We've been studying the code," said Joe thoughtfully. "We might be +able to handle it all right. It isn't the first time, if we're not +experts. Of course we can do it." + +"But not for old Salper," said Herb. "He's so impatient he'd make us +forget in five minutes everything we ever knew." + +"Maybe," said Bob again, adding, stoutly: "But I'm game to make a try +at it anyway. There's no one else to do it, and Mr. Salper stands to +lose his wife and a lot of money besides if some one doesn't help him +out." + +"Well, let's make him the proposition," suggested Joe, pausing and +looking back at the Salper house. "I'm with Bob in this thing." + +"So say we all of us," sang Herb cheerily, as they turned back. + +"So long as Bob's the goat," finished Jimmy. + +They found Mr. Salper in the living room of the bungalow, savagely +smoking a cigar. He scarcely looked at the boys when the girls let +them in, and Bob was forced to speak his name before he gave them his +attention. + +"Well, what is it?" he said gruffly, his tone adding plainly: "What +are you doing here anyway? I wish you'd get out." + +The tone made Bob mad, as it did the other boys, and when he spoke his +own tone was not as pleasant as usual. + +"We've decided to try to help you out, if we can, Mr. Salper," he +said, and the man looked at him with a mixture of surprise and +incredulity. + +"In what way?" he asked, in the same curt tone. + +"We know something about sending and receiving messages by radio," Bob +went on, getting madder and madder. "And we thought maybe we might get +a message through for you to a doctor and to your brokers, as well. Of +course," he added, modestly, "we haven't had very much experience----" + +Bob was too modest to say anything about how he had once sent messages +to some ships at sea, (as related in detail in "The Radio Boys at +Ocean Point,") and how he had tried to send on other occasions. + +"Experience be hanged!" cried Mr. Salper, so suddenly that the boys +jumped. "You mean to tell me you can operate that radio contraption?" + +"I think so," said Bob, still modestly. "We haven't done much along +that end of it----" + +"You'll do," cried Mr. Salper, while Edna and Ruth stared at him with +tear-reddened eyes. "Are you ready to go with me right away to the +station?" + +The boys nodded and the older man shrugged into his great coat, +reaching quickly for his cap. + +"Take care of your mother," he said to the girls. "I'll stop on my way +over to the hotel and send a nurse over for her. I hear there are two +of them there. Don't see why the physician there didn't send some one +to take his place if he had to leave." + +In a moment the radio boys found themselves once more in the freezing +air of the out-of-doors, being hurried along by the erratic Mr. +Salper. + +Poor Jimmy suffered on that forced march. Although he uttered no word +of protest, his face was purple and his breath came in little puffing +gasps before they had reached the hotel. + +Once there, they had a little respite, however, while Mr. Salper went +to arrange about having a nurse sent over to his wife. Jimmy waited in +the hotel lobby in a state nearing collapse while the other boys went +up to inquire once more about their friend, the operator. + +They found him no better--worse, if anything--and their faces were +very solemn when they rejoined Jimmy in the lobby. + +"Guess it will be nip and tuck if he gets through at all," said Bob, +anxiously. "I don't see why such hard luck had to pick him out for the +victim." + +"I suppose they'll appoint another operator right away," suggested +Herb. + +"I suppose so," agreed Jimmy. "But it will be hard to get any one for +a week or more on account of the heavy weather." + +"And in a week's time without communication with the outside world a +lot of Mr. Salper's money will probably have gone up in smoke," said +Joe. + +"Yes, it's us on the job all right," said Bob, looking a bit worried. +"I only hope we can live up to what's expected of us." + +"All right, boys," said Mr. Salper, on returning, in his eyes the +preoccupied look of the man of affairs. "If you can help me out of +this fix, I will surely be deeply in your debt." + +These genial words--almost the first that they had heard from the +self-absorbed man--warmed the boys' hearts and they resolved to do the +best they could for him, and, through him, for his daughters. + +When they reached the station they found it deserted save for one man +who sat at a desk, humped over in a dispirited fashion, reading a +magazine. + +At the entrance of Mr. Salper and the boys he looked up, then got up +and came over to them as though he were glad of their companionship. + +"How do you do, Mr. Salper?" he said, addressing the older man with +marked respect. "Is there anything I can do for you?" + +"Nothing, unless you can work this contrivance," returned Mr. Salper, +with a comprehensive wave of his hand toward the cluttered radio +table. + +"I'm sorry," said the other, a frown of anxiety lining his forehead. +"The operator is sick, and because of the heavy weather it is doubtful +if we shall be able to secure another one within the week." + +"A week!" cried Mr. Salper. "That amount of time, my friend, may very +easily spell ruin for me. It is necessary that I communicate with New +York immediately. Are you ready, boys?" + +The man looked with surprise, first at the radio boys and then back to +Mr. Salper. + +"Am I to understand----" he began, when Mr. Salper cut him short with +an imperative wave of the hand. + +"These boys," he said, "know something of radio. How much they know I +am about to find out. + +"Are you ready?" he asked, sharply, as the boys still hesitated. "A +delay of even a few minutes would be regrettable." + +The boys looked at each other, and since no one else made a move to +approach the apparatus, Bob saw that it was up to him. And right there +he realized the great difference that there is between theory and +practice. Of course they had had some practice in sending and they +were fairly familiar with the code, but never before had they been +called upon to make use of their knowledge in such a matter as this. + +Then too, Mr. Salper was not the kind of person to inspire +self-confidence. He was a driver, and it is hard to do good thinking +when one is being driven. + +However, having gone so far, there was no possibility of backing out +and with a show of confidence, Bob approached the apparatus. The man +who had addressed Mr. Salper regarded him with not a little distrust. +He had heard of the radio boys, as who at Mountain Pass had not, but +he certainly did not think them competent to send a message of any +importance. + +And at that moment, neither did Bob. + +"Will you send your message phone or code?" he asked, looking up at +Mr. Salper inquiringly. "We can do either here." + +Mr. Salper hesitated for a moment, then with a significant glance at +the other man, who was hovering curiously near, he snapped out, +"Code." + +"Do you know the letters of the station to be called?" asked Bob. + +The broker consulted a notebook which he took from his pocket. + +"Call HRSA," he returned. "That is our Stock Exchange station," he +explained. "They ought to be on the job while the Exchange is open. +They will relay a message to my brokers." + +Joe was standing beside Bob and saw that his chum's hand trembled +somewhat as he took hold of the ticker. + +"Don't get rattled, Bob," he whispered. "Take your time and don't let +him scare you. Remember, it's you that's doing the favor." + +Bob grinned, and then began sending out the call. Across the ether +traveled the letters HRSA and the call was presently caught up in New +York and then another message was relayed to the office of a +well-known brokerage firm. + +"Hey, Bill," called a well-dressed young man seated at a desk in the +far end of the office. "Here's WBZA calling us. These are the letters +of the station at Mountain Pass----" + +"Where the Honorable Mr. Gilbert Salper is taking his rest cure," +finished another man, flinging away his cigarette and coming to stand +beside his partner. "Do you suppose it's the old boy himself calling?" + +"We'll soon find out," returned the other, and without delay sent in a +message to the New York sending station. In a few seconds they were +being radioed into the ether. + +Bob's face beamed as he transcribed the dots and dashes into words. +The message read thus: + + "WBZA heard from. HRSA awaiting message." + +Mr. Salper, who had been striding up and down, hurried to Bob's side +in answer to the lad's hail. The other boys were peering eagerly over +Bob's shoulder. + +"I've reached HRSA and through them H. & D.," explained the young +operator proudly. "H. & D. are waiting for your message." + +"Fine! Fine!" cried Mr. Salper, and his face showed great enthusiasm. +"Those are my brokers, Hanson and Debbs. Got 'em right off the reel, +didn't you, boy? Great work! Can you get my message through at once?" + +"I don't know of anything to stop me," answered Bob. It seemed too +good to be true that he had picked up the right station so quickly. + +"Send this, then," Mr. Salper directed. And in a firm hand he wrote +down the following message: + + "Mohun is a crook and plots to ruin me. Find out + his scheme and check him. + + Gilbert Salper." + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +THE MIDNIGHT CALL + + +Skillfully Bob tapped out the message and in an inconceivably small +space of time it had been received by the station HRSA and relayed to +H. & D. The boys would have been interested if they could have known +the sensation caused by the few words. + +"Oh, boy!" cried Hanson, of the firm of Hanson and Debbs. "I've +suspected this slick fellow Mohun for a long time. Now with Salper's +authority we can go in and clean him out." + +"Salper wouldn't make an accusation of that sort," said Debbs +thoughtfully, "if there wasn't something in it. He's had some sort of +inside tip all right." + +"Well," returned the other briskly, "we'll let the old man know we're +on the job, and then get busy." + +Accordingly, a few minutes later Bob received and transcribed this +message: + + "Right. We'll have him inside of twenty-four hours." + +At the confidence contained in the message Mr. Salper straightened his +shoulders as if a great load had been lifted from them and held out a +friendly hand to Bob. + +"I can't tell you what you have done for me," he said, cordially. "Of +course I'm not safe yet from the crooked work of these men, but at +least Hanson and Debbs have been warned to look out. And that's +two-thirds of the battle." + +"I'm mighty glad we've been able to help," said Bob, adding earnestly: +"If there's anything else we can do please call on us. Mrs. +Salper----" + +He paused, for at mention of his wife's name the relief disappeared +from Mr. Salper's face and in its place was the old worried frown. + +"Yes--my wife," he muttered, and, without another word to the boys, +turned and stalked out of the room. The man, who had all this time +lingered near them, turned and went out after Mr. Salper and the boys +were left alone. + +"Say, you sure did turn the trick that time," said Herb admiringly. +"If they succeed in getting those crooks, Mr. Salper will love you all +the rest of his life." + +"It was more luck than anything else," Bob repeated. "Imagine getting +that station first throw out of the box." + +"Never mind," said Joe, adding truthfully: "No one else about this +place would have been able to do as much." + +They lingered for a while, talking over the exciting events of the day +and tinkering with the complicated apparatus. + +"Did you hear the latest prediction of Marconi?" asked Joe. "He says +that he has positive proof that in the near future a radio set will be +perfected which will send messages entirely around the world." + +"Yes," said Bob eagerly. "He even declares that we'll be able to put a +sending and receiving set side by side on the same table and receive +the messages that a moment before we've sent out." + +"It only takes a second of time too," said Herb. "Imagine sending +messages completely around the world at such speed. If Marconi didn't +say it could be done, I sure wouldn't believe it." + +"We'll be talking with Venus or Mars pretty soon," said Bob. "Marconi +says he has already received messages that don't come from anywhere on +the earth." + +Although they said little about it, the boys were elated at Bob's +success with the code, and it was surely a pleasant thought that they +had helped Mr. Salper, if only that they might make Mrs. Salper and +the girls happy. They had even, despite his usual gruffness, begun to +feel a sort of liking for Mr. Salper himself. + +During the long snow-bound afternoon they thought often of Mrs. Salper +and wondered if she were better. They wanted to inquire, but they were +afraid of making themselves a nuisance. + +Toward evening they strolled over to the hotel to ask after the +operator and found to their delight that he was better. The nurse, who +had become very friendly toward them, said she thought the trouble had +been checked in time and that the sick man's recovery, though it might +be slow, was sure. + +With hearts lightened on that score they went home. After dinner at +the hotel they spent some time tinkering with their set. One time they +noticed that in a vacuum tube was a pale blue glow, and Joe was at a +loss to know how to account for it. + +"We've got too high a voltage on the B battery," said Bob, after a +moment of study. + +"But how would that affect it?" asked Herb, interested. + +"Why," answered Bob, thoughtfully, "the high voltage causes a sort of +electrical breakdown of the gas in the tube and it's apt to affect the +receiving." + +"Say, Bob's getting to be a regular blue stocking," commented Jimmy +admiringly. "We'll have to get a move on to catch up with him." + +"You bet _you_ will," said Herb, with insulting emphasis on the +pronoun. However, Jimmy was too interested to notice. + +"Let's reduce the voltage, Bob," Joe was saying eagerly. "We'll test +out the theory." + +"It isn't a theory," replied Bob, as he reduced the voltage and the +blue glow disappeared as though by magic. "You can see for yourself +that it's a fact." + +This discussion led to others, and they sat for some time eagerly +experimenting with their set. It was just as well that they did for +they had just gone over to their cottage and thus were able to answer +quickly the imperative summons that came to them a few minutes later. + +In response to a knock on the door they found Mr. Salper standing +outside in the bitter night air looking so white and shaken that they +were startled. + +He came just inside the door and spoke in quick, jerky sentences like +a man talking in his sleep. + +"My wife is dangerously ill," he said. "She seems so much worse +tonight that there is imperative need of a doctor. There is no doctor +up here, and in this weather it would take too long to summon one. The +trained nurse who is with her suggests that we try to get in touch +with a doctor by radio and ask his advice. The idea is far-fetched, +but it seems about our only hope. If that fails----" he paused and Joe +broke in eagerly. + +"My father's a doctor, Mr. Salper," he said, and there was pride in +his voice. + +"A doctor, eh?" returned the broker quickly. "Oh, if only he were +here!" + +"I don't see how you are going to get hold of your father," broke in +Herb. "He's in Clintonia. Even if he got our message, through Doctor +Dale or somebody else with a receiving set, he couldn't send any +message here." + +"But he isn't in Clintonia!" shouted Joe, eagerly. "He went to Newark, +New Jersey, to attend some sort of medical convention and see if he +couldn't find out more about the epidemic that hit Clintonia." + +"Newark!" came simultaneously from Joe's chums. + +"Why, the big radio sending station is there!" exclaimed Bob. + +"Why can't you send a message to that station and ask them to get hold +of your father?" broke in Jimmy. + +"Maybe I could do it," announced Joe. And then he looked at Bob. +"Perhaps you had better do the sending. You'll probably have to call +them in code." + +Bob was willing, but first he went up to tell his mother and father +where he and his chums were going and beg them not to worry if they +did not come back soon. + +On the way to the radio station they stopped at the Salper bungalow, +where the calm-faced nurse was waiting for them. She had left the +Salper girls in charge of their mother, giving them minute +instructions as to what to do, and was going with Mr. Salper in the +hope that they might possibly secure medical advice by radio. + +The station was finally reached. It looked deserted and gloomy at that +hour of the night, and as Bob sent a call for help vibrating through +the ether he felt a creepy sensation, as though he were, in some way, +dealing with ghosts. + +There was just the slightest chance in the world that they would reach +Doctor Atwood. Just a chance, but if they did not take that chance +Mrs. Salper would die. + +For a long time they tried while the nurse sat quietly in the shadows +and Mr. Salper strode up and down, up and down, his face drawn and +white, his usually elastic step heavy and dragging. + +Again and again went out the call for the Newark station. Minute after +minute passed, and still Mr. Salper walked up and down uneasily. + +"I guess you'll have to give it up----" Herb was beginning when +suddenly Bob motioned for silence. The radio was speaking, and he was +taking down the message as well as he was able. + +"I've got Newark!" the young operator cried excitedly. "Now I'll put +in a call for your father, Joe. Where is he staying?" + +"At the Robert Treat Hotel." + +Once more Bob went to work rather excitedly and even a little +clumsily, yet his message went through. In reply he received another, +stating that Dr. Atwood had been called by telephone and would be at +the sending station inside of fifteen minutes. + +"And the best of it is, he is to radiophone," added Bob to Joe. "So +you can talk to him direct." + +After that the minutes passed slowly, both for Mr. Salper and the +boys. They thought the end of the wait would never come. But at last +the words so eagerly awaited reached them. + +There was no mistaking it, even though static interfered and the +tuning was not good--Dr. Atwood's voice, cheery, reassuring, helpful. +In his joy at the sound of it, Joe shouted aloud. + +"Hello, WBZA," came the voice. "If this is Joe talking, give me the +high sign, my boy." + +During the message Bob had tuned in the right frequency and, with +static eliminated one might have thought the speaker was in the same +room. + +Then there followed a battle with death that the boys would remember +as long as they lived. As soon as Doctor Atwood was made to understand +the nature of the service asked of him, he became immediately his +brisk, professional self. + +The nurse, instantly alert herself, gave him a description of the case +and it was wonderful as soon as the connection was switched off to +hear his kindly voice responding, giving full directions for the care +of the patient. He declared that he would be on call all during the +night and requested that some one call him every hour--oftener, if it +became necessary--to report the progress of the patient. + +The nurse hurried off, accompanied by Mr. Salper, and for the rest of +the night the boys kept busy, marking a trail between the Salper +cottage and the radio station, taking reports from the nurse and +carrying directions from Doctor Atwood. + +It seemed strange and weird, yet wonderful and soul-stirring, this +tending of a patient by a doctor many miles away. Once, during the +night, hope almost failed. Mrs. Salper scarcely breathed and lay so +still that Edna and Ruth were sure the end had come. They clung to +each other sobbing, while Mr. Salper strode up and down, up and down +the room as though if he stopped he would die too. + +Then came another message from Doctor Atwood. The nurse followed his +directions and once more hope came back to the Salper home. The +patient rallied, stirred, and for that time at least, the danger was +past. + +So dawn came at last and Joe and the two younger boys went back to +their cottage to try to catch a few hours of sleep. Bob remained at +the station, declaring that he felt not at all tired and as soon as +the other boys had rested they could come to his relief. + +A hard vigil that for Bob. In spite of all he could do, his head would +nod and his heavy eyelids close, to be jerked open next moment by the +arrival of some one from the Salper home or a message from Doctor +Atwood. + +News of the struggle had spread all over Mountain Pass, and people +watched with admiration and interest the brave fight that was being +made for a woman's life. And sometimes it seemed that, despite all +their efforts, the struggle must end in failure. + +All that day the battle waged and the next night--the boys taking +turns at the radio board, untiring in their determination not to lose. +And Doctor Atwood was as determined as they. + +And then, on the morning of the second day came news that the patient +had passed the much-dreaded crisis and, with the most careful nursing, +was sure to recover. + +"She'll be all right now," came Doctor Atwood's cheery voice. "It's +been a hard pull, but she's past the danger point now. Keep in touch +with me, boys, so that, in case of a relapse, I can tell you what to +do." + +Joe turned to the boys with the light of pride and affection in his +eyes. + +"That's some dad I've got!" he said. + +Later, when the boys walked over to the Salper home to offer +congratulations, the girls received them with literally open arms. + +"You've saved mother's life!" cried Ruth, with a catch in her voice. + +"And we love you for it!" added Edna gratefully. "You just wait till +mother knows!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +A PLOT THAT WENT WRONG + + +"So far, so good," breathed Bob happily, as the boys were discussing +the news that Mrs. Salper had passed the crisis and was now probably +on the road to recovery. "That's one thing we can set down to the +credit of radio." + +"And it's not the only thing of the same sort," put in Joe. "Do you +remember what Mr. Brandon told us of that ship with thirty men and no +doctor on board, where twenty-four of the men were down with a +mysterious disease? The captain got a message by wireless to shore +telling of his plight, and one of the best doctors in New York City +went to the radio station there and got in touch with the captain. He +talked to him by radio for hours, had him describe just the symptoms, +and then told the captain just what to do. A couple of days later the +captain wirelessed in that he had followed directions and that all of +the men had recovered and were fit for duty." + +"Yes," said Herb, "and about that other case, too, where a man had an +infected hand and they were afraid he was going to have lockjaw. A +doctor on land told the captain how to treat it and the man got along +all right." + +"Trust radio, and you won't go wrong," summed up Bob. "On land and sea +it's right on the job." + +"I only hope it will be as effective in saving Mr. Salper's money," +observed Joe. + +"I think very likely it will," replied Bob. "He's about as keen as +they make them, and now that he knows what those rascals are plotting +against him it's dollars to doughnuts that he'll get the best of them. +Their only chance was in taking him by surprise and putting over that +deal while his back was turned. And now that he's got in touch with +his brokers I guess the game is up." + +"I wonder how long it will be before we know how it turned out," +conjectured Herb. + +"Oh, probably not more than two or three days," replied Bob. "Things +move pretty fast in Wall Street when a fight is on for control." + +"I hope he comes out on top," observed Joe. "He's a good deal of a +crab, and I was mighty sore at him when he landed on us the way he did +the day we were coming up here. Acted as though he thought we ought to +be shot at sunrise. But since that time I've seen a good deal about +him to like and I've come to the conclusion that he's a regular fellow +after all." + +"You can tell by the fondness that the girls have for him that he +can't be so bad," said Bob. "That's a pretty good sign to go by. They +know him better than any one else except his wife, and she seems to +think, too, that the sun rises and sets in him." + +"I want him to come out ahead not only for his own sake but because I +want to see that fellow Mohun downed," put in Jimmy. "I'm sore at him +right down to the ground. I don't like his eyes, I don't like his +voice, I don't like his teeth, I don't like his character----" + +"Outside of that, though, I suppose he's all right," suggested Joe, +grinning. "He seems to be just about as popular with you as a +rattlesnake." + +"That's what he reminds me of, anyway," admitted Jimmy. + +"Talking of rattlesnakes," put in Herb, "here come three of them now," +and he indicated Buck Looker, who, with Lutz and Mooney, was coming +along the road. For some time now the Looker crowd had kept out of the +radio boys' way. + +"I wonder what trick they're up to now," said Bob, as he saw that the +bunch had their heads together in earnest conversation. + +"No knowing," answered Joe; "but it's a safe bet that it's something +cheap and low down. Buck would think the day was wasted if he didn't +have something of the kind on hand." + +The groups passed each other without speaking, though Buck darted a +look at Bob in passing that had in it the usual malignance, mingled +with a touch of triumph. + +"Did you see that look?" queried Herb, with interest. "Seemed as if he +had something up his sleeve." + +"I know what it meant well enough," answered Bob, with a shade of +soberness. "My dad was telling me that he'd been notified that a suit +had been started against him and the fathers of you other fellows by +Mr. Looker to recover the value of the cottage that he said we set on +fire." + +"That's all bunk!" cried Herb indignantly. "He couldn't prove it in a +hundred years. A lawsuit, eh? Huh!" + +"Dad doesn't think Looker has much of a case," replied Bob. "Still, he +says that you can never tell what a man like Looker and the kind of +lawyer he would hire may do. Of course we can't get away from the fact +that we were in the house the day before it burned, and that looks +bad. We know we didn't set it on fire, but nobody else knows we +didn't. At any rate, even if Looker loses his case, our folks will +have to hire lawyers and lose a lot of time in attending court, so +that all in all it makes a pretty bad mess." + +"So that's what Buck was looking so tickled about!" exclaimed Joe. +"I'd like to wipe that look off his face." + +"It might be a little satisfaction," laughed Bob. "But it wouldn't +help us win the lawsuit." + +By this time their walk had taken them near the vicinity of the radio +station; and as they approached it they caught sight of Mr. Salper +pacing back and forth in a state of impatience. + +"Seems to be stirred up about something," remarked Joe. + +"Did you ever see him when he wasn't?" laughed Jimmy. + +At this moment Mr. Salper caught sight of the boys and came hastily +toward them. + +"I want some messages sent and taken," he said, in his usual abrupt +way, though there was none of the sharpness in his voice that had +usually been in evidence when he spoke to them. "I wonder if you could +do this for me," and his eyes rested inquiringly upon Bob. + +"I'll do my best, Mr. Salper," replied the latter, and the whole group +went into the wireless room. + +"I suppose you have permission to use this plant?" came from Joe. + +"Oh, yes. If it hadn't been for that I couldn't have used it as I did +those other times," answered the broker. + +Bob seated himself at the sending key and, following the financier's +directions, got in touch with the Wall Street house that had figured +in the previous communications. + +For an hour or more there was an interchange of messages that were +mostly nonunderstandable to Bob and his friends who listened with the +keenest interest. There was talk of stocks and bonds and of +consolidations and controls and proxies and a host of other things +that bore on financial deals. + +At the beginning, Mr. Salper sat with furrowed brows and an air of +intense concentration. But as the answers came in to his various +inquiries, his brow gradually cleared and he relaxed somewhat in his +chair. + +Finally there came an answer that stirred him mightily. He jumped to +his feet and slapped his thigh. + +"I've got him!" he cried jubilantly. "By Jove, I've got him!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +SOLVING THE MYSTERY + + +Just whom Mr. Salper had got the radio boys could not tell with +certainty, but they had a shrewd suspicion that Mohun was the hapless +individual. + +The financier walked happily and springily about the office, chuckling +to himself, and Jimmy declared afterward that if they had not been +there he would have danced a jig. + +At last, when he had given sufficient vent to his elation, Mr. Salper +turned to Bob. + +"I'm sure I can't tell you how I thank you," he declared, with a +cordiality and heartiness that they had never yet seen in him. "This +matter was one of the most important that has come to me in the whole +course of my life. Hundreds of thousands of dollars were involved in +it, and I'd surely have lost out if I hadn't had your services in this +extremity. And now I'm going to prove my gratitude. A check--" + +"No, thank you, Mr. Salper," interrupted Bob hastily. "We don't want +money for the service we've been to you. It's been exciting and +interesting work for us, and I, at least, have been more than paid in +the experience I've got through sending." + +"Well then I'm going to get you the finest radio set that money can +buy," persisted Mr. Salper. + +"Not even that, thank you," returned Bob, smiling. "It's awfully good +of you, and we appreciate it, but we've learned more of radio by +building our own sets than we possibly could have done in any other +way. If you want to send a check to the Red Cross or some other +society of the kind, it would suit us better than anything else." + +"You're a stubborn young rascal," said Mr. Salper, with a smile, "and +I suppose I'll have to let you have your way. But just bear in mind +that you boys have a friend in me for life, and if I can ever be of +service to any of you in business or anything else, let me know and +I'll be only too glad to do it." + +He bade them good-by and went off briskly toward his bungalow to tell +his family of the news that had lifted such a heavy burden from his +brain and heart. + +The third day after the episode at the radio station the radio boys +had gone further afield than usual and came upon a little shack that +had evidently been used by workmen as a place for storing their tools. +It was little more than a shed, and the boys, bestowing on it only a +casual glance, had come nearly abreast of it when Bob, who was +slightly in advance, heard a voice that he recognized as that of Buck +Looker. + +He stopped dead in his tracks, and his companions did the same as he +held up his hand in warning. + +"We certainly did put it over on those boobs all right," Buck was +saying, and the remark was followed by laughs of satisfaction. + +"Yes, but we're not yet out of the woods," came the voice of Carl +Lutz, with a touch of uneasiness in the tone. "Suppose when they put +us on the stand to testify that we found Bob Layton and the other +fellows in the cottage the evening before it burned, their lawyer asks +us if we were in it too?" + +"Well, let them ask," replied Buck. "All we'll have to do is to deny +it. We know they were in it. They don't know we were in it. Who knows +that we slipped in later and sat there until nearly midnight smoking +cigarettes?" + +With a bound Bob was at the door of the shack. + +"I know it!" he cried. "I didn't know it till just this minute, but +now I know it by your own confession." + +"We all heard it," echoed Joe, as he, with Herb and Jimmy, followed +Bob into the shack. + +Consternation and conscious guilt was written on every one of the +three faces. + +Buck was the first of the cronies to recover some measure of +self-possession. + +"Think you've put something over, don't you?" he sneered. "Well, +you've got another think coming to you. This won't do you a bit of +good in court. I'll simply swear that I didn't say anything of the +kind and that you've made up the story out of whole cloth. It'll be +simply my word against yours, and you'd be interested witnesses trying +to help your fathers out by cooking up this story. So what are you +going to do about it?" + +"I'll show you what we're going to do about it!" cried Joe, starting +forward. + +But Bob stopped him. + +"Wait a minute, Joe," he said. Then he turned to Buck. "Do you mean to +say," he demanded, "that you'd take a solemn oath in court to tell the +truth, and then go on the stand and swear to a downright lie?" + +The contempt in his tone stung Buck into fury. + +"You can put it any way you like," he shouted. "I'm simply not going +to let you get the best of me. Who cares for the old confession as you +call it? You can have as many of those as you like and it won't do you +any good. Here's another one now for good measure. We were in the +house late that night. We were smoking cigarettes. Probably that's +what caused the fire to break out later. I tell you these things just +because it won't do you any good. In court I'll deny that I ever said +them. You'll say I did. But the court will know that you have as much +interest in lying as I have, and it'll just be a standoff. You'd have +to have a disinterested witness, and that you haven't got." + +"Oh, yes, they have," came a voice from the doorway, and Mr. Salper +stepped into the shack. + +An exclamation of delight broke from the lips of the radio boys, while +Buck and his cronies slunk back in terror and confusion. + +"I was out taking a stroll," explained Mr. Salper, "and as I heard +loud voices coming from the shack I stepped up to see what was the +matter. I was just in time to hear the full confession of this +estimable young man"--here he turned a withering glance on Buck--"and +while I'm here, I guess I'll take it down." + +He drew from his pocket a notebook and a fountain pen and wrote +rapidly, while Buck and his companions looked at each other like so +many trapped animals. + +In a few minutes Mr. Salper had finished. Then he read in a clear +voice just what he had written. It was a complete confession similar +to that which Buck had made, with date and place affixed. He handed +this over to Buck with the fountain pen, with a crisp demand that he +sign it. + +Buck hesitated as long as he dared, but with those keen eyes used to +command fixed upon him from beneath Mr. Salper's beetling brows, he +finally signed his name, and Lutz and Mooney shamefacedly followed +suit. + +"I guess that will settle the law case," Mr. Salper remarked, with a +smile, as he handed the precious document to Bob, who folded it +carefully and put it in his breast pocket. "Now perhaps we would +better go and leave these worthy young gentlemen to their meditations. +I don't think they'll be especially pleasant ones." + +The radio boys left the shack, followed by the black looks of the +discomfited conspirators. + +"You certainly came along in the nick of time, Mr. Salper," said Bob. +"We're very grateful to you." + +"I'm glad if I've been able to be of service to you," replied Mr. +Salper. "It's only paying back in small measure what you've done for +me. The bulk of the obligation is still on my side." + +It was a happy group of radio boys that returned to the Mountain Rest +Hotel that afternoon. + +"Adventures have surely crowded in on us lately," remarked Bob. + +"More than they ever will again," prophesied Joe. + +But that he had not foretold the future correctly will be seen by +those who read the following volume of this series, entitled: "The +Radio Boys Trailing a Voice; Or, Solving a Wireless Mystery." + +That very night they sent the news of the confession to Dr. Atwood +with the request that he would communicate the tidings to the fathers +of the rest of the boys. The lawsuit, of course, was dropped at once, +and Buck and his cronies slunk home in disgrace. + +"Radio is lots of work, but it's also lots of fun," remarked Joe that +night, as they sat late reviewing the events of the day. + +"Radio," repeated Bob. "It's more than fun. It's excitement. It's +romance. It's adventure. It's life!" + +THE END + + + + +_This Isn't All!_ + +Would you like to know what became of the good friends you have made +in this book? + +Would you like to read other stories continuing their adventures and +experiences, or other books quite as entertaining by the same author? + +On the _reverse side_ of the wrapper which comes with this book, you +will find a wonderful list of stories which you can buy at the same +store where you got this book. + +_Don't throw away the Wrapper_ + +_Use it as a handy catalog of the books you want some day to have. But +in case you do mislay it, write to the Publishers for a complete +catalog._ + + + + +THE RADIO BOYS SERIES + +(Trademark Registered) + +By ALLEN CHAPMAN + +Author of the "Railroad Series," Etc. + +Individual Colored Wrappers. Illustrated. + +Every Volume Complete in Itself. + +A new series for boys giving full details of radio work, both in +sending and receiving--telling how small and large amateur sets can be +made and operated, and how some boys got a lot of fun and adventure +out of what they did. Each volume from first to last is so thoroughly +fascinating, so strictly up-to-date and accurate, we feel sure all +lads will peruse them with great delight. + +Each volume has a Foreword by Jack Binns, the well-known radio expert. + + THE RADIO BOYS' FIRST WIRELESS + THE RADIO BOYS AT OCEAN POINT + THE RADIO BOYS AT THE SENDING STATION + THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS + THE RADIO BOYS TRAILING A VOICE + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE FOREST RANGERS + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE ICEBERG PATROL + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE FLOOD FIGHTERS + THE RADIO BOYS ON SIGNAL ISLAND + THE RADIO BOYS IN GOLD VALLEY + +GROSSET & DUNLAP, _Publishers_, NEW YORK + + + + +THE DON STURDY SERIES + +By VICTOR APPLETON + +Individual Colored Wrappers and Text Illustrations by + +WALTER S. ROGERS + +Every Volume Complete in Itself. + +In company with his uncles, one a mighty hunter and the other a noted +scientist, Don Sturdy travels far and wide, gaining much useful +knowledge and meeting many thrilling adventures. + +DON STURDY ON THE DESERT OF MYSTERY; + +An engrossing tale of the Sahara Desert, of encounters with wild +animals and crafty Arabs. + +DON STURDY WITH THE BIG SNAKE HUNTERS; + +Don's uncle, the hunter, took an order for some of the biggest snakes +to be found in South America--to be delivered alive! + +DON STURDY IN THE TOMBS OF GOLD; + +A fascinating tale of exploration and adventure in the Valley of Kings +in Egypt. + +DON STURDY ACROSS THE NORTH POLE; + +A great polar blizzard nearly wrecks the airship of the explorers. + +DON STURDY IN THE LAND OF VOLCANOES; + +An absorbing tale of adventures among the volcanoes of Alaska. + +DON STURDY IN THE PORT OF LOST SHIPS; + +This story is just full of exciting and fearful experiences on the +sea. + +DON STURDY AMONG THE GORILLAS; + +A thrilling story of adventure in darkest Africa. Don is carried over +a mighty waterfall into the heart of gorilla land. + +GROSSET & DUNLAP, _Publishers_, NEW YORK + + + + +THE TOM SWIFT SERIES + +By VICTOR APPLETON + +Uniform Style of Binding. Individual Colored Wrappers. + +Every Volume Complete in Itself. + +Every boy possesses some form of inventive genius. Tom Swift is a +bright, ingenious boy and his inventions and adventures make the most +interesting kind of reading. + + TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR CYCLE + TOM SWIFT AND HIS MOTOR BOAT + TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRSHIP + TOM SWIFT AND HIS SUBMARINE BOAT + TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RUNABOUT + TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIRELESS MESSAGE + TOM SWIFT AMONG THE DIAMOND MAKERS + TOM SWIFT IN THE CAVES OF ICE + TOM SWIFT AND HIS SKY RACER + TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC RIFLE + TOM SWIFT IN THE CITY OF GOLD + TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR GLIDER + TOM SWIFT IN CAPTIVITY + TOM SWIFT AND HIS WIZARD CAMERA + TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT SEARCHLIGHT + TOM SWIFT AND HIS GIANT CANNON + TOM SWIFT AND HIS PHOTO TELEPHONE + TOM SWIFT AND HIS AERIAL WARSHIP + TOM SWIFT AND HIS BIG TUNNEL + TOM SWIFT IN THE LAND OF WONDERS + TOM SWIFT AND HIS WAR TANK + TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIR SCOUT + TOM SWIFT AND HIS UNDERSEA SEARCH + TOM SWIFT AMONG THE FIRE FIGHTERS + TOM SWIFT AND HIS ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE + TOM SWIFT AND HIS FLYING BOAT + TOM SWIFT AND HIS GREAT OIL GUSHER + TOM SWIFT AND HIS CHEST OF SECRETS + TOM SWIFT AND HIS AIRLINE EXPRESS + +Grosset & Dunlap, Publishers, New York + + + + +THE RIDDLE CLUB BOOKS + +By ALICE DALE HARDY + +Individual Colored Wrappers. Attractively Illustrated. + +Every Volume Complete in Itself. + +Here is as ingenious a series of books for little folks as has ever +appeared since "Alice in Wonderland." The idea of the Riddle books is +a little group of children--three girls and three boys decide to form +a riddle club. Each book is full of the adventures and doings of these +six youngsters, but as an added attraction each book is filled with a +lot of the best riddles you ever heard. + +THE RIDDLE CLUB AT HOME + +An absorbing tale that all boys and girls will enjoy reading. How the +members of the club fixed up a clubroom in the Larue barn, and how +they, later on, helped solve a most mysterious happening, and how one +of the members won a valuable prize, is told in a manner to please +every young reader. + +THE RIDDLE CLUB IN CAMP + +The club members went into camp on the edge of a beautiful lake. Here +they had rousing good times swimming, boating and around the campfire. +They fell in with a mysterious old man known as The Hermit of Triangle +Island. Nobody knew his real name or where he came from until the +propounding of a riddle solved these perplexing questions. + +THE RIDDLE CLUB THROUGH THE HOLIDAYS + +This volume takes in a great number of winter sports, including +skating and sledding and the building of a huge snowman. It also gives +the particulars of how the club treasurer lost the dues entrusted to +his care and what the melting of the great snowman revealed. + +THE RIDDLE CLUB AT SUNRISE BEACH + +This volume tells how the club journeyed to the seashore and how they +not only kept up their riddles but likewise had good times on the sand +and on the water. Once they got lost in a fog and are marooned on an +island. Here they made a discovery that greatly pleased the folks at +home. + +GROSSET & DUNLAP, Publishers, NEW YORK + + + + +FOOTBALL AND BASEBALL STORIES + +Durably Bound. Illustrated. Colored Wrappers. + +Every Volume Complete in Itself. + +The Ralph Henry Barbour Books for Boys + +In these up-to-the-minute, spirited genuine stories of boy life there +is something which will appeal to every boy with the love of +manliness, cleanness and sportsmanship in his heart. + + LEFT END EDWARDS + LEFT TACKLE THAYER + LEFT GUARD GILBERT + CENTER RUSH ROWLAND + FULLBACK FOSTER + LEFT HALF HARMON + RIGHT END EMERSON + RIGHT GUARD GRANT + QUARTERBACK BATES + RIGHT TACKLE TODD + RIGHT HALF HOLLINS + +The Christy Mathewson Books for Boys + +Every boy wants to know how to play ball in the fairest and squarest +way. These books about boys and baseball are full of wholesome and +manly interest and information. + + PITCHER POLLOCK + CATCHER CRAIG + FIRST BASE FAULKNER + SECOND BASE SLOAN + PITCHING IN A PINCH + +THIRD BASE THATCHER, By Everett Scott + +GROSSET & DUNLAP, _Publishers_, NEW YORK + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Radio Boys at Mountain Pass, by Allen Chapman + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS AT MOUNTAIN PASS *** + +***** This file should be named 38453.txt or 38453.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/8/4/5/38453/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/38453.zip b/38453.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ad5774b --- /dev/null +++ b/38453.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0b10525 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #38453 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/38453) |
